Podcasts about david how

  • 76PODCASTS
  • 98EPISODES
  • 45mAVG DURATION
  • 1MONTHLY NEW EPISODE
  • May 21, 2025LATEST

POPULARITY

20172018201920202021202220232024


Best podcasts about david how

Latest podcast episodes about david how

The Inner Life
6 Foundations of Prayer (Part 1) - The Inner Life - May 21, 2025

The Inner Life

Play Episode Listen Later May 21, 2025 51:13


Msgr. Tom Richter joins Patrick to Discuss 6 Foundations of Prayer (Part 1) (4:01) why is it important to develop foundations of prayer? (11:05) First foundation of prayer: Awakened Faith (20:20) Break 1 David - How can I get more awaken faith if I already experience it in the past, but it has fallen away? How to reinvigorate the awaken faith and bringing it back? (26:07) What is the second foundation of faith: Getting God Right. (40:32) Break 2 Patrick shares an email about offering daily activities in getting God right? (41:46) Third foundation of prayer: The Cross

#DoorGrowShow - Property Management Growth
DGS 290: AI in Property Management

#DoorGrowShow - Property Management Growth

Play Episode Listen Later Apr 18, 2025 42:33


As the property management industry continues to evolve, it's important to stay up to date on the latest innovations in technology. In this episode of the #DoorGrowShow, property management growth expert Jason Hull sits down with David Normand from Vendoroo to talk about AI's role in the future of property management. You'll Learn [01:29] The AI Revolution [08:47] The Importance of Empathy and Human Touch [22:21] Decreasing the Cost of Maintenance Coordination [32:29] New Features Coming to Vendoroo Quotables “As any property manager believes, we know how to do it the best.” “If you're not reading articles and studying up on this, I think that's going to catch you by surprise pretty quickly.” “Empathy is the magic lubrication that makes everything better.” “Empathetic reflection and empathy is a magical ingredient.” Resources DoorGrow and Scale Mastermind DoorGrow Academy DoorGrow on YouTube DoorGrowClub DoorGrowLive Transcript [00:00:00] David: If you're not building AI tools from working with your partners, from being on the ground floor with them and using the data and building tools based upon the data and their pain points and their failures, buyer beware. If somebody's coming to you and saying, Hey, we figured this all out in the lab. [00:00:14] David: Come use it. Yeah. Right. Buyer beware. [00:00:18] Jason: All right. Welcome property management entrepreneurs to the DoorGrow Show or the Property Management Growth podcast. I'm Jason Hull, the founder and CEO of DoorGrow, the world's leading and most comprehensive group coaching mastermind for residential property management entrepreneurs. We've been doing this for over a decade and a half. [00:00:39] Jason: I've brought innovative strategies and optimizations to the property management industry. I have spoken to thousands of property management companies. I've coached over 600 businesses. I've rebranded over 300 companies like Bar Rescue for property managers, cleaning up their businesses, and we would love to help coach you and support you and your growth. [00:01:01] Jason: We have innovative strategies for building out growth engines, for building out your operational challenges, for helping you figure out how to get to the next level in your business and one of the cool tools that I'm excited to showcase today with my guest here, David Norman, is Vendoroo. We've had you on the show before. [00:01:19] Jason: Welcome back David.  [00:01:20] David: Yeah. Thank you for having me. It felt like years ago, it was only about, I think eight months ago since we did this, so much has changed over the time, so it's great to be back. Yeah, it's great to be back.  [00:01:29] Jason: Good to have you. I know you're in the middle of this AI revolution, which AI is just innovating and changing so rapidly. It probably does feel like years ago, so, yeah. Yeah. Yeah. It's been crazy. You guys have made a lot of changes too, so, you even changed your brand name from the last time we had you on the show. Yeah. Which was I think Tulu. Yeah. Right. And so, yeah. So why don't you get us caught up on what's going on 'cause, you know, there's been a lot.  [00:01:55] David: Yeah. Yeah. Thank you first of all for having me here today, Jason, and from the entire Vendoroo group of us, which, you know, the team has grown 10 x over the past eight months, which has been awesome. And I just also wanted to start in thanking everybody from what we call our client partners who have jumped in into this great unknown that is AI and is going to be like, how is this going to work in our industry? And so that's really what we've been focusing on the past eight months. You know, it's been a unbelievable journey of both failures, successes learnings and insights. And ultimately we're getting excited here at the NARPM broker owner which is in Denver to unveil Vendoroo. Like this is the coming out party. And so we're super excited if you're going to be there. We have a massive booth that we have set up that we have the ai alliance with other people that are working in the AI space, and I really hope that you guys come over and check it out. I promise this. [00:02:53] David: You'll never see a booth or a display like we have set up. At the NARPM broker owner. So.  [00:02:58] Jason: Now I want to go attend it. Yeah. Just so I can see your booth.  [00:03:01] David: So, let me put it this way. You may see the robot from the Jetsons walking around the booth walking around the NARPM broker owner, so, okay. [00:03:07] David: Yeah. Rosie? Yeah. You may see something like that. So she'll be vacuuming with her apron? Yeah. She'll be doing a little social engagement. It'll be cool. So, okay. Okay.  [00:03:17] Jason: Yeah. Very cool. Yeah, so catch us up on what, like, let's get into the kind of the background and the overview for people that have never heard about Vendoroo and what you guys do and how you got into this. [00:03:29] Jason: Yeah. Give people kind of the backstory. Yeah.  [00:03:31] David: Yeah. Thank you for that. So really the backstory is that, you know, we know of this AI economy that's coming, right? And there was a few of us, you know, I've been in this industry for 18 years. You know, I've managed you know, portfolios of 40,000 doors. [00:03:47] David: I've managed them for governments. You know, I started off with our own property management. Much like you guys. We started off with 80 doors. We grew to 550 doors in four years. So it was exciting to know that technology that was coming that promised duplication because, you know, as any property manager believes, we know how to do it the best, right. [00:04:05] David: And so what we decided to do is to come together and say, Hey, if AI's coming, there's two things that we need to figure out. Number one is how is this going to help us show value in this new industry to this new generation of property owners that is here, that is coming, that has been raised in the technology world too, right? [00:04:25] David: And two, can it actually duplicate our efforts? Can it actually be an employee for us? Right? And I don't care what people are promising about ai, you don't know until you get into what we call like, you know, get into the weeds, you got to get into the trenches. And so that's what we did, right? We went out and we were the guys that grabbed the torch and we said, we are going to take all the risk. [00:04:46] David: We are going to jump into the mix. We're going to ask people to jump onto the bandwagon with us and we're going to figure this out. And oh my gosh, what an unbelievable eight months it has been in learning and insights. And I can't wait to get into all the things that we've learned about the property management industry. [00:05:01] David: But that's really what we've been focusing on here the past eight months, right? So we started off with well hey, can the AI assist the va? Can it turn them into a super va? Is that what it's going to be? And, you know, some people were like, yay. And some people were like nay, you know? And so, and you know, because that human failure still was there, right? [00:05:21] David: And you know, what happens if they left? There was that inconsistency. And then it was like, all right, well what can the AI own? Right? What can it do? What can it perfect? And you know, can AI actually be the last employee that I ever hire? Right. That's really, that's a really cool thing to do. [00:05:39] David: But the property managing community had some really specific demands that they said that if this is going to be the last employee that I've had, it has to do this. And that's what I'm excited about our new technology 'cause it's doing those things. You know? [00:05:52] Jason: Yeah. And now you guys have made some big moves. I know, like I've, I have clients that we've sent over to you and they've shared some incredible stories. Like one client, I think he had 154 units or something like under management, and he said in the first day you're of turning on Vendoroo, like it closed out like 80 something work orders. [00:06:12] Jason: Yeah, like, it was crazy. Another client, they had a little more doors. They said it was like 50 something work orders were closed out in the first day of turning it on. And so, I mean, you're creating some dramatic stuff. Like this is a very different thing than what people are used to in maintenance. [00:06:27] David: Yeah. Yeah. And really what the exciting part about this, Jason, is that maintenance is actually really easy. And I know people laugh when I say that it's managing communications that is extremely difficult. Okay. Okay. Right, because you have, you know what AI told us about our industry over the last eight months is when we dove in with it and it took a step back and it said, whoa, you guys don't have a data problem here. [00:06:51] David: You guys have a emotion problem here. There's very specific categories of emotion that are in this space, right? Like, how do you build a technology that senses something? And I know this relates with property managers, 'cause I know this for myself. A property manager can walk into their office, sit down at their desk, and their spidey senses go off and they know something's wrong. [00:07:15] David: There's no screen that's telling them anything. There's no spreadsheet. They know something's off. Right. And so the AI is like, well, the statuses really don't matter that much to me based upon the feedback that I'm seeing from the property managers. Because the status and the communication all seem to be in order, but there's a disruption somewhere. [00:07:35] David: So I need to know about people's emotions. I need to understand about is the resident happy? Does the owner feel supported? Is the vendor being directed? And does the property manager believe that I can own the outcome for this? And it was really cool to start seeing its learning and understanding and picking up on these cues where, you know, people say that this is a data-driven industry. [00:07:55] David: It's really in an emotion driven industry.  [00:07:57] Jason: Oh yeah. It's a relationship and emotion industry for sure. Yeah. Yeah, big time.  [00:08:01] David: And it's really cool to see, and it's really started happening over this past last 60 days, the amount of residents, I was actually just looking at one before I jumped on here, that are like thanking the system, right? [00:08:15] David: Imagine that, like think of all of us that actually worked with the chat bot at like Verizon. I've never thanked that chatbot at Verizon for being their customer service. Right.  [00:08:25] Jason: And how do I get a representative? Representative. Representative!  [00:08:28] David: Yeah. Yeah, for sure. Versus you seeing people, you know, seeing individuals saying to the, you know, saying to the Vendoroo maintenance coordinator, Hey, I really appreciate feeling supported and how fast you acted because you know, there's empathy that's inside of its law and learning. So I don't want to get too much into the details on there. But yeah, these are some of the exciting things that we're working on.  [00:08:47] Jason: I mean, empathy is the magic lubrication that makes everything better. [00:08:52] David: Yeah,  [00:08:52] Jason: I mean they, they've done studies. Teams, even in working in warehouses, are more productive if the team has a higher level of empathy. Yeah. And doctors perform better. Yeah. If there's a higher level of empathy, there's less malpractice suits, like empathetic reflection and empathy is a magical ingredient. [00:09:10] Jason: I coach clients to add that in during sales. Yeah. 'cause their close rate goes up dramatically. Yeah. Right. So yeah. So leveraging and like getting the AI to actually be empathetic in its communication. Yeah. When that's probably not a natural skill for a lot of maintenance coordinators to be empathetic. [00:09:26] David: It's not, it's not a natural skill for a lot of people in the maintenance industry. Right? Yes. Especially when you talk about burnout. People begin developing views of the rental community, right? Like, oh my gosh, they're calling again, and that empathy meter goes lower and lower and lower. [00:09:41] David: Yeah. As people have been in the industry longer. But isn't it great that you have an employee now that knows that, yeah, it's my duty, rain or shine, 24 hours a day, seven days a week, 365 a year to always operate at the highest level of empathy? I never have a bad day. I never take a day off. [00:09:57] David: I'm never upset. I'm never short with somebody on the phone, never tired, never like, oh my gosh, Susan is calling me again. I'm going to let the phone just ring because I'm annoyed of talking to her. And it just is constantly hitting that same level of standard. And this is what's exciting to me, is that there are people that that have played around with this and have been a part of what I call the pain phase, right? [00:10:20] David: The pain phase is that understanding the way that agentic AI works, right? It's input in output. Input, output, right? The more that you're putting into it, the better the results are that you're going to get out of it, okay? Right. It's just like training an employee. So over the last eight months, what we've seen is that the community has trained this to be the level of a person that has now been working in the industry for five years. [00:10:46] David: In eight months. It's got five years of learning in eight months. Okay. Wow. In the next six to 12 months, we're probably looking at somebody that has 10 to 15 years understanding in the next six to 12 months and understand the level of type of tasks that it can do, especially getting into estimates and getting some other work. [00:11:04] David: And again, just you know, having empathy in my own life towards the people that jumped in that are like, what is this all about? Like, how does AI fail? Like, you know, there's still people that are involved and it was like this big like momentous train of like, you know, all these people were jumping on and giving ideas and people are in the loop and now it's weeding everything out and the AI stepping in and saying. [00:11:27] David: Hey, I appreciate all the input that you've given me. Thank you for all your effort. I'm now ready to step up to the plate and to own the outcome. Right. And that's what we're seeing at the NARPM show that's coming out. There's five AI tools. There's a master agent, five AI tools. And you know, I'll give you a couple of pieces here that, you know, we had feedback from our property managers like number one across the board. [00:11:50] David: A property manager said, if I'm hiring AI as my last employee, that has to work in my system. Yeah. Okay. Right. Like I don't want another, I don't want another technology. Yeah.  [00:11:59] Jason: I don't want a new system I got to get every vendor to use or a new system I got to get my team to use or figure out. We don't need another tool to make our lives more difficult. [00:12:08] Jason: No. They've got to use our stuff.  [00:12:09] David: They got to use, we have our existing stack. Yeah. So now the AI is fully integrated into all the most common PMS systems. You know, you have a cool chrome extension that you can download and there's a little yellow kangaroo right right there. And it's actually reading the work order that you're working on, and you can literally just ask it a question now and just being like, Hey, did anybody express frustration or concern on this work order? [00:12:32] David: Right? Because that's the emotion behind the status that you need to know. And it's like, yeah, two days ago Sally said that, you know, she was actually really frustrated about the multiple reschedules by this vendor. And it's like, great, that's a person I should be reaching out to and that's what I should be knowing that a status is never going to tell you. [00:12:47] David: Right? Yeah. It's in your slack, right? So if I have, if I'm on my phone, I'm talking to my employee and I'm laying in bed and I have a panic attack as a property manager, and I'm like, oh my gosh, did we take care of John's refrigerator and the office is closed? I can't get ahold of my employee. Yeah, you can. [00:13:03] David: Your employee works 24 7 now. Hey, can you give me an update on the refrigerator replacement at John's place? Yeah, it was scheduled this day. I contacted John. Everything's good to go. You know, go to sleep. You know, like, like that's the power. Full audit. Full syncing. So it's in your platform. That's really cool. [00:13:21] David: The other thing, it's got to be branded, right? This is a thing that we really learned about, like how important branding is to the community of property managers, right? Yeah. So the communications that go out have to be from your area code that's done. The emails that go out have to have like, you know, your company name and your logo on it. [00:13:39] David: The AI is doing that as well too. So that's being sent out, which is really cool. So people are feeling like, you know, that loyalty to brand is super important. And also do you know now that the AI can ask the residents to give a Google Review and we can link to the Google reviews and give you instant Google reviews to your page through the ai, which is cool, like how it's, it will know that if the success of a Google review is high on the way that the work order was done, that it's probably best to ask this person and it will send them a little thing. [00:14:11] David: Hey, can we get a feedback from you? And we link up to your Google review. And it posts that Google review to generate those 'cause we know those are super, super valuable to property managers. So that's actually going out today. That's kind of a little teaser there. That's the emails out now. [00:14:23] Jason: Nice. We'll have to get you to also connect it to our gather kudos links for clients 'cause then people can pick which review sites. So it diversifies the review profile.  [00:14:32] David: Love it. Love that. I'm going to hook you up with our guy Dotan. He's running that. He's one of our head of product. He's, actually out of Israel. [00:14:39] David: He's a amazing guy. I'd love to get you connected with him. Yeah. Cool. Let's do it. Cool. And then the biggest one too is like, I need a single point of contact. Right. And we knew that before there was a lot of people were still involved. There was a lot of oversight that was going on there, having that confusion and single point of contact. [00:14:56] David: Now it's in your phone, it's in your Slack, it's in your phone extension. It doesn't matter what's going on. You have one point of contact. It's your employee. You ask the question, get the answer, Jason, you can even ask for a change. You can even say, Hey, I want to change a vendor on a job and you'll see that the vendor gets changed for you in the system. [00:15:17] David: You can even say to your ai, and this is the big one: hey how do you triage this work order? And I want you to do this, or I want you to do that. And you just do it right through Slack or right through your PM chat and it makes the change for you. And now you have custom triage and all property managers have the ability to train their own AI for their company. [00:15:36] David: Think how cool that is. A person with 75 doors now, and the product that's being released has their own AI agent customized for their company, right? Yeah. Like, that's what happened over the last eight months, so you can see my excitement. There's been a lot of hard work in this. [00:15:54] David: Yeah, that's amazing. But this has been all the effort and a huge thank you out to everybody who's tried us, you know, even said that this wasn't for them at that point in time because those learnings went into what's going to make this product the best product in the property management space and is going to help people leverage sales and leverage efficiencies and blow their owners' minds away in ways that, that we have never thought about. [00:16:15] David: Oh yeah.  [00:16:16] Jason: Yeah. So I know like initially when you rolled this out, a lot of people were nervous about AI and you guys had kind of a human layer in between the AI and any communication Yeah, initially. Yeah. And so there was like, they had like a reps and a lot of people associated, oh, I've got this rep. [00:16:33] Jason: Yeah. You know, Steven or whatever is my rep or Pedro and I've got Pedro and like, oh no, what if Pedro leaves? And they were associating with that while the AI is really doing the crux of the work. Right. And so you guys have shifted away from even that now the AI is directly communicating with people. [00:16:52] Jason: Correct? Yeah.  [00:16:53] David: Yeah. So let's talk about that. So, definitely, so in the beginning there was like, we all had like lack of trust. We believed what it was going to do, but it was like we had a ton of people still trying, like, you know, using qualified VAs, training them. Like, you know, like, you know, if it fails, like, you know, you have to have a person stepped in and so let's talk about that. [00:17:12] David: So, you know, it was definitely that human layer. And let's talk about where we're at today. It is very clear to us, and the one thing that separates us from everybody is we still believe that humans are super important in this process. Okay? Yeah. And where humans are very important in this process are going to be when the AI says, Hey, I need you to make a phone call to this person for me, right? [00:17:35] David: Hey, I've reached out to this vendor three times and they haven't responded yet. I need you to give a phone call to see what's going on. Right? Hey, I need you to recruit a vendor for me. I need you to reach out and do a recruitment for the vendor. For me. Hey, this owner is asking questions about this estimate. [00:17:51] David: I need you to give a call for me. So the AI is basically able, on a standard work order, the AI can handle 95% of the workflow, no problem. Work order comes in, gets assigned to the resident. It gets out to the vendor. It's under the NTE not to exceed. It's great. The work gets done, the resident uploads its photos, the AI says to the resident, are you happy? [00:18:14] David: Everyone's good. It closes the work order out. Cool. Right. And then if a human...  [00:18:19] Jason: and how is it communicating with the tenant and with the vendor typically? [00:18:24] David: Yep. So, it's very clear that and this isn't a surprise to anybody. Everybody loves text messages, right? Yeah. I mean, that's just, it's just what it is. [00:18:32] David: You literally, like, people will get a phone call and they won't pick up and the text will come back and like text back. Yeah, text me. What do you need? Yeah. Text me here. But, so here's the things that people don't see behind the scenes that we'll talk about. So the complexity that went into. [00:18:51] David: Mapping out how to allow vendors... so a vendor could have like 20 jobs, right? And we don't want to send him like a code that he has to text for every work order so that it links to the right work order. Like what guy wants to do that? Okay. Like that's not how he works. So we figured out how to allow a vendor through AI just to use his regular phone and text anything about this thing. And it's understanding it and it's mapping it, it's routing it to all those work orders because we knew that in order for this to be the last employee somebody would have to handle, it also means that the vendor has to be happy and the same for the resident. [00:19:30] David: They can just text that they have multiple work orders. It understands what work order it's going to. If it's not quite sure, I would ask them, Hey, is this question about this work order? And they say, yeah. And so there's not like, again, codes and links and things that they have to do. It has to be seamless if they're working with a person. [00:19:46] David: So yeah, text message is massive. Email is second, and then phone is third for sure.  [00:19:51] Jason: Got it. So is your AI system calling people yet or you or telling the property manager to make the phone call?  [00:19:58] David: Yeah. People are okay with. If they're calling in like our new front desk agent, which if a person calls in and they want to get information about a listing or if they want to get information about a work order or something like that, or, you know, they're okay with getting that type of information. [00:20:13] David: Yeah. But they are, it is very clear that they are not okay with AI calling them when they're asking for an update on a work order like that. Like that line in the sand very clear. Yeah. And so we have people on on the team. That are constantly monitoring into ai, giving feedback, hitting improvement. [00:20:31] David: I want everybody to know there is not a work order that is taking place that is not touched by a human at least twice.  [00:20:38] Jason: Okay.  [00:20:39] David: Okay. Right.  [00:20:40] Jason: So there's a little, there's some oversight there. There there's, you're watching this, there are humans involved  [00:20:45] David: And then the ai will when it hits certain fail points, right? [00:20:51] David: It then escalates those things up to what we call the human in the loop, right? So there's an AI assistant, we there's people now that we're training a whole new generation of people that are no longer going to be maintenance coordinators. They're AI assistants now, right? And so when the AI says, Hey, this work order is not going down the path that I think it should go to be successful. [00:21:12] David: I'm escalating this up to a human, and so now as a property manager, not only am I getting this AI agent workflow that's standardizing the empathy and the workflows and all the stuff that we talked about in the communications, I also now get a fractional employee that when the AI says, Hey, I need help, I already have an employee that it can reach out to that can make that phone call or call the vendor. [00:21:36] David: But it's also monitoring the AI for me on top of it. So yes, there is, and that's one of the big thing that separates us apart is that the platform comes with what we call a human in the loop, an expert in the loop and so we're training the first generation of AI assistants in the property management industry. [00:21:55] David: Yep.  [00:21:56] Jason: Got it. So the AI maintenance coordinator. Has human assistance. Yep. Underneath it.  [00:22:02] David: And before it was the other way around where Yeah. The AI was assisting the human right. And now the humans are assisting the ai. That's what's happened in the last...  [00:22:11] Jason: that may be the future of all of our roles. [00:22:12] Jason: So,  [00:22:13] David: If you're not reading articles and studying up on this I think that's going to catch you by surprise pretty quickly. Yeah. Learn how to write prompts. I'll tell everybody right now. Yes.  [00:22:21] Jason: Yeah. Interesting. So, now what about this, you know, there's the uncanny, you know, sort of stage where people get a little bit nervous about AI and what do they call it? The uncanny valley or something like this, or right where it gets, it's so close to human that it becomes creepy. And there's some people that have fear about this, that are concerned. You're going to have a lot of late, you know, adopters that are like resistant. "I'll never do ai." [00:22:49] Jason: What would you say to somebody when you get on a sales call and they're like, well, I'm really nervous about this AI stuff, you know, and they just, they don't get it.  [00:22:57] David: Yeah.  [00:22:58] Jason: I'm sure there's people listening right now. They're like, oh man, AI is going to kill us all and it's going to take over the world and it's going to take our jobs. [00:23:05] Jason: And they think it's evil.  [00:23:06] David: Yeah. Yeah. I, and you know, I really want to hear that fear and I want to like, again, have empathy towards that. 'cause I do understand that fear of change causes people to get... Change in general. Yes. Right. It's like, whoa, I like everything the way it's going to be. Right. And we are historically in one of those phases of like, you know, the industrial revolution, the renaissance, like the automobile from horse. [00:23:34] David: Like, this is what is taking place. This is, this will be written down in history. It's massive change. It's a massive change. Massive. So what I would say to them, and not to, not from a way of fear. But to inspire them is there are a lot of hungry entrepreneurs out there that are embracing this head on. [00:23:57] David: Yeah. That are pushing the boundaries and the limits to be able to bring insights and customer service to their clients at a much higher level. And if you want to compete in this new AI economy. I would definitely encourage you to understand and get in and start investing in yourself now. But understand that investing in AI means having some pain threshold. [00:24:21] David: Like you got to get in, like you, you need to be able to give the feedback. You need to understand that if it falls short, do you have to be able to give it the time and the energy and the reward and the payoff of what I'm seeing for property managers who've embraced that when they're sitting there and they're going, I don't touch maintenance at all anymore. Yeah, it's wild. Right? And those are the people that in the beginning of this relationship, and there's a few that come to my head, are the ones that were sending me emails constantly saying, David, this is failing me. I believe in this, but this is failing me. And as my technology partner, I know that you're going to help us get this better. [00:24:58] David: And there is, you know, I have this word down that struggle equals great con conversation, right? Like, and so they had a struggle and that opened up a great conversation and because of that, their technology and the technology is getting better. So yeah, I think that from a personal point of view in this industry, one thing that I want to solve with AI is I think that we can all say that over the past 15 years, we've probably yelled at a lot of vendors or yelled at a lot of VAs or yelled at a lot of people. Let's start yelling at the ai. And then hopefully that the AI will actually eliminate the need for us to ever have to yell at anybody again because it knows us. [00:25:36] David: Yeah. It never fails us.  [00:25:38] Jason: You know? It really is amazing. I mean, your company is creating freedom for the business owner from being involved in maintenance. Yeah. Really?  [00:25:46] David: Yeah.  [00:25:47] Jason: And it just, and they get used to that pretty quickly. Like maintenance is just running and they're like, yeah. It frees up so much head space for them to focus on growth. [00:25:56] Jason: It gives them a whole bunch of like just greater capacity. Yeah. So they feel like, yeah, we could handle adding any number of doors now and we know we can still fulfill and do a good job.  [00:26:07] David: Yeah. Fixed cost scaling. Right? That's a term that we came up with is now that you know that I have a price per door that will cover all my maintenance. So if I went in and brought on 75 doors, I know that I don't have to go out and hire another employee. The system just grows with it and I know exactly what my margin is for all those doors. Right. And as we know previous, before fixed cost scaling a property managers is like, I have enough people. [00:26:32] David: I don't have enough people. Someone quit, someone didn't quit. My profit margins are good. My profit margins are bad. Yeah. And now with these AI tools. You know, you have your front desk employee, you have your maintenance coordinator, you have these fixed cost scales, and now somebody calls you up and says, Hey, I want you to take on 25 doors, and you're like, I have the resource resources for maintenance, which is, we know is 80% of the workload already. I don't have to go out and hire another maintenance coordinator 'cause the system just grows with me, which is cool.  [00:27:00] Jason: So one of the things you shared at DoorGrow Live and you're our top sponsor for the upcoming... Can't wait for DoorGrow Live, can't wait to, so we're really excited to have you back so. [00:27:10] Jason: Everybody make sure you're at DoorGrow Live if you want. Our theme this year is innovating the future of property management. And we're bringing, we're going to be showcasing, innovating pricing structures that are different than how property managers have typically historically priced, that allow you to lower your operational costs and close more deals more easily at a higher price point. [00:27:30] Jason: We're, we'll be showcasing a three tier hybrid pricing model that we've innovated here at DoorGrow, and we've got clients using it. It's been a game changer. We're going to be sharing other cool things about the future hiring systems, et cetera. Right. So you guys will also be there showcasing the future. [00:27:46] Jason: One of the things you shared previously that really kind of struck me as you showed, you did some research and you showed the typical cost. Per unit that most companies had just to cover and deal with maintenance. Yeah. And and then what you were able to get it down to.  [00:28:03] David: Yeah.  [00:28:04] Jason: And that alone was just like a bit of a mind blowing. [00:28:07] Jason: Could you just share a little bit of numbers here?  [00:28:09] David: Yeah. So one of the first things that we had to do when we started way back in the day is figure out well. Like, like what's the impact of AI going to be us from like a cost perspective, right? Is it a huge change? And so we went out on a big survey mission and we were surveying property managers and asking them, what's your cost per door for managing maintenance? [00:28:30] David: How much do you spend every door to manage maintenance? Now the first thing is less than 1% of property managers knew what that cost was. Sure.  [00:28:37] Jason: Oh, sure. Right. Because, but then they got to figure out, oh, we got a maintenance coordinator and we've got these people doing phone calls and they cost this, and yeah, it's complicated. [00:28:45] David: It's complicated. So we built a calculator. Okay. And then people could start adding in that information out into the calculator, and the average person was around $13 and 50 cents a door.  [00:28:56] Jason: Okay. Okay.  [00:28:57] David: Wow. Right, right. So that was where the average person was, somewhere in the low twenties. Yeah. [00:29:01] David: And others were actually pretty good. Like, I'd say like, you know, some of the good ones that we saw were maybe around like, you know, 10, $11 a door or something along that line.  [00:29:09] Jason: They probably had a large portfolio would be my guess.  [00:29:12] David: Yeah. And also I think a lot of it's just like, you know, I don't know if they were still accounting for all their software and everything that they had. [00:29:19] David: Maybe they're not factoring everything. Yeah. No, I think if we really dug in, it'd be different. So now we know that, you know, the base package of what people are getting in. The average cost of what people are paying for 24 7 services that's emergencies around the clock is about $7 and 50 cents a door, right? [00:29:37] David: So right off the bat in AI's first swing, it said we cut the cost in half. Yeah. Okay. Right. So 50% reduction. I mean, to me as an owner, a 50% reduction in cost. That's like. You know, alarms and celebration going off, you know? For sure. And then, yeah.  [00:29:55] Jason: And that's, if everything just stayed the same, like it was still the same level of quality, cutting in half would be a solid win right there. [00:30:03] Jason: Yeah.  [00:30:03] David: Yeah. That's just like status quo stuff. And now what, with the release of the new Vendoroo product that, that's actually being announced here today. The email's going out to all of our existing clients of all the new features that are coming out now, we're starting to see that. You know that quality is now increasing to where if you were to go out and hire that person, you may have to be spending, you know, 55,000 or $65,000 a year. [00:30:29] David: Right? So now it's like saying, okay, if we can get as good as what these people are using for their VAs right, and we know what that cost is, and they're saying that's, you know, that's what their factors is. Well, what happens in the next six to 12 months when this is a seasoned person that you would've to pay $85,000 a year to? [00:30:45] David: Right. Yeah. And right, because they have knowledge of. Estimates and knowledge of vendor routing and knowledge of, you know, it can handle...  [00:30:53] Jason: you've invested so much time into them, so much attention. They know your properties and know your portfolio. They know the vendors. Like you've invested so much into this person that now they sort of have you by the balls so that they're like, Hey, I want 80 k or I walk.  [00:31:06] David: Yeah.  [00:31:06] Jason: You're like, you've got to come up with it.  [00:31:08] David: Yeah.  [00:31:09] Jason: Right. You've got to do it.  [00:31:10] David: Yeah.  [00:31:10] Jason: And you know, because that's not easy to create. And a lot of people, in order to have a good maintenance coordinator, they need a veteran of the industry. Veteran of industry. [00:31:19] Jason: They need somebody that's been doing this a long time.  [00:31:21] David: Yeah.  [00:31:22] Jason: And that's really hard to find.  [00:31:24] David: Yes. It's extremely hard to find as we know. One of the things that I think that we're doing for this industry is we're actually preserving knowledge that I don't think is necessary getting passed down. [00:31:33] David: Yeah. You know, there's a lot less people that I think are as handy as they once were in the Americas and so we have a lot of that knowledge. Like, you know, we know that the average age of an electrician is in the sixties, the average age of a plumber's in the sixties. And these guys, you know, they have wealth of knowledge that it can troubleshoot anything that's going on in a house. [00:31:54] David: And so to be able to try to preserve some of that, so maybe if a person does come in, you know, maybe there's some knowledge sharing along the lines. But let's take it even in another step forward Jason that in the future, you know, the AI is going to know the location of the hot water tank in that house. [00:32:10] David: It's going to then add it automatically to the system, like. It's going to know more knowledge than they will because it's going to have maps of every single property that's all currently sitting inside of, you know, that maintenance coordinator's head, right? And so it's going to, it's going to actually know more than them, you know. [00:32:26] Jason: Yeah. That's wild. Yeah, it is. Absolutely. It's the future. Cool. Well, you're rolling out a bunch of new features. You're announcing these today. You've told me a little bit, but why don't you tell the listeners what's changing, what's new, what innovations have come out? What are you guys launching? [00:32:41] David: Yeah. Exciting. Yeah. So, the biggest one I think is, which is the most exciting is, is Resiroo, which is the first one that actually handles all the communications with the resident and does the triage and troubleshooting. First one of what are you talking about? So we have our products. [00:32:57] David: So you have these AI tools, right? These agents. Right.  [00:33:00] Jason: And so, you know, every, so think of them like different sort of people?  [00:33:04] David: Skill sets. Yeah. Different person. Okay. Exactly. And so that's when you come and see our display at the NARPM conference, you'll actually will see these five agents kind of in their work desk and in their environments, kind of cool. [00:33:15] David: Okay. Able to see them right. So the coolest part about that one is we're doing a major product you know, update on that for not only the knowledge base, but we're actually turning that over to the company. We were talking about this a little bit before, and now they own their own AI agent and they can customize it into how they want it to ask questions or the type of questions and the mindsets when it's triaging stuff. [00:33:41] David: Triaging work orders for their portfolio. Like super cool. So fully customizable to your company, right?  [00:33:49] Jason: So now sometimes the more humans get involved, the more they mess stuff up.  [00:33:54] David: Yes. We make sure they don't mess it up. So everyone's going to learn how to write prompts and they'll submit it into us. [00:33:59] David: And we have a great team of AI engineers that when that knowledge base is written or what they're doing. We will ensure that it is put in so that it actually produces the desire outcome, right? Yeah. Yeah. So that's a very exciting one. The second one that I'm that I think is so cool, do you know that only 10% of all estimates get approved by the owner without one or multiple questions? [00:34:23] David: Because owners really struggle with trust when it comes to estimates. Like 10%. Like, that's a really bad number, I felt as the industry that owners only believe us one out of 10 times. Like that's the way I took that. Yeah. Right. And so, Owneroo is what I coined inside, is the estimate of the future. [00:34:41] David: That really was looking in understanding like what was, what questions was the owner asking when they were rejecting a bid that that we could proactively ask the answer for them to help guide them to understanding the value in this estimate that they're looking at in historical context of the property. [00:35:00] David: How many other people have experienced this issue? Like, like there's a whole bunch of factors that should go into an estimate and an estimate should no longer be like, here's a cost from Frank. Right? Like, like that was like, like that was...  [00:35:14] Jason: here's what Frank said it is. Yeah. Like that was like from the 1940s. [00:35:17] Jason: That's good. How do I trust that?  [00:35:18] David: How do I trust that? That was from the forties and we're still...  [00:35:21] Jason: how much went into this decision? Was this just out of the blue, like pulled out of your ass or is this like legit?  [00:35:27] David: Yeah. Yeah. What's the, you know, we live in a data-driven world, so what's the intellect behind this estimate? [00:35:33] David: And so I'm really excited about Owneroo, which is going to be the new standard for the way the estimates are created. We have the front desk agent which is coming out. So, that one is going to handle phone calls that are coming in, be able to talk about available listings, actual general questions about leases route phone calls over to property managers for you. [00:35:54] David: So again. Very human-like interaction, great AI voice. Actually. We feel it's going to be the best in the industry. So a person's calling in, just like they're calling your office able to handle all those front desk things. We, we have the PM chat, which is now the employee which is fully integrated into all of your systems. [00:36:14] David: It's in Slack. That's your employee that you get to talk to. We believe that if you're going to hire somebody, they should be inside of your communication channels. You have the Google Chrome extension that it's on right inside your AppFolio or your buildium or your Rentvine software that you can ask and talk to it. [00:36:31] David: So, yeah, so we have a lot of exciting products that have come out. And then of course the backbone of all of them in the middle is Vendoroo, which handles all the scheduling, all the communications. You know, a resident asks for an update, responds to them, an owner asks for an update, it responds to them. [00:36:48] David: And you know, it handles actually the body of the work order. So you have those five tools, we believe are what the property management industry said. If you are going to give me an employee, this is what the employee has to be. This is what makes up that employee. So we say that these tools, these agents were actually built by the property management industry. [00:37:08] David: And that excites me because if you're not building AI tools from working with your partners, from being on the ground floor with them and using the data and building tools based upon the data and their pain points and their failures, buyer beware. If somebody's coming to you and saying, Hey, we figured this all out in the lab. [00:37:25] David: Come use it. Yeah. Right. Buyer beware.  [00:37:29] Jason: Yeah. So you guys connect with Slack. They can communicate through Slack, but it slack's a paid tool. Have you guys considered Telegram? I love Telegram Messenger.  [00:37:37] Jason: Alright. Could you do that? Write it down. Telegram Messenger is like the iMessage tool that works on every device. [00:37:44] Jason: It's free. It's one of the most secure, it's not owned or controlled by Facebook. Like, WhatsApp, like, yeah. But WhatsApp might be a close second, but we use Telegram internally, so I love Telegram.  [00:37:58] David: We'll definitely take that into, into consideration for sure. Yeah, check it  [00:38:02] Jason: out. Because I, what I love is the voice message feature and I can just listen to my team and others at like high speed, but internal communications and it's free for everybody, which is great. [00:38:12] Jason: So, yeah.  [00:38:13] David: Yeah. I think a lot, for a lot of people it was like you know, who was Vendoroo in the beginning and Vendoroo was like the team of like people that were trying to figure out like how is AI going to work in this industry? [00:38:26] David: How is it going to solve the needs of our property management partners? And this is why I say to everybody, if you thought about Vendoroo, if you came in and the experience wasn't great with Vendoroo, if you're one of our existing clients that has been with us and you're and you're still moving forward, and we thank you so much for your dedication to this, the Vendoroo product, everything that we've done, everything that we worked at is being showcased at the NARPM broker owner. The email's going out today. This is who Vendoroo is. We are a team that is a technology partner for the property management industry that is helping building meaningful AI tools, specifically by demand, by our industry to help us show value and to preserve this great industry. [00:39:09] David: For the future in this new AI economy, right? Like we need to step up. We have clients that are adding doors left and right because they're showing their clients that they use an AI maintenance system and their clients are like, this is what I expect from a property management in this community. [00:39:24] David: Right? And again, Owneroo, that estimate, we believe that in the future. Like, like owners are going to say like, I'm not approving an estimate unless it's like the estimate of the future, right? Like, like that's the new standard. So you got to know what the new standards are and you got to get technology that are going to help you compete with those new standards that will be in your community and are will be in your community in the next week, the next two weeks. [00:39:46] David: And definitely some really cool products in the next six months.  [00:39:49] Jason: All right. Well, yeah, I'm really excited to see what you guys have been able to create so far. So yeah, it's pretty awesome. Yeah. All right. Well David, it's been awesome having you on the show. Sounds like you guys are really innovating the future. Everybody come to DoorGrow Live. David, are you going to be at that one? I will be there. All right, so you can come meet David in person. [00:40:08] Jason: We've got some amazing people that are going to be at this. We've got technology people. There's a gentleman there, one of the vendors they created another really cool tool, but he had a hundred million dollars exit, you know, in a previous business, like there's really amazing entrepreneurs and people at this event, so come to DoorGrow Live, get your tickets, and if you do, we have just decided that we're going to give out to anybody that registers. [00:40:34] Jason: You can pick from one of our free bonuses that are well worth the price of the ticket. Or coming or anything in and of itself, including our pricing secrets training that goes over a three tier hybrid pricing model or our sales secrets training, which goes over how we're helping property managers crush it and closing more deals more easily at a higher price point. [00:40:55] Jason: And reputation secrets, which are helping our clients get way more positive reviews by leveraging the psychology and the law of reciprocity and getting the majority of their tenants in order to give them positive feedback online. Maybe some others. So you'll be able to pick from these bonuses one of these that you might like and that's our free, most incredible free gift ever that we'll give to each person that registers for DoorGrow Live. [00:41:19] Jason: So.  [00:41:20] David: Cool. Awesome man. Always great to see you. Looking forward to seeing you at DoorGrow Live and love that you guys are working on pricing because AI is going to make people think different about pricing. It's going to be way more efficient, so you guys are ahead of the curve on that. Great job, Jason. [00:41:33] Jason: Awesome. All right, so how can they check out Vendoroo, David?  [00:41:36] David: Just visit, Vendoroo.ai, go to the website, request a demo with one of our great sales reps, and yeah they'd love to help you out. See all the new products, see how far it's come. And again, we thank everybody from the bottom of our hearts for all their effort, people who've tried us out. [00:41:52] David: Come back and see what you built and yeah. Come check us out at Vendoroo.  [00:41:57] Jason: Got it. Go check out Vendoroo, it's vendor. If you know how to spell that, V-E-N-D-O-R-O-O dot A-I, go check it out. All right? And if you're a property management entrepreneur, you want to add doors, you want to make your business scalable, you want to get out of the day to day, you want to increase the capacity so your company could easily handle another 200 plus doors without having to make any significant systems changes, reach out to us at DoorGrow. We will help you figure it out. So until next time to our mutual growth. Bye everyone. 

Beyond the Hedges
Exploring the World of Music feat. Emmy Award-Winning Conductor Miguel Harth-Bedoya

Beyond the Hedges

Play Episode Listen Later Jan 8, 2025 38:01


How does a young boy from Lima, Peru grow up to become a world-renowned conductor? What is the role of the conductor in the music their orchestra is performing? What new goals do the Shepherd School of Music have for the 2025-2026 school year?Miguel Harth-Bedoya is an Emmy-winning and Grammy-nominated conductor, and also the Mary Franks Thompson Professor of Orchestral Studies at Baylor University and overseer of the Shepherd School's preeminent orchestral programs in the 2025-26 season. Miguel and host David Mansouri discuss Miguel's journey to finding a love for music and he explains some about his philosophy on conducting. They talk about Miguel's educational initiatives, his thoughts on the future of classical music - the surprising reason why he wouldn't use that word himself, and his commitment to community engagement, working with kids, and broadening the audience for orchestral music. Harth-Bedoya also discusses conducting Peter and the Wolf featuring John Lithgow in both English and Spanish, his upcoming role at Rice and his plans to enrich and expand the school's musical outreach. Let us know you're listening by filling out this form. We will be sending listeners Beyond the Hedges Swag every month.Episode Guide:01:21 Miguel Harth-Bedoya's Early Life and Musical Beginnings03:18 First Steps into Conducting07:34 The Role of a Conductor14:27 Working With People Instead of Instruments16:08 Joining the Shepherd School of Music20:06 Community Engagement and Future Plans23:27 Creating More Opportunities for Young People27:43 Caminos del Inka and Musical Legacy35:04 Rapid Fire Questions and ConclusionBeyond The Hedges is a production of the Office of Alumni Relations at Rice University and is produced by University FM.Show Links:Shepherd School of Music at RiceRice AlumniAssociation of Rice Alumni | FacebookRice Alumni (@ricealumni) | X (Twitter)Association of Rice Alumni (@ricealumni) | Instagram Host Profiles:David Mansouri | LinkedInDavid Mansouri '07 | Alumni | Rice UniversityDavid Mansouri (@davemansouri) | XDavid Mansouri | TNScoreGuest Profiles:Faculty Profile at BaylorMiguelHarth-Bedoya.comInstagramEpisode Quotes:Conductors works with people, not just with instrument14:23: [David] How do you build a relationship with, or chemistry with, the musicians that you're conducting? What does that look like? Are there things that work particularly well, or things that don't work as well, in building that chemistry or relationship?14:39: [Miguel] Well, you've hit another big, important aspect of what we do, is we work with people. And conductors need to remember that we are working with people, not with instruments. These are human beings, and each of them have their own lives, their own emotions, their own feelings, their own knowledge, their own background. And we all are sharing the same piece of music. Now, unfortunately, or fortunately, we are the individuals that have to bring units. And sometimes you have to agree to disagree or have others understand that maybe you did it this way, but I think it's this way. So understanding people's willingness and desire to sound good is number one.On building connections beyond music26:22: I love being very active in connecting with non-musicians. As a matter of fact, what I bring to Rice, or what I will be doing at Rice, is what I've been doing officially since I joined academia, which is: I teach musicians, I teach artists, music teachers, and I teach music lovers. We, as musicians, have to know people in every aspect if we want to think about doing what we're talking about. You cannot have a plan about engaging people in what we do and not be part of it. So, in other words, you have to get your hands dirty. If you want to plant the soil, you cannot just correct from above and let others.How Miguel is opening doors to music and life beyond performance34:26: In the current times that we live in, the 21st century, and with the technologies that we have available to connect throughout the world, I think creating the doorway—it's both literally a door to get into a building but also a virtual door to expose, first of all, what a musician is and what life as a musician is as well. And because we see somebody performing surgery, it doesn't mean we know the life of a surgeon. In creating more of that, in promoting that, that gateway is there early on, rather than waiting until you're out of high school before you dare to come to my building. And the one way I do this, personally, is by keeping in touch with the younger crowd.

Drinks in the Library
Generation X by Douglas Coupland with David How

Drinks in the Library

Play Episode Listen Later Oct 1, 2024


Hello Libration Nation! Ready to go back ti the 90s? Today, we're talking about one of the defining books of a generation: Generation X by Douglas Coupland. I'm joined by David How—father, husband, music lover, and proud Canadian

The Patrick Madrid Show
The Patrick Madrid Show: July 25, 2024 - Hour 1

The Patrick Madrid Show

Play Episode Listen Later Jul 25, 2024 51:06


Patrick kicks off with a powerful moment of Pope John Paul II singing the Pater Noster, touching hearts with his remarkable voice. He discusses Kamala Harris's controversial tenure as the U.S. border czar, and reflects on voting with a moral conscience. Patrick also shares a humorous yet eye-opening exchange between a cab driver and an irate customer, highlighting the complexities of modern politeness.   Audio: Pater Noster sung by JPII in Holy Name Cathedral Chicago (02:07) John - What happened to David Daleiden who did the sting operation on the Planned Parenthood? (05:14) Audio: For profit media's before and after about Harris being the “Border Czar” (06:43) Juan - How can we receive the Eucharist if we are voting for parties that are in favor of abortion? (11:04) Audio: A cab driver says “Thank you, Miss” and pays the price for it. (14:32) David - How do you understand Genesis where light was created before the Sun and Moon. (23:18) John - What is the Catholic position on the war in Israel since both sides of the war are in favor of abortion? (30:58) Audio: How Palestinians are able to so successfully victimize themselves (40:58) Josh - How do I talk to my wife who is very caught up in pro-choice movement? (45:39)

The Tony Robbins Podcast
You Must Understand the Fourth Turning to Survive What's Coming...

The Tony Robbins Podcast

Play Episode Listen Later Jun 12, 2024 93:58


How can past crises teach us how to deal with challenges in today's world? Our guest NEIL HOWE is a renowned historian and generational theorist, known for co-authoring the seminal books "Generations: The History of America's Future, 1584 to 2069" and "The Fourth Turning: An American Prophecy." In this timely one-on-one conversation with SCOTT HARRIS -- a seasoned facilitator and trainer for Tony Robbins -- Neil discusses his latest book, "The Fourth Turning Is Here: What the Seasons of History Tell Us About How and When This Crisis Will End."  Drawing on his expertise in history and cycles, Neil reveals how different generations experience and shape our world. Howe also helps us better understand the multiple crises that we're facing today, and how upcoming challenges will affect each generation differently.  How can understanding generational cycles in "The Fourth Turning" help us prepare for today's societal and economic challenges? Neil offers insights on how individuals, communities, and families can effectively prepare for the future. This discussion is particularly crucial, as we approach a critical juncture expected by the early 2030s.  Join us for this insightful conversation and learn how to stay multiple steps ahead in business and life! To watch this episode, click here. SHOW NOTES: [00:18] Scott's Intro  [02:42] The life cycles of society  [05:01] What precedes a Fourth Turning  [08:03] Win or fall apart as a country  [10:22] How we broke out of the last Fourth Turning  [13:44] Fourth Turning characteristics  [15:05] The decline of Western Civilization  [17:58] Golden Age after crisis  [18:30] War included  [21:30] Change to move forward  [23:52] The cycles of social behavior  [25:44] How younger generations can fix the world  [28:20] Lost Generation vs. Millennials  [31:00] Millennials and the rising economic inequality  [33:52] Millennials post Fourth Turning  [38:24] Prepping for what's ahead economically  [41:02] The importance of community virtues  [46:30] Neil's advice for secure geographical investments and promising industries  [56:15] Why living standards haven't improved  [57:07] Awakenings vs. crisis  [01:01:37] Question from David: How will the next year or two play out in this cycle?  [01:07:09] Question from Michelle: What changes or shifts have you observed between your initial book and most recent one?  [01:10:29] Michelle's second question: What role does immigration play on awakenings?  [01:15:57] Casey inquiries about the origin of the word saeculum and its relevance to shorter lifespans in centuries past.  [01:18:30] Casey's second question: With advancements in biosciences and longevity technologies leading to longer lifespans, will a saeculum consistently represent four generations, or will a fifth generation emerge?  [01:21:38] Casey's third question involves examining historical data and inquiring if regression analysis has been utilized to predict election outcomes.  [01:23:36] Jeffrey's question concerns relocating to safeguard one's family from impending turmoil on the planet.  [01:31:50] Scott signs off   

A Shared InHERitance
How Long Will You Mourn?

A Shared InHERitance

Play Episode Listen Later May 6, 2024 9:31


The theme for May 2024 is "Conversations with God - A Kingdom United (David/Solomon)." Our editor of the month, Shelby Carter, discusses the question as Samuel annoints David - "How long are you going to mourn for Saul?"Music from #Uppbeat (free for Creators!):https://uppbeat.io/t/zoo/clarityLicense code: UL9CSCKZ4YPM52DF

Sixteen:Nine
Tom Mottlau, LG Healthcare

Sixteen:Nine

Play Episode Listen Later May 1, 2024 36:38


The 16:9 PODCAST IS SPONSORED BY SCREENFEED – DIGITAL SIGNAGE CONTENT The health care sector has long struck me as having environments and dynamics that would benefit a lot from using digital signage technology. Accurate information is critically important, and things change quickly and often - in ways that make paper and dry erase marker board solutions seem antiquated and silly. But it is a tough sector to work in and crack - because of the layers of bureaucracy, tight regulations and the simple reality that medical facilities go up over several years, not months. People often talk about the digital signage solution sales cycle being something like 18 months on average. With healthcare, it can be double or triple that. The other challenge is that it is highly specialized and there are well-established companies referred to as patient engagement providers. So any digital signage software or solutions company thinking about going after health care business will be competing with companies that already know the industry and its technologies, like medical records, and have very established ties. LG has been active in the healthcare sector for decades, and sells specific displays and a platform used by patient engagement providers that the electronics giant has as business partners. I had a really insightful chat with Tom Mottlau, LG's director of healthcare sales. Subscribe from wherever you pick up new podcasts. TRANSCRIPT David: Tom, thank you for joining me. Can you give me a rundown of what your role is at LG?  Tom Mottlau: I am the Director of Healthcare Sales for LG. I've been in this role for some time now; I joined the company in 1999 and have been selling quite a bit into the patient room for some time.  David: Has most of your focus through those years all been on healthcare? Tom Mottlau: Well, actually, when I started, I was a trainer when we were going through the digital rollout when we were bringing high-definition television into living rooms. My house was actually the beta site for WXIA for a time there until we got our language codes right. But soon after, I moved over to the commercial side and healthcare, around 2001-2002.  David: Oh, wow. So yeah, you've been at it a long time then. Much has changed!  Tom Mottlau: Yes, sir.  David: And I guess in some cases, nothing has changed.  Tom Mottlau: Yep. David: Healthcare is an interesting vertical market for me because it seems so opportune, but I tend to think it's both terrifying and very grinding in that they're quite often very large institutions, sometimes government-associated or university-associated, and very few things happen quickly. Is that a fair assessment?  Tom Mottlau: Absolutely. There's a lot of oversight in the patient room. It's a very litigation-rich environment, and so there's a bit of bureaucracy to cut through to make sure that you're bringing in something that's both safe for patients and protects their privacy but also performs a useful function.  David: I guess the other big challenge is the build-time. You can get word of an opportunity for a medical center that's going up in a particular city, and realistically, it's probably 5-7 years out before it actually opens its doors, right? Tom Mottlau: That's true. Not only that but very often, capital projects go through a gestation period that can be a year or two from the time you actually start talking about the opportunity.  David: And when it comes to patient engagement displays and related displays around the patient care areas, is that something that engineers and architects scheme in early on, or is it something that we start talking about 3-4 years into the design and build process?  Tom Mottlau: Well, the part that's schemed in is often what size displays we're going to need. So, for example, if somebody is looking to deploy maybe a two-screen approach or a large-format approach, that's the type of thing that is discussed early on, but then when they come up on trying to decide between the patient engagement providers in the market, they do their full assessment at that time because things evolve and also needs change in that whole period that may take a couple of years you may go as we did from an environment that absolutely wanted no cameras to an environment that kind of wanted cameras after COVID. You know, so things change. So they're constantly having those discussions.  David: Why switch to wanting cameras because of COVID?  Tom Mottlau: Really, because the hospitals were locked down. You couldn't go in and see your loved one. There was a thought that if we could limit the in-person contact, maybe we could save lives, and so there was a lot of thought around using technology to overcome the challenges of contagion, and so there was even funding dedicated towards it and a number of companies focused on it  David: That's interesting because I wondered whether, in the healthcare sector, business opportunities just flat dried up because the organizations were so focused on dealing with COVID or whether it actually opened up new opportunities or diverted budgets to things that maybe weren't thought about before, like video? Tom Mottlau: True, I mean, the video focus was definitely because of COVID, but then again, you had facilities where all of their outpatient procedures had dried up. So they were strained from a budget standpoint, and so they had to be very picky about where they spent their dollars.  Now the equipment is in the patient room, but at the end of the day, we're still going to get the same flow of patients. People don't choose when to be sick. If it's gonna be either the same or higher because of those with COVID, so they still need to supply those rooms with displays, even though they were going through a crisis, they still had to budget and still had to go through their day-to-day buying of that product.  David: Is this a specialty application and solution as opposed to something that a more generic digital signage, proAV company could offer? My gut tells me that in order to be successful, you really need to know the healthcare environment. You can't just say, we've got these screens, we've got the software, what do you need?  Tom Mottlau: Yeah, that's a very good question. Everything we do on our end is driven by VOC (voice of customer). We partner with the top patient engagement providers in the country. There are a handful that are what we call tier one. We actually provide them with products that they vet out before we go into production.  We go to them to ask them, what do you need? What products do you need for that patient? I mean, and that's where the patient engagement boards, the idea of patient engagement boards came from was we had to provide them a display that met, at the time, 60065 UL, which is now 62368-1, so that they can meet NFPA 99 fire code.  David: I love it when you talk dirty. Tom Mottlau: Yeah, there's a lot of stuff out there that.  David: What the hell is he talking about?  Tom Mottlau: Yeah, I know enough to be dangerous. Basically, what it boils down to is we want to make sure that our products are vetted by a third party. UL is considered a respectable testing agency, and that's why you find most electronics are vetted by them and so they test them in the patient room. It's a high-oxygen environment with folks who are debilitated and life-sustaining equipment so the product has to be tested.  We knew that we had to provide a product for our SIs that would meet those specs as well as other specs that they had like they wanted something that could be POE-powered because it takes an act of Congress to add a 110-amp outlet to a patient room. It's just a lot of bureaucracy for that. So we decided to roll out two units: one of 32, which is POE, and one that's 43. Taking all those things I just mentioned into consideration, as well as things like lighting.  Folks didn't want a big night light so we had to spend a little extra attention on the ambient light sensor and that type of thing. This is our first offering. David: So for doofuses like me who don't spend a lot of time thinking about underwriter lab, certifications, and so on, just about any monitor, well, I assume any monitor that is marketed by credible companies in North America is UL-certified, but these are different grades of UL, I'm guessing?  Tom Mottlau: They are. Going back in the day of CRTs, if you take it all the way back then when you put a product into a room that has a high-powered cathode ray tube and there's oxygen floating around, safety is always of concern. So, going way back, probably driven by product liability and that type of thing. We all wanted to produce a safe product, and that's why we turned to those companies. The way that works is we design a product, we throw it over to them, and they come back and say, okay, this is great, but you got to change this, and this could be anything. And then we go back and forth until we arrive at a product that's safe for that environment, with that low level of oxygen, with everything else into consideration in that room.  David: Is it different when you get out into the hallways and the nursing stations and so on? Do you still need that level, like within a certain proximity of oxygen or other gases, do you need to have that?  Tom Mottlau: It depends on the facility's tolerance because there is no federal law per se, and it could vary based on how they feel about it. I know that Florida tends to be very strict, but as a company, we had to find a place to draw that line, like where can we be safe and provide general products and where can we provide something that specialized?  And that's usually oxygenated patient room is usually the guideline. If there's oxygen in the walls and that type of thing, that's usually the guideline and the use of a pillow speaker. Outside into the hallways, not so much, but it depends on the facility. We just lay out the facts and let them decide. We sell both.  David: Is it a big additional cost to have that additional protection or whatever you want to call it, the engineering aspects?  Tom Mottlau: Yes.  David: So it's not like 10 percent more; it can be quite a bit more? Tom Mottlau: I'm not sure of the percentage, but there's a noticeable amount. Keep in mind it's typically not just achieving those ratings; it's some of the other design aspects that go into it. I mean, the fact that you have pillow speaker circuitry to begin with, there's a cost basis for that. There's a cost basis for maintaining an installer menu of 117+ items. There's a cost basis for maintaining a Pro:Centric webOS platform. You do tend to find it because of those things, not just any one of them, but because of all of them collectively, yeah, the cost is higher. I would also say that the warranties tend to be more encompassing. It's not like you have to drive it down to Ted's TV. Somebody comes and actually remedies on-site. So yeah, all of that carries a cost basis. That's why you're paying for that value.  David: You mentioned that you sell or partner with patient engagement providers. Could you describe what those companies do and offer? Tom Mottlau: Yeah, and there's a number of them. Really, just to be objective, I'll give you some of the tier ones, the ones that have taken our product over the years and tested and provided back, and the ones that have participated in our development summit. I'll touch on that in a moment after this. So companies like Aceso, you have Uniguest who were part of TVR who offers the pCare solutions. You have Get Well, Sonify, those types of companies; they've been at this for years, and as I mentioned, we have a development summit where we, for years, have piled these guys on a plane. The CTOs went off to Korea and the way I describe it is we all come into a room, and I say, we're about to enter Festivus. We want you to tell us all the ways we've disappointed you with our platform, and we sit in that room, we get tomatoes thrown at us, and then we make changes to the platform to accommodate what they need. And then that way, they're confident that they're deploying a product that we've done all we can to improve the functionality of their patient engagement systems. After all, we're a platform provider, which is what we are.  David: When you define patient engagement, what would be the technology mix that you would typically find in a modernized or newly opened patient care area? Tom Mottlau: So that would be going back years ago. I guess it started more with patient education. If Mrs. Jones is having a procedure on her kidney, they want her to be educated on what she can eat or not eat, so they found a way to bring that patient education to the patient room over the TVs. But then they also wanted to confirm she watched it, and then it went on from there.  It's not only the entertainment, but it's also things that help improve workflows, maybe even the filling out of surveys and whatnot on the platform, Being able to order your culinary, just knowing who your doctor is, questions, educational videos, all of those things and then link up with EMR. David: What's that?  Tom Mottlau: Electronic medical records. Over the years, healthcare has wanted to move away from paper, to put it very simply. They didn't want somebody's vitals in different aspects of their health stored on a hand-scribbled note in several different doctor's offices. So there's been an effort to create electronic medical records, and now that has kind of been something that our patient engagement providers have tied into those solutions into the group.  David: So, is the hub, so to speak, the visual hub in a patient care room just a TV, or is there other display technology in there, almost like a status board that tells them who their primary provider is and all the other stuff?  Tom Mottlau: So it started as the smart TV, the Pro:Centric webOS smart TV. But then, as time went on, we kept getting those requests for, say, a vertically mounted solution, where somebody can actually walk in the room, see who their doctor is, see who their nurse is, maybe the physician can come in and understand certain vitals of the patient, and so that's why we developed those patient engagement boards that separately. They started out as non-touch upon request, we went with the consensus, and the consensus was we really need controlled information. We don't want to; we've had enough issues with dry-erase boards. We want something where there's more control in entering that information, and interesting enough, we're now getting the opposite demand. We're getting demand now to incorporate touch on the future models, and that's how things start. As you know, to your point earlier, folks are initially hesitant to breach any type of rules with all the bureaucracy. Now, once they cut through all that and feel comfortable with a start, they're willing to explore more technologies within those rooms. That's why we always start out with one, and then over the years, it evolves.  David: I assume that there's a bit of a battle, but it takes some work to get at least some of the medical care facilities to budget and approve these patient engagement displays or status displays just because there's an additional cost. It's different from the way they've always done things, and it involves integration with, as you said, the EMR records and all that stuff. So, is there a lot of work to talk them into it?  Tom Mottlau: Well, you have to look at us like consultants, where we avoid just talking folks into things. Really, what it has to do with is going back to VOC, voice of the customer, the way we were doing this years ago or just re-upping until these boards were launched was to provide a larger format, and ESIs were dividing up the screen. That was the way we always recommended. But then, once we started getting that VOC, they were coming to us saying, well, we need to get these other displays in the room. You know, certain facilities were saying, Hey, we absolutely need this, and we were saying, well, we don't want to put something that's not rated for that room. Then we realized we had to really start developing a product that suits that app, that environment, and so our job is to make folks aware of what we have and let them decide which path they're going to take because, to be honest, there are two different ways of approaching it. You can use one screen of 75”, divide it, or have two screens like Moffitt did. Moffitt added the patient engagement boards, which is what they wanted.  David: I have the benefit, at least so far, of being kind of at retirement age and spending very little time, thank God, in any kind of patient care facility. Maybe that'll change. Hopefully not.  But when I have, I've still seen dry-erase marker boards at the nursing stations, in rooms, in hallways, and everywhere else. Why is it still like that? Why haven't they cut over? Is it still the prevalent way of doing things, or are you seeing quite a bit of adoption of these technologies? Tom Mottlau: Well, it is, I would say, just because we're very early in all this. That is the prevalent way, no doubt.  It's really those tech-forward, future-forward facilities that are wanting to kind of go beyond that and not only that, there's a lot of facilities that want to bring all that in and, maybe just the nature of that facility is a lot more conservative, and we have to respect that. Because ultimately they're having to maintain it. We wouldn't want to give somebody something that they can't maintain or not have the budget for. I mean, at the end of the day, they're going to come back to us, and whether or not they trust us is going to be based upon whether we advise them correctly or incorrectly. If we advise them incorrectly, they're not going to trust us. They're not going to buy from us ten years from now.  David: For your business partners, the companies that are developing patient engagement solutions, how difficult is it to work with their patient record systems, building ops systems, and so on to make these dynamic displays truly dynamic? Is it a big chore, or is there enough commonality that they can make that happen relatively quickly? Tom Mottlau: That's a very good question, and that's exactly why we're very careful about who's tier one and who we may advise folks to approach. Those companies I mentioned earlier are very skilled at what they do, and so they're taking our product as one piece of an entire system that involves many other components, and I have full faith in their ability to do that because we sit in on those meetings.  Once a year, we hear feedback, we hear positive feedback from facilities. We see it but it really couldn't happen without those partners, I would say. We made that choice years ago to be that platform provider that supports those partners and doesn't compete with them. In hindsight, I think that was a great choice because it provides more options to the market utilizing our platform.  David: Well, and being sector experts in everything that LG tries to touch would be nightmarish. If you're far better off, I suspect I will be with partners who wake up in the morning thinking about that stuff. Tom Mottlau: Yeah. I mean, we know our core competencies. We're never going to bite off more than we can chew. Now granted, we understand more and more these days, there's a lot of development supporting things like telehealth, patient engagement, EMR and whatnot. But we're also going to make sure that at the end of the day, we're tying in the right folks to provide the best solution we can to patients. David: How much discussion has to happen around network security and operating system security?  I mean, if you're running these on smart TVs, they're then running web OS, which is probably to the medical facility's I.T. team or not terribly familiar to them.  Tom Mottlau: Yeah, that's a very good question. Facilities, hospitals, and anything that involves network security bring them an acute case of indigestion, more so than other areas in the business world. So these folks, a lot of times, there's exhaustive paperwork whenever you have something that links up to the internet or something that's going to open up those vulnerabilities. So, Pro:Centric webOS is actually a walled garden. It is not something that is easily hacked when you have a walled garden approach and something that's controlled with a local server. That's why we took that approach. Now, we can offer them a VPN if there is something that they want to do externally, but these systems were decided upon years ago and built with security in mind because we knew we were going to deploy in very sensitive commercial environments. And so not so much a concern. You don't need to pull our TV out and link up with some foreign server as you might with a laptop that you buy that demands updates. It's not anything like that because, of course, that would open us up to vulnerability. So we don't take that approach. It's typically a local server and there is the ability to do some control of the server if you want a VPN, but other than that, there is no access.  David: Do you touch on other areas of what we would know as digital signage within a medical facility?  Like I'm thinking of wayfinding, directories, donor recognition, video walls, and those sorts of things. Tom Mottlau: Absolutely. I mean, we see everything. Wayfinding needs have been for years and years now, and those are only expanding. and we start to see some that require outdoor displays for wave finding. So we do have solutions for that.  Beyond displays, we actually have robots now that we're testing in medical facilities and have had a couple of certifications on some of those. David: What would they do?  Tom Mottlau: Well, the robots would be used primarily to deliver some type of nonsensitive product. I know there's some work down the road, or let's just say there's some demand for medication delivery.  But obviously, LG's approach to any demand like that is to vet it out and make sure we're designing it properly. Then, we can make announcements later on about that type of stuff. For now, we're taking those same robots that we're currently using, say, in the hotel industry, and we're getting demand for that type of technology to be used in a medical facility.  David: So surgical masks or some sort of cleaning solutions or whatever that need to be brought up to a certain area, you could send in orderly, but staffing may be tight and so you get a robot to do it. Tom Mottlau: Absolutely. And that is a very liquid situation. There's a lot of focus and a lot of development. I'm sure there'll be a lot to announce on that front, but it's all very fluid, and it's all finding its way into that environment with our company.  All these future-forward needs, not only with the robots but EV chargers for the vast amount of electric vehicles, we find ourselves involved in discussions on all these fronts with our medical facilities these days.  David: It's interesting. Obviously, AI is going to have a role in all kinds of aspects of medical research and diagnosis and all those super important things.  But I suspect there's probably a role as well, right down at the lobby level of a hospital, where somebody comes in where English isn't their first language, and they need to find the oncology clinic or whatever, and there's no translator available. If you can use AI to guide them, that would be very helpful and powerful.  Tom Mottlau: Let me write that down as a product idea. Actually, AI is something that is discussed in the company, I would say, on a weekly basis, and again, I'm sure there'll be plenty to showcase in the future. But yes, I'd say we have a good head start in that area that we're exploring different use cases in the medical environment.  David: It's interesting. I write about digital signage every day and look at emerging markets, and I've been saying that healthcare seems like a greenfield opportunity for a lot of companies, but based on this conversation, I would say it is, and it isn't because if you are a more generalized digital signage software platform, yes, you could theoretically do a lot of what's required, but there's so much insight and experience and business ties that you really need to compete with these patient engagement providers, and I think it would be awfully tough for just a more generalized company to crack, wouldn't it?  Tom Mottlau: I believe so. I mean, we've seen many come and go. You know, we have certain terms internally, like the medicine show, Wizard of Oz. there's a lot out there; you really just have to vet them out to see who's legit and who isn't, and I'm sure there are some perfectly legitimate companies that we haven't worked with yet, probably in areas outside of patient education we, we have these discussions every week, and it's, it can be difficult because there are companies that you might not have heard of and you're always trying to assess, how valid is this? And, yeah, that's a tough one.  David: Last question. Is there a next big thing that you expect to emerge with patient engagement over the next couple of years, two-three years that you can talk about?  Tom Mottlau: You hit the nail on the head, AI. But you know, keep in mind that's something in relative terms. It has been relatively just the last few years, and it has been something that's come up a lot. It seems there's a five-year span where something is a focus going way back, it was going from analog to digital.  When I first came here, it was going from wood-clad CRT televisions to flat panels, and now we have OLED right in front of us. So yeah, there's, there's a lot of progression in this market. And I would say AI is one of them, and Telehealth is another; I guess we'll find out for sure which one sticks that always happens that way, but we don't ignore them.  David: Yeah, certainly, I think AI is one of those foundational things. It's kind of like networking. It's going to be fundamental. It's not a passing fancy or something that'll be used for five years and then move on to something else. Tom Mottlau: Yeah, true. But then again, also, it's kind of like when everybody was talking about, okay, we're not going to pull RF cable that went on for years and years because they were all going to pull CAT5, and then next thing, you know, they're saying, well, we have to go back and add CAT5 because they got ahead of themselves, right? So I think the challenge for any company is nobody wants to develop the next Betamax. Everybody wants to develop something that's going to be longstanding and useful, and so it's incumbent upon us to vet out those different solutions and actually see real practical ways of using it in the patient room and trusting our partners and watching them grow. A lot of times, they're the test beds, and so that's the benefit of our approach.  By providing that platform and supporting those partners, we get to see which tree is really going to take off.  David: Betamax, you just showed your age.  Tom Mottlau: Yes, sir. That made eight tracks, right?  David: For the kiddies listening, that's VCRs. All right. Thanks, Tom. That was terrific.  Tom Mottlau: Thank you very much, sir.  David: Nice to speak with you. 

The Patrick Madrid Show
The Patrick Madrid Show: April 16, 2024 - Hour 3

The Patrick Madrid Show

Play Episode Listen Later Apr 16, 2024 51:06


Join Fr. Matthew Spencer as he journeys through fascinating topics and questions, always aiming to deepen our understanding and love for the Catholic faith.   Victoria - Is Veronica and Mary of Magdalene the same person? (03:13) Maria - Why isn't the Chalice offered at Mass anymore? I miss it. (09:21) Susan – How do relics get scattered about the Church? Why can't we spread ashes? (16:08) David - How can we show best reverence for the Eucharist and what are the different styles of receiving? (22:12) Denise - Is there value in asking for the Cross to be taken away when suffering? (30:11) Delores - Why did Jesus tell Mary not to hold on to him, but he told Thomas to put his finger in his side? (36:05) Mike - My daughter is going to college in the fall. How can I help guide her in her faith without being overbearing? Janet - My daughter wanted some remains of her dad in her house so she can have him there. Is that okay? (45:01)

Top Secrets
Making Prospects and Clients Comfortable with You

Top Secrets

Play Episode Listen Later Apr 16, 2024 8:15


There are steps involved with making prospects and clients comfortable with you. You can't go from, "I have no idea who you are," to "I'm completely comfortable with you and I trust you implicitly" without steps. It just doesn't happen. David: Hi, and welcome to the podcast. In today's episode, co host Bianca Eastfound and I will be discussing the topic of making prospects and clients comfortable with you. Welcome back, Bianca. Bianca: Thank you so much, David. Definitely one of my favorite topics. And please tell us, what does it take to make prospects comfortable with us? David: Yeah, that's sort of a magic key, isn't it? What does it take? Well, I think it takes desire, certainly starts with the desire to want to do it, because a lot of times we're just so focused on selling what it is that we want to sell that we don't really think about that too much. We just think in terms of introducing ourselves and letting them know what we do and hoping that they're going to want to buy it. But so much of that, can never really happen until and unless we get to the point where they're comfortable enough to even want to hear what it is that we have to offer. Bianca: Well, that's absolutely great. And yeah, I definitely agree with you. So who do we need to do this with? David: Pretty much everyone, pretty much every prospect, every client we ever interact with, we need to create a level of comfort. In some of my early training, I talked about sort of four levels, if you picture a target with archery practice it's a series of rings and outside the rings, there's this area outside the target. That I think of as total obscurity. They don't know who you are. They don't know what you do. They have no idea why they should do business with you at all. So that's sort of outside the target. And then the first level inside the target is recognition. They recognize that you're alive. They recognize that you're taking in air on the planet, but they don't know exactly what you do or how you do it, or if they should use you at all. They just recognize you. Okay, I recognize you. So you move from obscurity to recognition. That's sort of the first step. And then after they recognize you, then you can start to move to comfort. Because until I even know who you are, there's no way I'm going to feel comfortable with you. So there's that next level. So you move from obscurity to recognition, and then recognition to comfort. And then from Comfort, you can eventually, if you do your job well and consistently, you can get to loyalty, right? We didn't even talk about loyalty in the topic today, but ultimately that's kind of the goal. And Comfort is one of the steps we need to get through in order to get to any sort of level of customer loyalty. But when we talk about making prospects and clients feel comfortable with us, it really is a process. And in our total market domination training, we talk about different methods of interaction. In other words, we have entry level awareness. So entry level awareness is designed to make someone aware of the fact that we exist and we do what we do. From there, we can then move on to that comfort level awareness, which is designed to expand the relationship a little more. Okay, I know who you are, I know what you do, and now I feel comfortable enough with you to place that first time order with you. And then once that happens, if I deliver well and consistently, and then you order again, and I deliver well and consistently, then eventually that can lead to loyalty. But I think a lot of it goes to recognizing that there are steps involved here. You can't go from, I have no idea who you are, to I'm completely comfortable with you and I trust you implicitly. It just doesn't happen. Bianca: Wow. And that's a great answer, but I know for some people it may be like a lot. So how do we really do it? David: How do we create that level of comfort? Bianca: Yes.

The Patrick Madrid Show
The Patrick Madrid Show: April 03, 2024 - Hour 1

The Patrick Madrid Show

Play Episode Listen Later Apr 3, 2024 51:11


Patrick explains the distinctions between panentheism and traditional Christian beliefs, providing ways to help a child understand God's presence in the world. Patrick then moves on to discuss the concept of indulgences and offers insights on true contrition and interior freedom.   Patrick responds to an email about a person who doesn't go to Mass because he has a one-on-one relationship with God and asks “why does God allow children to die?” (01:39) David - How do I explain to my 6-year-old son that God is in everything? (20:45) Mike - How do you make sure you are free of venial sin? (27:32) Charlie - Do you think that the more sin you have the less effective your prayer is? (36:14) Zachary – Thank you so much! Jacinto - How do I talk with someone who says that faith alone is all you need to be saved? (45:55)

The Patrick Madrid Show
The Patrick Madrid Show: March 07, 2024 - Hour 2

The Patrick Madrid Show

Play Episode Listen Later Mar 7, 2024 49:10


Patrick discusses the profound changes to the Mass post-Vatican II, addressing concerns about doctrinal shifts and the underlying intent. He explores the significance of language changes and their impact on the Church's tradition. Patrick offers historical insights into Mary's perpetual virginity and the lasting power of Jesus as symbolized by the sacrificial lamb.   Linda - Why did God pick a lamb for the sacrifice for the Hebrew people during Passover? Why not another animal? (00:47) David - How do you defend Mary's virginity and what would you say to someone who says that Jesus did things very differently so what's stopping him from giving Mary to his supposed siblings? (12:19) Emily - I became Catholic about 3 years ago. I was a Jehovah Witness for many years and I wanted to encourage people who know Jehovah Witnesses to keep praying for them because coming into the church is the best thing they can do! (19:37) Kip - Question about these parts of two prayers: “They shall be newly created” and “our life, our sweetness, and our hope” Wilfred - After Vatican II, why didn't the Roman Rite just translate the Mass into English instead of changing it? (37:02)

The Patrick Madrid Show
The Patrick Madrid Show: February 28, 2024 - Hour 2

The Patrick Madrid Show

Play Episode Listen Later Feb 28, 2024 49:10


Patrick demystifies the misconception of selling one's soul, highlighting redemption through Jesus. He shares insights on fasting with pure intentions, guided by St. Francis de Sales's wisdom and examines grief, and the concept of time in the afterlife, and Jesus as the 'Son of Man.' Emphasizing the core message of scripture, Patrick clarifies that entrance to heaven is not earned, but granted through Jesus's love and forgiveness. John - Are there different levels of Grace? How long does the Eucharist last in us after we receive it? (05:19) David - How can I forgive a brother of mine who hurt me? Email – What should I write in a card to compassionately address the tragic passing of an acquaintance's children? Francisco - How do I properly understand Matthew 12:7? Danielle - Matthew 16:27: Question about the “Son of Man”. Also, James and John are sitting at the right hand of God. Who is supposed to sit at the left hand God? Hayden - How is it possible that humans can be transformed more when Purgatory is a place outside of time? (32:13) Marci (email) – How can someone sell their soul to the devil if our souls belong to God? Jenny - Is there a good book on fasting that I can read for Lent? Gabriel - If Jesus asked you “why should I let you in” when you die, how would you respond? (44:58)

The Patrick Madrid Show
The Patrick Madrid Show: February 07, 2024 - Hour 3

The Patrick Madrid Show

Play Episode Listen Later Feb 7, 2024 53:46


David - How many creeds are there? I know about the apostle creed and the Nicene creed and what is the difference? (01:24) Do all priests need to be celibate and why? Gideon (16-years-old) - I called in a little bit ago regarding a speech. You helped me out a lot.  Thank you for your help. Email – Is it ethical to become pregnant using someone else's fertilized embryo so the embryo isn't destroyed?     (13:20) Maureen - I was in a relationship with a man. We fornicated and I am concerned about my soul. What should I do? William – What is the best way to talk about Saint Anthony of Padua to help inspire others? Emily - My mom is on hospice and one of her care givers is stealing medical supplies from the house. What should I do? Joanne - What do you think of a parent taking a 13-year-old to a bingo night with a drag queen as the MC? David - Can you get baptized in the Catholic church if you are married outside of the Church?

Generation Mixed
AITA with David and Jermaine

Generation Mixed

Play Episode Listen Later Jan 25, 2024 31:02


Get ready for new AITA reddit stories!Dive in with Jolie, David and Jermaine, as all three respond to three brand new AITA posts on Reddit that discuss challenges of being mixed race in today's world.Jermaine is an aspiring actor and model, who is graduating from college in Spring.David works as a dance teacher, attends school, and has won many competitions.@408maine (Jermaine)@kingmachl90_ (David)How can we bridge the gaps within our mixed race community based on experiences, geography, skin tone, and upbringing to become more united?DOWNLOAD and SUBSCRIBE to Generation Mixed, on Apple, Spotify, IHeart, or Spreaker!FOLLOW US: Instagram: @generationmixedpodcast | https://www.instagram.com/generationmixedpodcast/Tik-Tok: @GenMixedpodcast | https://www.tiktok.com/@genmixedpodcastSubscribe to our newsletter at www.nuwavemedia.orgE-mail us with any questions, comments, or suggestions for future episodes: Generationmixedpodcast@gmail.comWanna be on the show? Text or call 510-852-9550!What it means to be multiracial in America, one story at a time, from the studio to the streets. –Exciting news! JMarc has partnered with NuWave Community Media, a non-profit promoting digital literacy. Support our cause by donating or volunteering at www.nuwavemedia.org. Explore our diverse podcasts for insightful content. Join us in building a digitally empowered community

The Alli Worthington Show
How to Trust God's Grace with Max Lucado

The Alli Worthington Show

Play Episode Listen Later Sep 18, 2023 40:48


Hey friend! Have you ever wondered if your past is too much for God to use you? What can He do with all of the ways we struggle? Have you ever bargained or wrestled with God?  One of my favorite guests (and fan-favorite!) Max Lucado is here to talk with us about it all today.  Called “America's Pastor” by Christianity Today, Max is the bestselling author of 45 books and counting. He is a pastor and speaker who says he “writes books for people who don't read books.” Max is a father of three, grandfather of two, and he lives with his wife in San Antonio.  In his newest book, God Never Gives Up on You: What Jacob's Story Teaches Us About Grace, Mercy, and God's Relentless Love, Max examines the life of Jacob in Scripture, how God loved and pursued Jacob, and what that means for us.  Join Max and I for a great conversation as we talk about:  Where he gets his  book ideas Why there aren't as many books about Jacob as there are about biblical heroes like Daniel and David How to discern when our understanding of God has become too small Why Max connects with and treasures the story of Jacob God's faithfulness to his people, no matter what You'll also love hearing my chat with Max about how to have hope in a divided world. Check it out here. Favorite quotes: “In the story of Jacob he is hot and cold, in and out, weak, and then he's strong. He has dreams and then he wrestles with God. Then he falls and flops. It is every person's story.” “Jacob's relationship is a transactional relationship with God. You do this. I'll do that. That really strikes home with many of us.” “All of us go through some negotiation or transactional relationship with God.” “It is okay to wrestle with these things. Ultimately there is one authority and it is not you or me.” “Be kind to yourself. God hasn't given up on you. Don't give up on yourself.” Coaching this week:  Three truths about business you won't find anywhere else on the internet.  (31:40) Links to great things we discussed:  Max Lucado Website God Never Gives Up on You: What Jacob's Story Teaches Us About Grace, Mercy, and God's Relentless Love These Days - Jackson Browne The Chosen 1883 1923 PXG Golf Irons The Wino and I Know - Jimmy Buffett Migration - Jimmy Buffett The Coach School The Coach School Instagram 3 Secrets to Become a Successful Coach Order your copy of Remaining You While Raising Them here. Hope you loved this episode! Be sure to subscribe in iTunes and slap some stars on a review! :) xo, Alli https://www.alliworthington.com  

American Institute of CPAs - Personal Financial Planning (PFP)
Why you need to take Bitcoin seriously - part 3 {PFP Section}

American Institute of CPAs - Personal Financial Planning (PFP)

Play Episode Listen Later Aug 11, 2023 31:19


If you believe it is a good idea to hold even a small amount of Bitcoin, the next step is to educate your clients and decide on the strategy that will have the best chance for success.  In this episode of the PFP Section podcast, David Oransky, CPA/PFS, shares how he approaches this with his clients. Mark Astrinos, CPA/PFS, poses the following questions to David: How to you respond to criticism of Bitcoin from other advisors? What is your approach with clients to include Bitcoin in their portfolio? How do you explain that Bitcoin is money versus a traditional investment that produces cashflow? Why are retirees most at risk if Bitcoin is successful long term (and they haven't allocated a portion of their portfolio to Bitcoin)? How do you assuage fears given the volatility of Bitcoin? Should advisors be worried about compliance regulation or lack thereof?  Where can listeners go to learn more? For more resources related to this episode: Tune in to the first episode and second episode in this series. Listen to David's in-depth webcast on Bitcoin and access the related slides. Check out the various books to learn more that David mentions at the end of this episode. This episode is brought to you by the AICPA's Personal Financial Planning Section, the premier provider of information, tools, advocacy, and guidance for professionals who specialize in providing tax, estate, retirement, risk management and investment planning advice. Also, by the CPA/PFS credential program, which allows CPAs to demonstrate competence and confidence in providing these services to their clients. Visit us online to join our community, gain access to valuable member-only benefits or learn about our PFP certificate program. Subscribe to the PFP Podcast channel at Libsyn to find all the latest episodes or search “AICPA Personal Financial Planning” on your favorite podcast app.  

The Patrick Madrid Show
The Patrick Madrid Show: August 02, 2023 - Hour 1

The Patrick Madrid Show

Play Episode Listen Later Aug 2, 2023 51:10


Patrick shares and comments on a new Gallup poll - Belief in Five Spiritual Entities Edges Down to New Lows. He offers real solutions and tools we can use to stay grounded in our faith and to help our friends and family come home to the Church Patrick shares the disturbing news of a giant gallstone that might break the world record Ivan - Why is the Lutheran Church not able to confect the Eucharist but the Orthodox Church can? Ray - What do you think about knocking on wood meaning going to the wood of the Cross for all your needs? Email – What is Adoration? David - How do I address people who are talking during mass? Grace - What should people do who want to adopt but it is too expensive?

Side Hustle Hero
48: Carve Out This Side Hustle

Side Hustle Hero

Play Episode Listen Later May 16, 2023 37:20


When you're working in a family business and you want more money but there isn't more to go around, what do you do? You start a side hustle of course! That's what pushed today's guests Jennifer Cornelius and David Swojanovski to launch Rubble Road Soapstone Carving Kits. They've gone from selling 30 of these soapstone pieces a month, to selling thousands per month. Where once the saw that cuts the silhouette pieces ran just 4 hours a week, now it needs to run at least 12 hours a day. Is developing a business teaching students and adults soapstone carving using these kits something you'd be interested in doing as a side hustle? Then you'll want to reach out to Jennifer and David. But first, for inspiration in whatever your current or future side hustle might be, check out today's episode.  What You'll Hear: 05:20 Want more money? You'll need to figure out a side hustle. 06:20 Being encouraged to teach carving in the schools 07:08 What the lesson looks like 08:50 Expanded from 6 shapes to offering 26 shapes in 3 different sizes 09:15 The overwhelming response at trade shows made them realize they were on to something 11:31 Statue of David: How did Michelangelo know he was in there? 13:20 Why all their stone comes from Brazil 14:38 Listening to customers has shapes their product line 15:48 Teacher's conventions gave Rubble Road great exposure 16:20 Piggybacking her sister's tradeshow proved lucrative for them, but not so much for her sister! 17:25 Go to where your ideal client is 17:50 40% of revenues come from other companies using their kits to teach in schools 18:53 Profit margins on kits 20:10 Potluck carving nights! 21:21 Teaching carving remotely 22:20 Remote teaching has given remote schools access to this program 26:02 Another income source: the “traveling jewelry classroom” 27:40 The biggest challenge in growing Rubble Road 30:13 Next steps for the business 32:38 Jennifer & David's best tip 35:06 The value asking questions 35:10 Being open to learning something from everyone you meet   Connect with Jennifer & David: https://www.rubble-road.com/ https://www.tiktok.com/@rubbleroadsoapstone https://www.instagram.com/rubbleroadsoapstone/ https://www.facebook.com/rubbleroadsoapstone Connect with Joan: https://www.instagram.com/joanposivy/ https://www.facebook.com/posivy/ https://www.joanposivy.com/ Check out Joan's #1 success course! https://courses.joanposivy.com/p/turn-your-thoughts-into-wanted-things The Way Success Works Book http://thewaysuccessworks.com/ Be on the show! https://www.joanposivy.com/be-our-guest.html  

Forktales
Ep 64: David Jones / President of The Excellence Advisory & Coach of Winning Restaurants

Forktales

Play Episode Listen Later Apr 17, 2023 34:07


David is a performance excellence coach focused on teaching, consulting and executive coaching for small to medium sized businesses, including many restaurants. David spent six years as a business/excellence coach for Pal's Excellence Institute. Pal's – or Pal's Suddenly Service – is a drive-through only 31-location restaurant chain located in northeast Tennessee and southwestern Virginia. The restaurant is known for its speed, hospitality, cleanliness and people. Pal's relies heavily on word-of-mouth marketing. That word-of-mouth allows Pal's to spend roughly half as much on marketing as some of its similar competitors. According to David, COVID gave restaurants a second chance to make a first impression. Restaurants that were struggling before the pandemic were struggling after the pandemic, pointing to an internal flaw that contributes to that struggle. Some restaurants used the pandemic as a chance to reset and improve themselves to make a second first impression and win over new customers after the pandemic ended. Quotes “What we see now is a lot of sculptures and spokescharacters have been discontinued. Architecturally speaking, we're getting modern boxes that don't have much life.” (Joseph) “If you look at the new (restaurant) designs, they're all basically the same. You really want to stand out in a sea of sameness.” (David) “How often in life do you get a second chance to make a first impression? If customers are coming back (after the pandemic), we have a chance to win them over and leave all that past behind.” (David) “If people aren't buying it, it's because they don't want it.” (Joseph) “If you think about a restaurant and what it does, it's really a manufacturing operation. You're manufacturing food in real time for a specific order based on your menu.” (David) “Systems are one thing, but activating them tends to be where the rubber meets the road and where most people hit the road.” (Joseph) “Twenty percent of the effort is putting a system in place and 80% of the effort is sustaining it. You have to make it a habit. You have to change in a way that it's harder to go back than it is to go forward.” (David) Transcript 00:00.91 vigorbranding Everyone today I'm joined by my friend David Jones he's the president of a company called the excellence advisory which we'll get into in a little bit. Um, but before we do David why don't you say hello and give a little bit of backstory. 00:11.50 David M_ Jones Well hello joseph and thanks for having me on today I considered a personal and professional honor to be here with you speaking to your audience and I'm actually an engineer by training 25 years in corporate America and then I had the great blessing and ability to work with. Pals through their business excellence institute which I hope we get to talk about and did that for 7 years and ah and today I do teaching consulting and coaching executive coaching for small to medium sized businesses including a lot of restaurants. 00:49.83 vigorbranding That's awesome. Yeah, so pals is um, essentially what prompted our connection on Linkedin. Um, and honestly it's a concept I had never heard of they're they're not here in Georgia or in Central Pennsylvania so I just never come across them. But what really grabbed my attention and prompted our discussion was. Um, pal's sudden service is what it's called has these amazing huge sculptures on their buildings sculptures of their food like hamburgers and drinks and all kinds of things and this just struck me as such an amazing thing. Um. Before we get into why they're doing that can you give us just a little bit of a rundown about what pals is all about. 01:28.79 David M_ Jones Oh absolutely. Yeah, it's so it's a drive through only 31 unit chain in East Tennessee and Southwest Virginia they are known for their speed their hospitality, their service, their cleanliness, their value. And they're people. They're amazing

Board Shorts Podcast
Governance Q & A With Steven Bowman | Ep. 65

Board Shorts Podcast

Play Episode Listen Later Mar 21, 2023 62:39


Steve Bowman and I answer a series of questions submitted by the BoardPro community as part of a recent webinar that we participated in (find the replay here: https://www.boardpro.com/resource-centre/webinars/qa-everything-governance). Submit your question for a future Board Shorts Podcast episode: https://bit.ly/BoardShortsQuestion Questions (06:02 - Ateel) What is the fine line [for the Board getting involved] in appointing Office Staff - e.g Business managers, Front office staff. Is it an operational matter? What are your thoughts? (11:28 - Michelle) What do you like to see in a board pack? How much before the meeting do you like to receive it? And how do you encourage people to read the board packs before each board meeting? (23:44 - Annette) We are currently making changes to our Agenda Template. Looking for information on best practice Agenda layout and specifically how to relate agenda items to the Strategic Plan. (41:18 - David) How can we make time for digital, to deeply incorporate this into both strategy and risk? Digital transformation and cybersecurity can easily be crowded out of the agenda by short-term operational issues, and there's only so much time/attention when small organisations have several board meetings per year. About Steven Bowman Steven Bowman is a governance expert and seasoned Board adviser, with a great depth of experience and skill in facilitating Board reviews and the strategic planning process. He has held numerous senior executive, CEO and Board positions in the USA and Australia, and has authored and co-authored over 14 books on governance, strategy, risk and executive leadership. Steven has built a reputation around the world as an adviser who empowers his clients by offering multiple perspectives on any given challenge. Connect with Steven Conscious Governance TV: https://www.consciousgovernancetv.com/conscious-governance-tv-home Conscious Governance Moments: https://www.consciousgovernancetv.com/podcasts/conscious-governance-moments Steve on LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/stevenbowmangovernance Thanks to our sponsor BoardPro Visit boardpro.com/boardshorts and use the promo code boardshorts (all one word, lowercase) to get a 30-day free trial AND 20% off the price of your first year on any plan.

Navigating Consciousness with Rupert Sheldrake
Q&A with Brother David Steindl-Rast and audience; re: History of Orthodox Scientific Thought

Navigating Consciousness with Rupert Sheldrake

Play Episode Listen Later Mar 14, 2023 40:08


This is an extract from Rupert's workshop with Brother David Steindl-Rast at Hollyhock, Cortes Island, BC in August, 2011.00:00   Brother David Steindl-Rast: Making a thing out of the soul; AI Sentience 04:08   Rupert Sheldrake: Golem/Frankenstein myths and robot consciousness07:07   Rupert: Analog computers as possible framework for machine consciousness07:57   David: So it is possible?08:23   Rupert: Promissory Materialism will "prove" that people are machines 09:04   Rupert: The genome wager with Lewis Wolpert 14:13   David: Science as limited faith, one without hope15:00   Audience: if Science and Faith both seek truth, they must converge15:41   Rupert: we all have implicit biases; materialists in particular have huge blindspots17:31   Audience: Truth emerging like a flower17:54   Rupert: Institutionalized science, grants, educational conformity19:32   David: How can you do it?19:36   Rupert: I was forced to work independently, not recommended21:04   Rupert's excommunication by Nature Editor John Maddox22:29   Rupert: Pluralism in politics, but not science "we know the truth"24:13   David: Questioning establishment power25:32   Audience: A rebirth of creative thinking?25:43   Rupert: Trouble with the academic system; funding reform; medical system fatigue; alternative therapies29:10   Audience: Morphic resonance, homeopathy, interpersonal neurobiology, setting science free30:17   Rupert: Comparative effectiveness research, pragmatic medical systems, most scientists are from Eastern cultures (India, China)32:35   Audience: What if you talked to a radical cosmologist?32:48   Rupert: Mainstream cosmology IS radical, multi-verse theory, laws of nature must be fixed34:58   Rupert: Martin Reese's simpler hypothesis "get's rid of God"36:09   Rupert: Stars being conscious too much for Martin Reese37:48   Rupert: Brian Swimme, Thomas Berry, creation story, popularized science, natural philosophy

Talking Apes
The Scientific Race to Defeat a Deadly Virus with David Quammen - Part 2 | S2E35

Talking Apes

Play Episode Listen Later Mar 13, 2023 71:13


"Viruses are the dark angels of evolution, terrific and terrible, without which, the immense biological diversity gracing our planet would collapse."In 2013 veteran science writer David Quammen wrote an opinion piece for the New York Times titled, The Next Pandemic: Not if, but When?  Seven years later he found himself writing about the horrors of the very thing he had foretold, as the Covid-19 virus surged throughout our world. This week, continuing our special Zoonotic Disease In the Spotlight month, David joins us for a second time round to discuss his book BREATHLESS: The Scientific Race to Defeat a Deadly Virus. BREATHLESS  is the story of SARS-CoV-2 and its fierce journey through the human population, as seen by the scientists who study its origin, its ever-changing nature, and its capacity to kill us.Through conversations with 95 expert scientists, David examines how Covid and other strange viruses emerge from other animals and infect we human apes, leading to global catastrophe.  This week on Talking Apes, we ask David:How did Covid-19 start?How are bats linked to Covid-19? Why do bats cause pandemics? Why do zoonotic diseases emerge from wet markets? Are all viruses bad?Did governments respond badly to the Covid-19 crisis?How can we prevent future pandemics?  Click HERE to visit David Quammen's Website. Click HERE to learn more about zoonotic diseases. Support the showTalking Apes is an initiative of the nonprofit GLOBIO. Official website: talkingapes.orgInstagram: @talkingapes_podcastTwitter: @talking_apes Click here to support the show.

The Down and Dirty Podcast
Talk Dirty To Me Q&A: Communication with Your Partner, Group Sex, Kinks & Navigating the 5 Love Languages in Relationship

The Down and Dirty Podcast

Play Episode Listen Later Feb 27, 2023 12:53


In this week's episode, I tackle your questions regarding image, sex and dating! I answered four questions about communication, group sex, kinks and how to bring the five love languages into your relationship, this is a must listen!  Please tell us your thoughts about the Q&A over on Instagram @celestemooreimage, and be looking forward to more of these in the future! In this week's episode we discuss:  [1:36] Question 1 (Alan): What to do when your partner will not listen to your challenges or stories?  [3:40] Question 2 (Brian): What do you do when your partner wants to have group sex but you don't?  [5:33] Question 3 (David): How do you bring up a taboo kink to a partner?  [9:20] Question 4 (Chris): What are the best ways to understand your partner's love language?  Let me know your thoughts on today's episode because I always love hearing from you all. You can find all the links and resources in the show notes of the episode on my website, www.celestemoore.com.

Unlimited Influence
How To Attract Abundance: Clearing your Energy Field - NLP and the Law of Attraction Part 1

Unlimited Influence

Play Episode Listen Later Jan 17, 2023 60:53


In this episode of How to Attract Abundance: Clearing your Energy Field -NLP and the Law of Attraction: Part 1, we'll be sent through a series of activities of NPL and we'll learn how to attract abundance into our lives easily. We're here to experience the different ways to target our old system. Today, David talks about the amazing effect of clearing our energy field in order to achieve a better life. One that is abundant and free of negativity. Standout Quotes: “But I'm never here to embarrass anybody. I'm never here to make anybody feel bad. My job is to show you what's possible.” – [David] “Because most of us have aches and pains and we'd rather learn but the feelings that you're carrying around, do not mean you're broken. They do not mean you're broken. Nobody here is broken.” -[David] “How we can custom design all of the experiences we have, the ones we want to create, and the ones that will come into our world through ways we didn't directly program. It's a hologram.” -[David] Key Takeaways: The goal of the program is to help people and to end as much suffering on this planet. All of the holographic data encoded within your neural system manifests as feelings in your body. They're also the same as the vibrational frequency you've emitted and radiated. So, for every vibrational frequency, you have a range of corresponding phenomena. In other words, chemical. The law of analogy is one of them. These are the basic principles that govern the law of attraction. And if you don't comprehend them, you're at a serious disadvantage. Episode Timeline: [00:30] David's goal in the program [00:52] Resolution frequency generator [01:30] Vibrational Frequency [01:46] Law of analogy [02:07] Law of attraction [04:07] Dominant Thoughts [05:40] Idea of point and fix. [06:23] Golf Correspondence [07:51] Embodied Cognition [09:30] Play pretend activity [10:34] Why focus is important [11:34] Hit Smart person syndrome [11:53] Get playful [12:24] Activity on feeling wonderful feelings [15:11] You are the god or goddess of your world within your own [16:46] Holographic Mind [17:02] Two types of mind states [20:15] Navigation System [21:10] Everything is variation of reality [25:24] Safe place activity [30:05] Series of questions activity [32:33] Karma [35:51] Script out your perfect life [36:54] Colors connected to feelings [38:35] Meditation resets neurology [41:02] The unconscious mind is always first to respond [41:33] Familiarity is safety [42:27] Holographic Memories [43:00] Hologram [44:01] Consciousness is holographic [45:02] Holographic Memory Resolution [46:42] Terminal Event [47:31] Trauma Defense system [50:42] Get out of Jail Card [52:54] Vibrational Phenomena [56:51] Phantom Pain

Sixteen:Nine
Brian Nutt, Adificial

Sixteen:Nine

Play Episode Listen Later Dec 7, 2022 34:27


The 16:9 PODCAST IS SPONSORED BY SCREENFEED – DIGITAL SIGNAGE CONTENT There have been a few companies that have come along in recent years offering a platform that used templates, image library and stored data to largely automate the production of videos - but few if any of them had their heads wrapped around how that might work with and for digital signage networks. A Louisville, KY start-up is taking a run at the concept, and the big difference with Adificial is that its CEO and co-founder started and ran a digital signage software company for many years ... so he has his head around the desire for content automation when it comes to videos that find their way to screens. Some listeners will know Brian Nutt as the founder of Codigo, which had built up a strong and interesting business focused mainly on regional banking. That business was acquired in 2018 by Spectrio, which now also owns and publishes Sixteen:Nine, and Brian spent a few years away from the business, before thinking about and pulling together Adificial. It's a platform that uses web services and the scalability of cloud computing to enable HTML5-driven motion media files to be generated quickly and easily, by the hundreds or thousands. At scale, a motion file unique to a person or place can cost only pennies. Nutt is a digital signage guy, but he's launching Adificial with a focus on media embedded in staff and customer emails. That makes sense, as the idea is that this platform can generate many thousands of custom videos for emails, versus the dozens or maybe hundreds that might be needed by a digital signage network that wants different messaging for, let's say, each store in a chain. But the capabilities are there to make this relevant for digital signage. Have a listen. Subscribe to this podcast: iTunes * Google Play * RSS TRANSCRIPT David: Hey, Brian. Thank you for joining me. For people who don't know you or maybe recall you from your past, can you give me your background and what you were doing with Codigo?  Brian Nutt: Sure and great to talk to you again, Dave. Codigo was a digital signage company that I founded back in around 2004, so set up kinda early on in the trajectory of digital signage. That morphed into us introducing a number of different retail media products, interactive kiosks, overhead music, on-hold messaging, all that type of, and we had a focus on financial institutions, really, like regional, local banks and credit unions. Although towards the end there, when I sold Codigo in 2018, we had installations around the world and all sorts of different industries from restaurants, universities, office complexes, and all the places that you would see a digital sign installed today, or retail media, as I said.  Did that and sold that in 2018, took a few years off and launched this new project which is pretty exciting.  David: So what is Adificial?  Brian Nutt: Yeah, so Adificial really began I guess in terms of me thinking about this back before I sold Codigo, so Codigo and I think like a lot of digital signage products, at least today, maybe not back then, but we had the pretty robust online content engine for creating content that could be either sent down to a kiosk or digital signage or any of the devices, whether it was on-hold messaging or any of those things, you could create the content on the web, and so I had this idea that might be an exciting product as a standalone product. We never launched it, and it's probably a good idea because folks like Canva came along, and Promo and these other products came along, and they did a pretty good job so I'm glad I didn't do it, but after little time off, I was still thinking about the product and just how video is forcing businesses to do things differently, and this requirement today to personalize content for folks that are your customers or are interested in the product. So the idea of an Adificial is to solve the problem that's traditionally been around video, which is, it's expensive, it's time-consuming and yet the requirement of it by consumers continues to race forward daily, and then the age today where data, people are willing to share their data with brands freely and why is video passive still? Why is it that it's audience-based where I press play and I watch it and Dave gets the same video as I do, even though we have totally different lives and we live in different spots and have different ages and all those things.  It's this idea that you can make videos personalized with data. What I know about you, I should be able to map brand assets, audio, video, and language even, and insert interactive elements, calendar invites, pdf, downloads, buttons, and anything like that into the video. So it's fully interactive and engaging in ways that just really haven't been largely available and at reasonable rates. David: So this is a content automation platform?  Brian Nutt: Yes. I would wrap it up by saying we're not in the marketing automation space. We're not trying to compete with Mailchimp or anything like that, what we're trying to do is automate the production of the video with data and available assets and return that piece of content back to the market automation platform that would then send it out, primarily via email, although I can see this transition to social and SMS in any other way that you communicate to consumers.  David: So if I'm running a digital signage network, and I have a hundred different stores and I want a video for each of those stores, but I want it localized to each of those stores, instead of getting an agency or in-house designer to generate a hundred different videos, you would run it through this and it would use data to generate those hundred videos? Brian Nutt: That's a decent comparison, but this product's really not built for digital signage. So imagine a little bit bigger than that. You know the value of data on your consumer today is tremendously high. So if you have a CRM that has 10,000 people that are either current customers or leads or somewhere along the customer journey. What we do is we could produce videos for all of them and you insert video into your marketing stack, into the customer journey and send it out via email.  David: Oh, okay. Are the files not big enough to run on a large format screen?  Brian Nutt: They could, and in fact, when I initially started this, the idea was to send content to any device, but we've narrowed that down and focused on market automation platforms. But there's no reason it couldn't morph into a digital signage play. It's just not today.  David: Right, because there's more scale in those and it's just a bigger business.  Brian Nutt: Yes.  David: So it's one of those things like Poppulo, App Space, and some of these other companies that are starting to blend platforms, where it's one stock that can send to a digital screen, that can also send to a smartphone, to a tablet, to a website, whatever. It would kind of plug into that kind of thing.  Brian Nutt: Yes, and here's the other reason that I've gotten into this, and I'm a huge believer in power digital signage, obviously. But at Codigo, our growth was really built around this incredible drive to build more stores, more locations, more branches in the banking space, and so we leveraged that and grew off that and really benefited from it. But today what's happening is, in fact, I was looking just recently, they're suggesting that in the next five years, 50,000 retail stores will close. Since 2009, when we were going into the great recession, banks and credit unions numbered about 15,000 total, that's not branches. Today, there are about 7,000. So it's this consolidation and push not including the number of locations that close during the pandemic, what 20,000 retail stores, something like that.  So what's happening, in my opinion, is the store or branch does a couple of things. One, it's meant to educate a person in person on the product, build trust, and sell products. But if stores are closing, people aren't going to the store, how do you communicate to them personally and to me, the conversation today is done in data. If I'm willing to give a brand my data, trust them with that, even if it's unreasonable. I'm not going to the store. I never wanna meet a person that's going to tell me about a shoe or a bank loan or whatever, but that doesn't mean I don't expect you to communicate back to me with things that are specific to me, to help me learn about products, build trust, and ultimately sell me something. So that's taking it from the digital science in-store installation, that's the next progression of what we're trying to solve.  David: It's another output.  Brian Nutt: Yeah, exactly.  David: So how does this work? Brian Nutt: I guess, where do you want me to start? It did take quite a while to figure it out honestly. You start with this gigantic idea and then try to distill it down into something actionable. So that's where we are now.  But at the finest level, it's really not that dissimilar from digital signage. It's just one level deeper in how you're delivering the content, so you know the right time, right place, right person, all those things. And a large well of content that's either procured the third party ShutterStock, et cetera, or first party to the brand and then using technology to map these pieces of content to data, and data could be something like just knowing your name and having it be, “Hello Dave”, and so if the first name equals Dave, then show the text Dave on the first screen and if language equals Spanish, say, “Hola Dave”, and that's really what it is.  It's mapping data smartly to assets, no matter whether it's something as simple as text or a background image or a video, things like that, and then you stitch those together based on where you are in the process towards, or whatever it's you're involved in. It could be something like onboarding an employee. It could be obviously selling someone, onboarding them on a product, or following up with a customer service issue, and you do it at scale. Because you can automate it.  David: So if you have the data tables, you have the image assets, and you have maybe some core templates, you could conceivably generate 10,000 videos that are all tailored to each individual? Brian Nutt: That's exactly right.  David: Are you dependent on templates? Brian Nutt: Again, it's very similar to digital science in many ways. So what we're doing, just like we did at Codigo, is leveraging a high degree of design skill and allowing folks to manipulate that as they choose. Now we've done a couple of things a little smarter this way, which is we're building in functions where we call it a branded function, which I guess is kinda out there in the market in software where you just click a button and it'll map your brand assets the best it can to template that we're building, but the same thing with Codigo is that we have a pretty high-end content editor that allows you to build whatever you want.  David: Do you need to have graphic design skills? Brian Nutt: Not a high degree of them. As I said, it's very similar to what we did at Codigo from a user experience perspective. David: So you wanna have somebody using this who has some core design chops and knows not to use Comic Sans for a font, or use pink and everything?  Brian Nutt: Exactly. I can barely sign my name much less, create a piece of content that's gonna be sent out to thousands of consumers and I'll never do that. But the thing about this is not the design skills. It's meant to be, the whole set it and forget it attitude, which is once we have content mapped and I have the data that's associated with different pieces of content, and I have the story, we call it a story setup, and maybe I'll give you an example: If they use a CRM and I have David Haynes who showed interest in Red Wine and you wanna join the wine club, the Friday Wine Club at the local wine establishment. So you show interest in that, and in their CRM you meet a condition that says, “Hey, Dave just joined the wine club” and what traditionally happens is when you meet that condition, you're sending an email and the email says, “Hey Dave, thanks so much for your interest in the wine club”, and it's got a picture or something of it, there, and maybe it shows people what the wine club. Well frankly, that's boring. So what we wanna do is take that same approach and it's all that is: a form, it's all merge fields. “Hello, first name” - it just that it happens to be Dave. “Thank you for your interest in Product ID” - wine club, or whatever that it might be. Brian might be a white wine drinker, but it all comes from the same engine, so it's effectively a similar approach. We're taking data from those systems, current systems, we're not trying to be a CRM and mapping that to assets that we have, whether they're the first party to this, in this case, the wine club or something that we've provided you from a third party library, and then turning that into video, right? Stitching each of these assets together with dynamic fields that represent, “Hey, Dave, thanks for your interest in the wine club. All the red wine drinkers are meeting down the road on Friday afternoon. Come by. Would you like to attend?” You could click yes.  David: Gotcha. So this is rules-based, it's not AI?  Brian Nutt: Today, no.  David: So there's a plan? Brian Nutt: There's a grand plan.  David: So what are the outputs like? What's the output file?  Brian Nutt: The output file as well as a URL, and so what we're generating is a PURL, a personalized URL.  David: So it's not an mp4, it's not a video file of any kind, it's an HTML5 file? Brian Nutt: Yes.  David: Do you work in parallel with a CRM system or how do the two platforms play together?  Brian Nutt: Yeah, now we're going to beta in February. Today, there are a number of different ways to do it. You can either upload it yourself or you can, there are a number of systems that can automate the transfer of data, like Zapier, et cetera. And you map these just like anything else. If you have a list of people that meet conditions, like the Red Wine Club, you take that data and get it to our system. As long as we understand what the fields are, then we can choose the correct content to weave together and return it back to you as a PURL, which can then be sent out as an email. David: How seamless will it be?  Brian Nutt: It should be very seamless. Take any system, let's take Mailchimp for example. There are custom fields and automation that allow you to insert links into an email template or a landing page. So we're routing on top of those existing systems and the features that they have and so once you have that, you can have a custom record for each person, like Dave O'Brien or whomever that updates itself, and when those conditions are met, it knows to send the email.  David: So would you use APIs or would you use middleware like you were mentioning like Zapier?  Brian Nutt: That's the first way to do it. Oddly in the financial space, it's more of a security requirement. Rather than doing that, oftentimes I'll just use SMTP, which seems old school, but there are reasons to do so, like man-in-the-middle attacks, and things like that. But there are ways to do this. Now, do we wanna integrate with as many systems as we possibly can? We'll let the market dictate that.  David: Because it's HTML5, is it responsive?  Brian Nutt: Responsive to the size of the device? Is that what you mean, like web responsive?  David: The screen resolution, and if it's going out on Facebook, it's a 4:3 square and if it's going out on a larger screen, it's a 16:9 rectangle?  Brian Nutt: Yeah, again, it's very similar to the product we had with Codigo, which is, you can do custom resolutions, you can do whatever you want, but then again, it's gotta be responsive to the area of the device, or in this case, the browser, whether that's mobile or your laptop or tablet or whatever.  David: So when you look at this from financial aspects, what's the benefits argument of doing this versus producing individual videos? It's pretty obvious, but tell me nonetheless.  Brian Nutt: As I said, producing videos is incredibly expensive, and I've termed it the content gap, which is what I call, it's the distance between what consumers require in video - and they want everything in the video - and what businesses can reasonably produce. So it's not just the cost, a lot of times people outsource this stuff, and then it's got a shelf life.  But with what we're doing we think we can reasonably produce hundreds of thousands of videos, for pennies on the dollar, and I say video because that's what people understand, but it's actually HTML that you render, that's the other component that is good. It's favorable. Now, will that be something that every brand wants? Do they want rendered videos? Sure, there might be folks that require rendered video, and maybe we'll do that at one point we actually did, at Codigo, we ended up using a very similar approach. Then we built a rendering engine that rendered as HTML5 to true video. But today it's HTML5 and it's just from hosting to production to the delivery of it, it drives the cost down to prices that were impossible. David: So when you go to market in a couple of months, two or three months, what am I paying? Am I subscribing to something? Am I buying an enterprise license? Brian Nutt: It's a SaaS model, and it's usage-based too. So it's a tiered-based model similar to the digital signage space, there definitely be some content creation elements to it where we assist clients if they need the content made, and you probably remember at Codigo we did that as well. It's the same approach here, and it really depends. It's hard to give you a specific pricing point. But I think most customers will probably land somewhere between $500 and $1500 a month. That's where I think it would be. It could be far higher, depending on usage.  I was at a trade show recently and there's a customer of mine, who said that they sent out emails last month. Well, If you make 140,000 videos, it might be a little higher, but that's what we're trying to do, we're trying to do the same thing as the last business, which may get a very attractive price that they can leverage.  David: So that's the scale argument why it makes more sense for a cable company or a phone company or power company, something like that, that has tens of thousands of subscribers and customers versus something like a digital signage network, which as I said, might have a hundred iterations of a similar ad, and you don't get the same economies of scale from. Brian Nutt: That's right, and in a lot of ways I feel like this is very similar to when I started Codigo. I remember telling people, I'm going to replace printed posters on the wall with flat screens, and they're like, what? And I'd say it's called digital signage. They'll say, oh, you mean like those LED, those red blinky lights that go across like that? I'm like no. That's not what I mean, and I would go around with a 42-inch screen, and those things were heavy, and so it's almost the same thing where I have to show this to everyone so they can understand this, and go oh I can use this. There are all these different permutations of a relationship with a client or an onboarding of one or whatever it is and then they kinda get it so that's where we are. David: Yeah, that's very familiar to me. Years ago, back in the mid-2010s, I had a little spin-out product that I did with a Korean partner called Spotamate, and it was automating videos based on templates and by far my biggest challenge was education. Because people just couldn't wrap their heads around it. So how are you gonna deal with that?  Brian Nutt: I think that today, the state of the consumer today around video is totally different, and the other thing is that I think Spotimate was sort of Adobe-reliant, right? David: Yeah, it was an Adobe plugin.  Brian Nutt: Yeah, so we're skipping all that. So from a user perspective, it makes it a little easier to get started, since it's a lot fewer steps to take, but from an education standpoint, I think people are starting to expect this. It's like if you log in to Netflix and you see all these interesting shows that you know, that makes you think, oh, wow, boy, that's something I would watch, you understand that there's a data-driven decision behind that, and whether it's content while you're scrolling through on Instagram or across the web, all these technologies exist and I feel like most folks understand that when they see something like this, they get it, where before it might have and it still can be creepy. I'm not saying it can't be, but depending on the use, before it was perceived entirely like that.  With the pandemic and, if you go back before the pandemic, or let's go five years back, a lot of people didn't wanna take videos. They didn't wanna do a zoom call or whatever. They wanted to do it on the phone or they shut off their camera. But today, if I have a Zoom call with you and you don't turn your camera on, I think something's wrong. What's going on? So it's this drive to video and the requirement of a personalized experience that when people get this, I think they'll be like, oh yeah they'll understand.  David: So I realized, as you've said that your core market is email marketing, maybe social media, some of those things. If you have digital signage, software platforms, or solution providers who are interested because maybe they do this whole omnichannel thing and they see this as an opportunity, how would they work with you? Would it run in parallel?  Brian Nutt: That's a sort of broad question to ask. I'm not sure I don't have that nailed down yet. But I'd take all inquiries, so to speak. Because again the idea is to insert this into the marketing stack. So whether it's digital signage or traditional email marketing, or any omnichannel approach, as you said, contacting a customer, why aren't you using video? And so it does seem as I said from my perspective, the growth of digital signage, which isn't anywhere, relies on footprint and as it declines or appears to decline at least from different ways. This is one of those ways to pick that up.  David: Yeah, and I think you're gonna start seeing a lot more screens, but in places other than what people thought about, which was, in stores and so on, but there are all kinds of operational messaging that could stand to be personalized based on location, not personalized to individuals, but to the dynamics of that, area of a building or whatever. Brian Nutt: Sure, and the same thing holds true. The level of personalization is all really based on the quality of the data that you have and if you try to make it too deep and too complicated, folks I think will shy away because, yeah, it might not be possible, remember, it's the same thing with digital signage. You can make things super, super complex, and try to do all these really neat things, but the reality is a lot of people don't have that capability. So you can only deal with what is reasonably available to you from a data perspective, but there's no reason you have to be specific to a person. Obviously, digital signage doesn't do that but automates it specific to an area, of the work floor, or whatever that's doable. David: You've been out of digital signage for roughly four years now. I'm curious now having kinda left the industry, what's your perspective on it now?  Brian Nutt: I think there has been a tremendous amount of consolidation, including me, right? So a lot of the players that existed before have been rolled up in some ways. So it's like the wild west that existed when I really was looking back in the wild west, but it's gotten a little more sterile, at least that's my opinion. I think that the interesting pieces of it are in the hive stack arena with retargeting and programmatic ad buying, which I was never a really big proponent of the ad model. I think we talked about it before, but there are interesting ways to serve content and that's really more, kinda what, where you're going with what your comments were before, how do you serve that content to folks in a unique and timely way, and I think there will be, and there already has been this approach to multi-device from a screen, just one big screen, but honestly, since I got out, I haven't paid a tremendous amount of attention to it.  David: What you're doing is very current in terms of the shift more and more to using data integration and automated content so that it's always relevant, so you're doing what the industry's doing. Brian Nutt:  All right, there you go. David: So if people wanna find out more, where are they gonna find you online?  Brian Nutt: Yeah, it's www.adificial.io - we're signing up beta users, although it'll be a closed group and already have a pretty good number that we've signed up from some past relationships. But anybody who's interested, just go on there and there's a beta sign-up little form there, and you can learn about it. David: And you're bootstrapped?  Brian Nutt: Yeah, bootstrapped in entirety. I've got one co-founder who was actually with me at Codigo as well, and we've got a team of six developers working on this thing full-time and are pretty excited about it. David: All right. It was great to catch up with you.  Brian Nutt: Yeah, you too, Dave. 

Edge Game
52 - SOMEBODY STOP ME (feat. Jim ”Jim Carrey” Carrey)

Edge Game

Play Episode Listen Later Nov 7, 2022 100:56


A Separate Crow 1 year special Glock - Famous Dex Edge 3rd titantron intro song playing through speakers  u think u know me Holding gun to head and in mouth the whole episode Edge Game 53 suicide by cop. Published as axon body cam footage. Approaching cop with Glock pointed, screaming HELLO IM GAY AND IM YOUR HOST GERALDO RIVERA!!!! SOMEBODY STOP ME!!! SSSSSSMOKIN!!! LiveLeak watermark iFunny BestGore DocumentingReality EFukt Kaotic.com Each camera is a different watermark  Facebook live greenscreen cell phone cam swinging from ceiling fan And then change my mind at the end (?) Whispered voices/auditory hallucinations   Tuesday, November 1, 2022 Corn (Deflection word)   Monday, October 31, 2022 Live by the sword, die by the sword One who uses violence can expect a violent response.   Remember! We live in a world of misunderstanding.   Not good vs. evil!   Above all Be true to your self!   You, if anyone ever reads this, got this. :)   I love you.   Sincerely,   David   How to cope with loneliness https://youtu.be/NJh5idlanrc Just Dance 2017 PC Unlimited Rasputin 4K   The underwhelmingness of life It HAS to be underwhelming.   Otherwise we lose gravity and fly into outer space!   How to connect with anyone Humble yourself    Gaining true***** independence takes time! If you still feel like you're kinda still a high schooler, like me, give this article a read.   It talks about the slow, healthy, steps needed to be taken in order to gain authentic and true independence!   So you can be freeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee: https://thoughtcatalog.com/holly-riordan/2020/10/being-strong-and-independent-doesnt-mean-you-do-everything-on-your-own/ Happy reading!   Take care. :)   Perspective We all have our histories and own perspectives.   And who could blame us for making our own assumptions moving out into the world when it's all we've ever known?   Nevertheless, try your best to look beyond your own eyes, your own ears, your own mind, and your own heart.   And you may start seeing things that you've never seen before!   You got this.

Listening WELL to the KING
6 DAVID 221016

Listening WELL to the KING

Play Episode Listen Later Oct 16, 2022 39:16


If we asked David: How do you do it, how do you live abundant life in the midst of world's chaos?  I believe King David would reply, "The Lord is my Shepherd." David knew how important it is to have a good shepherd.  Pastor Rick teaches from Psalm 23 and John 10 to CrossPoint Church on Taste of CrossPoint Sunday.

People of Pathology Podcast
Episode 130: David West - Proscia, Digital and Computational Pathology

People of Pathology Podcast

Play Episode Listen Later Oct 3, 2022 49:54


Today my guest is David West, CEO and Cofounder of Proscia What we discuss with David: How he became interested in biomedical engineering and how he discovered pathology Starting Pathology Cloud and how that led to the founding of Proscia The mission of Proscia The Concentriq platform and some of its features How Concentriq can be used in both research and clinical settings The importance of interoperability in digital pathology Some of the partnerships between Proscia and other companies The automated QC feature and how this can save time and money His thoughts on the future of digital pathology Links for this episode: Health Podcast Network  LabVine Learning The ConfLab from LabVine Dress A Med scrubs   Proscia on Twitter Proscia Website Pathology's Digital Future David West of Proscia: Five Things You Need To Create A Highly Successful Startup   People of Pathology Podcast: Website Twitter

Personal Development Mastery
#253 Snippets of wisdom 1 - The high vibration of appreciation, with David Strickel.

Personal Development Mastery

Play Episode Listen Later Sep 29, 2022 7:57


I'm starting a new kind of episode called "Snippets of Wisdom". In these episodes, I will be selecting my favourite, most insightful moments from previous episodes of the podcast. ݆⁣ The first one which I chose to begin with has a very strong personal meaning for me. It's a conversation I had with David Strickel, presented in episode #126. At that time in 2021, just over a year after I had launched Personal Development Mastery, I was feeling that the growth of the podcast was very slow. So during our conversation, I asked David: “How can I spread the podcast's message to a bigger audience?” ݆⁣ The answer I received was one of the most profound aha moments that I had during the podcast. It inspired me and guided my subsequent steps about how I look at my podcast's growth. The wisdom shared in this message will be very valuable for you, if you're someone who feels impatient, who feels that despite all the work, the results are not showing. ݆⁣

#dogoodwork
Small By Design with David Feldman

#dogoodwork

Play Episode Listen Later Sep 5, 2022 19:14


David is the Founder and Director of Strategy at 3 Owl, an award-winning creative agency that creates websites that stand out from the noise. They've worked with companies like Mellow Mushroom, Great American Cookie Company, VitaLink, Taco Mac, and Wahoo. At the start of Covid-19, David had to fire 80% of his agency's staff in one day. Despite the setback, he and the small team that stayed on never missed a deadline and continued to generate millions of dollars in added revenue for their clients. They also managed to grow 3 Owl by 20% each year since. In 2021, David also wrote the book Small By Design about how to scale a small business all while staying intentionally small Highlights Who David Feldman is What being a small team means for David How he operates a small team as a big company As a small team, what was their experience like creating value and receiving feedback from their clients What the important is for being always available for clients What a small by the design team is What is the next goal for the book Where to find more information about David and his team Episode Resources Connect with Raul Hernandez Ochoa https://www.linkedin.com/in/dogoodwork https://dogoodwork.io/work-with-raul https://dogoodwork.io/podcast Connect with David Feldman https://smallbydesign.co/ https://3owl.agency/ https://www.facebook.com/3owl.agency/ https://www.instagram.com/3owl.agency/ https://www.linkedin.com/company/3-owl-media/ https://www.linkedin.com/in/david-feldman-atl https://www.instagram.com/dfeldatl 

Sixteen:Nine
Telmo Silva, ClicData

Sixteen:Nine

Play Episode Listen Later Aug 24, 2022 37:43


The 16:9 PODCAST IS SPONSORED BY SCREENFEED – DIGITAL SIGNAGE CONTENT Integrating data has increasingly climbed the priority list for more ambitious and involved digital signage and digital OOH projects. The big driver for that is how near or real-time data makes what's on-screen automated and triggered, which means more timely, targeted and therefore relevant messaging. Lots of CMS software companies offer some degree of data integration and on-screen presentation, and we're starting to see some third-party companies that work mainly in digital signage - like Screenfeed - also offering data display toolsets. We're also now seeing well-established data handling companies making themselves known in this sector, particularly to help make some of the more complicated set-ups both happen and then reliably, and securely, work. ClicData is a software firm based up in the northwest of France, but has clients globally that use its Business Intelligence platform to bring data in from more than 250 sources - into a single, harmonized data warehouse. I spoke with co-founder and CTO Telmo Silva about Clicdata's roots, how its platform works and how it can be applied in digital signage applications. Subscribe to this podcast: iTunes * Google Play * RSS TRANSCRIPT David: Telmo, thank you very much for joining me. Can you tell me what ClicData is all about?  Telmo Silva: I started ClicData in 2008 as a pharmaceutical-focused data analytics company, and later branched out a little bit into making it a wider-used data analysis, data management and data intelligence tool for all sectors, and hence the name, ClicData from ClicPharma before, and yes, this tool is really the culmination of that learning in the pharmaceutical sector that we thought is applicable to really any sector.  David: Okay. So if I'm sitting here listening to the beginning of this podcast, some people might be wondering, those in digital signage and the AV sector, might be wondering, okay, why am I listening to this? How does it plug into that sector?  Telmo Silva: Absolutely, and it's funny, Dave, because an acquaintance of ours asked me, should we do this podcast? And I said, yes, absolutely, because everything generates data and digital advertising is definitely one of the factors.  You have to know where you're spending your money and what you're requiring and who's looking at things, and one of the first clients we had in the early days was actually a Canadian company out west that had this technology on elevators to take snapshots of peoples and try to recognize their age group and their demographics and as they're playing the videos on the small screen on the elevator, try to figure out what's the retention? Are their eyes moving and moving away from the screen and so forth, and how long do they stay hooked for those short 30-second clips, and things like that? And that was actually my first introduction to digital advertising and a use case for ClicData, a very successful use case, and I was hooked on that.  I was hooked into that so much that where ClicData is based out, which is France, there's a very large history of retail companies here that spent a lot of money on aisle advertising, and they start using those concepts, not only in terms of video and monitoring but also in terms of monitoring the paths of customers through their stores, optimization of aisles and things like that, where to put the digital signs and advertising and so forth, and all that generates a lot of data that you have to make sense of. And this is really well ClicData comes in, right? Those point solutions with digital advertising are part one, but without actually collecting all these from the different stores, and different locations that start making sense of it, it's just data, right? It does not turn into information until you do something with it and that's really where we come in, in trying to bring as much data from the different systems and different points of information really that a company may have, or a client may have and bring that into something that makes sense, that you can aggregate, that you can slice and dice, and then further down the line, then expose that to your customers, and say, okay, this is what you paid for. David: So you're aggregating and harmonizing and developing insights around the data as opposed to being a collector of data, right? Like you're not doing any of the computer vision or sensor-based work yourself?  Telmo Silva: We do not, but we do have all the necessary connections just with the different systems. Unlike potentially other systems that are very well standardized, each vendor of those displays of those collectors may have their own interfaces, APIs and so forth. They may have their own storage formats and as you use the different systems, your challenge is really to understand, how can I connect to this one now, and how can I extract information that I want out of that. And our connectors are actually quite flexible in that sense where we have fixed connectors for some of those systems, but for others, we have generic connectors that you can kind of configure to tap into that data.  David: Would this be something that might be called middleware? Telmo Silva: I would say potentially, yes. It depends on your definition of middleware. Ultimately we see business intelligence at least the portion of data analytics and reporting that we offer, as the next step before you feed it back and you go, okay, now I understand the results that I've received here, what improvements are we gonna make? And we start to cycle again, right?  So again as an example, you may start receiving data from certain videos and start saying, okay, this is the demographics and so forth, can I make some adjustments to my campaigns or to my videos or to the sequence of videos that I'm displaying? Again, I'm going back to that video on the elevator concept and optimising that, so it is part of that loop of data collection, data analysis, making decisions based on that data, and then feeding that back into the loop again. David: When you started the company accessing data from all kinds of different data sources was very complicated and time-consuming, and you had to get all kinds of permissions and all kinds of meetings and phone calls and everything else to work it out.  One of the things that I gather has changed over the last decade or so is that most platforms now have APIs, it's easier to get stuff out of them, and so on. So has your role lessened, or has it increased because they're always changing and there are so many and if you're an independent company, like a digital signage company, a software company, you have to stay on top of that, or you would use a company like ClicData that's spending all their time doing that and making it easy?   Telmo Silva: To answer your first question, it has actually increased, right? Whereas before we would ask a vendor whether that be Facebook or Google and say, our mutual customers have data on your advertising network, right? And again this kind of can expand to any type of data vendor or data collector that we may tap into and before they would basically know it's our data, and the consumers of course start reacting against that, right? Today, If you do not have an API, if all you do is get my data into your system, but not give me anything back in return, then I don't want anything to do with you. And we've seen backlashes at times with Facebook, Cambridge Analytics and things like that, where those types of sharing are also kinda gone another way rather, but nonetheless, today, if you do not have an API, then you're a second-class citizen on the internet and on the software technology stack. So that is great but an API is still an API. It is a programming interface and it does require some knowledge and it's not a standard. Just because we call it an API does not mean that they'll follow the same standard, it's very well organized, and it's very well understood. So every API has its nuances, its little quirks and its own way of paging through the amounts of data that it can offer. And so our role has actually increased due to that, because again, as I was mentioning before our connectors know how to deal with those different variations and those different formats and schemas that the data may be provided with. So in that sense, it's actually increased the need to have a tool, like ClicData, to be able to tap into those APIs and bring it into a format that is easily digestible by any analytics tool, including our own tool. David: How much is involved, if you wanted to do this yourself and let's say you wanted to Integrate information from four different business system sources or whatever, within your company? Is that something that would take a morning, a month, or a year to do if they weren't using something like ClicData? Telmo Silva: If they were not using something like ClicData, they obviously need somebody technical, but it would take an extensive amount of time for development, and again, large companies still do that, where they write custom interfaces to bring the data and amalgamate them into one single source of truth. This is where millions of dollars are being spent on data warehousing projects and business intelligence implementations and so forth. So not having a tool like ours definitely would require a good technical team, and again, depending on the sources, potentially database analysts, database experts, SQL developers, API developers, whether they do it in Java or Python or what have you. And then bringing all that into a data warehouse will definitely take more than just a few days. In my previous life, prior to creating ClicData, that was my bread and butter, and these projects would go on for 3-6 months. With ClicData, if we have the connector that you need or if you can configure your API connector and you have a basic understanding of APIs, you should be able to do that within a day, to connect three or four data sources and start seeing the data flow through into ClicData.  David: So on a project launch basis and certainly on an ongoing operating basis, it sounds like if you're running a spreadsheet model on this and a business argument, it would take a huge amount of cost out of the equation and time, and these are people you don't need to hire?  Telmo Silva: It goes on to just beyond hiring and the people behind it, because, having somebody who can accompany you if you're not an expert or in the technical side, then it may be worth it. But the bottom line is the continuity of it as well. It's okay to build a prototype. It works once but the next day, you don't want to have to do the same thing, right? You don't want to have to copy and paste the data into Excel or out of Excel again and repeat and so forth. And also, technology is what it is, business evolves as it is, and so you always need these adjustments. It is an investment that you have to make towards being data-centric, being data-focused and to say, I want to build these systems that collect the data on an ongoing basis that I can automate the reporting that can save you time as well in reporting these numbers back to your team or your clients or your management team and all this combines into the ROI that you're looking for, and yes, there is a technical side of it as well that there will be savings, whether it's in consulting or in minimizing, at least the number of times that you involve them, to gain access to your data.  David: If I'm a customer, what am I buying and how am I paying for it? Do you buy an enterprise license or is it software as a service?  Telmo Silva: It is totally software as a service. We do not offer any on-premise installations of software, and this is because we want to be rapid at giving new features, new connectors. Connectors continuously change, and there's new software in the market and we wanna be rapid in making those available. So software as a service is really our model, and what you get when you subscribe to when you get one of these subscriptions, which is monthly or yearly based, is you get basically all the connectors. You get a data warehouse, a database available to you through Microsoft Azure, that's our partner, and you can have your data stored in over eight different regions around the world: US, Ireland, Canada, Germany, France, and a few others, and once you have that data warehouse, that's your piece of the database there, the data starts flowing through the connectors. Once that is in your data warehouse, then from there you can actually build downstream flows, you can tap into it directly with Excel if you want, or you can use our dashboard tool to start creating dashboards and graphs and charts and tables indicators.  You can share those dashboards with other people. You can publish them to your customers, et cetera, and then you can just automate these things so that it just does that every day or every morning or every hour. David: Is that the primary output that you would see for digital signage and digital out-of-home home networks, probably more so on the digital signage side, would be data visualizations and dashboards?  Telmo Silva: I think that would potentially be one of the use cases, analyzing the data that's coming through and making decisions based on those as normal reporting and analytics data tools would. The other part of it and some customers of ClicData do this is they just use the collection capabilities of ClicData and the data warehouse to store their data, but then they feed that into other tools of their choice, tools that potentially they wanna do some more advanced machine learning on the data, maybe they want to write their own special code to analyze it, or maybe simply feed another system that requires this data to consume it and so forth. ClicData is really a multifaceted tool that can be either used just for collection and aggregation of the data or all the way through to data visualization and analytics.  David: Okay, so you would have almost like templates or widgets of some kind that would be able to do develop dynamic charting and things like this based on what you select? Telmo Silva: Absolutely, much like you would do on a pivot table in Excel, to drag and drop some columns, and the chart starts taking shape with columns, rows and so forth. That's exactly our design, it's very user-friendly as much as we can, we do have a lot of options for styling because not everybody likes the same styles and colors, but in essence, it's very much an Excel-like data visualization tool built into ClicData. David: If I'm a digital signage CMS software provider and I'm working with, let's say a financial services company and they wanted data visualization, if I wanna put that visualized chart into a schedule, so it shows up on the digital signs around the workplace. Is that an HTML file or how do you get that up on a screen? Telmo Silva: If you want to embed our dashboards into third-party applications, into screens, we have quite a few customers that have screens around the office, we have a railroad train station system that actually publishes our dashboards on every single station and stops with the schedules and things like that, and their performance, so are they late, etc.  So you can definitely embed that, and it's just simply a URL. You put that inside an iFrame, inside your web page, and the iframe immediately refreshes if the data has been refreshed, so you don't have to do anything, you just have to open it up in a browser, maximize the screen and boom, your dashboard is live and will refresh automatically.  David: Aare there any kind of limitations on how real-time it is or is it just how you wanna set it and how it works at the other end, in terms of data generation?  Telmo Silva: Our schedules have the ability to go on a minute basis to your data sources and pull the data in, however you can use our API, because we too have an API, to push data in, and in that case, the push is up to you. If you wanna send it once per second, you can. These will not be full data loads. These have to be small packets, a few rows, a few hundred rows at a time, potentially.  But you can use our API to bring in real-time data, and again, the same concept, whether we pulled it or you pushed it, everything downstream gets refreshed and gets activated for you. David: I suspect that's a conversation that you and your sales engineers have at times with resellers and end users, “Sure we could do real-time, but for the application you're talking about, do you really need that, or is every minute or every five minutes fine?”  Telmo Silva: Absolutely, and this is why we stopped our schedule at one minute. Again, you have to be really in a high traffic, high volume situation, and to be able to make a decision in real-time, and that's ultimately the key, right? It really is up to you and there's the cost associated with you developing a push notification to other systems as well. So it really is up to the customers, but yeah, in some sectors there are times that some folks ask for real-time when in fact, their data doesn't change on a daily basis. Case in point, Facebook, they themselves only refresh their own metrics or expose their own metrics on a much larger time scale. So for us to do real-time with certain systems and certain data sources is just refreshing and using bandwidth for nothing.  David: Do you have to make statements and assurances around privacy of the data or that's not really your issue, whoever's collecting that data or you're gathering that data is the one that's gonna have to worry about that, you're just enabling the use of that data?  Telmo Silva: Even though obviously data privacy and respecting the customer's data is our number one thing, we do have a role to play. If we're talking in Europe, GDPR is a huge thing. Every country has their own protection laws and privacy protection, like the California Data Protection Act. Every country and state and province has their own or has started some type of laws and regulations.  Us being a European company, but with customers in North America, we have to be very careful. This is why we're almost the only ones that actually are able to start your data warehouse in any country that you wish in those eight regions that we've mentioned, and that's step number one, but we are a data processor for you. We don't know what your data is, but we are processing your data for you. It's our application, and we are responsible to make sure that there's no external access to it, that if there are court orders, we have to make sure we validate and check them with our customers and so forth.  Luckily that has never happened, but we don't know what your data is. So we are not able to be really responsible for it, but that's part of our terms of service. If you put data that you are not entitled to use or process if you put data that is not legal for you to own, that's the responsibility of our customers, but obviously, we would have a role to play in that in this GDPR system where we are responsible to at least point out or give it out if asked legally, obviously.  David: I assume you get a lot of questions around security as well. Telmo Silva: Oh, absolutely, and again, this is why we partner with Microsoft Azure. Our expertise is really making the software intelligent, and easy to use, that it processes fast, that we can process thousands and thousands of files and sources and dashboards a day, an hour really, and not really on the physical and digital security of these data warehouses and systems. And this is why we rely on Microsoft Azure severely. We have a strong SLA with them to protect our property and our customer's property, their data.  David: I know almost nothing about the technical side of what your company and others like it would do, but I assume that a lot of the heavy lifting in terms of security is on the Azure side and you take advantage of that and you let them worry about that, but, make sure that you're working according to their policies, right?  Telmo Silva: Absolutely, but it also takes our knowledge to encrypt the data and to make sure that their configuration is set up correctly. I think that is the positive and negative of cloud-based systems, like Google, Amazon and Microsoft. It's so easy these days to just start a server anywhere and start putting data into it. It's much harder to make sure that nobody else has access to it and to make sure that it's protected and so forth. And even within Microsoft, there are some checks and balances there as well. We can't say, just because it's Microsoft's or Amazon or Google that takes care of your data, we're pawning it off on them, and if something happens, let's go to court. That's not how it should be handled. There has to be some responsibility on the people using those systems, and how we code the application, and to make sure all the settings are set up correctly. So it is a team effort between the vendors and us, and also our customers to make sure that they're comfortable with the fact that we are ISO certified, SOC certified HIPAA compliant, et cetera. This is time and an investment on our part to make sure that they should not be just for the sake of having a stamp, on your website saying, “We are ISO certified” and that's it. It does take effort from both companies and all parties involved to make sure that the data is secure and private.  David: So Microsoft is a major business partner, but they're also a competitor, through Power BI? Telmo Silva: That is correct. Power BI, their visualization tool is a competitor to our data visualization module, not necessarily to the whole ClicData platform, and they do an excellent job at it as well.  David: But I assume your company has its share of competitors, right? Telmo Silva: I believe there's data visualization for every type of business in the world. Power BI, Tableau, ClickView. I don't wanna name more than three, but there are at least three hundred of them, and let's not even go beyond those, let's just talk about Excel, there's some amazing visualization in Excel and it has been around for years. So there's a lot of great experience, but again, these are tools and they are distinct separate tools, and if you have to load up Excel or Power BI or whatever every day to hit refresh, and then export it out and think about security and access, then that's the downside of these tools. They do a great job for that initial data investigation but are terrible for the ongoing maintenance of it.  So what we say is, whereas we may not be as advanced as some of those tools, potentially. If you're trying to do something very specific that only Power BI can do, maybe we cannot do it. The upside of using our tool is that you don't have to do anything else. The data is there as soon as it's refreshed, the dashboards know that the data is refreshed, it immediately sends emails out to the people that are on the list for receiving this dashboard, and they get it on their mobile app. They get an alert, whatever, right? It's all automated for you.  So if you want to spend less time wasting copying and pasting and using Excel and these tools, then, these are the types of platforms that you need to look for.  David: I assume the other thing is that you stay on top of it because APIs change and data sets change and everything else and if you just had it developed yourself internally or if you outsourced the development, a month later, the schemas and things could change and all of a sudden it doesn't work, right?  Telmo Silva: Absolutely. We see that with the big players obviously, Google, Instagram, Facebook, and others are constantly improving their APIs. Security keeps changing around the world. We're phasing out certain types of security, TLS 1, TLS 2, et cetera, and APIs need the security, they need to be compatible with it. So this is really where most of our customers get their benefits is to say, okay, ClicData is taking care of all that for you, and then make sure that the data keeps coming in, and flowing into your data warehouse.  David: So if I'm a digital signage content management systems software provider, or Perhaps an AV/IT systems integrator who has an ask from clients or wants to incorporate this into their service offers, what's involved? What are the first questions you have to ask them? Do you support this, do you support that, or are there any really real barriers?  Telmo Silva: We start by looking at their data sources, right? If we can't bring the data, if they're using a very specific format of a very specific system that we cannot gain access to, typically very old ones then we're upfront about it. We say that you're not gonna get this data in, and you're not gonna be able to report it. David: It's on a mainframe system or something? Telmo Silva: Mainframe, believe it or not, we can connect to it. It is important for us and believe it or not, there are still a lot of customers, especially in the retail sector that does mainframe, IBM series of servers, those things that we thought don't exist. They exist and they exist in quite a lot of companies. So we still support those. But sometimes it's just very cryptic or the format. I cannot give you an example off the top of my head but we have this, as I mentioned before, a very robust kind of API connecting connector that takes a lot of options, and most of the time we can configure it to fit. But yeah, if you're a provider of data that pretty much says: I'm not giving you access. I can only give you monthly reports or something like that. Yeah, you can import those reports monthly by hand. Is that something that you really wanna do, et cetera? So we discuss alternate solutions like that. But yeah, that would be the first step. The second step is what are their objectives? Are they looking for visualization and embedding these dashboards and putting them back to their customer in a self-service mode so they can monitor the success of their campaigns, their ads network, et cetera? Or is this internal use for analytics and so forth? So we discuss those items to make sure that ClicData is the right solution for them, and if all checks out, I think then the next step is just to get a trial account for 15 days and connect a couple of data sources, see what you can build. We have an in-app chat tool that allows them to ask questions as they go along during their trials. Ask your questions, ask how you can do things and get that first initial prototype, and that's a big advantage of being a SaaS product, there's no installation, you lose nothing, right? You don't have to install or return servers. You just get started, start connecting your data and start playing around with your data and start visualizing and prototyping within your team, get success quickly, get motivated quickly as well. That's a big part of it, and from there, you just start your subscription level. David: What level of skill do you need?  Telmo Silva: To do complex things, you definitely need some SQL sometimes, some function programming, as you do with Excel, we are all different experts in Excel. There are those of us that use Excel just to type in numbers and your basic drag and drop, and that's it. And then there's those that know to do Lookups and they know a few more functions and then there's those that do Macros in Excel, right? There are different skills, and with us, it's the same thing. It really depends on what you need to do and how much your data needs work. So we have our own kind of Excel-like language that they can use, very similar to SQL as well. They can do a lot of things with the data.  We needed to make ClicData very powerful, and very flexible to ensure that we will not be stumped by a specific need or a specific customer request. But at the surface, we also try to make it easy with a strong UI to write those hard-to-write functions behind the scenes through an interface that is a little bit easier to use. David: So at a minimum, you want somebody who has an interest or a knack for this sort of thing, as opposed to Margaret in Sales and Marketing saying, “Here, you do this!” and she gets the deer and the headlights look?  Telmo Silva: Absolutely. Now you can, if you have, and some customers of ours do this and they split the work of connecting and making the data available versus consuming the data, right?  You have your technical person, the person that knows the data very well to create these kinds of slices and catalogues of data and make them available to the rest of the team, and the team then goes in, either with our dashboard editor or report editor, and does their own dashboards and their own kind of visualizations or with other tools as well. So there are also those splitting of functions that sometimes are important to put in place into a company. David: ClicData is in Northwest France based in Lille, correct?  Telmo Silva: Yeah, we have three major offices. That is our head office, the engineering office in the north of France. We have one in Toronto, Canada, and we have one in Texas so we're all over the place a little bit. David: So Europeans are gonna engage through your European offices and Canadians and Americans can find a couple of offices on this side of the pond?  Telmo Silva: That's correct.  David: Where do they find you online? Telmo Silva: ClicData.com  David: It's important to say there's no “k” in the click. Somebody got to it before you could get the one with the “k”?  Telmo Silva: I believe so, or maybe at that point in time, we wanted to make it very even with four and four, Clic and Data, I'm not sure. David: Oh, they'll find it. Thank you very much for spending some time with me.  Telmo Silva: Thank you for having me.

Coach Carson Real Estate & Financial Independence Podcast
#239: Inflation, Gambling Disguised as Investing, & Living Without Money Worries | with David Stein

Coach Carson Real Estate & Financial Independence Podcast

Play Episode Listen Later Jul 4, 2022 61:28


Episode #239 - How do you invest during inflation? How do you avoid losing money when asset prices are so high? How do you live without worrying about money? These and more are the topics of this interview with David Stein, a former money manager of billions of dollars for investor clients who now teaches how individuals can understand money, invest it, and live without worrying about it. Companion Article/Show Notes:  https://www.coachcarson.com/davidstein/ David's excellent podcast: https://moneyfortherestofus.com/episodes/ Free Course from David - How to Beat Inflation: https://moneyfortherestofus.com/inflation/ David's Community - Money For the Rest of Us (Plus): https://moneyfortherestofus.com/hub/ ________________________

Authentic Persuasion Show
[447] David Rueda from LendingUSA (APS Aftershow)

Authentic Persuasion Show

Play Episode Listen Later Jun 22, 2022 19:30


“There’s nothing quite like immersing yourself in somebody else’s culture. And I think that’s the difference between transactional sales and relationship sales” – David How do you avoid the siloed nature within organizations? What impact can internal alignment bring to your organization? In this episode, you will be listening to the aftershow with David Rueda. […]

Warships Pod
11: Ukraine Naval Blockade, War by Hunger & Top Gun: Maverick

Warships Pod

Play Episode Listen Later Jun 19, 2022 59:43


We have as our guest this time David Larter, a noted commentator on US Navy matters and also global naval developments. First up for discussion will be the naval side of Ukraine War, with David giving his perspective on the Russian blockade, plus growing realisation of the global impact of Ukrainian grain shipments being blocked. Podcast host Iain Ballantyne asks what can be done. Can it be broken by force? If so, who would do it? Iain and David discuss the ‘War by Hunger' that is potentially about to inflict starvation on some of the world's poorest countries. Their chat also touches on echoes of what happened when the British imposed a sea blockade on Germany in WW1 and were themselves victims of U-boat attacks against maritime trade.  The overall Russian strategy today - and how it is driven by President Vladimir Putin's urge to ensure Russia is not cut off from the sea - along with his desire to emulate Tsar Peter the Great in establishing his nation as a great imperial power, is also a topic of discussion. Turning to other aspects of the Ukraine War at sea, and indeed the entire conflict, Iain suggests that the most important battle on land and sea is in fact for possession of Odessa… Iain asks if David agrees that, if the Ukrainians get cut off from the sea and lose Odessa, it is ‘game over'? The USA of course is deeply involved in leading the West's effort on Ukraine, but it also has a world of troubles to look out for, not least the rise of an aggressive China. And so in the vanguard of all that is the US Navy, with Iain asking David: How mighty is the USN these days? Is it being pushed to its limits and beyond by the world of troubles? WARSHIPS POD likes to also touch on history and culture in addition to current naval topics and geopolitics, which sees the discussion segue to an ancient movie history artifact - namely ‘Top Gun' and its sequel ‘Top Gun: Maverick.' Spoiler alert for this section of the podcast! Iain and David reveal they have both seen it and so discuss their reactions to ‘Top Gun: Maverick'. Does it fly or crash and burn?  • In addition to being a well-established Navy reporter David Larter is a US Navy veteran, - now working in the aerospace industry in Los Angeles, but who still engages on naval issues. His comment on the podcast are in a personal capacity as a navalist and not reflective of any organisation's opinions. David can be found on Twitter @DavidLarter  • Iain Ballantyne is the Editor of WARSHIPS International Fleet Review magazine. For more details on the magazine http://bit.ly/wifrmag Follow it on Twitter @WarshipsIFR and on Facebook @WarshipsIFR Iain Ballantyne can be found on Twitter @IBallantyn 

Angus Underground
Listener Appreciation Episode

Angus Underground

Play Episode Listen Later May 6, 2022 80:20


David, Joe, and Korbin answer questions submitted by the listening audience. David then visits with Casey White, Senior Director of Technical Services and Innovation at Central Life Sciences, about Fly Control. Casey describes the highly, highly effective products, ClariFly and Altosid IGR, and how/when to use them. The guys cover dozens of your submitted questions and talk about everything from marketing, breeding and crossbreeding, the future of industry, protocols, inflation and demand, how to be an advocate, diversifying, trusting your eyes, and so much more. Mentioned in this Episode:Montana RanchThe Montana Bred for Balance Bull and Female Sale — Call David at 406-210-5605 or send an email to Bulls@MontanaRanchAngus.com if you're searching for semen from balanced trait sires!Rafter 5M Land & CattleBruin RanchFacebook @AngusUndergroundInstagram @AngusUndergroundContact AngusUnderground@Yahoo.com or call 406-210-1366 if you are interested in becoming a sponsor for Angus Underground.BreederLink.comGeneBrokers.comCentral Life SciencesGeorge ChambersSouthern Cross RanchClariFlyAltosid IGRAmerican Angus AssociationQuotes:“I just hope that when I get where I'm going, I'm where I need to be.” — Korbin“The customers pay an immense premium to get to do business with us and the more I can spend my time with those folks getting to understand their needs, wants, directions, goals… that's the best marketing tool.” — Joe“Continue on the path that you're on and capitalize.” — David“Your cattle still have value even if they have numbers.” — Korbin“Produce something different from everyone else, and let everyone know what you have.” — David“Find people that raise the kind of cattle you like and really quiz them.” — David“Develop your own biases, develop your network… but also trust your heart and trust your own eyes.” — Joe“Be an advocate for the beef industry.” — David“How do we grow our demand for our beef? We just have to produce good beef and we have to be good stewards of the cattle, of the land, and we have to sell that message to the general public.” — David“It's about empowering a new generation of breeders.” — Joe“Every animal has to add value no matter which lane you decide to be in or if you decide to tackle multiple lanes.” — Joe“Trust your eyes, trust your heart, do what matters to you. Don't pay attention to what the crowd says.” — David

The Nugget Climbing Podcast
EP 117: Yves Gravelle — Lessons From Grip Sports, Basing Your Training on the Demands of Your Goal, and Top 3 Finger Training Methods

The Nugget Climbing Podcast

Play Episode Listen Later May 2, 2022 117:46


Yves Gravelle is a V15 boulderer from Canada and a 3x APL World Champion (i.e. grip competitions). We talked about lessons from grip training that we can apply to climbing, the importance of simplicity and consistency, how to break down a bouldering project, basing your training on the demands of a specific goal, top 3 finger training methods, how to train full crimps, and much more.Check out Athletic Greens!athleticgreens.com/NUGGETUse the link above to get a free year's supply of vitamin D + 5 travel packs!Check out Grasshopper Climbing!grasshopperclimbing.cominstagram.com/grasshopperclimbingTell them I sent you to save $500 off a fully kitted out 8'x10' Grasshopper board! Check out Chalk Cartel!chalkcartel.comUse code "NUGGET" at checkout for 20% off your next order!We are supported by these amazing BIG GIVERS:Leo Franchi, Michael Roy, David Lahaie, Robert Freehill, Jeremiah Johnson, Scott Donahue, Eli Conlee, Skyler Maxwell, and Craig Lee Become a Patron:patreon.com/thenuggetclimbingShow Notes:  thenuggetclimbing.com/episodes/yves-gravelleNuggets:0:07:18 – How to pronounce Yves' name, and living in Ottawa0:09:20 – The most legendary training montage I have ever seen, and an introduction to APL0:12:32 – Why Yves thinks climbs could represent themselves well in grip sports, and what a competition is like0:15:22 – Specializing vs. being a well-rounded athlete in grip0:18:11 – Balancing climbing goals with grip competitions0:19:28 – What Yves has learned from grip sports, and taking training ideas from powerlifting0:22:26 – How Yves bases his training around the demands of a specific boulder or goal0:24:49 – Is it possible to combine outdoor climbing with quality finger strength training?0:31:07 – An example training week with outdoor bouldering on Sunday0:35:05 – Preparing your body for the amount of training you want to do, and progressively working your way up0:36:19 – Building capacity, and learning about nutrition0:37:55 – Reading nutritional research about bouldering0:39:33 – How Yves has changed his diet0:42:28 – Maintaining finger strength during off-seasons, and pushing hard for goals0:45:51 – Finger training principles, keeping things simple, consistency, writing things down, and using RPE to measure your training0:51:38 – Training strength when you are fresh, finishing fresh, and not going to failure (adding a buffer)0:54:14 – Yves' session load calculator spreadsheet0:57:36 – Preparation cycles, and competitive cycles1:00:45 – Jazz1:02:13 – How Yves trained for ‘So What' V15, and building shoulder strength and mobility1:05:15 – Patron question from fdclimbs: Any tips for building climbing-specific shoulder strength?1:07:34 – Yves top 3 finger training exercises for climbing1:12:01 – Progressive warmup for finger training1:13:58 – Micro edge training1:15:39 – Contact strength training1:19:20 – Summary of Yves' top 3 finger training methods1:21:08 – Patron question from Alan: Does Yves have a favorite way to train full crimps?1:22:39 – Yves' full crimp story, and how he prevents finger injuries1:26:14 – Patron question from fdclimbs: Tips for training individual fingers? (And Yves' grip positions and anatomy)1:29:53 – Patron question from Alan: How does Yves balance different methods of training fingers and grip strength?1:33:19 – Prepping for ‘Terremere' and Hueco1:34:17 – Patron question from Daniel: Any plans to travel to world-famous bouldering areas and try the classic V15s or V16s?1:35:38 – 1-7-11 on the campus board (with slightly different spacing)1:37:00 – Patron question from Daniel: Is there such thing as “enough power”? What about finger strength?1:38:18 – Patron question from Xander: Do your finger strength gains still transfer to climbing?1:39:28 – One of Yves' favorite coaches to learn from1:40:59 – When you are starting off almost anything will work1:41:44 – Patron question from Michael: What is the smallest edge you can hang with one hand? What about two hands?1:42:54 – Being muscular and still being strong on tiny holds, and putting on muscle mass in the right places1:44:30 – Patron question from David: How does Yves look after his skin, especially splits and tears?1:46:48 – Contributing to local bouldering areas, and winning the world championships1:47:41 – Yves' daughters and gymnastics1:50:26 – Listen to your body, and enjoy the process1:53:10 – Be present1:54:39 – Wrap up

The Patrick Madrid Show
The Patrick Madrid Show: March 10, 2022 - Hour 1

The Patrick Madrid Show

Play Episode Listen Later Mar 10, 2022 49:10


Patrick addresses possible propaganda and answers a question from Gigi where she says she's not able to find accurate information about the casualties in the Ukrainian/Russian war so far. David – How can I get my 86-year-old mom baptized? These Campaigns Hope ‘Deepfake' Candidates Help Get Out the Vote Jose – Is it Ok to baptize my children without godparents? Democrats lose fight to strip abortion funding restrictions from spending package Kevin - We used the wedding coordinator as godparents and it worked out well Patrick shares what the Catholic Church requires to be a Godparent Ted – Can kids be baptized protestant if they don't have godparents?

Coaching Leaders
David Burkus: How to lead high-performing teams from anywhere

Coaching Leaders

Play Episode Listen Later Nov 22, 2021 45:10


David Burkus is one of the world's leading business thinkers. Since 2017, David has been ranked as one of the world's top business thought leaders by Thinkers50. His best-selling books have won multiple awards and have been translated into dozens of languages. As a leadership coach and organisational psychologist, David's work is changing how companies approach innovation, collaboration, and leadership. "Leading from anywhere. The essential guide to managing remote teams", David's latest book is the topic of this conversation. Here are a few things that I have discussed with David: -How to set up and lead remote teams. -Feedback culture within remote teams. -What's the future of WFH will look like. To learn more from David how to lead teams remotely, check out those links: Website: https://davidburkus.com/ LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/davidburkus/ YouTube: https://www.youtube.com/c/DavidBurkus/featured Twitter: https://twitter.com/davidburkus?ref_src=twsrc%5Egoogle%7Ctwcamp%5Eserp%7Ctwgr%5Eauthor If you enjoyed this episode and are committed to becoming a better leader, please subscribe and leave a review. It will help me grow my podcast and invite more amazing guests to my show. Have a great day on purpose!

Podcast Talent Coach
Answers To Your Podcast Questions – PTC 359

Podcast Talent Coach

Play Episode Listen Later Oct 30, 2021 26:01


I did a Facebook Live "Ask Me Anything" the other day on the Podcast Talent Coach Facebook Page. On it, you got answers to your podcast questions. We talked about everything from selling and monetizing your show to using text messaging as a way to interact with your listeners. I thought I would share those answers with you today. BOOTCAMP Before we jump into it, I want to invite you to a powerful event I am holding where I will help you build your podcast monetization strategy. We actually get stuff done in this day-long bootcamp. So many times, we go to webinars hoping to learn something only to find out it is full of fluff. We might walk away with one or two ideas after an hour. But we are really only there for the sales pitch. You now have a chance to join me for a 6-hour Podcast Profits Bootcamp where I will walk you through the entire process to build your podcast monetization strategy. It's actually 7 hours, but you get an hour for lunch. During this event, we will build a few ways to monetize your show that are perfect for you. This isn't one size fits all. It is specific to your podcast. You can enroll at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp. You will get a workbook that will help you stay on track as we develop your strategy. During the bootcamp, we walk through the workbook step-by-step. We will start with your foundation to ensure you are building on solid ground. Then, we will develop your purpose. I'll show you why most podcasts don't make money, so you can avoid those pitfalls. Many people think ads and sponsorships are the way to make money with your show. That is a myth. It is the worst way. Sponsorships require a very large audience and a lot of sales time. Ads also have a revenue ceiling. I'll show you a better way during the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. I won't just show you, we will build it together. We will discuss the various ways you can monetize your show, and we will pick the strategy that is right for you. Finally, you will have plenty of time to ask me questions to refine your strategy. This is so much more than a webinar or workshop. It is a bootcamp where we will actually get things done. Where most webinars last an hour, this is an all day event. REGISTER Registration for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp is $197 for this 6-hour bootcamp and your workbook. More importantly, you walk away with your monetization strategy for your show. Right now, you can enroll for $197. Enroll now and secure your spot. You can enroll at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp. If you are ready to build your podcast monetization strategy, the Podcast Profits Bootcamp is for you. You've spent enough time attending empty webinars and trying to find sponsors. Now is the time to build a real strategy. Let's sweeten the deal for you a little more. If you enroll in the Podcast Profits Bootcamp, You will also get a bonus prep call to get you ready for the event. This is where we help you gather all of the information and ideas you'll need before the bootcamp begins. Let's get you registered for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. Jump in right now at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp. QUESTIONS My biggest challenge is growing the audience. What's the best way? - David How do I maximize the content while minimizing the time & effort? - Anne I'd love to know if you have any thoughts on SMS text marketing? I think I'd be able to get more engagement if my busy moms could simply text me a question about a product or service instead of sending in a voicemail or sending an email. Do you have any recommendations for a service provider to work with? - Laura How do I direct people to more than the freebie. - Karen How do you know your worth? I'm not good at selling. - Mike Offer things without making it sound like an ad. Hard to make yourself likable while selling something. - Cheryl How does the podcast fit into the whole marketing plan? - Bruce GET ANSWERS – ASK ME ANYTHING I will be doing more "ask me anything" sessions on the Podcast Talent Coach Facebook page. If you are not following me there yet, head to PodcastTalentCoach.com/Facebook. I would love to have you join us and get your questions answers to your podcast questions. BOOTCAMP Come join us for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. It is a powerful event that will help you build your podcast monetization strategy. So many times, we go to webinars hoping to learn something only to find out it is a big sales pitch. We might walk away with one or two ideas after an hour. But we are really only there for the sale. You have a chance to join me for a 6-hour Podcast Profits Bootcamp where I will walk you through the entire process to build your podcast monetization strategy. During this event, you will discover 9 different ways to monetize your show. Then, we will build your specific way to generate revenue that is perfect for you. This isn't one size fits all. It is specific to your show. You will get a workbook that will help you stay on track as we develop your strategy. During the bootcamp, we walk through the workbook step-by-step. We will start with your foundation to ensure you are building on solid ground. Then, we will develop your purpose. Many people think ads and sponsorships are the way to make money with your show. That is a myth. It is the worst way. Sponsorships require a very large audience and a lot of sales time. Ads also have a revenue ceiling. I'll show you 9 better ways during the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. I won't just show you, we will build it together. We will discuss the various ways you can monetize your show, so you can pick the strategy that is right for you. Finally, you will have plenty of time to ask me questions to refine your strategy. This is so much more than a webinar or workshop. It is a bootcamp where we will actually get things done. Where most webinars last an hour, this is a 6-hour, all day event. REGISTER Registration for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp is $197 for the 6-hour bootcamp, your workbook and your monetization strategy for your show. You can get the details at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp. If you are ready to build your podcast monetization strategy, the Podcast Profits Bootcamp is for you. You've spent enough time attending empty webinars and trying to find sponsors. Now is the time to build a real strategy. Let's get you registered for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. Jump in right now at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

Sub Club
Matthieu Rouif, PhotoRoom - Finding Product Market Fit by Unbundling Photoshop

Sub Club

Play Episode Listen Later Sep 15, 2021 44:36


Watch the video version of this show on YouTube »Matthieu Rouif is the co-founder and CEO of PhotoRoom. PhotoRoom enables anyone to create studio-quality photos on their iPhone. Before founding PhotoRoom, Matthieu was the Senior Project Manager at GoPro. Matthieu is also the co-founder and CTO of HeyCrowd, and co-founder and CEO of As-App.Matthieu earned his graduate degree in materials science and engineering from Stanford University, and his bachelor's degrees in economics, and physics from École Polytechnique. While at École Polytechnique, Matthieu was a member of the skydiving team and debate team. Matthieu also served as a Parachutist Commando Officer in the French Air Force.Matthieu started developing apps in 2009 as a student at Stanford, and subsequently started two iPhone app companies. He was part of the Replay app team when they won App of the Year in 2014. Matthieu started PhotoRoom after leaving GoPro in 2018.In this episode, you'll learn: Matthieu's retention strategies for keeping app users subscribed Innovative and clever ways to get users to demo your app Balancing your app's pricing and features How churn can be an asset Links & Resources YC HeyCrowd GoPro Photoshop Zenlea Shopify Poshmark Depop Corel Matthieu Rouif's Links Matthieu on Twitter Matthieu on LinkendIn PhotoRoom is hiring! 10 Tools to Ship an iOS App in 2 Weeks PhotoRoom's Website PhotoRoom API PhotoRoom on Twitter Follow us on Twitter: David Barnard Jacob Eiting RevenueCat Sub Club Episode Transcript00:00:00 David:Hello, I'm your host, David Barnard. And with me as always, Jacob Eiting, RevenueCat CEO. Our guest today is Matt Rouif, co-founder and CEO at PhotoRoom, the app for removing backgrounds and creating studio quality photos right from your phone.On the podcast, we talk with Matt about how his time at GoPro led to founding PhotoRoom, how churn can actually be an asset, and how being locked in Apple's basement led to one of PhotoRoom's biggest marketing wins.Hey, Matt. Thanks for joining us on the podcast today. How are you doing?00:00:48 Matthieu:Great. Hey David, Hey Jacob.00:00:51 Jacob:Hi, it's nice to finally meet internet/virtual face-to-face. We've known each other for a little while. I've become fortunate to know you kind of through RevenueCat, but not actually know-know you. So, it's nice to finally put a face to the name.I was looking back through my email and I think the first I ever heard of you was from our mutual friend, Cisco, if I say that correctly?00:01:23 Matthieu:Yeah, Francisco.00:01:24 Jacob:Francisco, who shared with me a blog post that I had seen that you wrote where you talked about RevenueCat as part of your stack. Since then, I think we talked as you were thinking about going into YC, and then after YC, I put in a little bit of money, so this is a good opportunity to check in on my investment.I'm super excited to dive in, because there's a lot of questions. I kind of have followed you guys and kind of seeing some of the stuff you've been doing, but I don't know, like the behind the scenes decision making processes and like, and all that stuff. So yeah, I'm excited to hear the story firsthand.00:02:04 David:Yeah, but before we get into PhotoRoom, you've got quite a history in app development. So, I want to go back to the beginning and talk war stories. A lot of people were in the industry way back when. Jacob and I both started really early as well. So, you got your start during the Stanford class and you were actually a teaching assistant at Stanford at the time, right? I'm kind of stealing your story, but yeah. Tell me, tell me how you got into it.00:02:34 Matthieu:Yeah. Actually I wasn't a teaching assistant in physics. I was doing a master's in physics at Stanford, right at the moment of the first iPhone class. And, I actually went to Stanford because I was fascinated by the entrepreneurship. And I had this business idea of printing photos and sending them.And that seemed a lot easier not to buy hardware, but just use the iPhone which just started at that point. So, I was at Stanford, there was the iPhone class. I wanted to do a photo app. So, see, 12 years later....00:03:05 Jacob:A 12 year overnight success.00:03:07 Matthieu:That's what they say. Exactly. And, yeah, I got, I actually, I got started, programming.I was doing physics before, and I didn't know anything about programming. So I took a class with a friend that went through the basics, and I just wanted to push products on apps. And I found that the iPhone was the best at that point. And actually the photo app became something else.The first company I started back in grad school and they became like a ski resorts app. I shipped, we had all of the major ski resorts. And, It was a great, I did that for two years and a major ski resorts and, yeah.I started an apps company after that, one called HeyCrowd around a social network. So like we had surveys that you could answer to with polls, like, a bit like Instagram stories now, and that didn't work so well compared to the ski resort, but, yeah, I got into iPhone apps right since the beginning.00:04:18 Jacob:I remember the Stanford course. It was on iTunes U that was mass disseminated or was it the later one?00:04:25 Matthieu:No, it was the one that it wasn't Stanford U. There was a, the guy from Fitboard during the class. I don't know if it was doing that.00:04:42 Jacob:Yeah. I remember. I remember it being like the moment when we were like, oh, this is going to go mainstream. Right? Like, because up to that point, you had to learn iOS by doing basically Mac OS. That was like the one point there was the big nerd book you learned Mac OS, and then the SDKs came and you like tried to learn quickly, like what worked and what didn't.But, if you were like me who came from no Mac programming, there was really no iPhone entry into it. I remember when the Stanford course came out. It was like one year too late for me. Because like at that point I had already done a lot of stuff, but it was still really great.I still watched the whole thing. I remember watching it. But it's interesting. We have the same path. I don't know if we ever talked about this, but I was studying physics in undergrad as well. Yeah, I didn't go to Stanford, but I went to a small state school instead, just cause, you know. But yeah, kind of similar story where like I was in, I wasn't in grad school, but I was physics, undergrad.Didn't really know what I wanted to do. I really loved physics and the math and all that stuff, but like, there's a stronger economic pull, let's put it that way, to work on apps. That was the same story for me. Like took a little bit of what I had learned, writing code for experiments and things like this, and then kind of started making apps.And then, yeah, the rest is history.00:06:06 Matthieu:Yeah. I think one of the introduction to physics is like how fast data applies to the real world from science to real world. And you don't find that in a, like a physics job where you kind of find that back in, like a software development where you like, can we solve a math problem, a computer science problem, and you can directly apply it to real00:06:25 Jacob:Yeah. Or like, even with business modeling and stuff too, you know, you think about how a business moves and like what number moves this number. And there's no physics there. You're not approximating a physical system, but some of the same principles apply. Right. You're like trying to find some laws that are underlying it and work from there.So yeah, I found it hasn't been terribly unrelevant, but, but yeah, that's interesting. What else, what else do we have in common? Let's keep going.00:06:48 Matthieu:Yeah, sure.00:06:49 David:Well, actually, I, I want to jump in. I want to get to PhotoRoom, so we're actually going to skip over. You've done a lot now. So after, after that you went to replay and replay was like onstage at a keynote. And you're the co founders that you were working with, you know, as, as you joked, before we started recording, spent a month in the basement and apple, as everyone does before a keynote.But then you ended up at GoPro working on imaging. so just tell me about that. Leaving GoPro. I mean, Great company done a lot of innovative stuff. but tell me about leaving to start a PhotoRoom and what the inspiration, I guess we've heard part of it, you know, 12 years of working on imaging and wanting to build a photo app.But yeah. Tell me about the founding of, of.00:07:36 Matthieu:Yeah, I, I, so GoPro is an amazing company, but it's more marketing and hardware. And, I really wanted to, I grew a bit frustrated about like how we could, do better software. Yeah, a few frustration from that I, as a product, I was product manager by them. So I was like frustrated with the design tool, like a Photoshop and, and, you kind of have to move to, and by that time you had to move to California to move the stuff.And I was based in there in Paris and I decided to stay there with the family and, and kind of, we had an amazing missionary team at GoPro in Paris, but it's really difficult to. To change the paradigm of a kind of a software, like a, if it works from a kind of more deterministic way. So I kind of realize that it's really tough to ship a new software with new paradigm, and we've mentioned our new insights.So I thought there was a big opportunity with the new, new hardware coming on, the iPhone formation, learning the new, the new, yeah, this new kind of way of thinking about software. And, I left the GoPro to start a company and we've just ideas in mind. And I also, at the time realized that there was a. A lot of apps, you know, like after 10 years on the app store, you kind of know the tricks of the app store. And I knew there were a lot of apps in the top of the photo apps that were around razor and background eraser. I realized like, okay, if they're just kind of a, you know, I say scam, but it's certainly scam, but all these apps that are built quickly, there must be some demand around it.And so that's, I started with the background remover idea. Like I saw that there was a mission learning team at GoPro that there was some background removal, paper and all that. Okay. There must be some demand. Let's ship something quickly and see how it goes. And that's kind of the nice thing of like 10 years of development, you know, the right tool to go fast and just shipped a prototype in two weeks.We've actually referring at, by then I have a blog post on like the 10 tools I use there and, And, yeah, it was, it went super fast, super fast to the store and we have some machine learning and, on-device machine learning by then. So it's as a, and it kind of caught up, like you tried a dozen ideas on some kind of stay on the wall on some, like, and just stay on the wall.00:09:43 Jacob:So at the time it was called BGE app background app. Right. was the focus initially, did you have like a big scope for it or was that your entry? You were like, Hey, I know that they there's these photo apps that kind of suck that are doing this background thing. I think we can do it better. And like, let's see where it goes from there.Or did you have like a bigger plans or longer term aspirations? 00:10:04 Matthieu:I think there was, an understanding that people kind of needed that and the tech tech was 10 X better as they say. So it was really interesting, but I didn't, I mean, we didn't have the full plan for that. It's really a few months in that we are understood with Elliot the kind of the market fit.And we understood also like this idea of, and we call it, we translate pixels into concept that makes it much easier to, to, to edit. So w for the room is the best for digital for entrepreneurs. And the idea is that instead of using mask and layers and pixels, you just like, the machine learning, understanding what are the.The big cells and they just tell you, okay. A cat. So we call it cat to catch up on the cat. And you should have actions that are relevant to a Catholic changing the fur color. if it's, if it's a piece of clothing, it should be the texture of the clothing. If it's a, if it's a kind of graphic change of color, you know, kind of, it makes it much more accessible than what exists in like 10 year, 20 years, software that exists by for the editing.00:11:03 Jacob:So, so yeah, I mean, I think that sounds like a very much a pitch and a story that somebody would be taught at Y Combinator. So I'm curious, like what I'm curious, like, how did that evolve? Like how so you, you, you, you guys launched the app in the, I remember I was talking in like the spring of 2019.00:11:20 Matthieu:Yeah. Like may 2019. Exactly. 00:11:22 Jacob:And then, you started YC in the fall or the winter?Yeah.00:11:25 Matthieu:No, we actually, so we started YC in the following summer. We were supposed to do the winter batch after that. So seven months. And, we, we couldn't because our visa issues, at some, with the family, I couldn't move to, to, to YC. Yeah. 00:11:42 Jacob:Can tell you there's one way to solve that problem.A global pandemic.00:11:49 Matthieu:Exactly. Yeah. That's exactly right. So we did it involve, I think we shipped super fast. We failure my co-founder who is like a, like a machine learning genius. and we follow early on the YC startup school, which is kind of the, first step to. And, and so what does it help you? It kind of, you measure the, yeah, the progress.So, how much customer you're talking to, Ahmed, how much money you made and how happy you are doing what you do. And so that's kind of how we iterated 00:12:24 Jacob:You were 00:12:25 Matthieu:Months. 00:12:26 Jacob:During, startup school or 00:12:28 Matthieu:Yeah, the school kind of asks you every, every week, discussion and you make sure you make progress on that. I think these are the right question to make progress on your business.And here's, what's kind of, kind of natural, like two months later. So we started in may, may, June on that, application for YC where I probably in September, like, so, so we did like all summer, we did the startup school scheme and then framework and made some progress on that. And we got the YC application in September and the interviews actually in Paris, In, I think November.00:12:57 Jacob:And then, ha had you, I guess like, your, your aspirations or your reasons for applying, I guess, are in some ways, self evident to somebody. You know, obviously you don't need to convince me, but for the listeners, I, what was your, yeah. What were your motivations? Like? Why did you, well, I guess for one there's, you know, I don't know.I always hear there's a couple of reasons, right? Like sometimes it's prestige, like people want to the prestige of YC, sometimes it's, it's the help, which I honestly think is the, the, the best reason. Cause I, you know, it's, it was honestly really good for us, but then there's also like, you know, it's, it's a great way to springboard venture back.Thing, right as well. So like, did you have like strong reasons? Was it all of the above or what was the motivation for, for getting on the venture? 00:13:44 Matthieu:Yeah, that's a good question. so I think number one reason was, ambition. I think like a lot of your brain startups, you Batara, can be not ambitious enough. And I think if you're ambitious, like YC is really a way of, the alpha taking the ambitious path. Okay. Then how to make it like a business and a product that has a strong impact, like on a very large number of people.So that was, that would be my number one. I think then it's kind of the learning. we are at the beginning of the company, we sit for failure, then what's what kind of is the most important, you know, for their culture. And we talked about it also. And, one thing we really value is learning fast and I think YC kind of helps you, you probably a lot of like, you learn so much faster because you're at the right contact.So it's, I mean, it's. It's on the partners. Like every time we have a office hour, almost every time, like, wow. Blown away, there is like also Atlas. I get the right investors, I mean on the revenue, on the like mobile subscription and like, yeah, like you like auger from Blinkist, like, someone from, John from Spotify.So that's really helpful and also extra connection like we have in AI, we have the VP of AI and locale Facebook, and I don't think we could reach this network with, with. 00:15:01 Jacob:Yeah, the network thing is depends on, you know, what your background is. Obviously you had been in the peninsula, but still it's hard to be really deeply networked and still it's hard to. Invest in your engineering skills. Right. And like your IC skills and invest in a network at the same time, which was kind of my world.Like I had an okay network, but like, it wasn't super well networked. So YC was like a big like boost to that. Right. You could get interest to people. You could get a little bit, it's still, a who, you know, game Silicon valley is still in a lot of ways or the broader concept. 00:15:33 David:Before we move on. I wanted to talk to us a little bit more about the, about the ambition of PhotoRoom, because, and this is something I think is, would be really relevant to a lot of our listeners who are, are building apps in the space. And, and I, as an indie developer for 12, 13 years, feel like I've, I've, I've worked too much with, with blinders on.Not thinking about the bigger opportunity. So like the first app I launched was trip cubby. It was a model it's log tracking app, to get reimbursements from taxes or get reimbursed from your company, for your mileage. And I just, I treated it like a little tiny indie business, lifestyle, business, and everything else.Meanwhile, 00:16:19 Jacob:IQ00:16:20 David:IQ built a huge 00:16:23 Jacob:Probably launched about the same time. Right. I would think. 00:16:26 David:No, they launched much later actually, which is even again, it's like I had a multi-year lead as kind of the, how to do that 00:16:33 Jacob:Assuming the market was there. Like my, like you probably came when the market was finally there, 00:16:37 David:Starting to grow, but yeah. But what's so cool. Is that, I think there's so many opportunities in the app store that people overlook that seem really niche. Like you just started out replacing backgrounds in photos, 00:16:50 Jacob:And now you're going to be the next generation Photoshop. Is that a good one? Is that a good pitch? I don't know what the 00:16:54 Matthieu:Yeah. 00:16:57 David:What, what's the ambition that, where that took you from, okay.We can replace background images too. This is, could be a huge business because we're, un-bundling one of the like key parts of Photoshop, which is a massive business. So what, what, what is the, what was the ambition and what is the ambition that you feel that this, this can be such a big thing. 00:17:21 Jacob:How did you, how did you convince yourself of that? The ability to do that?00:17:25 Matthieu:Yeah. 00:17:25 David:Yeah.I mean, it's, it's amazing.00:17:27 Matthieu:I think it's, well first like working on photo, video editor, like I realized that, I mean, video is big. Like we got, I think we free-play then named quick by GoPro. We got to $100 million. It's kind of tell you like, and most people, they are still using like photo collage. So everyone's working on photo and video is too complex for most people.So like, if you get 100 million for a video, then it's probably like any good, like yeah. Project improvement like 10 X product improvement on photo must get like 1 billion users. And I think it's like, that's one of the YC model, but it was really starting from a pain point of myself, like creating the assets for actually for the app store.Like you have to create a PSD. And I was like, you spent so much time on non creative task. And I was like, I want to make that much simpler. And I think the big heart moment was kind of talking to the user. So, and also like talking, yeah. Talking to people like we kind of build in the open and people told us, it's like, yeah, Yeah, it's a, it's like a actually it's like programming, like a U instead of you're you're doing like, object oriented, editing, like you understand what kind of objects you have and you make actions that are relevant to that.And that's, that's kind of done myself, like really burning myself away. Like it's much simpler. Like you have an object and you, you offer it to the user. What's the logic for the subject lines, Photoshop. It's such a pain to learn. Like I think everyone would remember is kind of the blown away part of Photoshop, but also the pain it is to understate.00:18:51 Jacob:And it hasn't gotten easier in 20 years. Like the only way now you can paint on a sphere or something like, there's nothing like new, I still open it and it's comforting. Cause I learned in CS two or whatever, and it's all still the same, but like, I don't think it's necessarily, like, I think, I think there's even a broader near you.I'm going to make your, your $10 billion company, a trillion dollar company. But I think there's an even broader narrative there around just like the future of software and how machine learning. Further like narrows the gap between like in software, like programming, not in the traditional sense, but like telling a computer what to do and the computer telling, like asking us or like bringing us like the things it can do.And you see this in like varying degrees of it working well. Right. like Gmail, like suggesting like absolutely insane sounding replies that I would never say, like, that's kind of that, but, but I think that's all maybe a little bit too far, but I think what you guys are doing, it's really great. You know, like segmenting photos, like giving people those tools, like taking, especially for a tool like email it's like writing, like, I don't know.An AI assistant to like, say, thanks like I can, I got that. Thank you. But for, for, yeah, like, like cutting backgrounds out and like setting up. Yeah. Just building like, things that to a human, because we're so visual in the way we think seem really basic, right? Like I want the cat in front of a blue background, right?Like that. Just tell the computer and it can do that right now. The existing tooling is like very manual and very skills driven. And you guys are bridging that gap. So like yeah. Who knows something? I don't know. Maybe photos, aren't the end of it for you guys, maybe next you just start tackling the next software domain.Right? I, you know, I don't know that we'll get to 10000000001st and then we'll worry about the trillion dollar.00:20:28 David:And that's the really magical thing about your app and your onboarding that I wanted to ask you about. So exactly what Jake was saying. When I think of removing a background and I've worked in Photoshop literally since the nineties, late nineties, I'm old. but it's, I've tried that like a hundred different times.And even in the most modern Photoshop, I don't even know how to do it. I expect it to be. I downloaded PhotoRoom and in like three taps, your onboarding is magical because you don't get in the way of the person having a desire to get something done. And then seeing it happen. So in like three tops from opening the app, I see a background removed and it was just like00:21:16 Jacob:Okay. 00:21:16 David:Instant, like mindblowing experience. 00:21:19 Jacob:Yeah.00:21:20 David:This thing that like, I know it's so hard and I think of needing professional tools and needing to be a professional to even figure it out. It just happens magically after three or four taps in your app was that I assume that was very intentional. Did you have different onboardings before and kind of iterate to that point?Or what led you to just such a focused get the person to that?00:21:45 Matthieu:Yeah, that's a good grade. She was our interview. I think, we like, if we, especially in the beginning every week, we'd go to McDonald's and pay a meal to student or anyone. And they like the tagline for McDonald's and Frances com. Everyone can come in and come as you are. So we really met like tourists students professionals, and like doing user interview.We got so frustrated. I think that people didn't get to the step of removing background that kind of like00:22:12 Jacob:Oh, so you would give them an unlogged out like a brand new device and like, watch them go through onboard.00:22:17 Matthieu:We would like pay the meal initially for downloading the app. We'd like first ask you three, four questions about their photo usage on their, on their phone. kind of ask them to download the app and yeah. Blinded as yeah. And, and we were like came sneaking. We just were, we were just iOS at the beginning.So try to find people with iPhones and not Android, and that was stuff, but yeah, I mean, people usually stopped before and they don't understand something and like to build trust with them, we figured out like the best is to short tech. So I can we get to the point where. We actually have all these people, we try the app that actually see the bag, the magic effect of Futterman like, so like taking a white sheet of paper, we valued microphone and like thinking, how can we do that?And it got to like adding that as early as possible in the onboarding. I think that's, that's, that's fine.00:23:06 Jacob:I think, I remember now reading about the McDonald's testing and your, your, YC application and being like. That's the moment I knew these guys were going to make it, I guess like it's was brilliant, right? Like I, I don't know how much user testing, like real good user testing is. If you do it in some sort of like professional context, it's probably really weird and like expensive and like hard.And this is dead simple, super scrappy. Right? People don't do it because I don't know nerds. Don't like talking to people like we don't like, you know, it's, it's, it's tough to put your, your app in front of somebody and see them. Not, it's one thing to read like bad retention numbers on amplitude is another thing to like, see somebody actually churn and like, but honestly that's the best way to learn.Like this is the best way to like, get really actionable feedback. So, I'm sure that was, that was super beneficial.00:23:53 Matthieu:Yeah, it's a, it's a trick from Zenly. So the social network and maps, like that really is, one of the best, app in embarrass and they, and we apply that and yeah, it requires some. It's not easy, I must say. But, you really, you learn so much and the pain today is more like we have more qualified users.So it's really easy in the beginning when you're in your photo apps and people just as the app and everyone has photos. So it's easy to explain. Then you want to like talk to your kind of retain user. It's difficult to get them at the McDonald, but now we're friends with all the vintage shops around the block.So in Paris, so we get.00:24:28 Jacob:So that, yeah, that was I kind of my question I wanted to ask. I'll just slide it in now, but like I've noticed, I don't know. I don't know if you had this intention initially, but it seems like you've found a new. Even amongst these apps in something I would say commerce or even e-commerce it seems like a lot of people use these, use your app to take photos of objects, to use as like advertising or gone Shopify.Is that, is that true and statement or am I just like misreading investor updates?00:24:56 Matthieu:No, it's totally true. Actually, it's not. The interesting thing is it came from a personal lead, like using, as you say, Photoshop and wanted it much easier for me, but I wasn't clear who was using the CRA's background apps. I'm talking to like user at McDonald's. We realized like there was all these reselling apps, especially in the Europe and the U S where people.Yeah, they're just like selling Poshmark on vintage in Europe and they, there is no app that's focusing on their photo need. Like everyone's doing like selfies or I dunno, whatever lens on video you can make or, but, no one's in it helping them. And it actually came from the user interview like, oh, that some user told us like, oh, my girlfriend would love that she's selling on Depop.And, and we kind of like it after multiple user asking us in support. asking us, and in talking at the user interview of my goal, we realized that, oh, that's a niche that we should kind of focus on. So that's Allie Kim, 00:25:51 Jacob:Was that pre YC, like pretty early in the process.00:25:55 Matthieu:And it came in a few, just not in one day, but it, I think early, after being taken at twice a 00:26:02 Jacob:Okay. 00:26:03 Matthieu:Like early 20, 20,00:26:04 Jacob:So then my next question, I guess, is like, how do you decide then? So you have a car for strong product. You, you, you might have like varying. This is, I think this is very common for a lot of apps and companies is like, you have probably different levels of product market fit depending on the market.Right? So like maybe broadly across all users of iPhone, your product market fit may not be as strong. But then when you look at this one niche, like maybe it's really strong. And then I think some. End up in a situation where you have to kind of decide, like, do I want to go for this maybe less fit, broader market, or maybe a tighter market with a stronger fit that I'm starting out with.Did you have that internal conversation? And then did you make an active decision? Like we're going to focus on this and then yeah. And then what's the plan after that? Like, or is that the forever plan?00:26:48 Matthieu:I think we, the easy part is as a product guy, I'm really convinced that our usage is really deep. Like we're starting from a different Lego brick, like, okay, you don't need it mask or square pixels, you edit like objects. So, I mean, any app that kind of want to copy that Nike that's to stop doing what it does today.So it's kind of the thing that relates to the missionary understanding excelled in the beginning. So we were confident. Digging into this usage and this product paradigm and like product basic block is interesting. And then we decided to focus on the pro usage and, and it's difficult as a follower. You want to serve everyone at the beginning, we were even doing a video plus photo, like in December of 2019, we dropped the video, just for animation.And then we dropped kind off the casual use case to focus on the pro and, and it's, it's been helpful. You're not like giving up on the other users. You, I mean, some of the features, they're still going to use it, the other, the casual, the people doing memes from, from the app, but she just like when you build features, you think about them.And I, around that, I think YC is helpful because. like if you reach local maximum from one vertical, like product market fit, then you investing so much on the take. It gets better than the, all the local maximums or, or adjustment. Like you can reach them after, and it's not a big deal and kind of believe and believing and trusting that helps you on, on like a, okay, we're going to focus on this one for, let's say three months and we say,00:28:14 Jacob:Yeah. I mean, I think that's a really good point in that I think can trip up people early in the process is that you think. That making an active choice to close yourself off to part of the market as a mistake. Cause you're like, well, I want to serve everybody or, well, I want to, you know, I want to have the most broad appeal I can cause it does, it feels wrong, right.To not serve a use case. but often tactically it's a bad choice because yeah, in the early days, anything. Hey find any users that love your product, even if it's a small group, there's, it's a, it's a closer step to like, get your foot onto that than it is to try to get sustainability on like mediocre product market fit across the broad market.Because then also it makes, yeah, it makes your McDonald's discussions easier. Well, maybe you don't have McDonald's discussions anymore. It makes your product discussions easier. Cause you can say like, okay, these are pilot. We're not going to do all this stuff. We're going to focus on this stuff, which gives you more of a loss city.I just really feel there's so much to getting that velocity early. Right. Like getting something that's like moving and growing and getting fast. And I think that's one of the things, I mean, I don't know, I won't, I won't docks you guys on retention numbers and stuff, but you know, when you have a, I'll just say that when you have a pro user base, that's using it for something non casual retention gets easier, right.Like have a reason to come back. And so if you, I mean, there's not that many apps like that. That on it's hard, it's hard, it's hard. It's rare to find mobile apps that have that opportunity. Right. So when it's there, you need to take it00:29:45 Matthieu:Yeah. 00:29:46 David:How do you think about pricing for that value creation? Since, since those that kind of pro segment really probably gets a lot more value than you're even currently charging. because they're actually making money with your product. Like how did you think through your print pricing? And did you iterate to this point from a more kind of consumer pricing to them to a, I mean, to me it feels like you're in the middle still of somewhat consumer-friendly and really honestly, probably cheap for a professional use case.So how did you land on your current price?00:30:24 Matthieu:Yeah, to be honest, it's like most of the photo apps. I mean, when we started and maybe it's different, they are all pricing like 10 bucks a month and that's kind of given by, I guess, Spotify Netflix, like it's kind of the, the glass ceiling of the price of subscription, even for prosumer. And, and we kind of iterated on the under yearly from 40 bucks to 69 bucks, in, in the U.So we didn't like, we kind of landed on that quite early. you don't want to alienate the user, especially if you put the up-selling in the onboarding, like, to be too expensive. I think we have a major opportunity though, to like address the more advanced business and the more than one person in a shop, it's just, it's really difficult to build this a B2B case in in-app like, you don't have that many apps that use that in the up-sell of the phone.So you probably have to show it like. The the first price, to every user and on the pro you probably can to brigade them after, I think it's something we can do later, like focusing on the product for now and make it simple as much as you're like, if you start with two prices, like the support, basically it is going to go crazy.We still do the support of the users. That's something we try to maximize for simplicity here.00:31:37 Jacob:I mean, it's a good point to make, especially too. It depends on, depends on your cashflow constraints as well. Just like how much, how extractive you want to be, how much you want to push it. Right. because you know, when you have good retention, like there's an argument, an argument to be made to not mess that up by because you're raising your price will hurt your attention, right?Like it's kind of at least on paid, right? Like more expensive. It is. People are going to churn more. and if you're compounding your total, like paying subscribers, that might be more important and then extracting an extra, an incremental $2 or $10 or whatever from each user, right. It might be better off just to keep them happy and longterm.And that's what makes it, I don't know, pricing just so complicated. It's about finding that equilibrium to maximize like the longterm area under the curve and not just, not just like the individual LTVs.00:32:27 Matthieu:Yeah, exactly. I think there was one. yeah, we, you want to talk to, like, you don't want to. Expensive at the beginning, you should have too expensive. Like one of the really source of feedback was also our support. And like, if you're too expensive, you get less pro. And the goal, I mean, the reason we launched after two weeks with was like the feedback from process so much more valuable than the feedback from, for users.I mean, you still want people to pay, like, just stop at 500 bucks in long month is going to be like, there's no way people are going to pay for that. So, and I was actually talking on Twitter that like, we actually put forth first a monthly plan because we wanted people to churn and be able to talk to them.So there was really a focus on learning from the 00:33:07 Jacob:Interesting. 00:33:08 Matthieu:Early days.00:33:09 Jacob:Yeah, I've always. Yeah. The, the short, I think, long, the annual subscriptions obviously have a bunch of benefits to, to, to app developers, but you do end up flying blind for a very long time. Right. Until you really know what those numbers look like. So if you're on monthly, purely, it does kind of simplify things early on.Which is another case to be made for just not over thinking your pricing, like initially, right? Like you guys launched just with the monthly and it was fine that you added, I don't know when you added an annual product, but you brought it in when the time. 00:33:40 Matthieu:I think the logical, so learning from GoPro and replay days is the pricing is quite elastic. So you double your price, you divide by two, the number of pros like minus plus 10%. And so, so it doesn't, I mean, it's, I mean, when you get bigger, it's way of doing experiments on pricing, but in the early days it's worth, it's not worth like taking too much time on that.00:34:01 Jacob:Yeah. I mean, it's good to know if you have an elastic curve, it means you're pretty close to, to the optimum already, right?00:34:06 David:Did you start from day one at that $10 a month price point?00:34:10 Matthieu:I think we were at eight or nine. it's pretty much like every pro for the pro apps. Like not selfies was at that on the photo and it's, and I think. The co, I mean, it goes from Spotify on Netflix. Like, everyone's like a, it's like if comparing industry report, they tell you a comparing you to Spotify on that fixed anyway.So it's a, I think it's a good, like a way to start on as they increase the price, they increase kind of the time of all the possible ATV of all the apps, which is really good. Thank you.00:34:40 Jacob:If they don't take care of it, inflation will don't worry. 00:34:43 David:But, but that's just amazing two weeks, to an MVP that you could charge $8 a month for, and people actually paid it.00:34:50 Jacob:Well, 12, 12 years in two weeks, David, if00:34:52 David:Well, right, right, right. No, no, that's a great point. But the point being that there, there are still opportunities that when you have experience and domain knowledge, that it's not the, the programming, it's not the, it's not such a monumental task to build something that's really valuable to people in this space on mobile, that you can build something good quickly with that experience.00:35:17 Matthieu:The first app was really crappy though. Like I think we 00:35:20 David:Yeah. 00:35:21 Matthieu:A few weeks before having our pay first paid users.00:35:23 David:Gotcha. I did want to talk a little bit about your marketing, so, What did you do at launch? Did, did you get a little pressed? Did you, you know, talk to apple, how did you get that initial code?00:35:35 Matthieu:So yeah, we were super, I mean, apple has been super supportive to us. I think. Before GoPro, GoPro acquired replay. so we play was, app of the year, senior as, elevate. So 00:35:46 Jacob:You guys at the year in France, is that what the00:35:48 Matthieu:No, so so I have a card, I brought the screenshot that, 00:35:52 Jacob:The U S 00:35:53 Matthieu:So we didn't, yeah, we didn't, get the U S we didn't get the U S and north America, and it's kind of a private, taser, but it's, we got like most of the Europe and Asia. And, yeah, and then I was seeing like the star that elevate their they're thinking the other U S and we should get that. 00:36:14 Jacob:It was good for you that we hadn't localized maybe 00:36:18 Matthieu:Yeah, 00:36:19 Jacob:That was the thing we were like only English at the time.00:36:22 Matthieu:Well, elevate is such a difficult business to localize. So I think it's a photo video is easy to localize it. Yeah.And, and so we got like, we got the keynote, so, and we kind of, I mean, the app is really good at marketing. using the latest technology of, apple in, like the metal and using the lasers, the GPU, I kind of build a relationship from there, with the apple team and also like learning AR that's kind of the narrative of apple, like to showcase apps.Leveraging the latest technology. They do their marketing through developers and that's awesome for us. Like it's super opportunity. And so what was that? When we started, it was well, we're using a Carmel to do the background removal and we did use like really early on in September of 2019, we use our KPIs to remove the background, to do some live preview of the photo.And so we got into, there is an accelerator inference in the biggest, like sexual life is one of the biggest things. Accenture and apple has a program there and we got in there and they helped us and like marketing and, and business, during the summer. And we had some tech workshop and in September we got Macy's, marketing from the using Eric.He, three, I think, API APIs. So I think all the days was marketing through, using the latest tech software and hardware from.00:37:42 David:And where did it go from there? Yeah. So after, after you've, you've gotten some traction in some of those early customers. did you jump into paid user acquisition 00:37:52 Matthieu:No. 00:37:54 David:Of, of, paid to, organic growth?00:37:58 Matthieu:Yeah. So we got into, we didn't do paid until like, we really got traction and market fit. So early 20, 20, and we started to have some, we got Gary V tweeting about us, like a video, farmer. So that was like a viral video demoing the app. And we kind of, I mean, the thinking was if some videos of demoing for term or viral, it probably works so-so as ad.So we kind of use these viral videos and try ads on that. Started ramping up, I think before YC, Facebook ads. So in April of last year and, it kind of, yeah, it was a good, channel of acquisition for us. And we always had in mind, like, we don't want to spend too much, we wanted to have it under control, but the payback was really good.So we kind of, added mix like, I don't know, it was three 17, maybe at that point in between the, between paid 30% beta and the 70%. And, yeah, organic and so that we ramped that up and I think it wasn't a good time to all this marketing and we kind of fast in that, at that point, because there was a COVID, the beginning of the COVID and all marketing was going down.So it was super cheap to try stuff there. 00:39:09 David:Yeah. 00:39:09 Matthieu:So I tried to be a part of these tick on that an influencer. I like a lot of times. So like all of that, we were at the right time and at the right moment for that day,00:39:17 Jacob:So how much, like are you balancing? I mean, obviously there's always so much you're balancing as a founder. but you know, how much are you thinking about investing back in the app and like broadening your appeal, making it better new markets, like new platforms versus. The scale of approach, like how can we scale marketing and, and continue to grow?Or is it like 50, 50? Like, do you have a top priority right now? Or, or how has the, like, how has your, your mind thinking about like your biggest growth levers?00:39:48 Matthieu:Yeah, we try to try to have a higher, level kind of privacy laws. So let's focus on retention or let's focus on this specific kind of users. So, in the U S for just three months, and we tried to align product and growth, on like a three months of that. And so that's kind of. that's yeah, that's how we think about it with Elliot and, and try to have it on growth and on product and kind of put us to talk more to these kinds of users, so to improve on, on these kind of shoes or just, just niche for instance.And, I don't know if people are selling on this marketplace for a month and then we'll see maybe another nation, another country, but still improve the experience for everyone.00:40:29 Jacob:And are you thinking about marketing in terms of like specific people selling on specifics, like marketplaces, like the you're actually going like channel by channel that, that, that, that closely. And does that inform like features or does that inform creative or how does that feed back into your part?00:40:44 Matthieu:Yeah, we're good. We're getting into that. Like we tried to understand bearer by a persona use case. What's the LTV and what's the retention is, and I think we are at the scale where we start to do that, but before it was like a general, a general creative for everyone and kind of demo the value of the app.And we were super lucky that our creative we're working for them. And I think like now, like the way marketing works, it's, like a. Facebook or Google are doing most of the optimization and you're more into like, what can I add up my creative so that it fit the focus I want to do for it. I don't know if the U S so I'll be a make sure you're in English.I'll make sure if you're like looking at multiple countries, try not to be too localize. I think there is a Netflix called neutralize, or they have a specific wording on making the, the artwork or the creative, not to localized, not to English, for instance. Okay. So you just content that's good. So it's kind of, that dictate kind of what we try to do with growth and marketing.00:41:39 David:That's great. Well, I have a million more questions, but we do need to, to wrap up. We're going to put links into the show notes to find you on Twitter and LinkedIn and, and PhotoRoom is such a great name, easy to Google, easy to find on the App Store. but you're also hiring, what, what positions do you have open?00:42:02 Matthieu:We're hiring a lot. We're hiring on growth and paid acquisition, hiring project designer, iOS developer, Android developer. And the way we think about the team is really to have a, like, we are 10 people, and we have a strong impact to millions of users. So, really leveraged like a small team, high impact.I think it's possible because of apps. So, we're looking for really senior people for that, and mostly in Europe. So we have like a, two, three days a month, in the Paris HQ, but, you can work from anywhere in Europe.00:42:35 Jacob:Yeah. And I'll, I'll second that. I think working on this product would be really interesting. Purely based on my insider knowledge as an investor and your friend, but for real, I mean, a lot of apps don't, you know, get to the point you have. You've got a lot of tailwinds and I think actually, the upsides are go far beyond the App Store.The future is very, very, very big. And you guys are ambitious. So take these jobs. Thank you.00:43:02 David:Yeah. 00:43:03 Matthieu:Yeah. We were thinking be everywhere. We stopped for a while, but we were like mobile first, not mobile only. And we have the web app web tool that we launched last week. We have an API for any developer that wants to remove the background. We have photo and attribution, and have the module folks using it.So it's really, I think we want to be close to the entrepreneurs, and we want to communicate through pro images that sell. And so sometimes it's not an app, it's just a photo and button. And so you can use the API for that. So, yeah. 00:43:33 Jacob:It's pretty great when you have a good product market fit, it just gets really fun. 00:43:37 Matthieu:Yeah. And we have that kind of, now that we have money, we kind of, we have like super smart people on the machinery team. So, we have the best thing on the market to do that. And that's super exciting. Now we're shipping new machinery next, I think next week. And it's going to be awesome. I can't wait to see the result on the analytics.00:43:52 David:That's amazing and 10 people. I thought you were bigger. I guess you want to be, you want to be, 15 or 20 with all the postings you have. 00:44:01 Jacob:That's why I'm really bullish on this market, David.00:44:04 Matthieu:Yeah. 00:44:04 David:Yeah, 00:44:05 Jacob:A small team can do a lot of stuff in this space. It's crazy.00:44:07 Matthieu:Yeah, It's00:44:08 David:It is crazy. Well, thank you so much for being on the podcast. It was great chatting, and thanks for sharing your insights, Matt. 00:44:13 Jacob:Yeah. We'll have to catch up again in two years to see how, see how it's going. 00:44:17 Matthieu:Yeah, of course. With pleasure. Thank you guys.

The Writ Podcast
Episode #11 - Do you hear the People's Party?

The Writ Podcast

Play Episode Listen Later Sep 10, 2021 47:00


This week on The Writ podcast:In the newsDavid Coletto is the CEO of Abacus Data and hosts inFocus with David Coletto. He joins me to discuss how the race has unfolded so far and how the Liberal-NDP switchers are the key electorate that could decide the outcome of the election.Coletto also describes the PPC's emerging voting coalition, what is contributing to their rise and whether their vote will turn out on election day.Questions and answers (with David)How to explain the difference in the PPC's support between online and IVR polls?How do pollsters weed out dishonest respondents and avoid being tripped out by demographic unicorns?What's the best way to estimate who will turn out to vote?Polls of the weekA run-down of where the federal parties stand. Read more in Wednesday's article on The Writ.#EveryElectionProjectThe 2015 Canadian federal election.This week's podcast title musical inspiration:If you have any questions you'd like me to answer in next week's episode, leave a comment below, tweet me or send me an email. You can also listen to episodes of The Writ on YouTube by subscribing to my channel here.Thanks for listening! This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thewrit.ca/subscribe

The Patrick Madrid Show
The Patrick Madrid Show: September 09, 2021 – Hour 2

The Patrick Madrid Show

Play Episode Listen Later Sep 9, 2021 51:08


California ethnic studies pushes in-school pagan prayers to Aztec gods David – How do I encourage and convince my wife of the benefits of homeschool or private Catholic school despite the cost and extra work? Fr. Christopher – I can sympathize with the caller named John in feeling let down. I work at a VA […] All show notes at The Patrick Madrid Show: September 09, 2021 – Hour 2 - This podcast produced by Relevant Radio

The Art of Catholic with Matthew Leonard
116: Dr. Brant Pitre Reveals the Scriptural Secrets of St. Joseph

The Art of Catholic with Matthew Leonard

Play Episode Listen Later Aug 31, 2021 46:30


Think you've heard it all about St. Joseph? Think again. Matthew Leonard is joined by Dr. Brant Pitre for a scintillating discussion that reveals some incredible Scriptural insights and new revelations about Our Lord's earthly father. You do NOT want to miss this episode! GET 20 FREE Video Lessons of incredible spiritual formation in the SCIENCE OF SAINTHOOD! Text SAINT to 66866 (US Only) OR go to ScienceofSainthood.com. Matthew and Brant discuss: - The secret identity of St. Joseph - The important clues regarding Joseph in the genealogy of St. Matthew - The darkly illuminating backstory that explains the awful Massacre of the Innocents Jesus barely escaped - The vital importance of the census story in Bethlehem and the House of David - How we know the royal line of David in Jesus' time even though all records had been destroyed - The one powerful word Scripture indicates St. Joseph uttered

Discover the Book Ministries
David-How to Overcome Obstacles

Discover the Book Ministries

Play Episode Listen Later Aug 18, 2021 30:57


WFL-41 900318PM David-6 LIFE OF DAVID PART #6 DAVID CONQUERS PSALM 18 David – our focus these past weeks! Why? Because he's so much like all of us… Loves God Falls… Sins… Discouraged… Encouraged… Righteous… Conquers… Worships God… In fact, David and Psalms (1/2 he wrote) mirror nearly all our lives the ups and downs! [...] The post David-How to Overcome Obstacles appeared first on Discover the Book Ministries.

Dr. John Barnett on SermonAudio
WFL-41 - David-How to Overcome Obstacles

Dr. John Barnett on SermonAudio

Play Episode Listen Later Aug 16, 2021 30:00


A new MP3 sermon from DTBM, International is now available on SermonAudio with the following details: Title: WFL-41 - David-How to Overcome Obstacles Subtitle: Psalm 119 - A Word Filled Life Speaker: Dr. John Barnett Broadcaster: DTBM, International Event: Sunday Service Date: 8/16/2021 Bible: Psalm 119 Length: 30 min.

#CreateYourEarthLife
#92- Pornography Addiction

#CreateYourEarthLife

Play Episode Listen Later Jun 1, 2021 32:45


Special guest, David Munford, joins us to answer a few questions you all had for him about pornography addiction. David has been on the podcast twice before. The first time he shared his struggles with pornography addiction. The second time David shared how Jesus, the church, and certain people in his community helped him through the struggles of pornography addiction. Today, David is answering questions that we haven't asked him yet... and the last one is the first time he has addressed this question on a podcast!Here are the questions I ask David:How did you know you were addiction to pornography?What made you quit watching porn?How long did it take you to reach out for help?What were you feeling when you first reached out for help?What were your triggers when you stopped watching porn?When you are triggered or have an urge to watch porn, what do you do to help yourself stop?WHY don't you have TikTok?I pray this podcast episode is able to give people who are not struggling an understanding of pornography addiction, and I pray this episode helps people who are struggling get some guidance.Here is David's podcast, Seeing Red with David Munford: https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/seeing-red-with-david-munford/id1523348036God Bless you all!

Messages
The Life of David - How's your Heart?

Messages

Play Episode Listen Later May 23, 2021


The Life of David - How's your Heart?

Simulation
Vlog Squad Discusses Nature of Reality

Simulation

Play Episode Listen Later Apr 26, 2021 71:34


Calling all LA Influencers to play Metaphysics Mike Tyson promoting Entheogens on Impaulsive More people asking the main questions: Who are we? Why are we here? What is our true nature? What is I? Who am I? How to maximize planetary prosperity? Old Hollywood has no idea what’s going on with Digital Quotient (DQ) TikTok, Snapchat, IG, YouTube, CGI, VR, AGI, Avatars, Neuralink New Hollywood understands DQ Need Metaphysical Truth as Anchor Focus for what to build around One Infinite Creator expressing itself Maximizing Human Potential Great place to start is influencers already discussing the Q’s VIEWS with David Dobrik & Jason Nash Episode: Biggest Life Failure Timestamps: 20:20 — 26:36 David to Mike Sheffer: “Mike do you think the world revolves around you?” Mike: “Anything not directly in front of me doesn’t exist.” David: “My math teacher used to tell me that all the time.” Mike: “Nothing exists outside my own mind.” Mike: “How do I know you exist when I leave this room?” Very aligned with Metaphysical Idealism Consciousness is inextricable from reality Realities require observers just like dreams Clouds (thoughts, perceptions, forms) appear inside Sky (Awareness) Advanced stages reach All-Inclusive Awareness Donald Hoffman’s Conscious Agent Theory Render only local experience like in GTA Other agents are rendering China, India, Russia Jason: “How do I know I haven’t been dealing with a narcissist this whole time?” Solipsism would be narcissistic: “Everyone else is an NPC.” Our GTA games overlap — multiplayer missions like VIEWS podcast

United in Accessibility
E02: Partnership Excellence

United in Accessibility

Play Episode Listen Later Apr 23, 2021 34:14


Kate Nash from Purple Space and David Caldwell from UK Home Office explore the role of disability staff networks in building partnership excellence within an organization. As part of this conversation, they touch on how accessibility leaders can support the development of disability staff networks, the role disability staff networks play in developing a culture of accessibility awareness, and how disability network leaders can be vital support and allies for accessibility leaders.  HOST: Please welcome Kate Nash and David Caldwell.  Kate is the Head of Purple Space, the world's networking and professional development hub for disabled employees, network, and resource group leaders.     David is the Head of Accessibility and Digital Inclusion at U.K. Home Office, a UK government department. His main focuses at the Home Office are accessibility strategy, policy, and assurance.      Today they will be discussing the role of disability staff networks in building partnership excellence within an organisation.  They will touch on how accessible leaders can support the development of disability staff networks, the role disability staff networks play in developing a culture of accessibility awareness, and more!    DAVID: My name is David. I'm -- I currently work at the Home Office in the UK as the head of accessibility and digital inclusion and I'm really pleased to be part of the strategic leader in accessibility working group, and today we'll be focusing on one of the domains that is inside the book of knowledge and as part of the work that we've been doing. The domain we are looking at is partnership excellence and we are focusing specifically on disability staff networks, and I can think of nobody else in the world better qualified to talk about disability staff networks than Kate Nash. So, Kate, hello. Welcome. Give us a bit of an introduction. KATE: Thank you, David. A really great pleasure to be able to join you today. I was thoroughly excited to be able to join David in any conversation, but this of course is a subject so dear to my heart. I have the great pleasure of heading up Purple Space. It's a small social business and we set up in 2015 as a result of a book that I wrote some years ago, Secrets and Big News. And now we have a growing membership and what we do is support organizations, employers to set up and or to improve the effectiveness of their employee resource groups or networks and there is such cross over in terms of the wonderful work the access champions and access professionals are doing. So, delighted to be here David. I think my picture, my photo is short hair. I think COVID has now meant we cannot go to hairdresser, but it is me and it is lovely to be with you. I am looking forward to this conversation. DAVID: We wanted to start today's session setting a bit of context about networks in the world that we live in right now and Kate, I know that Purple Space just before Christmas around the International day of Persons with Disabilities launched their impact report that looked at networks in the world of COVID. I wonder what are your thoughts about that and what are you seeing from networks around COVID in particular around accessibility and accessing company systems remotely. KATE: Yeah, thank you. So, a few things, a few things. I mean in terms of the context of ERGs and networks, we're seeing massive growth, so organizations, whether they're global business or a local business within a specific jurisdiction, we're increasingly seeing that they're becoming vehicles to accelerate the pace of change when it comes to disability confidence, so as we know, most businesses or businesses of a certain size will have a diversity and inclusion professional specialist, and they often work across really large brief in order to build a more inclusive workplace, and resource groups and networks are really used to augment and supplement and to really hasten the pace of change, so that's happening per se. In terms of COVID and some of the things that came out of the impact working group. Two things really struck me. One is that disability networks, ERGs, have meant that they are a really good focal point in raising issues and surfacing challenges and spotting trends when it comes to access issues. So, they are a really natural vehicle for surfacing those pre-existing challenges. And what COVID has done, and of course we've proven in an instant how easy it is for many of us to work remotely and from home and this is something that many disabled employees have been calling for for many years. We've now almost proven the point that it's relatively easy to be able to work extensively from home. Of course, that brings challenges so that's the first thing that really struck me is how COVID has accelerated the surfacing of pre-existing challenges when it comes to the access requirements not just for disabled people but anyone who wants to become more proficient in using tech and more productive and more efficient in their work. So that is the first thing. I think the second thing is they're often -- and it really came through in the impact report, David. I know you were part of the working group, but often networks and resource groups provide a very strong role in noticing the solutions, you know, so lots of chat between and across disabled people some who have the same impairments, some who have different impairments, but they're often a rich source of advice and support as to how you can switch on certain features when it comes to access tech. And what we're seeing through COVID is often they were the go-to agent for organizations who wanted to really start to think about how you automate certain features within tech. So those are the first two things that struck me.  What about you? What did you see from the impact report? DAVID: Yeah, I think it's probably similar to you. I think the way I summarized it when I was talking to some colleagues about the report and we were discussing it was, I think the thing that comes through a lot is that the impossible was made possible in an instant, and I think actually it's shown that the reluctance to do some adjustments and -- was there -- has been there for a long time but in some ways unjustifiably. And I think that sometimes it just takes these big events to happen to shake things up a little bit, and what I like in what you were saying about how networks are like a conduit for those issues bubbling up, and I suppose I wonder -- I wonder what you see in that – in that kind of being that conduit about the role of network leaders in speaking that truth to power and being the voice for those that they represent in the organization. What's your thoughts there in terms of how networks can do that? KATE: I think one of the strongest roles that they play is in clustering the common themes that come out in terms of inaccessible tech as well as inaccessible environment as well as inaccessible ways in which we work. The reality is most people with a disability are individuals who acquire that health condition or disability through the course of their working life. We know that some 83 or 84 percent of all disabled people are those who acquire their disability from the age of 16 and 65. What that means is people are often grappling with a change of identity as well as often a change in the way in which they have to work and a change in the way in which they interface with their working environment as well as the people who work around them and it can be incredibly hard to accommodate and feel good and to feel good about yourself within that change of identity. And therefore it becomes very complex and harder and longer for individuals to articulate what their needs are. One of the things that we saw, for example, in the book that we wrote years ago is it can take on average someone two to three years to even ask for a workplace adjustment because they feel that there are favors. We know on the one hand that these things are not favors. They're enshrined in law, but it's altogether different. So, to come back to your question I think what networks and ERG do so powerfully is that they provide what I call an advocate type role. They start to surface the themes and the constant truths around inaccessible tech or environments, and they start to depersonalize the needs to provide solutions for groups of people who might share the same impairment so whether that's individuals with a vision impairment or people who maybe have a hearing condition, they are theming those things rather than an individual having to ask for a particular workplace adjustment and it's just accelerated that. DAVID: Absolutely. There's some interesting comments from Ray around people being taught to be grateful for what you do have and not to ask for too much, and I think I've definitely seen that. I've definitely seen disabled staff go, well, you know, I got this bit of -- I got one of the ten things that I needed, and I kind of felt bad for asking for more. So yeah, I've seen that. I also, just on Tracey's point, so ERG is Employee Resource Group so we tend to talk about employee networks and employee resource groups. There's a whole plethora of different ways of saying the same thing, isn't there, Kate? KATE: Yes, absolutely. Different organizations will use different language to describe often the same thing. As David says, the most common used languages are networks or employee resource groups, but we equally see some organizations use the term business resource groups, sometimes special interest groups, sometimes affinity groups. Particularly when it comes to this subject you often have accessibility networks or user testing groups as well. So, it's really vehicles of individuals who don't have a dedicated role in mainstreaming disability within the workplace but individuals who want to support the business to do differently and better. DAVID: I want to pick up a little bit on one of the things you just mentioned there about the informal role of networks in as much as, you know, most network leaders and most networks are volunteer led. There are very few examples where it's a formal part of somebody's job. And what challenges do you see with that in terms of those network leader's role when it comes to this topic of accessibility, digital accessibility, workplace accessibility in general, what impact does that have, these people have a big remit but they are volunteers? KATE: Yeah, and there lies the rub (laughs). And one of the great things that ERG leaders and network                leaders have in abundance we say is passion, energy, commitment, dedication, and a real desire to support their organization to do differently and better. They're very often individuals who have experienced disability themselves in one way or another. Often that's direct experience, but it equally can be somebody who may be a parent of a child with a disability or indeed someone whose parents had a disability. It may be individuals who are line managers, exceptions but you're absolutely right. They also have a day job and the day job comes first. So, I suppose the great -- the greatest role, the greatest benefits that networks can play is in clustering some of the themes and the common features of inaccessibility for disabled people. But their roles are naturally very broad. They're often involved in supporting an organization to improve workplace adjustment policy. They're often involved in delivering storytelling campaigns, which you know so much about yourself, David. And they also can be involved in user testing groups, but their roles are very, very broad, and I think where some of the networks that are led by some of the accessibility leaders and the unique role that accessibility leaders can play is a real focus on the access issues because they're slightly different. You know, disability is a complex human experience, and for some it's about leveling the playing field when it comes to kit and gizmos, technical terms. But sometimes it's not about that. Sometimes it's about noticing the self-limiting untruths that we have of ourselves and the things that we need to do to improve our confidence, so, yeah, but to answer your question, ERG leaders are busy bunnies. They have a very broad remit.  Some of that is about access but if that can be augmented by great leadership when it comes to access champions, then that's fantastic. That's when the magic happens. DAVID: Yeah. HOST: IAAP membership consists of individuals and organizations representing various industries including the private sectors, governments, non-profits, and educational institutions. Membership benefits include products and services that support global systemic change around digital and the build environment. United in Accessibility, join IAAP and become a part of the global accessibility movement. DAVID: How do we encourage people to tell us about their disabilities and then how do we encourage them to ask for adjustments to make sure that they are best supported in the workplace, and I've got some thoughts, but I'd love to hear yours first. KATE: Yeah, well, I think some of the more common ways in which you can support people I suppose to hasten the process by which they ask for a workplace adjustment is to really give good, consistent, and easily visible information about how you can access the workplace adjustment. Those employers that really start to motor on this are those that tend to have, you know, a one-stop portal of information that's very visible. It can be available as you on-board an organization. Senior business leaders know where it is and tend to socialize that information with their own teams, with human resources and the DNI departments will routinely get information about where you can get that access adjustment, so that's really, really important. I think the other thing that networks can do to support people to know that a business is really serious in wanting to deliver adjustments is some of the storytelling campaigns. Many organizations whether they're very small public sector organizations in a locale or whether large global multinationals, one of the most powerful instruments of change is to get individuals to share information about their disability, and not just for its sake. It's not a cathartic exercise. It's about saying this is me. This is my impairment. This is what I do for the business. This is how I deliver well for the business. And by the way, I have bipolar and mine is a good news story because as soon as I asked, I was able to get a soft adjustment in terms of how I work. And those little micro stories have the most powerful impact in helping people to notice, wow, the business is really serious about this. We know from our membership how hard it is often for individuals to share information about their disability with an organization. It can take a very long time, and it can take a wee bit of courage. And when the wonderful John Armichi talks about trust and how organization need to earn that trust. So, yes, of course individuals can do differently and better and learn as they go along about how to be who they are – how can they preserve and protect their brand as a high-performing employee with a disability at the same time as being who they are. But it's often the case that people will need a bit of courage to share that information formally, and as you call out when you've done that, you at least expect I suppose the business to say, okay, so what do you need and how can we help and when do you need it, yeah. DAVID: Yeah, absolutely. One of the things that we talked about before we jumped and looked at some questions is about how networks can help to I suppose provide a sense of themes and a general helping to scope those areas. I wonder, one of the things I've been thinking about recently is about what's the role of an accessibility leader to help disability network leaders almost focus a bit to provide some of that time to be a sounding board and to be I suppose a confidante rather than having to do it themselves, almost helping, go well look, this is what we've got, you know, we've got this side of the table when it comes to accessibility. What we need some help on is this stuff. So almost helping for us some of the shaping around the role of disability networks in this conversation about accessibility in the workplace. KATE: Yeah, agree. I mean a number of thoughts strike me when you offer that up, David. I think the first is -- of course, we talk about access in the round and that can mean different things. It can mean access to tech as well as access to the built environment. As well as access to flexible and agile working policies. Access is a broad term. But that said there's often what I would call an occupational psychology that sits behind some of the exceptionally gifted access leaders and champions. What I mean by that is they tend to be -- dare I say without stereotyping access leaders is they tend to be very systematic in the way that they work. They tend to be those individuals who can do root and branch analysis. They tend to be those that really hone down on what the problem is and therefore surface what the range of solutions are and therefore for the business can understand what the best solution is. So, the interplay I think between access professionals and leaders and champions as well as the ERGs of work on a broader level is, one, to be able to get the bit between their teeth and really hone down on solutions. They can unblock what I call the consistent themes, the challenges that go round and round and never get resolved. Maybe surface one year and then three years later, guess what the big problem is, it's the same thing that surfaced six years ago or three years ago. And some of the greatest access leaders and champions are those who chose to table thump and say this is not good enough or not in my name or leave that with me and I'll go back. So they set the bar high and as you say, can often counsel and mentor ERG leaders. Does that make sense? DAVID: It does. It makes absolute sense, and I think what I've seen and certainly what I've learned from other folks in this working group and in the IAAP and similar groups in places like the business disability forum in the UK, and the ILO, the international labor organization groups is as much as you get accessibility leaders who maybe come in have a focus on say digital accessibility, we end up -- because we're such a passionate bunch of people, we end up getting involved in areas like build environment and might not be part of our official remit to look at workplace adjustments because that's traditionally an HR thing but we're going to get stuck in, and I think it comes down to the fact that we live in this sort of ecosystem of things and it's no good to just make the digital things accessible if our stuff can't get workplace adjustment so they can't get into a building. So, I think it's increasingly -- like I say, whilst people are coming with this digital angle and this tech angle. I'm increasingly seeing and feeling that access, is not workable, doesn't stack up like that because you end up kind of doing half the job really, which is difficult because you end up with network -- with accessibility leaders who are spinning multiple plates. But I think that's the role of networks comes in and helps accessibility leaders to say I've got all these things, I need you to help me understand what's going on, on the ground to be able to then go, right, that plate, it's about to fall off, but it is not actually going to cause anybody any problems. Let's deal with this plate that is still spinning and it's going to spin on for a bit longer but the second it drops it's going to break, it's going to smash. KATE: Absolutely. DAVID: I wonder as well. One of the things that I've been thinking about as well is about that kind of useful tension that can exist between networks and accessibility leaders and thinking about it from the perspective of very often I've seen and I know colleagues see is that networks and individuals in networks will perhaps raise an issue that they think affects a lot of people, but actually when you dig under it, it's a lack of understanding, it's a challenge that individuals because of a specific reason but that's not been surfaced. So, I wonder whether you think there is a useful tension in having them as the separate groups and separate entities and the accessibility not leading the disability network or not being on the steering committee, for example. KATE: Yeah, real pros and cons, and I think like you say, David, I think I'm more inclined to notice the benefits of the creative tension that comes with those two groups and those two issues. We -- I mean, as we know, in the disability inclusion, building more inclusive workplaces is about coming at the topic of disability and mental health from different dimensions and different perspectives, and inclusion can mean a number of things, and part of it is about access to kit, access to buildings, access to technology, access to policies, access to know-how, access to people. We know that. But inclusion is also about encouraging in this case non-disabled allies to be part of our world and notice the benefits of recruiting and retaining and developing employees with disabilities. So, you know, I think there's a lot of benefits in disaggregating the responsibilities between the access leader and the ERG leader, but the reality is both are allies of each other, and so the reality is all organizations will do it differently, all organizations. We see, for example, subnetworks of user testing, mystery shopping, individuals, very patient people who want to be genuinely used to test out kits and to test out technologies, etc., and others don't want to do that at all. They're busy with their day job, and they are like “Thank you very much”. So yeah, we're challenged there but a good challenge I think. DAVID: Lets turn, Maybe spend five or ten minutes talking about the culture around accessibility and the role of networks. You talked a little bit about storytelling, and I wonder what your thoughts are about how that can be used and the telling of lived experience stories to kind of bring to life the reasons why organizations need to be accessible not just, you know, in their systems but in their workplace environment and the simple things like their communications and the videos from the CEO and those sorts of things. So be interested to hear your thoughts on that. KATE: Yeah, really powerful, really, really powerful. Telling gritty stories about actual individuals within an organization can be one of the most powerful drivers to sustain motivation and direction and ambition and standards when it comes to accessibility. So, there's nothing quite like -- and of course, it takes a little bit of practice. Not everybody wants to share their story, and the majority of individuals are continually perfecting the way in which they describe their story of disability or difference. It is never once and done, it's a story of continued practice. But where we see real power is where you can hone down somebody sharing a bit about themselves, a bit about blocks they have had, the challenges, the obstacles, the barriers, the inaccessible ways in which the business has interfered in them being productive, the solutions that then came about, particularly the individuals that helped unlock those solutions, our champions, our allies that can unblock that and then as a result of that how either productivity went up or efficiency went up and/or one's level of, you know, motivation goes up because of course we want to work with organizations who want us to do well. So, I think storytelling can be an incredibly powerful vehicle and a technique for accelerating the process of accessibility change within an organization, really, really powerful. DAVID: Yeah, and from my experience I hear it quite a lot when we get asked about how do you help people to see beyond compliance and beyond box checking, and it's very often that the thing that changes people, people's perceptions and people's approach to accessibility regardless of what version of accessibility that is, is watching somebody or being involved with somebody with a disability trying to complete a task, for example, trying to, you know, have a look at their pay slip, for example, or watch that really important video that lays out the next thing that their CEO wants to do or simply getting into the building, getting up to their desk, using that new fangled touch screen lift system that nobody thought about how somebody in a wheelchair was going to use or someone who is blind was going to use. I think that is really impactful. That's another type of storytelling, but it has to be, we have to be careful how we do those things and so that we don't -- so we don't overuse the -- certain individuals and we don't overplay somebody's ability or inability to do some things. So, it doesn't, we're not, so people understand that we are not going this people can't do their job, it is actually we're putting barriers in this person's way because I think it is very easy and a fine line between those things. KATE: Yeah, absolutely. It's about reframing, I think. DAVID: Absolutely. We talked a little bit; you mentioned a couple of times and I know that a lot of people use disability networks as a way of finding people to do testing and to get them to do user testing of their systems or of their buildings. I think the one thing I've kind of realized come to over the last couple of years particularly in this role that I have now actually is that I think they are, there's definitely a use -- there's definitely a way we can leverage disabled staff to do that. But I think we have to do two things. Firstly, we have to make sure that those individuals who are involved in that are trained and skilled in their assistive technology and in the types of things that they need to be talking to people about, and very often what I've seen is unfortunately where the individual is using a very sophisticated piece of assistive technology, but they don't understand it and therefore they come up with all these problems that aren't really accessibility issues. It's an issue with their setup or with their knowledge of their system. So, I think we need to make sure that the people we get involved in user testing like that are suitably supported in that way. And I also think we need to find ways to say thank you and rewarding them because it is an extra thing. As much as it's good to involve staff that don't have disabilities in that type of work, it doesn't happen very often because we roll things out, we just give people stuff. So that extra and the extra thank-you, the extra little reward and generally can't pay them in the way you might pay somebody externally, but I think there's ways we should reward people who volunteer and take part in that type of activity, and lastly it shouldn't be the only thing. We should definitely be encouraging organizations to have people doing this as part of their jobs and making sure we do it in a way that doesn't rely on the goodness and the kindness of volunteers. KATE: Great tips there, David. I really enjoyed hearing all of those. I mean picking up on your point on thanking people, it can be one of the simplest easiest things to do but it's the most commonly missed. You know, we see for example in our membership -- we do see some fantastic practice. I just saw the other day and if you're listening, Sodexo, well done. We saw an amazing thank you going out from senior business leaders to those who are doing a good job in terms of leading ERG networks, and I think when it comes to user testing and mystery shopping and using your own people to surface where there's constant challenges, a simple thank-you is really powerful. Doesn't do it, not everyone wants to be part of that user testing, but for those that do, they are investing their time in the organization in terms of how we could be doing things differently and better. So, a simple thank-you is very powerful. DAVID: Kate, I want to say a big thank you to you for generously giving us some of your time and talking to us about the world of networks and about that useful opportunity that accessibility leaders have to be closer to their disability networks. HOST: The IAAP Accessible Document Specialist (ADS) credential is intended for accessibility professionals who create and remediate accessible electronic documents and their related policies. The ADS credential represents an ability to express an intermediate level of experience designing, evaluating, and remediating accessible documents. The ADS credential is beneficial for people in or aspiring to be a User Experience Designer or Tester, Web Content Manager and Administrators, Project, Program, and ICT Managers and more! Check out the IAAP ADS certification webpage to learn more!     

Drone to 1K Podcast by Drone Launch Academy
S3/EP 7 Philip Hurst from Philip Hurst Media

Drone to 1K Podcast by Drone Launch Academy

Play Episode Listen Later Feb 16, 2021 49:42


DRONE TO $1K PODCAST SEASON 3 / EPISODE 7 WITH PHILIP HURST   Philip Hurst is the owner of Philip Hurst Media.   Introduction   Philip got his first drone about a year ago. He was working for an architectural company and had the idea of using a drone for roof inspections. He ended up using his drone to take videos of ongoing construction projects, as well.   Philip felt like he was really onto something with drones.   He pitched the idea of incorporating more drone work into his job to his boss, but nothing ever really came of it.   In the meantime, Philip had been posting his drone work (cinematic videography, 3D mapping, photography, etc.) on Instagram, and it was catching people’s attention.   People were reaching out to him, asking if he would do drone work for them.   Philip knew he needed to get his Part 107 license so that he could start accepting these jobs and making money. Within a month of getting his drone, he took and passed the Part 107 Exam.   Philip was able to get enough business to quit his architecture job, start an LLC, and fly drones full time!   “It’s really about the hustle and the drive.”   Philip felt lucky to be able to learn how to fly drones with a DJI Mavic because it was pretty easy to fly that drone.   He dedicated lots of time to practicing flying and taking photos and videos.   He also spent time branding his business and adding more and more content to his Instagram page.   David: When you were still working at the architectural firm and starting to use drones for roof inspections, was that when you started practicing a lot? Or did that come later?   Philip was practicing during his lunch breaks at work. He actually had his first accident during one of his lunch break flights – on the first day he had his drone!   Philip took his drone everywhere. Whenever he had a free moment, he would grab his drone and start practicing.   He tried flying in difficult situations, like through tight spaces. He also tried flying the drone towards him so he could practice with the controls being backwards… which ended in a crash. Luckily, his drone was okay, though!   David: What was the first job you ever got? Did you reach out to people or did someone come to you?   Philip races mountain bikes and knew one of the promoters of a big race. The promoter reached out to him and asked if he could get some drone footage of the race.   After that, Philip went on Zillow and found $500,000+ homes. Then, he sent emails to the real estate agents that listed those homes and let them know that he would shoot footage of their listings for free. He said that the first listing would be free, and that his work would help get their houses sold. He sent out about 500 of those emails over the course of two days.   He ended up landing about 15 jobs from that email outreach.   Philip says that being willing to do free work is very important because it will be hard to land jobs if you don’t have a portfolio of previous work to show your potential clients.   “When I send them to my Instagram, the proof is in my work.”   Philip sends his potential clients to his Instagram page to see his work. BUT, he also sends them to other drone pilot’s Instagram pages and shows them what they SHOULDN’T want from the drone pro they hire. He’ll point out things like jerky, non-cinematic footage in others’ work, which helps him prove that his footage is smoother and higher quality.   David: What part of the country are you in?   Philip is in Ohio. He says that he is “the best in the Midwest.”   “When it comes down to it, I’m not just a pilot. I’m just also a media professional and I’m a cinematic photographer and videographer. So yeah, I can catch great content and I can do good drone work, but I like to find the value in my end product, because like I said, drone work are just establishing shots to help support a much bigger story.”   David: Of the 15 free jobs you landed from your Zillow outreach, how many of those turned into paying clients?   Out of those 15, about 8 of them have become routine clients for Philip.   Philip is also branching out into other industries. Some of his friends are shooting a pilot for ABC and they asked him to capture some establishing drone shots. Now, Philip’s name is going to be on IMDb!   Philip emphasizes that he started about 6 months ago. It’s awesome to see how much his business has grown in just half a year.   He says that his drone is one of his most powerful tools.   “You gotta put the time in. You gotta grind, you gotta believe in yourself. You gotta have that confidence. You know, you gotta walk the walk and talk the talk. Go out there and look professional.”   Philip says that you need to make potential clients feel confident in choosing to hire you as a drone pilot.   He also stresses that you need to be posting on all social media platforms. But, you can tailor your messaging on each platform.   David: How would you do something differently for Instagram vs. Facebook vs. LinkedIn?   For Instagram, Philip will post short, 15-second clips or stories. His Instagram grid is a bit more curated. He’ll curate his Instagram grid based on the seasons or even moods. The coloring and moodiness will change as you scroll down his Instagram feed. His stories are usually behind-the-scenes footage.   For LinkedIn, Philip likes to have his feed look a little more polished.   As far as TikTok goes, Philip says, “If you’re not on TikTok, you’re missing the boat.” He says that you can reach millions of people on TikTok. He says it’s a great place to brand yourself.   David says that one of his friends is on TikTok and that one of his posts got half a million views.   One of Philip’s TikToks actually got 5 million views in the first week!   Philip says that he treats his drone work very seriously.   When he gets home from a shoot, Philip removes his memory cards and uploads all of his footage so it doesn’t get lost. He also unpacks, cleans, and inspects all of his equipment. Philip says he treats his equipment well because it makes him money.   He says that networking is very important. If you want to be successful, get to know successful people. You never know who someone may be friends with or who they might be able to introduce you to.   Strive to become known as “the drone guy” or “the drone gal” in your town so that people will immediately think of you whenever they (or someone they know) need drone work.   Because David started Drone Launch Academy, many times people will reach out to him for drone work. Once, he made $1,300 on a shoot for commercial properties that a friend recommended him for.   Philip says that calling himself “the best in the Midwest,” saying his name is “Maverick,” and constantly talking about and posting about drones helps people to associate him with drones. When someone thinks of drones, they usually immediately think of Philip because of the way he’s branded and marketed himself.   Other drone pilots have actually reached out to Philip to see if he’d do a tutorial video on how he edits.   David says even if you have the best product on the market, if nobody knows who you are, you won’t get much business. You need to be willing to network and marketing your business so people will know about you.   Philip says that, “the squeaky wheel gets the oil.”   David: Are you doing walk-through videos for real estate? Or are you just doing photos? What’s your typical package for people?   Depending on the client and their needs, Philip can do interior and exterior photos (including HDLR photos with bracketing, flash photography, and editing), virtual staging, virtual tours/360 Matterport tours, 3D exterior mapping, cinematography (both aerial and ground), and walk-through video tours.   David: What do you charge?   For aerial photos, Philip charges $250/hour. His starting price for a video (for an up to $400,000 house) is $350. For houses above $400,000, he charges a $1 per $1,000 listing price for video (for example, for a $3 million home, Philip would charge $3,000 for a video) because there’s usually more places to film in a more expensive home. Also depending on the size of the house, he’ll usually do Matterports for about $300, with a same-day turnaround. For each house, he’ll probably do around 20-50 photos. For 50 photos (which are edited and use HDLR, flash photography, removal of chips on walls, and other high-touch edits), he charges about $400.   He adds extra finishing touches to his photos and videos because he wants to help sell the house. Of course he needs to make money with his business, but he really wants to build relationships with people and help them sell their houses.   David: It sounds like you’ve been making money in the real estate area, but you’ve also gotten some other interesting jobs, like the mountain biking thing. Do you have any other, more outside-of-the-box jobs? What’s one of your favorite, non-real estate related gigs you’ve gotten?   Philip really likes doing product photography and brand marketing. He’s shot footage of wakeboards, boats, and outdoor events. He’s also working with models to create demo reels for their modeling career. He also has a couple of weddings booked.   David: You said you started about 6 months ago. What would you say is your average revenue per month?   Philip says that he’s making about $3,000/month. He makes sure that a percentage of his revenue goes back into the company, a percentage goes towards being able to buy new equipment in three years, and a percentage goes to him, and a percentage is put aside for taxes.   David points out that if you have a W2 job, the government will hold your taxes… but if you have your own business, you are responsible for putting aside money for taxes.   Philip says that he’s actual had someone tell him that he’s not charging enough for his drone services.   Don’t forget to enter our weekly giveaway before 2/23/21 for a chance to win one of 5 prizes (including a free 15-minute coaching call with Philip and David): https://dronelaunchacademy.typeform.com/to/lWpVfLpq   Connect with Jonathan: Facebook: Philip Hurst Media Instagram: @philiphurstmedia YouTube: Philip Hurst Media   Have a Drone Business? Want to be Interviewed for Season 3? Complete this questionnaire: Drone to $1K Business Owner Application   Training from Drone Launch Academy Part 107 Exam Prep Course ($50 off) Aerial Photo Pro Course ($50 off) Aerial Video A to Z Course ($100 off) Aerial Roof Inspection Pro Course ($100 off) Drones 101 Course ($20 off)   Other Places to Listen iTunes Stitcher Spotify TuneIn  

Sixteen:Nine
Travis Peterson, Snap Install

Sixteen:Nine

Play Episode Listen Later Feb 10, 2021 33:36


The 16:9 PODCAST IS SPONSORED BY SCREENFEED – DIGITAL SIGNAGE CONTENT Companies that specialize in deploying digital signage networks don't always get the kind of respect they deserve in this industry.  They can get called "hang and bang" guys, when in reality the job is complicated as hell. Getting digital signage networks properly installed and running across hundreds or even thousands of locations involves a LOT of project management and coordination, and a lot of vetting and training to ensure the techs who show up know the work, what to do and how to behave. Travis Peterson started Snap Install about 10 years ago, having learned his installation chops working in home AV systems. Those can be fun jobs - putting slick audio and video systems in the homes of stinkin' rich people - but to scale an installation business, you need high volume commercial work. Based in Minneapolis, Snap Install now has a big core staff and hundreds of trusted contractors around the US and Canada, who take on high volume digital signage deployments in venues like restaurants, retail and health care. We had a great chat about the challenges he always faces, and the bigger ones presented in the past year. We also get into where Snap starts and stops, and why his team does the stuff they're good at, and leaves things they probably could do to their partners. Subscribe to this podcast: iTunes * Google Play * RSS TRANSCRIPT David: Travis, thanks for joining me. Can you tell me, because maybe not everybody knows what Snap Install is all about?  Travis Peterson: Yeah, thanks for having me, Dave. Snap Install. we're a nationwide service provider. We're located out of Maple Grove, Minnesota. For those of you not familiar with Minnesota, it started in the twin cities area, and we are a nationwide service provider of skilled labor. So in other words, we're brokers of services.  We have 54 employees at our corporate office and then 700+ contractors across the country that worked for us directly. Businesses and manufacturers hire Snap to provide installation service solutions really from coast to coast, so our job is: we represent our clients in a professional manner and follow up on the design scope of work to get the job done. Now that job could be a thousand plus site rollout across the country or one service call in a rural area.  David: Are you focused just on digital signage or is it one of many things that you do? Travis Peterson: Digital signage is the primary focus and represents the majority of our business. But we also have two other verticals that are defined. One is the healthcare industry and then another one is the relocation of executives across the country, their residential homes actually. David: Oh, really? Interesting. So what do you do with that?  Travis Peterson:  It's actually one of the main reasons the company got started. I was fresh out of college. In my second job, I was working for a company back just over 10 years ago and that company had a similar business model, but it was B2C compared to our business model B2B, and back then you go to Amazon, you could throw a TV in your cart and you could have added installation to it. The company I was working for, we would send the technician out to the home.  And I started a B2B platform there and worked with some relocation companies, and executives moving across, they got expensive equipment. We would dismount their equipment, movers pack it up, ship to the new house and then we'd reinstall it. As that company as much as I loved working there and really got my first taste of a small business, it's where I became addicted to the small business platform. I realized that as it became unethical, I had two choices. One: go to sell insurance like my dad and possibly golf, probably a lot more and have a lot more freedom and residual income coming in or start a business. And I decided to start a business and I went to one of our biggest clients at the time, as that business was falling apart and said, “Hey, if I started a company, would you follow me and be my first customer?” And he said, absolutely. We had a good working relationship. He knew that the company wasn't doing well and he asked me two questions. I'm 26 years old at this time. And he said, “Do you have any money, Travis?” And I think I might've had about $5,000 to my name and I said no, and he said, “do you have a business plan?” In my head, I was saying, what the hell is a business plan? I said, no. He said hop on a plane and fly out to Philly, let's talk. Did that and we put together Snap Install and the focus was primarily three things? We call them our three pillars. Our people, what I'm most proud of is our culture. Our partners, which are all of our customers, and then our technicians across the country. And with that focus on those three pillars, we've really over the last, it'll be 10 years here in September. We've seen success. And as I was stating the primary focus, the reason we started was the relocation and that's what his business, his other business does is they help relocate executives and we do that AV work for them. So as we succeeded with that, we branched off over the last 10 years into the healthcare facilities, into the digital signage world.  David: Yeah, I would imagine when you looked at digital signage and thought, “okay, the  one and two gig things with the executives is interesting, but if we want to scale, we've got to find something that offers scale and signage does that.” Travis Peterson: You nailed it. The onesie twosies are great, but when you get the thousand site rollouts, that's really our bread and butter and it's really where the company grew.  David: When companies describe themselves as service providers, I always push back on them and say, where do you start and where do you stop? What's the range of services and what's the stuff you don't do?  Travis Peterson: I think that's a great question and I think that question is just as important as what you do. One thing we are not is we don't provide system consulting or design. We don't provide any hardware or software and we also don't run a knocking system for system monitoring. Plenty of other companies do all that stuff and we don't, and we're also the type of service provider that some others aren't out there. We know when to say no. We know when to say that either when our partner isn't going to set us up for success or when it's just not in our specialty. Think high-level integrations. We have boots on the ground across the country. We have high-level technicians and we also just have warm bodies that sometimes just need to show up and swap out an HDMI or turn off a PC player to get a backup and running and all those skill sets. We aren't the type of company that's going to say, “Yes, we can do that.” We make sure that we can define it and follow through on the scope of work and then get the deliverables back to our customer and represent them in a professional manner as well.  David: There are some of your competitors who seem to be focused on specific areas. I don't rattle them off cause you don't need to know that or listeners don't need to know that, but maybe they are heavy on C-stores or maybe they're heavy on QSR. Do you have a vertical that you tend to focus on or is it more just what do you need to do and let's talk?  Travis Peterson: So our goal is to provide solutions to our partners and we're a vendor-neutral company. We have partners ranging from that focus on healthcare, that focus on QSR, that focus on kiosks, and what we try to do is really embed ourselves with our partners and make sure that we understand what their goals are and that we can deliver on the scope of work. So when we say “our focus”, we're in all of those. But our focus isn't on a specific vertical within digital signage. Our focus is on our partners and making sure that we can deliver on their needs and they range in so many different ways. If you asked me where the majority of our work comes in the digital signage, I'd say it'd be through healthcare and QSRs  David: Healthcare would be interesting right now. I'm guessing you haven't done a lot in the last 10 months?  Travis Peterson: For some, yes. And for some, no. It's changed, COVID has changed the way we've had to do business and as many people listening can probably attest to. For one, on the healthcare side is the clinics. What we've seen a big increase in is them utilizing digital signage more to educate their customers: A, for social distancing, maybe. B, for not having to while they're sitting in the waiting room, it's limited usage in the waiting room or whatnot. They're utilizing a lot of those things then all the way back to the doctor's office. Putting signs up in the office. So while they're waiting for the doctor, it's there too. So for some customers, you're absolutely right. We've seen a huge decline and then other businesses actually boomed since Q2.  David: Okay. So yeah, you wouldn't be going into primary care facilities like a hospital or something like that, but tons of clinics are still seeing patients and they need to communicate with?  Travis Peterson: Yeah, and now we have some of our customers, they're even working on medical carts that offer the vaccine that we're helping integrate and deploy at hospitals too. David: How would that work?  Travis Peterson: So the card is designed in different ways to ensure that it holds the vaccine and then it monitors, without getting into too many details, it's providing care for the customers as they come through with minimal contact, for the actual nurses or practitioners to the clients. David: Now you said that you don't have a knock, you don't do recurring managed services and things like that. Is that a headcount choice or complication choice, or is it that you don't want to compete with your partner?  Travis Peterson: More the latter. As being vendor-neutral, it's also very important that we aren't competing with our customers as well. We are about 98% labor and that 2% falls into on-site materials that we sometimes are forced to provide. But some of the recurring services that we have started dabbling into that have worked well for both our partners and ourselves is preventative maintenance type work, we call them health checks. You go out and you do a thousand site rollouts. That equipment needs to continue to function and function properly. And us providing maintenance on that regularly, where we show up just to check it and provide the right deliverables back to our customers. So they have that peace of mind as they charge their customers to ensure it's actually working is good too and a lot of companies are being audited on that type of stuff too lately. So we can help them be proactive on that and make sure we get ahead of the game instead of them having to pay maybe for a 90 minute response time when they call us and it's a fire truck having a roar out there as quick as possible to get a PC back up and running. We've seen some value in that. And also with COVID, a lot of systems are collecting dust over the last nine months and those systems are going to need to be powered back on and up and running here soon. And we've seen a majority of our partners already proactively planning to get us out there and get those up and running. So it really depends on the retail store or the location, allowing us to come in and do that. But we've seen a big uptick in that as of late.  David: When you describe partners, would they most typically be like CMS software companies or are they manufacturers as well?  Travis Peterson: A wide variety of all of them, some resellers as well.  David: And so for a reseller or a kind of a local solutions provider, if they get a big gig, they just know that they couldn't possibly do a four-state rollout or a nationwide rollout? Travis Peterson: Exactly. Or sometimes they might just want boots on the ground. It might be an integrator, and they're trying to do a very large project in a state that they aren't located in, and they're going to fly out one specialist, but then they want eight of our techs to show up and run wires, mount screens, check and actions and they're the guide on-site, where they direct other people around.  David: Digital signage is one of those things that goes from very simple stuff, like you could get a gig in a workplace where you're putting in meeting room displays or video conferencing displays, that kind of thing, but it can go all the way to the other end where you have a 300 foot LED video canopy. Do you cover the whole waterfront or is there a sweet spot for what you do?  Travis Peterson: That's a great question. And it ties back to my point of us being willing and able to say no when we need to. If we can generate a scope of work that can be consistent from coast to coast, that's where we succeed. And that scope of work needs to be done from any tech across the country. And as you can imagine, when you're dealing with 700 plus technicians, their skill sets have a wide variety of range. So some of those high-end projects, we absolutely do those. Sometimes it's only in specific Metro areas. We work with our partners, but getting back to figuring out what the partner needs and the systems they're trying to put together and have assembled, that's where we come back working with them and say, we can do this, or unfortunately we aren't the right partner for this, but if you can send your people out to do this portion, we're happy to do the mounting and other things along those lines to make sure that we're meeting each other's needs. But it does tie back to that say no when you need to say no, because, in our industry, it's funny, you think you'd be in a good spot as a business when your competitors don't do a good job. But unfortunately for us, it's completely the opposite. There have been some companies, service providers throughout the years in this industry that have really put a bad name on the nationwide service provider. And that doesn't help us. That actually hurts us when our partners, as we're trying to sell to them, they already lost that trust as a small business. For me, every client we get, we have to work so hard to get it. So it's so important to keep those. And from their perspective, when you hire a nationwide service provider and they worked so hard to sell that deal, and then their nationwide service provider screws it up, it's going to be a pretty hard sell for us to get that trust back from them and tell them that we're different than what they've already experienced. David: How important is aftercare because, in the olden times when I used to travel, I would go through airports and mass transit, terminals, and all that sort of thing. And I would see video walls and they were badly in native calibration and had been left way too long. But I get a sense that in a lot of cases you have customers who, or somebody has the customers who put these things in, and then they forget about them or they're there, but they don't worry about the colors drifting and all that sort of stuff.  Travis Peterson: It happens all the time. I've even been in airports where we've performed installations, say at a quick-service restaurant, I've actually gone back there and fixed some cable management ‘cause I walked by and was like, “God, we've done that.” But when you're at a retail store or anything, you have so many employees going around and things get touched, cable management falls because someone was messing with stuff and the calibrations off, cause it's been two years. So you nailed it on the head. It's a service we provide and we feel the ROI is there, but some people don't budget for it. And when they don't budget for it, it's hard to justify adding that cost because it isn't always cheap either. But the value is there and there's nothing worse from my perspective when you walk into a restaurant and three screens are working, one's off, or the cable management hanging, and I know I'm going to be biased and nitpicky when I see something small or maybe the average consumer might not be. But that value is there from our end. David: Even my local bank, outside of Halifax, I go in there, there's almost always one of the screens out and I've got to a point where I know the manager and I'll walk in and go, “that one's out again”, and we've actually gone behind the counter and monkeyed around to try to get things going again, even though he doesn't know who the service provider is, I know who it is, but I'm not going to call them or anything else. But like you say, you get nitpicky and you want to see it working properly.  Travis Peterson: Yeah. If you ever know it's Snap, you better call me Dave. Cause we'll get on and fix it.  David: You're probably not allowed in Canada right now.  Travis Peterson: It's true. We do have technicians in major Metro areas though. David: Oh, there you go. Aren't there tougher environments than other ones to do, like what are the hardest venues to do installs in?  Travis Peterson: Pre COVID or post-COVID? (Laughter) David: Let's talk both. Travis Peterson: Pre COVID, I think airports always take the cake. It's just, you gotta go through more security. You got a lot of people walking around there for it all the time. Also overnight work, after hours. So we are structured in-house at our corporate office, we have full-time nighttime employees that are doing the project management because we have enough work where we do a lot of overnight work, but that's where it's tough. So we have different tiers of our technicians. We have primaries, tier one, tier two, tier three. And our primaries, they're our bread and butter guys. They're from across the country. They live in a brief Snap Install. When we have nighttime work and we need to utilize them for that, then during the daytime, which is still a high priority of work, we gotta bring in the other crews and make sure that they're up to speed with handling that higher workload that was there for the primaries that are covering the nighttime or vice versa. So it's a challenge for us logistically in making sure no matter when the work comes across or where it is, we're providing that high level of service that we promised to our customers. But as far as physical locations, I would always, I think put airports at the top, but we do a lot of work in airports because when you walk through airports, there's a lot of screens everywhere. There's a lot of business to be had.  David: So I've written about this, that it's a bit of a blessing in disguise. If there's anything good that comes out of COVID and there's not very much at all is that a lot of projects that would normally have to be done overnight and normally done if they're done through the day with a whole bunch of hoarding and a whole bunch of disruption, those venues are mothballed right now and you can go in and start and stop a project, just work in the daytime for a week and you're done without ever having to be there at midnight.  Travis Peterson: It has been the one blessing that COVID has provided us is fewer consumers walking around and more daytime work. But the other problem that comes with that is a lot of people just cut their budgets immediately and said no more technology, digital signage spending. I always see not a lot of our partners take some hits there too. So as great as it is, we would take pre-COVID any day over post-COVID in regards to the number of projects that were being awarded. But a challenge for COVID too is with us is I had to take my network team and I actually add two people to it. And our network team is really the team that drives the compliance and relationships with our contractor’s and it became a full-time job for two employees just to manage the different state regulations, county regulations for our techs because we felt the need for communication needed to be at an all-time high for our network. But also we felt the need to educate them and make sure they were aware really from Q2 all the way to now, is we were trying to stay ahead of the game and let the technicians know that safety is number one and what their state was regulated on, what they could and couldn't do and make sure in some cases we were considered, I'm missing the word right now, but a needed service, where if a cop pulled some of our techs over, which was happening, we had a sheet that could provide them that they were essential workers, and it was needed. And we were providing that documentation because we were essential workers, we were in healthcare. We were doing the type of work that the States checked off and said, “You're good to go.”  So that became a full-time job and that became a challenge. And we were seeing us spending resources and money on things we never had to in the past and it was good. And as much as COVID has hurt many across the country and many businesses, I look at it as a blessing in disguise. In one way, if you look back a year from now, the Q1 of 2020, Snap was firing on all cylinders. We were chasing our tail in many ways and then COVID hit and it really slowed our business down, about 70% for a little bit. But it allowed me to take a step back and work with my leadership team and take one step back to take two steps forward. And we didn't let anyone go due to COVID. But now, since then we've brought on 14 new hires and our complete company is restructured in a way that we're built for growth. And I strongly believe that if that never happened, I wouldn't be in the spot where I'm at as growing through some of those challenges. And then also our company. I think we'd still be chasing our tails in a lot of ways, instead of being prepared for what's ahead now which we feel 2021 in digital signage is going to come back and it's going to come back roaring and we're excited about it.  David: Your business is one that relies heavily on human factors. You've got your 60 or so full-time employees, but I think you said 700 contractors or something like that. That's a lot of personalities scattered across the country and you have to stay on top of them all. You have to rely on them showing up, and then you've got by extension, and I remember this from my own time being VP Ops of a company and running another company that you could have the install techs there, but you're still on the phone yelling at an electrician who was supposed to be there at 11 and it was 12:30 and so how do you get past all that and have you learned a way to do it? Travis Peterson: Lots of gray hairs and probably die at a young age. (Laughter) No, you know what, our whole business is built of relationships and we don't have a product that flies off the walls that we can box up and ship out to our customers. Our product is technicians, it's humans and humans make mistakes. I make mistakes every day. And that's okay. One thing with our customers, it's a sales pitch. We don't lie to our prospects. We tell them, “Hey, there's going to be days that you don't like us, cause we're going to mess up,” and that's okay because what we can promise you is every time we mess up, we're going to do the right thing. And we're going to figure out a solution to have you have a happy customer. But I'd be lying if I said there weren't days I wanted to pull my hair out. One of the most frustrating parts about this business model is our 50+ employees in-house, we could work our asses off, check every box, make sure everything's perfect, and that technician who we've maybe never physically met that we're sending out to a site failed us, and sometimes that's on us because we don't do our checks and balances, but sometimes it might just because he or she's having a bad day. So things we do to prevent that is: in the last five years, we've completely invested into our network team that builds the relationships, holds our tech compliant, insurance all the county, whatever it may be. And then also we have reviews with them and they know how they're graded. So our technology and other investment, we've made every tech out in the field has an app on their phone. It's the Snap app and that's where they do all their work. It's where they accept their jobs, where we can see when they're completed with the job, all the deliverables come through, but then they also know their rating on a job and some businesses out there have some prospects or even clients to this day, they ask us, “Hey, your competitors say they have W2 technicians across the country, you guys have subs, why are they better or why are you better than them?” And I dunno if it's about who's better or not, but I'm a strong believer that the contractor model if used appropriately and is accountable, is stronger than the W2 model in some ways. And I tie that all back to competition with the W2 employee. They might get complacent. They might not care as much. They might call in sick or do something elsewhere with subcontractors, you actually have that competition level and if you're transparent with them and show them that other people in their areas are knocking on the door, looking for that work, it doesn't mean that we make them compete with each other and hold it there to their throat every day. We actually are all about building relationships. Long-term, we don't just throw it out to a marketplace and cross our fingers. Our techs work directly with us and we build those loyal relationships. But that competition aspect is, you scratch our back, we'll scratch yours. But at the same time, I need you to keep up that accountability because I hold myself accountable and I expect you to hold yourself accountable. As we're paying you for this work.  David: There are some, I'm aware of at least two matchmaker services out there, that kind of dating services for AV techs. You put in a need and different techs in that region can respond to it and bid on the deal. Are they competition or is that really a onesy twosy thing that you don't tend to play in very often?  Travis Peterson: Onesy twosy thing that we don't play in at all. Our value add, some of our technicians, they work for our competitors as well. And we're okay with that. We're transparent and saying, that's fine as long as when you're doing our work, you're putting our work first and actually it's a two-way street. A lot of them come back and say, gosh, we wish you had this work because you treat us way better because you pay us quicker because you do this, and this. And with the onesy twosy company is that is our value add is really the project management feature we offer in house with those 50 plus employees. If you call Snap as a client of ours, you're calling the same person and they know exactly what job that you're talking about. They can connect you with the right person. They can provide the tier one or tier two support service they need to, and that pays dividends for our customers because there's nothing worse than getting a call from your customer saying, “Hey, the TV just fell,” or “Hey, this didn't happen” instead of a call from us being proactive and saying, “Hey, this happened. If you want to reach out to your customer, that's fine but here's what we're doing about it to make it right and here's how we're going to make sure your customer has a smile on their face at the end”  David: Are the jobs getting more complicated because you now have a lot of direct view LED and a whole range of new products. In many cases, the cabinets have different shapes. The mounting systems are different. There's very little in the way of universal standards or anything else. So you go into a job and the techs have to crack the manual and everything. All of a sudden, look at the back and go, okay, this is yet a new wrinkle that we haven't seen before. Travis Peterson: They're definitely getting more complicated and a real man read manuals is what we tell our kids. There are lots of techs out there that will say, “I got this, I don't need to look at a manual as anyone that's an expert in their field.” But it's become clear as the complications get thrown, our way is we have to make sure the documentation is there. We have to make sure the expectations are the same from what we think our customers expect to what they actually expect of us and lay that out and in our technology having checkpoints. So as a technician goes through the job, that person has to actually check off the things they're doing to ensure that we're following it step by step. Because if you do the wild west, so you just say, hang it up there and let's just hope it's right. That's not going to work. There are steps you have to follow and we work with our partners to make sure that it's laid out and very clear so that it can be followed with a scope of work. David: Last question: is there a piece of advice that you provide to your partners and if you're exposed directly to your end-user customers, you try to get across to them to smooth out the job? Travis Peterson: Yes. Some of them let us be more involved than others, but for us, it's communication and getting us involved as quickly as possible. Not to give advice and tell you what's right or wrong, but we've seen a lot of things. We've been in business for almost 10 years now. It's not our first rodeo. We do this all day, every day. And what some customers might not realize is checking those boxes and having the checks and balances prior to deployment is so important. And in the end, it saves them a lot of money and we don't do it to rattle their cage and cause more issues. We do it to make sure we're being proactive before that deployment starts so they can save money in the end and we can avoid fewer trips. David: Do you have to try to convince them of the value of a preliminary site survey?  Travis Peterson: I think it depends on the stage of the relationship we're out with our customers for those the ones that we've been working with for a long time, they see the value, maybe they didn't at first and then we had to sell it to them and show them why now they know it's there, but it is something that can be challenging at times where that customer doesn't want to pay that small fee for the survey upfront and we allow them not to, but in the end, they paid triple what it would've cost because if they avoided a couple of things that they could have covered.  David: Yeah. They think it's a cash grab until I find out actually, no, we should have done it. Travis Peterson: Exactly and it's definitely not a cash grab for us. It's more of a break-even to cover our asses on some other things going forward.  David: All right, Travis, I appreciate you taking some time with me.  Travis Peterson: I appreciate that.  David: Thank you.  

Drone to 1K Podcast by Drone Launch Academy
S3/EP 6 Jonathan Stettler from Steady Focus Media

Drone to 1K Podcast by Drone Launch Academy

Play Episode Listen Later Feb 9, 2021 47:59


Jonathan Stettler is the owner of Steady Focus Media, a business that specializes in providing photography and videography services for businesses and real estate.   Introduction   Jonathan has always been into drones. The first time he saw a drone, his friend was flying one of the original DJI Mavic Pros. Jonathan thought it was cool, but he didn’t actually buy a drone until years later.   Jonathan’s background is in photography. He had tried wedding photography, but he didn’t love it. He wanted to be a photographer, but he just wasn’t sure what industry he should try to get into.   Last year, Jonathan bought a DJI Ronin gimbal so that he could put together a video for his taekwondo school. He had never tried videography, but he decided to give it a go. Once he sat down to edit the video, he was surprised at how much he enjoyed the editing process. When he showed the video to the taekwondo school, they were really impressed.   Jonathan started Steady Focus Media to create promotional videos for small businesses. Once he actually started his business, he felt like he was officially a photographer and it really helped him to take it seriously.   He ended up buying a drone, and then a few months later, the COVID-19 pandemic hit. All of the small businesses (his normal clients) shut down. He wasn’t sure what to do. He had the idea that maybe he could make money with his drone. So, he looked into it and figured out that there were Part 107 regulations he’d need to learn so he could pass the exam to be able to fly his drone commercially.   He went online and found Drone Launch Academy. He enrolled in our FAA Part 107 Remote Pilot Exam Prep Course and it helped him study for and pass the exam on the first try.   Then, he enrolled in our Drone to $1K program, which helped him to grow his business.   David: How’d you get your first client?   He found his first client through a local Facebook Classifieds group. He put up a post that said he was looking for a realtor that wants a free home tour. He got responses back from people asking what the catch was. He said that there were no strings attached, he was just trying to build his portfolio. He ended up getting a response from a realty team. He went out to the house that they told him about and it was a super nice, $800,000 house that had an indoor pool and a tennis court!   Although the realtor loved the video, Jonathan didn’t really hear anything back from them. He tried to use Facebook to promote his business, but he wasn’t getting any leads. After about a month, he heard back from the realtor he had worked with and they asked if he could also do another video, as well as photos for another house.   As he landed more jobs, he had more and more material that he could use for demo reels and for promotional materials for his own business.   Jonathan stresses the importance of having a portfolio of your work. He says that doing free work when you’re first starting out will help you get the content and footage you need to build your portfolio.   “It’s the thing you need to start building the ladder to get to where you need to go.”   Since Jonathan started using drones when the pandemic hit, he hasn’t shot photos and videos for a single home without wearing a mask. He realized that photography and videography is a job that you can do even during the pandemic.   “It’s still a viable business, even when everything’s going wrong.”   Jonathan’s business slowly grew from $200 the first month, to $500 the second month, and then 3-4 jobs a week. Jonathan is now working with several local realtors.   David: How did you go from having one client to then getting booked 3 times in the same week?   Jonathan says that it all happened very organically. A realtor that he had been communicating with a month before ended up reaching out to him because she had a house that she needed photos and video for. Jonathan went out and shot photos and video of the house and sent everything over to the realtor that same night. After that, she became one of his consistent clients.   Because of the pandemic, Jonathan couldn’t physically go into realtors’ offices to introduce himself, so he decided to take a different approach. He created flyers for his business and mailed them out to local realtors’ offices. That landed him a job with one of the bigger realty companies. After that, their marketing director called him to ask if he did headshots. He took a headshot for one of their realtors and she then told the rest of the realtors about Jonathan’s business and his pricing. That led to lots of jobs for him.   Over the past 3 months, Jonathan has had at least one job per week.   David: Do you have a full-time job in addition to your drone work?   Jonathan does have a full-time job that pays well, which has helped him to be able to build his drone business. Jonathan loves that his drone work gives him the opportunity to be creative.   One thing that Jonathan stresses is that you need to be willing to put the work in if you want to succeed with your drone business.   “You absolutely have got to put the work in, because the thing is, if you think you’re just gonna stand around and, like you said earlier, the money’s just gonna come to you, it’s not gonna happen.”   Jonathan says that the initial startup costs for a drone business can be a little expensive, but once you put that money into the business, you’ll earn it back – you just have to persevere and stick with it.   David says that many times, people don’t feel like their work is good enough and they struggle to find content that they’re confident enough to post online. David says that you can post photos now, and then keep practicing and taking more photos. Once you have work that you’re happier with, just use them to replace the original photos you had posted.   Jonathan says that when he looks back at the pictures that he was impressed with 10 years ago, they are very different from the photos he’s proud of now. He says that your opinion of what looks good will change over time.   You can also work with others and help each other grow your businesses. David says it’s important to have a community of people to bounce ideas off of. He says that the drone community is usually willing to help each other out and give advice.   David says that a drone is just a tool. In order to succeed with a drone business, you need to know about the industry you’re in and you need to have business skills. Jonathan agrees that you really need to be knowledgeable about the industry that you’re working in.   “Walking into a job with confidence – that’s key.”   One way that you can get industry-specific knowledge is by offering to do free work. If you’re in the roofing industry, you could offer to do a couple of free drone roof inspections for a roofing company. If it goes well, you could build a friendship with the company and start to learn about the industry first-hand.   David: Do you want to stay in the real estate industry?   Although Jonathan didn’t initially intend to work in the real estate industry, he actually really enjoys it.   David: How are you pricing your drone services right now?   Jonathan has noticed that people don’t like complication. For photographs, Jonathan’s flat rate is $125. For video, his flat rate is $200-$250 (usually a 3 to 5-minute edited video with music). For 3D tours, Jonathan charges $200. He will do photos and video for $300. For all 3 (photos, video, and 3D tour), he charges $500.   The first question that realtors ask him is, “Do you do drone work?” Jonathan also doesn’t charge extra for drone footage.   Jonathan says that for many realtors, his pricing model is appealing because they don’t have to guess how much the photos, video, and 3D tour will add up to in the end.   In the future, Jonathan is hoping to make $100/hour. Right now, he usually makes anywhere between $80-$125/hour.   Don’t forget to enter our weekly giveaway before 2/16/21 for a chance to win one of 5 prizes (including a free 15-minute coaching call with Jonathan and David): https://dronelaunchacademy.typeform.com/to/fRpOCNNw   Connect with Jonathan:   Website: Steady Focus Media LLC Facebook: Steady Focus Media LLC Instagram: @steadyfocusmedia   Have a Drone Business? Want to be Interviewed for Season 3?   Complete this questionnaire: Drone to $1K Business Owner Application   Training from Drone Launch Academy   Part 107 Exam Prep Course ($50 off) Aerial Photo Pro Course ($50 off) Aerial Video A to Z Course ($100 off) Aerial Roof Inspection Pro Course ($100 off) Drones 101 Course ($20 off)   Other Places to Listen   iTunes Stitcher Spotify TuneIn  

Drone to 1K Podcast by Drone Launch Academy
S3/EP 5: Alex Castillo from LA Aerial Image

Drone to 1K Podcast by Drone Launch Academy

Play Episode Listen Later Feb 1, 2021 50:03


Alex is the owner of LA Aerial Image. Introduction Alex was the first guest when the podcast came out about a year and a half ago. Alex was an original RC plane flyer. Then when he was older, he was able to afford this stuff. One day at the airfield, he saw some guy with a quad copter and knew he needed to have one. Then he decided that he didn't just want it to be a hobby. So he took his photography background as a hobbyist and then just got into video and just started doing video with drones. He does a whole array of different things, such as 3-D modeling for construction sites David: Do you do real estate? I tell a lot of people to start with the real estate because it's easy to get in. Everybody knows a realtor and you can get jobs fairly easy, but you can't stay in the industry. For Alex, he says, it's just not fun. In the meantime, he picked up an Amazon prime show called The Bay and he’s also been shooting for the Pop Star network for three seasons now. David: How did you land your first construction client? What did they want? My first construction job was subcontracted from another guy. They did some progress shots and 3-D modeling. Alex has done 3-D modeling for rock quarries too, so they can judge their materials and measure them. The person who subcontracted to him found Alex on Google. He needed a pilot in LA because he was getting business there but lived in Oregon. David: One thing people are asking who are interested in industries like construction, but don't know the lingo, is “How do I give a sales pitch to an engineering firm or construction or contractor?” What would be your sales pitch for 3-D models? I don’t have to do sales pitches right now; the contractor is doing them. I learned a lot of the lingo onsite because when I first went in, I didn't know either. I learned the lingo just talking to the guys onsite. For the most part you just need to explain that it will save them time and money. Construction guys are busy as hell. If you can send them an “as built”, which is a PDF that shows all the information. David: How often did they have you go out there and do a 3-D model of the whole site? It depends on where they're at in the building. In some cases it was once per week, in others cases every other week. “We’re going to do a testimony video of one of the biggest companies we work with, how they used the 3-D model, how it worked and how it saved them money. We’ve saved them tens of thousands of dollars in the long run.” David: How much are you able to charge these construction companies or engineering firms for flying every other week and doing a three D model? About $1500 bucks a flight in total is what the contractor charges. It takes Alex only about 45 minutes to do a model and then he makes $300 when most of the guys on the site made $50 or $60 an hour. David: What’s your favorite type of thing to work on: What's the most fun for you? What do you like doing the best? “I like the film stuff; I like being on set. As the drone guy, there’s lot of waiting around, which can be a little stressful, but other than that, it’s fun.” David: Do you think the Inspire 2 has helped you get those jobs? Yes, for sure. If you don’t have an Inspire 2, they’re not going to be hiring you for that job. David: What would you say you’ve learned that's new in the drone world? Are you getting better at the stuff you already know how to do, or do you feel like you've honed any specific skills? With nine years of drone flying under his belt, Alex has had more crashes in the last couple of years than ever. “I think I got complacent with my flying and I'm thinking ‘I got this.’ I think I need to get back to the basics and be a little more aware. I got a little loose.” Sometimes you might just get on autopilot and not really be thinking it through as carefully.   David: When you're flying for these construction sites, do they require you to have a tight amount of insurance? You have to have insurance and a lot of times it's at least 2 million. It could be up to 5 million. They have really expensive workers' comp and they have to pay the personnel. They preach safety all day long.   David: What’s changed from getting business now from when you were first doing it. Now, are you actively searching for any business or it just all comes to you? Alex says he wants to get better at looking for it. All his work lately has been “just coming to him.” He spends about $50-$100 per month on Google Click ads. And, he says, he doesn’t even get that many people from Google. Most of it is referral. “As long as you’re good at what you do, they're going to call you back or they're going to pass your number to someone else. Don’t get discouraged. You have to work actively on your business to grow it.” Alex says it isn’t about just buying a drone. You have to learn to be a good business owner, provide good customer service and create relationships. You might have to do some free jobs here and there to get the people to know your services and to know your work. Alex says, “Just start somewhere and build it.” Connect with Alex: Instagram: @laaerialimage Have a Drone Business? Want to be Interviewed for Season 3? Complete this questionnaire: Drone to 1K Business Owner Application Training from Drone Launch Academy Part 107 Exam Prep Course ($50 off) Aerial Photo Pro Course ($50 off) Aerial Video A to Z Course ($100 off) Aerial Roof Inspection Pro Course ($100 off) Drones 101 Course ($20 off) Other Places to Listen iTunes Stitcher Google Play Spotify TuneIn

Atheists in Recovery
5 Ways to Increase Your Self-Esteem in Recovery

Atheists in Recovery

Play Episode Listen Later Jan 14, 2021 12:18


Welcome to today’s show! Is low self-esteem holding you back? In today’s solo episode I outline 5 ways to banish negative self-talk, increase self worth and take back your relationship with yourself to keep you from “ruining” your recovery. WHAT WE’LL LEARN Listen to your language. They are the sentences that begin with, ‘I am…’ or ‘I am not…’.  Who AM I? (think of the messages you received from childhood) Many factors went into creating this inner self. The Goal is, No Self-Esteem. The “cure” for low self-esteem isn't high self-esteem, it’s no self-esteem.  The Story of David How to Accept Yourself for Who You Are. Stop judging yourself! Questions to ask yourself. (an exercise).  Write these questions down and answer them. Our brain is a problem solving vessel!   RESOURCES MENTIONED The Masculinity Dilemma:  covert depression and self-sabotage   Schedule a free 15 minute 1:1 hypnotherapy consult here. For more info, head over to atheistsinrecovery.com and subscribe to our email list. And thank you for listening!   Leave an honest review on ITUNES.  Your ratings and reviews really help and I read each one. Subscribe on ITUNES If you enjoyed today’s episode, please share it with friends, family, and other professionals by using the social media buttons on this page.

Drone to 1K Podcast by Drone Launch Academy
S3/EP 1: Liam Abrigg from Bentley Studios

Drone to 1K Podcast by Drone Launch Academy

Play Episode Listen Later Jan 5, 2021 52:35


Liam is a Photographer/Videographer and Owner with Bentley Studios Introduction: Liam specializes in photography and video, mostly in the wedding industry, averaging about 40 weddings a year, and incorporating the drone. He also takes photos of the transitions of projects for roofing companies. David: Let's go back, let us know how your business started from the beginning... Liam has been an entrepreneur since he was 15. He started in the iPhone repair business, doing that for three years, repairing over 300 iPhones and saving $10,000 to fund his photography business. He got his first camera was when he was 13. He became the school photographer in High School, when a teacher asked if he would have any interest in filming her wedding.  At 16, Liam sweated through five shirts filming his first wedding. He also realized he loved being a part of someone’s special day, giving them their video or photos and seeing them tear up. After that, he started doing social media videos. He’d call local businesses and say, “I'm starting a business and want to try to get into social media. I see you guys are lacking in that area and I would love to help.” He got a lot of practice doing video production this way. David: What kind of reception did you get when you'd reach out? Some turned Liam down, saying they had their own thing, or they didn’t want to dabble in that. Some said they appreciated that he wanted to do it for free and would give him the opportunity to do so. Liam valued that as a networking opportunity. He got turned down a lot and found out he’d get a better attitude and could find a way to not offend anyone and help people out. David: How did the transition happen from dabbling with free stuff and reaching out to businesses to progressing into your first paying client? Toward the end of high school, Liam did a lot of senior photos which led to more paying opportunities. Every once in a while, he’d try to reach out and get opportunities to film a wedding. As he started to have more work to show people, he started to get booked more. Liam owes a lot of his success to word of mouth. He loves to go out and talk to people and create those friendships. David: When did you start first dabbling in drones? Around the end of his senior year, Liam bought a Phantom 4pro and fell in love with it. At that time, not many local people had any drones, so there was a lot of good opportunity in front of him. David: A lot of people get a drone, then want to know how to start getting clients and paying gigs. So, did your free work just turn into paying gigs or did you have a strategy to start making money? Liam had a gradual increase since he’d started out pretty cheap. Over time, as he had more experience, and his portfolio got larger, he gradually increased his prices because of his experience and equipment. Also, people would see his work on Instagram and message him. Liam says, “It was like a large spider web that expanded, but it was a lot of networking that led to those opportunities.” David: What do you do for your social media? Do you have a system, every time you shoot something, you put it on Instagram or Facebook? Liam has a system. After every shoot, Liam always puts a nice grid on Instagram. He says the first thing people look at when they go onto your page is your grid. The “grid” is some type of theme on your whole feed. Liam says if people see your page and it’s too eclectic, they will bypass it. David: What were you charging for a wedding when you first started out? Liam would charge $500 for a wedding, giving clients an 8-15 min highlight video. He wanted the experience and was young at the time so to make $500 on a Saturday was great. Now, his videos showcase the whole day and the client has total control over what’s in the video. The average price for that is $3000. For photos, he charges an hourly rate of $300 and then there's no minimum or maximum on the hours. An entire wedding runs about $4500-$5000. David: When did you start breaking out into other areas? At the end of high school, Liam got more into the drone. Where he lives—in Youngstown, OH—there are tons of realtors. He’d see on social media that a lot of them were just using their iPhone to take photos, so he offered to do houses for free, saying he wanted to learn. At that time, he was trying to incorporate more of the drone to become the go-to drone pilot in the area. That’s when he fell in love with the drone. Liam still has seven realtors that he messaged on Instagram when in High School that he still does houses for. After he did one house for free, he’d offer to sit down and see what kind of price they wanted to pay. Typically, he’d charge $250 for a full photography package and using the drone would be another $100 on top of that. David: How much of your business is with real estate agents? It sounds like you might be more focused on weddings. Liam is more focused on the weddings, which is where the money is. He has four employees, so he'll double book weekends. He says people LOVE drones at weddings—they think it’s the coolest thing. He also does a decent number of aerial photos for roofing companies. And, sometimes, walkthrough real estate tours for $150. Weddings have led to different opportunities, including meeting an owner of a roofing company locally that specializes in schools and large commercial properties. He asked Liam to film the progress of projects to display to potential clients. Liam goes out once every two weeks to take about 15-20 photos and a 360-degree video of the building. A typical roofing project on a commercial property is 8-10 weeks. He charges a flat rate of $300 per shoot which includes video editing. At the end, he puts together a 1-2 minute video of a time lapse of the whole project. David: When you started with that one roofing company, did you see what they wanted and you reached out to other roofing companies, or how did that work? These companies don't like anyone to share their drone stuff but they will share it with other roofing companies or partners. Liam has gotten contacted from partners or other connections within the contracting industry of his first roofing client. David: Let’s look at a snapshot of your week. How many drone or video productions jobs, including weddings, would you say you're going out to each week? The week prior to the interview, Liam had three drone shoots for the roofing company and then two promotional videos for local businesses—which are “about me” stories that they can put on social media or their website. With Covid preventing people from going to their businesses now, a lot of them want to provide opportunities for people to watch what they offer online. He also had a wedding on Saturday. His average week is about 5-6 jobs.   David: Can you let us know your average revenue in a great month and a slow month? In summer, Liam averages between four and five weddings a month, then usually three projects during the week. In a good month, he averages $10-12,000. In a slow month in the winter, he can make $3000-$5000. David: What advice do you have for me on how to get started and get and get going? What would you say? Liam says the Mavic Mini is a great starting point...mess around with it for a while. Then, after some time, he says to jump up to Mavic Air. Go take some photos and get experience to feel comfortable. Liam also watched a ton of YouTube tutorials on how to get good drone footage. David: When someone then says, “I’m ready to get my first client. How do I do that?” What would you say? Liam says social media is a great platform to use, since everyone's on it. Jump in with the realtors. “They don't pay very well, but starting out, you're not going to make very much anywhere.” Liam says think that the more jobs you get under your belt, the better you look. Then start to DM a bunch of real estate agents. They love their social media stuff. Have a good grid that showcases what you do. When the agents click on your profile, you want them to see you have cool stuff and it's organized. Resources Website: www.bentleystudiosusa.com Instagram: @bentley.studios or @liambentley_15

The /Filmcast (AKA The Slashfilmcast)

The Slashfilmcast is launching a Patreon! Support us at  http://patreon.com/filmpodcast. On Thanksgiving day, Devindra baked a turkey, David enjoyed a feast, and Jeff got a little too much gravy. For the feature review, the cast has a heated conversation about Run, a horror-thriller film directed by Aneesh Chaganty and written by Chaganty and Sev Ohanian.  Use #slashtag on Twitter to recommend a title for us to watch. Thanks to Mike C for building the Hashtag Slashtag website: https://hashtagslashtag.com/ Thanks to our sponsors this week: FuboTV, Pretty Litter, Paint Your Life Go to http://fubotv.com/FILMCAST for a 7 day free trial and 15% off your first month. Visit http://PrettyLitter.com and use promo code FILMCAST for 20% off your first order.  For 20% off and free shipping of your painting, text FILM to 64-000. Weekly Plugs David - Undoing review with Tara Ariano (Patreon) (https://www.patreon.com/posts/44499396) Jeff - Gratitude to all our listeners   Shownotes (All timestamps are approximate only) What you’ve been watching (21:14) David - How to with John Wilson (with YouTube Anatomy of a Scene (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RCNsx_NyNOU) ), Panic Room, Gunda Devindra - Mangrove, Happiest Season, Saved by the Bell (Peacock), Fresh Prince reunion   Jeff - The Flight Attendant, My Octopus Teacher, Seth Meyer: Lobby Baby Feature  (~1:27:46) Run Spoilers (~1:40:37) Support David's artistic endeavors at his Patreon (https://www.patreon.com/davechen) . Listen and subscribe to David’s newest podcast Culturally Relevant (https://culturallyrelevantshow.com/) and subscribe to his YouTube channel (http://youtube.com/davechensky) . Check out Jeff Cannata’s D&D show Dungeon Run (https://www.youtube.com/channel/UC3BYmMS1F4rNWsAkCaEVhoQ) and listen to We Have Concerns (https://wehaveconcerns.com/) . Listen to Devindra's podcast with Engadget (https://www.engadget.com/2019/10/07/engadget-podcast-microsoft-apple-pcs/) on all things tech. You can always e-mail us at slashfilmcast(AT)gmail(DOT)com, or call and leave a voicemail at 781-583-1993. Also, follow us on Twitter (https://twitter.com/slashfilmcast) or like us on Facebook. (https://facebook.com/slashfilmcast) Credits: Our music sometimes comes from the work of Adam Warrock (http://www.adamwarrock.com/) . You can download our theme song here. (http://www.adamwarrock.com/?p=3174) Our Slashfilmcourt music comes from SMHMUSIC.com (http://smhmusic.com/) . Our spoiler bumper comes from filmmaker Kyle Hillinger. (https://m.youtube.com/kylehillinger) This episode was edited by Beidi A.  (https://www.adamscostudio.com/) If you’d like advertise with us or sponsor us, please e-mail slashfilmcast@gmail.com. Contact us at our voicemail number: 781-583-1993 You can donate and support the /Filmcast by going to slashfilm.com (http://slashfilm.com/) , clicking on the /Filmcast tab, and clicking on the sidebar “Donate” links! Thanks to all our donors this week! (https://audioboom.com/posts/7736975-ep-594-the-nest/edit)

Leaders in Customer Loyalty, Powered by Loyalty360
Loyalty Live Session | David VanWiggeren, CEO, DropTank

Leaders in Customer Loyalty, Powered by Loyalty360

Play Episode Listen Later Aug 24, 2020 32:33


David VanWiggeren, CEO, DropTank, and Loyalty360's Mark Johnson discuss customer loyalty/CX trends and the changing industry landscape.Here are questions that Mark posed to David:• How do you define customer loyalty and what does customer loyalty mean to your organization?• What is the biggest challenge or opportunity you see in customer loyalty today?• What is one brand (or a few) that you think do an exceptional job of creating customer loyalty and why?• What is a brand (or a few) you are most loyal to and why?• How have you seen COVID impact your clients or brands in general – and what brands have you seen successfully pivot or reinvent themselves during this time?• COVID-19 has had a significant impact on brands’ marketing strategies this year. What are your clients asking of you right now and how has that changed from what they were asking of you at this time last year or earlier in 2020?• What is one piece of advice you would share with brands looking to improve their customer loyalty or experience strategies?• Look five years from now; how do you think loyalty programs, strategy, or customer experience will evolve?Loyalty360 is hosting speakers in a live stream format, featuring conversations on customer loyalty and experience news, trends, insights, and opportunities for marketers. During the live stream sessions, guests are welcome to tune in to the live broadcast on Loyalty360's YouTube channel, ask questions, and have them answered in real-time.Visit http://www.loyalty360.org

Park City Gospel Church
Oh, To Have the Messiah Swear a Permanent Covenant to You

Park City Gospel Church

Play Episode Listen Later Aug 23, 2020 50:18


Sermon Outline The Lord's hand is on His messiah which causes both great affection and great jealousy The Lord will not let His messiah's life be taken from him An everlasting covenant with the Lord's messiah comes with both humiliation and blessing Family Discussion Questions: How did the Lord demonstrate that His hand was upon David and would bless David's role as anointed king (little 'm' messiah)? David's life just couldn't be taken from him -the Lord would not let anyone stop him from his saving work of Israel. What does it say then about the love of Jesus for the church that He did die, but that he willingly laid down his life rather than it being taken from him? What was the cost for Jonathan to be in a covenant with David? How many of those 'costs' are costs that you also face to being in acovenant with David's great Son Jesus? What is the difference between a 'cost' (which we would strongly affirm) to belonging to Christ and paying for it (which we would strongly reject)? Jonathan's greatest hope for his covenant with David was going to be realized after his death. How is that similar for Christians in covenant with Jesus? What is the one "thing" that puts a person into a permanent covenant of love with Jesus?

Peak Performance Selling
David Torres

Peak Performance Selling

Play Episode Listen Later Aug 12, 2020 57:33


Key Talking Point of the Episode:David’s background: How he turned his anxiety into a careerThe overlap between sociology and salesDavid’s definition of EmpathyHow David is building his team during this Covid periodWhat does purpose mean to David?David’s first commission from the million-dollar clubQualities of top performersHabits that help David get better and stay afloatHow does David handle bad times?Does David love winning or hate losingQualities of good leadersDavid’s Lessons on Leadership from Jurgen KloppKey Milestones of the Episode:01:41 David’s Background and how he got into sales04:34 David’s first interview07:51 The overlap between sociology and the business environment 12:02 What is empathy for David? How does David build empathy with his team?18:12 What types of things is David trying to build with his team during these bizarre times of Covid-19?26:03 David’s definition of purpose for himself and his team?30:11 How David used his commission from achieving the Million-dollar club35:21 What are the qualities of top performers, according to David?43:12 What habits and routines does David have in place that helps him get better?44.60 What does David do on a bad day? What gets him back to his best?49:14 What does success mean to David?50.01 Does David love winning or hate losing?50:15 Qualities of the best leaders that David has had a chance to work with52:01 Whom does David admire in sales? Magical Quotes from the Episode“Seek to understand, and then you can be understood.”“Sales isn’t just about bringing in revenue or about making the money that you make. Sales is really about making a business work.”“Somebody out there is going to be successful in spite of the circumstances. There is no reason why I can’t be that person. Why not me?”“You’ve got to earn it, every day.  Earn every single conversation.  The second you take that conversation for granted you start to fall off the horse.” “Build a weekly plan, that iterates daily.”“Attack every day with a sense of purpose”“I think part of the reason why a lot of salespeople burn out is we buy into the consumerism of sales.”“We buy into the idea of getting yourself the new watch, the new suit. For me it’s about what other things mean a lot more to you?  If I were to leave the Earth tomorrow I can say I made an impact here and that’s what makes me happy and give me passion to make every day that much better.”“Never expect anything of others, you wouldn’t do yourself.”“When you want to be the best, you stop cutting corners because doing the things that the best do means doing the things that they best do.”“1. Care 2. Find a way to be the best and continually do those things that help you continuously be the best 3. Learn from your mistakes.  The second I stop thinking I make mistakes, is the second I’m lying to myself”“Not about being the best of all-time, it’s about being the best that night day to day” Related Links:Jurgen KloppJurgen Klopp on LeadershipBill WalshDavid’s Linkedin

The Antonio Neves Show
30. An Inside Look At The NBA with David Nurse

The Antonio Neves Show

Play Episode Listen Later Aug 5, 2020 31:34


In this episode of The Best Thing, Antonio Neves talks to NBA life and optimization coach, author and motivational speaker, David Nurse. In a powerful conversation, David talks about what it's like to work with top NBA basketball players and how he responded when he was fired from his dream job with the Brooklyn Nets. This episode will shift your perspective off of you and your current situation and help you step into personal acceleration through the art of serving others.    LINKS: Pivot & Go: The 29-Day Blueprint to Redefine and Achieve YOUR Success David's website: davidnurse.com David's Instagram @davidnursenba   Quick Episode Summary: Get to know David How good is the 12th player? A healthy ego is self-aware It's just a scrimmage, but not to me. Small 1% steps will get you where you want to be The best thing When one door closes, four more open Rebounding from setbacks Failures are preparations for the opportunities to come It takes 10 years to become an overnight success If you make it about you, you'll never reach the spot where you want to be

Feeling Good Podcast | TEAM-CBT - The New Mood Therapy
198: Ask David: What if Your Negative Thoughts Aren't Distorted? Do Demons Cause Depression? And more!

Feeling Good Podcast | TEAM-CBT - The New Mood Therapy

Play Episode Listen Later Jul 6, 2020 40:21


Today, Rhonda and David discuss ten great questions submitted by podcast fans like you! I can’t find any distortions in my thoughts! What’s the cause of this? Crushing Negative Thoughts. Do you have to write them down? Can’t you just do them in your head? PTSD Question: Does the trauma have to be life-threatening and experienced in person/ How can I get over anxiety and panic? Do demons cause depression? How is Sara now? Is anger just “ossified tears?” How do you explain the basic concepts of CBT and cognitive distortions to patients who are not familiar with your work? Can I help myself as much as Rameesh did? How can I start a self-help group based on your book, Ten Days to Self-Esteem? How can I find my favorite podcast? I can’t find any distortions in my thoughts! What’s the cause of this? A new comment on the post "001: Introduction to the TEAM Model" is waiting for your approval https://feelinggood.com/2016/10/27/001-introduction-to-the-team-model/ Hi Dr. Burns, I just ordered your book and am writing my cognitive distortions daily. I ran into one I did not know how to label it. I am a 73-year-old, attractive woman, When I see a young beautiful woman having a great time, say in an ad, I feel angry, sad and jealous. This does not apply to family members only strangers. charlotte Crushing Negative Thoughts. Do you have to write them down? Can’t you just do them in your head? A new comment on the post "190: How to Crush Negative Thoughts: Overgeneralization" is waiting for your approval https://feelinggood.com/2020/05/11/190-how-to-crush-negative-thoughts-overgeneralization/ Dr. Burns, Why is writing the negative thought down important? Can’t I just pinpoint it in my head and simply switch the negative thought to positive one? I know it will not work but i am not able to convince others or myself why I have to write them down. Why is the writing process so important? After practicing for a while will you have the habit of think positively? I am wondering why some people have this way of positive thinking without even practicing? Toni PTSD Question: Does the trauma have to be life-threatening and experienced in person/ A new comment on the post "147: High-Speed Treatment of PTSD?" is waiting for your approval https://feelinggood.com/2019/07/01/147-high-speed-treatment-of-ptsd/ Hi David, I am a fan of your great work and contribution to psychology. I have a question about PTSD: does it necessarily have to be life-threatening in person or can it be caused for example by a threat via online message? Thank you! MB Thanks, MB, great question. Only your thoughts can upset you, not the actual trauma, so the answer is yes. Anything that is profoundly upsetting is profoundly upsetting, period! There is no objective way to measure the impact of any trauma other than via your own thoughts and feelings! This is so important, and yet most of the world, including those who have written the DSM-5 (and all earlier editions) / don't yet "get it." The DSM states that for a diagnosis of PTSD, you have to have some trauma that is “objectively horrific.” But there is no such thing! david How can I get over anxiety and panic? Debby asked a question about podcast 189: How to Crush Negative Thoughts: All-or-Nothing Thinking I have your book When Panic Attacks. I am at a loss at what to use to get over anxiety and panic. It is exciting because you said that you can get rid of both fairly soon; which would be great Hi Debby, Thanks for your excellent question! The Daily Mood Log described (I believe) in chapter 3 of When Panic Attacks is a great place to start. Do it on paper, and not in your head, focusing on one specific moment when you were anxious. Thanks! One teaching point is to focus on one specific moment, and not try to solve anxiety or any mood problem in generalities. A second teaching point is to record the situation, your feelings, and your negative thoughts you were having at that moment. This is always the starting point for change! You’ll find tons of resources on my website, feelinggood.com, including the show notes for all the podcasts with links, search function, and way more, all for free. You can learn a great deal if you put in the time and effort. For example, I am now creating a free class on anxiety and it will soon be available on my website! David Do demons cause depression? Brian W. commented on Podcast 189 on All-or-Nothing Thinking Hi Dr. Burns, Amazing podcast as always doctor Burns! Question: have you ever encountered anything in your patients that you might consider supernatural? I'm Catholic and there's the idea that demons can cause depression or mental illness. I know it sounds crazy, but I've seen weird things. Thank you. Brian Thank you for your question, Brian. Depression results from negative thoughts, not demons. That's good because you can learn to change the way you think and feel. The type of therapy I do is entirely compatible with all religions, including Catholicism, and there is often a spiritual dimension in recovery. All the best, david How is Sara now? Is anger just “ossified tears?” Dear Dr Burns, Though doubting that you’ll ever read or answer this, nevertheless I’ll cast it to the cloud for something-or-other! I’m an old fossilised blind British harpsichordist (good combo?!!) and a devoted fan of your podcasts, as well as selectively slowly making my happy way through the 27 hours of RNIB’s Talking Book version of ‘Feeling Good’ (Must tell you that the Braille Music Translation Programme I use invented by a great buddy in Pa. is called ‘Goodfeel’, so you guys must have something in common!). Alas I have 2 questions. First, as a ‘floating’ OCD sufferer for 70 years or so, I wildly enjoyed Sara’s ‘high speed cure’ in podcast 162. However, surely with this new Coronavirus threat – the virus remaining on cardboard for around 24 hours and other surfaces including shopping for at least 2 days or more -, her cure must have now been reversed? The fact, and I mean from much research ‘fact’ is that ‘what you touch could kill you’. Sure, it might not but, in as bad health otherwise as I am, I believe it’s imperative to be as careful as pos. which, courteously put, is screwing my brain! How about Sara?! Finally, well I suppose it’s a comment more than a question. I’ve been enjoying and, indeed, beginning to benefit from your section in the book on anger. I wonder though whether, unless I haven’t got there yet (which is eminently possible!!), you might have left out one aspect of anger? I’ve often thought that it, as well as hatred and violence could be designated ‘ossified tears’ and, believe me, in my case, if so, they’ve turned into unbreakable rocks!! Keep up the great work, Dr Burns. We all need such an unique communicator and erudite intellect as you, oh and I fervently hope you can stay clear of this virus. Very best and thanks, John Henry (Not the old American horse, . . . but rather a British, almost human John Henry!! David and Rhonda respond to both of John's questions! How do you explain the basic concepts of CBT and cognitive distortions to patients who are not familiar with your work? Hi David and Rhonda, You previously answered a question of mine on your podcast. It was quite helpful, thanks! I have a new unrelated question. While the live sessions have been very illuminating in many ways, your patients have always been trained therapists who are already familiar with the concepts of CBT and cognitive distortions. I understand this is an ethical necessity. As a family physician I struggle with that first step - how do you introduce the concepts of CBT and the cognitive distortions to non-therapist clients? I imagine it must take at least a full session just to do education on the distortions. This may be a question best for Rhonda. Thanks again! Calvin Hi Calvin, Thank you for another great question. If you prescribe the book, Feeling Good, it can help you and your patients in three ways. First, they’ll get all the concepts and some sound psychoeducation, saving you time. Second, the book is at least as effective as antidepressants, so it is prescribing something that may be very helpful with no side effects. Third, it will be a test of their motivation. Motivation appears to have a massive effect on recovery from depression. Also, there are tons of great classes in TEAM for beginners if you check them out at FGI (www.feelinggoodinstitute.com). There are also free classes on depression and other topics on my website, www.feelinggood.com. These classes may also help your patients. On the show, Rhonda will explain how she introduces these topics to her patients as well! All the best, David Rhonda’s note to Calvin: You flatter me, because all questions are best answered by David, but I will give it a try. I do ask all my patients to read David's book Feeling Good, which is superb at describing what CBT is and why it is effective. I have an intake telephone call with all my new patients before we start working together, and before they read Feeling Good. In that call I explain CBT like this, imagine a triangle that has Thoughts, Feelings and Behavior at each point. Your thoughts drive your feelings and your behavior. So, if you can change the way you think, you can change the way you feel. David gives the example of someone walking in the woods who hears a twig break. Imagine that hiker thinking that a murderer is creeping behind him or her, what do imagine he or she would feel? But imagine that same hiker thinking that his or her best friend is joining the hike? What would he or she feel then? There are lots of examples like that: two students who have studied the same amount. One walks into the test room thinking, I did a good job studying, the other walks into the test room thinking I should have studied more. Who do you think will do better on the test? This is an actual study that has been done, and if you guessed the student thinking more confidence did better, you would be correct. It makes logical sense. I don't explain cognitive distortions in my intake discussion, but when we first start working with a Daily Mood Log, after we have gone through T = Testing, E = Empathy, and after A = Assessment of Motivation, when we are going through the M = Method "Identify the Distortions" for the first time. I explain that cognitive distortions are embedded in our negative thoughts, and they are simply ways that our mind convinces us of somethings that aren't really true. By this time patients have read part of Feeling Good, so they have more psychoeducation. But I find if patients still don't understand the concept of cognitive distortions, as we go through the Identify the Distortions method, they soon understand what distortions are. I hope that makes sense, and that you find this helpful, Rhonda Can I help myself as much as Rameesh did? Hello Dr David, I saw how Ramesh changed dramatically and I want that kind of change in my life. but I am doubtful. It was you who managed to melt away his resistance using different techniques. Is it possible that we can manage to change ourselves so effectively? Shivam Hi Shivam, Thank you for this incredibly important question. Research indicates that many people have been helped by reading my books and doing the exercises, such as Feeling Good. Motivation and hard work are critically important in personal change and recovery. I am also working on a new app, and hope to get data to answer this exact question! Best of luck! Will make this an Ask David question, as it is so important! David How can I start a self-help group based on your book, Ten Days to Self-Esteem? Dr Burns, I know your book, Ten Days to Self Esteem, has a group leaders manual. Can anyone start one of those groups of do you have to be a therapist of some sort? Has anyone told you that they started one? How did they say it went? Any tips for starting one? Thanks Richard Hi Richard, Many pilot studies using this program with lay leaders have been effective. The program at my hospital in Philadelphia, also using lay leaders, was very effective. David How can I find my favorite podcast? Hi David I am a therapist and was reminded of one of your podcasts as I was listening to a particular patient. I wanted to share the episode and then couldn’t find it so felt silly. It was an episode where a father (perhaps Indian? Maybe a doctor?) empathizes and listens in a whole new way to his adult son and has a miraculous turn of events in the relationship- simply by being present and not being defensive when the son tells him how he feels about his father. It was beautiful and moving. A great example of “opposite action”- agreeing with the criticism rather than defending against it. Does that episode ring a bell and can’t you point me in the right direction to retrieve it? I know how busy you are. Thank you for your wonderful podcast and for any help you can provide. Thanks, Pam Hi Pam, It might be the follow-up to the live therapy with Mark. Use the search function on my website. He is from Iran, and is an OB-GYN doctor who has faithfully attended my Tuesday training group for years. He is one of my favorite people. Learning the Five Secrets takes lots of commitment and practice. He has formed his own Five Secrets practice group with friends and colleagues who are not shrinks. They’ve met weekly for years, so his skills are quite refined now. Thanks! David On the podcast, I emphasize the search function you can easily find on every page of my website, www.feelinggood.com. Pam’s comment on the Five Secrets is also important. Desire, commitment and ongoing practice are the keys to mastery! Rhonda and David  

The Remote Real Estate Investor
How Private Money Lenders Can Help You Close More Deals in Less Time

The Remote Real Estate Investor

Play Episode Listen Later Jun 26, 2020 39:08


In this episode we have David Young from RCN Capital tell us all about the world of private lending: what it is, how it works, who might want to use it, where the money comes from and how it differs from traditional lending.  --- Transcript: Tom: Greetings and welcome to the remote real estate investor. In this episode, we're going to be talking about what investors should and need to know about private capital. We're connecting today with David Young of RCN capital to answer all of our questions. Alright, let's do it.   -Theme song-   Tom: Awesome David. Well, first off, thank you so much for joining us. And, why don't we start by telling us a little bit about yourself.   David: Thanks to Tom and Michael for having me, really appreciate the opportunity. Yeah. My name is David Young. I'm the director of business development with RCN capital. We are a direct private lender headquartered in South Windsor, Connecticut, just outside of Hartford. And we do lend nationwide. I'm actually located personally in Boston, remote to the office as are some of our employees. And my background is pretty diverse, prior to arriving at RCN where I got to RCN in 2014, the company started in 2010 in response to the previous financial crisis. If you will, now, we're certainly going through another challenging period, but if you go back to the 2007/2008/2009 nine meltdown RCN was started in response to that, and I'll get to that a little bit more. So my background is spreads across a variety of things. I graduated from the United States military Academy. At West point, I was in the army active for about seven and a half years upon leaving the service. I took on a variety of roles, many of which were oriented around sales business development. I had executive level positions as a division vice president as well. I also ran a small business in central Massachusetts as a VP running a outbound and inbound call center and a variety of other roles spread across a lot of different types of skills and levels of experience that cover a lot of different ranges of medical, home improvement financing, and several others as well.   Tom: All right, that's great David, let's jump right into the meat of questions around private lending. So a lot of remote investors, they like to invest with debt, lot of great benefits to investing with debt. And there's this decision right of private capital versus more traditional loans that you would get in your personal home mortgage. Why don't you break down some of the differences between private capital and a more traditional mortgage?   David: Sure. So, you know, the more traditional route of a mortgage say going to a bank of America or Wells Fargo and applying for your typical 30 year mortgage is certainly an option and might be the best option for somebody depending on their particular situation. In fact, private lending essentially exists and evolves in response to those that can't be served by the traditional sector. So it's filling a gap that isn't being met in the traditional sense. So, you know, a traditional mortgage may be suitable if there are no issues to consider in terms of, you know, damaged credit, if there's not an extreme or even a high sense of urgency in terms of time and being able to complete a transaction in a very rapid amount of time, perhaps if there is no issues with, you know, citizenship, you know, private lending, a lot of the firms such as ours will work with foreign nationals, you know, with traditional mortgages or other, you know, hoops, if you will, that you have to jump through. There's a lot more that goes into the underwriting with a traditional mortgage in terms of looking at income verification, tax returns and so forth. So, but again, it may be the right route. Generally, the rates are going to be lower and a traditional mortgage, as you see right now, 30 year mortgages are somewhere in the low to mid threes and on private lending, you're not going to be able to get that low, but that's because you're being represented in a different asset class and there's different variables that come into play. So why would somebody pursue a private loan in terms of making a real estate transaction? That could be a variety of reasons. Let's just look at a typical fix and flip, if you will. Timing might be very critical. Somebody might be analyzing an asset that they want to move on and they need to line up financing on that. There may be competition for that particular asset, perhaps there is perhaps there isn't, but either way investors tend to feel a sense of urgency when they identify something that they want to acquire and then renovate and eventually flip. So private lending, generally speaking is going to give you a much faster response time. In other words, you can link up private lenders, such as RCN capital and fairly quickly get through the process and get approved and actually get funded on that loan. Why? Well, there's generally a lot less that goes into the underwriting and there's general early, a lot less in terms of a regulatory issues and traditional banks, you know, going back to the bank of America in order to administer and process your typical mortgage, there's a lot of regulation involved. There's a lot of issues that they have to consider. They're not necessarily the ones that are thrusting that upon you. Those are things that they must comply with, private lending, not as much, for example, we're not at least in RCN and many others as well. There's no check on tax returns. There's no check on income verification in terms of you don't necessarily have to have a W2 type wage job in order to be approved. And it certainly wouldn't hurt, but you don't necessarily have to have that private lending, particularly if we look at hard money fix and flip, you know, residential real estate where RCN focuses on non owner occupied residential it's asset based. So the focus is on the asset itself. And then other key factors tend to be the experience of the borrower. So how many transactions have the borrower has the borrower completed? We tend to look at the last, most recent 36 months by verifying if their name is on entity that completed a transaction. And then there's going to be a look at other things like credit score. But for example, in private lending, there are requirements or expectations on a credit score typically lower. In fact, maybe even much lower than in traditional mortgages case in point right now, just in response to the COVID crisis. In some tightening of lending standards across the board, both traditional and private lending, a lot of your traditional banks have really ratcheted up their standards and expectations. Credit score minimums have gone way up liquidity requirements, et cetera, that in and of itself is going to bump a lot of people over to the private lending space and private lending. Currently at RCN Capital, the minimum FICO is 650. If you look across all of our product categories, you're not going to find that at a Wells Fargo. So speed, credit requirements, the ability to be perhaps a little bit more creative with an approach and how to go about getting something done and being rewarded much, much more so for the asset itself. So is this a good deal that you're going for? You know, that's going to be a very high concern to a private lender. Yeah, nd the experience that you bring to the table. So do you know what you're doing? Do you have the experience, do you have the liquidity to accomplish it? That is what really matters as opposed to what, you know, a Wells Fargo or bank of America is forced to look at.   Michael: That's a really great point. Yeah, I was just going to ask you, you mentioned it in passing hard money is private capital and hard money. Are those two synonymous or do they really differ?   David: Yeah, that's a great question. Now again, I've been with RCN since 2014. Initially I wasn't directly on the real estate side, but a lot has changed as RCN originated in 2010. What private money consisted of in hard money was what a lot of people I hear now refer to as you know, kind of the old school where, you know, you know, a guy who might know a guy who could get you alone. And then when we say asset based, I mean, it's, there may, there may not even have been, and this still exists today, by the way, we compete with this and RCN where leverage, LTVs loan to values. If you will, to keep it simple, tend to be lower and you're more old school had money, maybe even no doc may not have require barely any documentation. And certainly not necessarily an appraisal or even running a credit score and for the purposes of just adding it to a file. So now when you kind of, it's almost, you know, a point of contention or even something that people joke with each other about in the industry where, you know, hard money has really evolved into a much bigger and more sophisticated ecosystem where more money comes in, where there's more requirements like just looking at the FICO, FICO requirements, FICO minimums. A lot of that is tied to where the capital is originating from to fund these loans. So there's institutional capital that helps. And not in all cases, there are funds. Well, there are private investors that buy loans directly, but institutional capital tends to come with certain expectations. The FICO is one of those where you have to check the box. If you will, the old school, if you will hide money, probably shrug their shoulders at that. Um, they're not concerned with that. They're not necessarily concerned with an appraisal. They want to see the asset and they're going to protect themselves by, in all likelihood having a lower level of leverage, lower LTV we had prior to COVID essentially the whole private lending, hard money space fix and flip space was getting, you know, leverages, you know, up to 90% or even higher with some particular vendors out there where you were getting 90% of LTV, plus a hundred percent of the rehab funding to close a loan on a flip, as an example, someone doing your so-called old school, hard money. I mean, I haven't heard of anybody doing that high of leverage in that space, but it's still out there. There's those people that, whether it's a lot of times it's speed, somebody will close alone very, very quickly with minimal underwriting work done aside from looking at the asset itself. So there's still a market for that, but there's a lot to your question, a lot of crossover or kind of a lot of blending they're one and the same in some ways. And then they separate from each other as well in different segments of the marketplace, depending on who you ask, different people have different interpretations as well.   Tom: One piece you touched on is room for, I don't know is creativity is the right word, but there's a little bit more variability in the different products in that it's just, there's way less regulation I'd say on it. Would you mind touching on that on some of the different products that, and maybe one of the more popular products specifically as a remote investor that you guys originate?   David: Yeah. One of the ones that really took off, uh, heading into COVID and we've now just activated it again is our 30 year long term rental. Okay. So this is a 30 year fixed, fully amortized loan, much like what many people are familiar with with your traditional 30 year mortgage that we talked about a couple of minutes ago. So 30 year fixed non owner occupied residential. We have that available on one to four units. This really came into play. It. This really took off like a rocket, uh, in March of roughly in the spring of 2019. I don't remember the exact date when we launched it, to be honest with you up to COVID. This thing was already approaching 40% of our originations at that point. And it gives people a lot of flexibility. We could look at portfolios of assets, so you'd have investors out there with say they had 10 single family residences and they had 10 different financing situations on each one. Maybe two of them were with a particular guy. I know a guy who knows a guy who gave them a bridge loan a couple of years ago. Maybe one of them was with someone else. And there was just all spread out everywhere. The 30 year longterm rental, you could take a whole portfolio and roll it into one transaction and get that entire portfolio into a 30 year fixed fully amortized mortgage. At that time, back in February, you know, rates were getting as low as four 449 on that, which is very low for non owner occupied resi. So you had that, you had the ability to look at those assets. So you may have one particular, if we stick with that example, one house perhaps was not cash flowing as strongly as the others. You weren't necessarily penalized for that. You weren't necessarily told that that one couldn't join the party, so to speak. That one was weighed against the portfolio as a whole. So we could look at the whole portfolio, also look at the investors level of experience, their level of liquidity and take all of that into account to make a decision. We have an executive committee at RCN Capital that looks in each and every transaction and they can exhibit, you know, a certain amount of creativity, if you will, at any point in time to see if the transaction truly makes sense, as opposed to trying to run that through a large bank, traditional bank could potentially be an entirely different experience.   Michael: That's so cool. David, it's something I talk a lot about with students in the Academy about portfolio loans. It's something that I've used on the commercial side of things, and I think it's the best thing since sliced bread. So I've always thought that they existed for single families, but that's great to hear that they do indeed. So anybody listening that have spoken to me within the Academy about getting, go for portfolio loan, go call David Young at RCN Capital.   Tom: in coming up with what the rates are. Is there a little bit of a discount for larger pools, larger portfolios, or how does that typically work?   David: Yeah, that's a great question. So we have generally, you'll see, uh, and right now, as listeners are hearing this, uh, allow me to emphasize if I can, that things are changing very quickly. So in terms of pricing as a whole rates points and whatnot, we saw a very high level of liquidity is kind of sloshing around the system, heading into a COVID and then things really tightening up seizing up even, and then starting to now loosen up. We've seen changes on almost a daily basis over the last couple of weeks here at RCN capital. So the way those rates are determined, you know, in terms of the price at anything is which is, you know, in large part driven by supply and demand as things seized up and there was less or no liquidity for this paper and the secondary market, it became very difficult to price it, you know, because we didn't know what it was trading at when there was a lot more trading volume and activity on this paper and the secondary. Then you could determine pricing a lot more clearly. Furthermore, you had a lot more of the competitors actually active and lending in the last couple of months, people have pulled back. So we don't necessarily know what this company over here is doing because they've completely ceased lending at this current time. So a lot of that is supply and demand driven, how much volume and activity is there for this paper behind the scenes. And then that results in, you know, subsequent pricing that the retail sees factors that we look at from an underwriting standpoint, and to determine kind of how to bracket that again, back to experience and also the size of the loan. So generally speaking again, pre and post and kind of while we're still with COVID here for the time being, it's a little different, but generally speaking, more experience and a higher loan value dollar absolute dollar value would generally lead to better pricing to the retail client. And through our wholesale channels. My role primarily is with our correspondents that work on our private lending platform, other hard money lenders, private lenders out there in the community that are looking to leverage our infrastructure to grow. We also work in that capacity as well, but the pricing, the borrower's experience and the size of the loan, we have systems in place. Whereas the loan exceeds a certain amount in dollar terms, you may get some relief in terms of the yield. There may be some relief in terms of the origination, but those would be the two main things experienced in the loan size.   Tom: Got it. And for the kind of ongoing ownership, you know, so there's a secondary market where you guys are selling the mortgages that you guys originate from the experience of the person who was getting their loan originated, or do you guys ongoing service them after you, it, of the loan,   David: Yeah, depending on the product, but actually RCN Capital. What we have here is, is pretty unique in the industry. And I leveraged this a lot with our wholesale partners when they're looking to find somebody to work with in terms of a capital partners that we have essentially everything in house now, right now, a lot of folks are remote. In fact, almost everybody is given the scenario, but if you'd look past that for the current situation, when we talk about servicing the loans, yes, we have our own servicing team at RCN capital. A lot of lenders in this space are set up with a situation where they're outsourcing that, which is fine. That's a decision. A lot of people make. We actually did that ourselves for a certain amount of time and decided to internalize that and make that organic to RCN, to place that amount of value on the customer experience. So yes, we're doing that, not all do that, that also holds true for another good example is our legal team. A lot of these transactions involve, you know, somebody originating and kind of setting the table if you will. And then the actual closing of the loan document prep and so forth, working with attorneys, which that can be intimidating and frustrating as a whole to a lot of people that is sent out to some other entity to conduct that business where we have that internally. So we have that an entire legal staff. That's all they do all day long is work on legal issues, closing stock preps, et cetera. We have our accounting team, our marketing team and everything actually in house in RCN. And that really helps as well. Not only does that help the retail client by providing them, they get a loan from us that they're to get an exceptional level of service, everything under our control. If there's a problem, we identify it, we fix it. But also with our, you know, our B to B or our wholesale partners, if you will, other lenders brokers, when they choose to work with us, they have that entire team, all organic to RCN capital to support them and help them grow their business by using our infrastructure and platform.   Michael: Great. David kind of a specific question for you around some of our CMS product, but anytime someone's using hard money, they want to get out of it as soon as possible because it's typically more expensive than traditional lending. So do you guys have any type of prepayment penalties that would prevent someone from getting out or is that really too specific of a question it's kind of on an ad hoc basis based on the product?   David: No, that's a great question. It depends on the product. I'll walk you through each of them here briefly. So on our long-term rental. Yes, we do encourage investors to be, you know, fully aware and committed to the asset for that exact purpose. You know, long-term rental and holding of that asset. There is a five, four, three, two, one step down. In other words, you can choose, you know, at what level you are, what time period and what penalty would be associated with that if you were to try and refinance out of that loan. So, you know, obviously that's a big decision to make that you have to be aware of that on our midterm product, which actually now is presenting all kinds of interesting opportunities for investors. It's a two years of interest only we call it a two plus one and already has built in an option to extend for a year. We have this available on one to four units, multifamily five-plus and mixed use, as long as it's at least 51% residential by square footage. On that product, there's a six month prepay penalty. So if you think it through, if you were to enter into that product to interest only for two years, perhaps you have an asset that you do want to rent, but you're not entirely sure you could change your mind. You may try to sell it. You make, you know, you may rent it for a year. And then at that point, you may want the flexibility to see if you want to do something different with it. The two plus one with only a six month prepay gives you that exact flexibility because after six months you could theoretically enter into a new transaction to get out of that one without a penalty applying. So there's that on the short term, I won't get into specifics on that. It can be on a case by case basis, but there's nothing to dissuade you from completing your project as quickly as possible. You know, as a lender in particularly with the yield component, you know, there's origination, which are the economics kind of front loaded to the front of the transaction. And then there's the yield component in terms of collecting the actual payments as each month goes by. So there can be challenges that a lender or a transaction ends up being very short. There wasn't much time to collect yield, but again, we don't want transactions that drag out for long periods of time and have to ultimately potentially approach modification as well. So on a 12 month, you know, a flip, if you will, our transactions show that, you know, investors are not penalized for, you know, being expeditious and efficient with their work. And we also have incentives to, you know, not, uh, enable them or make them feel like they should consider trying to extend it or go past a certain point. We try and we want to position them so that the project is done efficiently. According to the data that we have that shows, you know, what success looks like.   Michael: Awesome. Kind of taking a step back and looking more high level at private lenders. I mean, you touched on it briefly, but who where's this money coming from to fund some of these loans?   David: That's a great question. When you let's compare it to conventional, you know, just here in COVID, this, this could go in a lot of different directions, but in COVID what we saw was the federal reserve came in and really just threw the kitchen sink at everything essentially. I mean, they've, they've done things that are truly unprecedented that that's cannot be overstated, but one of the things they did is something they've done before. They certainly did it as part of so-called QE, quantitative easing since the 2009 crisis, which was to come in and provide a backstop to mortgage backed securities MBS. Now, even just saying that they're going to do that can have a huge effect regardless of how many they ultimately buy, but those are the traditional mortgages that are originated from, you know, you know, Fannie Freddie type stuff from a bank of America type of transaction that are sliced and diced into exotic securities, and then sold the fed comes in and says, look, we'll back up those, you know, we're gonna, we got your back on that, that helped that particular sector kind of spring back from the depths of the COVID crisis, if you will. And private lending, you know, we don't have such a backstop from the government. So this money is coming from, you know, private capital sources. However, there's been a big evolution, you know, for a period of time, a lot of this was from a private, you know, private investors, private investors would form funds. So you might form a fund with a group of investors that has, you know, I don't know, $20 million together. And then that funds purposes to invest in these various private lending transactions in whatever area that they choose to focus on. So they're out there lending and recycling that cash and doing their thing. And that's with, you know, that amount of money that they've been able to put together. There's also one off transactions that occur when an originator may take a loan and say, look, here's a loan. We have, do you want to fund this? So they take this loan, it's a 500 K transaction. They present it to that particular investor and they get a yes or no answer. And it's funded that way. RCN can help in those scenarios where you run out of capital and then you can come and jump on our platform. If you happen to be in one of those positions, any of the listeners out there. And then as the industry grew, you know, you have yields here that are pretty juicy compared to traditional. You look right now. Uh, if I pulled it up, I know from looking recently, uh, the 10 year note is what around 0.7%. So you're lining the government money for 10 years, for .7% annualized. A lot of institutions are, you know, they have to do that, but if you can lend as an institution into the private lending sector for loans that are collateralized by real estate and get five, I don't know, I'm just throwing these numbers out there. A lot of pricing is bounced around, I don't know, five, 6% versus less than one on government notes, government bonds. Then that's certainly a decision that you might want to take a look at. So a lot of that, I think yield differential investor demands for yield, the thirst for yield. You've had interest rates just being destroyed down to nothing. You have negative interest rates in some parts of the world. A lot of folks speculate, you know, rates could even be driven negative here in the United States. So pension funds, you know, other people that manage money institutions, there's no yield. It's very difficult to get yield secured and then incomes private lending, where you have these loans that are backed by hard assets. And as the ecosystem grows, becomes more mature. You have more underwriting standards, you have more eyes looking at it. You have more ability theoretically to, uh, make better loans, uh, minimize the faults and kind of feed the whole beast, if you will. Institutions look and they say, Hey, that's pretty juicy yield. I wouldn't mind getting some of that. And then you have that type of money coming in institutional level. So say, you know, you have funds, people put funds together, you have private investors to do one off transactions and then institutional capital.   Michael: Super great description.   Tom: That's a great overview. I'd love to learn a little bit more about the different types of customers and the different flavors of customers that use private capital. So there's individual investors, perhaps there's syndications, I'd love just to learn a little bit more of the different kinds of avatars or profiles of people that use private capital.   David: Right, yeah. So back to our discussion on experience. So when RCN creates products and underwriting standards, generally speaking, that experience factor is huge. So we do lend to people that have no experience. In many cases, those are, you know, kind of a mom and pop, maybe, you know, an individual that's looking to get involved with their first flip transaction. And that person might be someone that could come from a variety of backgrounds. It may be somebody that was working with someone else on these transactions actually executing the labor, the work, you know, watching a project, go from A to Z with their own eyes, and then deciding that they want to dive in on their own. Maybe it's a husband and wife, couple that are, you know, have a little side hustle going on. So you've got that. You certainly have the mom and pops. Then you have the call it a small business. If you will, maybe that tends to have multiple projects going on at one time, they may have their own crew in terms of contractors and a more sophisticated setup in terms of having a, you know, a playbook on exactly how to execute a transaction and already having the resources lined up or even on their own staff, you have that. And then you have even bigger organizations that are doing this in big numbers. You know, maybe they may have 20, 30, 40 transactions going on at any given time. They may, you know, they talk in terms of flips. In many cases, they may flip a couple of hundred houses in a given year. You have that as well. We're also seeing, you know, more activity and more interest in the multifamily space. So multifamily five-plus units, you know, these are small balance apartments. Generally. I know in Boston and other areas on the East, you see these spread throughout the communities, a building that may have eight, 10, 12, 16 units. You know, there's estimates, there's about 10 million of these out there in the country. And those are starting to get more activity as well. And for those, you know, that's probably a project that's going to require more than just a couple of guys working together on a side gig and some more sophistication. So you see a variety of different flavors out there. You see people that have made this, their, their living. This is how they make a living. This is their job. This is their career. This is everything. So we've seen different variations.   Tom: Awesome David, I think people hear private capital or private money tossed around a lot, like we were saying before, and you've given us such a great overview and background of kind of the institutional side of things, if you will, but from a private lending perspective, if I'm looking for money and I happen to know someone that has some extra, could I just go ask them to lend it to me and I think work out some kind of agreement with them, or do I have to go through maybe the more traditional channels of private money?   David: Yeah. I mean, we have actually specific to my role. We have investors lenders, if you will, that were doing exactly that. Or maybe they may even still do that, where they are providing kind of one off direct transactions between themselves and an individual investor out there looking to flip a house or what have you. So to your question, can you do that? I mean, there's nothing that I could say that's could literally stop somebody from doing that. There may be other things to take into consideration in terms of making sure everything is within compliance. I mean, the compliance is certainly looser on the private lending side than it is on traditional, but you want to make sure that you're working with, you know, it may be worth considering to take a look at working with an established organization or entity. That's been doing this to ensure that all documentation is done correctly, to ensure that all procedures are done. They'd probably be, it's in their vested interest to help you, help you to look at the project and make sure it makes sense. And there's ROI available there for you to capture, obviously to be able to pay back, pay them back and make the monthly payments. So I, yes, you can still, you know, there's nothing stopping someone from, I suppose, from approaching an individual saying, Hey, do you think you could give me X amount of flip this house? And that's kind of how it all got going, you know, looking at, you know, maintain a certain leverage level minimum or no doc, you know, obviously securing with a lien, putting that money out, collecting interest, only getting it paid off and then getting the balance back, you know, your principal balance back. So there's nothing per se stopping you. I think there's other things to consider in terms of, you know, working with an established entity that, you know, has a strong reputation has done this before, and they may have a lot more options. You know, you're kind of guy on the corner of the street, if you will, may have certain options that might fit certain people, but you go to a lender such as RCN Capital, and there may be more choices there for you that might be a better fit to your situation after you take a complete and thorough look.   Michael: Okay, great.   Tom: That's awesome. I think we're, we're getting close to covering all the questions we have. I guess another question, practical question is geographic footprint. So do you guys have any limitations on where you originate loans?   David: Yeah, that's an excellent question. Anyone that's curious, it's a better description than here in me, you know, yap about it would be to go to rcncapital.com and see if I can get some traffic to our website. Here are capital.com and scroll down to the bottom. You'll see the map and that will show, but yeah, we can originate and close loans in the entire country everywhere except for a few States, Alaska, Oregon, Nevada, the Dakotas, Minnesota, Vermont. So the bulk of where the business is and where the volume is not nothing against those other locations where we're not currently able to do that. We have that covered. So any investor that is looking to do whether it's activity locally, or perhaps even dabble in other areas, you know, another benefit of an established entity such as RCN capital is the fact that we have that footprint nationally already. So we're already established in those areas. If you have something in Tennessee, great, but you may also have something in Oklahoma, we can do both of them. So we've got a pretty well covered.   Tom: My last question has to do with a product that I'm not that familiar with, but very interested. I'm just not sure I'm interested. If you guys carry it like a revolving credit where you can add properties in and out of a facility, do you guys offer any type of products like that? And this is a self serving question. Just something that I've heard about and just interested in learning more about,   David: Yeah. I mean, what I can say on that and thank you for that. It is a great question for investors with a certain level of experience, you know, a strong level of experience. If they get connected to RCN Capital and a loan officer, they can certainly take a look at pursuing what we would call a line of line of credit in the precise definition of that is probably not the best description, but we, it comes up a lot in the, in that, in those terms. And people use that to describe it. It's not exactly what it is, but we could potentially consider and look at that for someone with a certain amount of experience in the sector and has that documented and demonstrated. And what that could look at like is just use a million bucks to keep it simple. Perhaps someone being granted exposure of a million dollars every 12 month period, every annual designated period at certain terms. And in that case, they're, you know, why would it benefit them? Why would they care about that? It could be improvements in terms of speed and efficiency. If the borrower's already underwritten, ie. the entity, you know, on these short term loans in particular can only lend to a legal entity. So if that entity and the owners of it are already underwritten, then that's all locked and loaded. And now you're presenting each asset as you identify it and decide to move on it into the mix from an underwriting standpoint. So you still have to follow procedure, you know, appraisals and whatnot, but you've got some of the things out of the way to expedite the process and make it more efficient and make it a cleaner experience for your high volume, high experience clients. And that also would take into account. You may be able to add more fuel to the more logs on the fire in terms of supporting your own case, by adding in, like, if you have other things that contribute to your liquid net worth, you could provide that to perhaps support your case. If you're trying to obtain a certain amount of exposure that you're granted annually, you could look at doing things like that on.   Michael: Tom you gotta get on that.   Tom: I know. Yeah, definitely.   David: It sounds like, Tom was thinking about that one,   Tom: For sure. Yeah. Okay Michael, do you have any other questions?   Michael: I think that's it for me that this has been awesome.   Tom: David, this is great. Yeah. So we're going to end this David with a couple of what we call quick fire questions, and these are just general investing philosophy. It's great having smart guests, such as yourself, come on the show and just love your thoughts on this either or type of question. So are you ready to do it?   David: I'm ready unless you got a bunch of trick ones in there. Tom: All straight forward ones. All right. So consolidation or diversification. David: You want me to give a quick answer? Speaker 4: All quick answers, all quick answers. Yes. You can say both. I'll always... Speaker 1: I'll say both, I always tend to, when I, if I may, when I identify a trend, I tend to favor something. If it depended on my belief in it, I tend to consolidate, I'll give you an example, crypto. I can consolidate Bitcoin. I don't need to mess around with the others, but in other scenarios, I might favor diversification. Tom I think a good way to say that is either shallow and wide or deep and narrow. David: Yeah.   Tom: Deep and narrow, I like it. High property taxes or high income taxes?   David: Neither   Michael: That's the best answer we've had yet. Tom: High rent growth or low vacancy?   David: Probably say low vacancy. On that type of thing, I like to play it more safe.   Tom: Yup. Yup. Cashflow or appreciation?   David: I'm going to say cashflow. Cause I look at real estate as the primary benefit to me is a hedge against the inevitable destruction of your purchasing power over time. So I feel like that will happen when a hired asset, if it's chosen properly. So I'll go for the cashflow. If you pinned the two against each other.   Tom: Debt or equity?   David:   From the standpoint of real estate, debt.   Tom: Love it. Single family or multifamily? David: Tough to go against SFR right now.   Tom: I like it. Alright. Last couple of questions. Turn key or massive project?   David: How cheap did you get it? Being realistic, turnkey. You know, assessing my own situation.   Tom: Yeah. Midnight oil or early bird worm?   David: Early bird worm   Tom: Text message or email?   David: Neither. No, I'm kidding. I'm either, probably either.   Tom: Alright. And the last one kind of an off the wall, olive oil or butter?   David: Well, I do like that butter that is allegedly made with olive oil. Tried that on a steak and that worked out pretty well, but..   Tom: I know what you're talking about.   David: Yeah. It's olive oil or butter with olive oil. I'm not sure what brand it was, but I tend to use olive oil fairly consistently. So I have to be true to myself and to you and this excellent show we're on.   Tom: Awesome. Well, well, that's it. You made it through the quickfire questions. Want to give you a chance to yeah. Where can people find you get a hold of you and get ahold of RCN?   David: Folks can find the company at rcncapital.com, blue and white colors there. If you're Googling around looking for it, usually you'll find it. You can link up to myself. You could certainly shoot me an email if you'd like a first initial, last name dyoung@rcncapital.com. You can hunt me down on LinkedIn as well. Love to make connections with folks and expand the network and learn from people. So those are probably the best ways to get ahold of me and the company.   Tom: Awesome. David. Well, thank you so much for coming on.   Michael: David. Thanks so much. This was great.   David: Thanks guys. Really appreciate you having me and I'd love to do it again. Appreciate it. Thanks.   Speaker 1: Thanks again to David Young for answering our questions. Today's episode was brought to you by Roofstock Academy and we're running a special promotion right now. For a limited time you can receive a $100 discount with the promo code JULY4. With Roofstock Academy we have all these benefits: coaching, on demand lectures, the tools, the SFR paybook, on and on, but the Roofstock Marketplace credits just got that much sweeter. So initially it was a $750 credit when you buy, now it is a $2500 credit. So you buy Roofstock Academy and for your next 5 transactions you will $500 back at the close of your transaction. Happy Investing!       

Drone to 1K Podcast by Drone Launch Academy
S2/EP 6: Leo Adams from SkyeLink Aerial Photography

Drone to 1K Podcast by Drone Launch Academy

Play Episode Listen Later May 5, 2020 38:19


Leo Adams is CEO/Co-Founder of SkyeLink, a professional drone service company with a drone marketplace and pilot network.  David: “Tell us what kind of services SkyeLink provides for drone services and on the pilot network side?” The main services SkyeLink offers are aerial inspections, aerial mapping and aerial photography. They work in construction, solar, real estate, production and typography. Their pilot network allows them to scale and offer flexibility to clients nationwide. Their drone marketplace allows clients to connect with pilots, post jobs, and receive bids from within the pilot network. The network also streamlines the process of getting pilots deployed by offering compliance documentation, Part 107 certification, insurance certificates and drone registration. David: “Did it start off with the pilot network idea from the beginning? Were you offering services and then expanded more and more?” Leo bought his first Mavic drone in 2016, taking images and doing aerial photography, as a side hustle while still in a full-time corporate job. When he went to flying full time, the company began to do more aerial photography, as well as video production, real estate work and inspections. Leo believes that starting in roof inspections is the easiest route, especially with a Mavic or Phantom 4. From there, he began doing more infrastructure, energy solar inspections and mapping work. Working with pilots across the country opened the door to working with bigger clients. The goal was always to have a nationwide business. When he found his partner/CTO, who heads technical operations and software development, they spent all of 2018 bringing in clients and taking the business to the next level. “It’s been a slow but steady process. Every year I learn something new, I evolve a little bit and grow into a new area. It's been exciting journey since 2016.” David: “With the kind of pilot network you're building, are you still finding clients, then finding the pilots for those jobs? Are you at a point where you're getting referrals and have repeat clients or are you making an active effort to go out and pitch people?” SkyeLink is continuing to develop new business, create new opportunities for their pilots and close contracts. Existing clients come back to them for work. They’re always communicating with new prospects and trying to close new contracts that can bring more work to their pilots. Obviously, they want to win as much business as possible and keep their pilots as busy as they can. David: “While you were transitioning out of corporate work to a full-time drone business—which I feel like is like the dream for a lot of people—what was it like when you were first starting out and managing full time work AND side work?” In college Leo had run a couple of businesses so he knew that he eventually wanted to be a full-time entrepreneur. When he moved to Charlotte, Leo says, “I wanted to create something that would allow me freedom to do my own thing. I had that intention right from the start and worked at it. I took action on that goal by doing things that put me in a position to make the leap away from my full-time job. I might've done it a little too soon, but it gave me the energy and drive to make it work!” Leo spent a lot of time capturing B roll for videographers that didn't know about using drones yet. He tried to meet and collaborate with as many people as possible, always looking for how to bring them value. He made videos for small businesses, using his drone as a tool on many projects. He found that realtors, agents and brokers had low cost expectations and there were a lot of people looking to get into drones who were willing to offer low introductory discounts. As a result, it became apparent to him that the market was saturated. He knew he couldn't hang around there forever if I was going to make it work in the long term, so he began pursuing work in other sectors. David: “What did you do next? What kind of work did you look for in what kind of timeframe?” Leo did real estate videography and video production for the better part of a year still working at his full-time old job. It was when he started progressing out of it and joined some pilot networks that he started to have the idea to create a unique type of pilot network that would work with their pilots on what's fair for them while keeping it competitive for the client and having their margin. “I wanted to have a conscious capitalist mindset. There was a different way to do it that seemed better to me and I had to find a way to position myself differently.” When Leo was first getting started, he emailed potential leads, which, he says, was not the most sustainable. He found out that when he was able to have a face-to-face conversation with a potential client, they were much more willing to work with him—as opposed to drone pilots who were bombarding them via email or cold calling. Leo says, “Know who your ideal client is, then find out where they live, what they do, where they go, etc. Networking events, conferences, and industry meetups are great places to build relationships with potential prospects—whether they have a job or not.” People he’s met at these events have connected him with past colleagues or they have active projects in their pipeline. David: “What ways have you found to be able to get in front of customers?” Leo suggests, when reaching out to these companies, to ask yourself how you can provide value. Can you go out there and do a demo or sample inspection and show them what deliverables you can produce for them? That might be enough to push them over the edge and to feel your services are worthwhile. “Add a Demo Day/ Lunch & Learn to your marketing mix to talk to potential clients about what you offer. For example, bring lunch to an engineering firm’s project managers and talk about typography, mapping projects you've created, elevation models, terrain models or contour maps.” David: “How would you direct people just starting their business to get moving generating some income—at least on the side?” Leo says you just have to get out and fly, just passing the Part 107 exam doesn't make you a good pilot. He insists people should go to a park and try different shots—trucking shots, an orbit shot or a reveal shot—these are typical shots that drone pilots are using in real estate videography or production work. From there, go out and meet people and reach out to your existing network. Once you start doing work, make sure you're saving some of the deliverables and footage that you take. “Down the road, your portfolio will be your biggest sales tool to drive new business.” David: “How did you make the transition from video production to being able to talk intelligently and sell engineers?” It was about working with and partnering with smarter people than himself, asking for help from people that had experience with those services. He solicited working with them, even sometimes having them attend new business meetings to jointly sell and so he could learn from them. “If you approach it in the right way, this is a very collaborative industry. You're able to work with other pilots and, hopefully, create mutually beneficial relationships.” David: “So when you set up partnerships with these pilots, how did you sell that without seeming like you were creating more competition for them? How did you get them to agree to let you learn from them?” Leo says he had to show his true intention of working with them to bring more business to their business too. He tried to connect with people that he knew would be willing to help and had something that he could offer them. David: “So what's next for you? Is your future plan to continue to build out SkyeLink with more pilots and more projects?” Leo says it absolutely is. He and his partner agree that 2018 was building year--not much going on in terms of business. 2019 was setting the stage to create a sustainable business. 2020 is growth mode; it’s the kind of year to create new partnerships with pilots and new clients. “It’s been a journey—not an easy one. Have patience, take it one step at a time and go through the ups and downs. There’s going to be a learning curve, but you just have to push through that. You gotta play the long game, I guess.” Connect with Leo: Website: www.skyelink.org Facebook: @skylinkuav Instagram: @skylinkuav LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/company/skye-link/ Have a Drone Business? Want to be Interviewed for Season 3? Complete this questionnaire: Drone to 1K Business Owner Application Training from Drone Launch Academy Part 107 Exam Prep Course ($50 off) Aerial Photo Pro Course ($50 off) Aerial Video A to Z Course ($100 off) Aerial Roof Inspection Pro Course ($100 off) Drones 101 Course ($20 off) Other Places to Listen iTunes Stitcher Google Play Spotify

Drone to 1K Podcast by Drone Launch Academy
S2/EP 5: Mike Jensen from Jensen Films

Drone to 1K Podcast by Drone Launch Academy

Play Episode Listen Later Apr 28, 2020 38:46


Mike Jensen, from Jensen Films, has been in business for almost 30 years doing wedding and event videos and corporate videography. Mike always offered unique services to clients, such as 8mm film, 360 VR panoramas and aerial shots of wedding venues. In the mid-90s, he did his first aerial by renting an airplane and continued to get aerial footage by renting helicopters. At $400/hr, it was very expensive, but he gathered a reusable library of about 30 to 40 of the most popular wedding venues in town and says, “Before the drone revolution, my competitors weren't offering that.” In 2006, I created and produced the world record wedding video event in Sacramento, setting a new world record of 100 cameras to professionally film a wedding. David: “So when did you get into flying a traditional kind of quad copter setup?" When drones started to become reliable in the early 2000s, Mike didn't feel comfortable flying them himself, so he found a drone pilot online that was flying a lot over water. Finally in 2014, Mike got his license and purchased his first drone—a DJI Phantom 2. I started flying it for events and later upgraded it to the Autel X-star then to the Mavic Pro. Today although he flies an Autel EVO, his favorite drone to fly is the Mavic 2 Pro Zoom. David: “Do you use drones right now mostly as a supplement to your film business or have you gotten into any drone services?” Mike had an advantage of having a videography company first. At some point, his videography clients also need drone services, which made it an easy sell. One of Mike’s biggest clients is a local major construction company. They've hired him to go out every week and do visual updates--flying for 1-2 hrs, shooting 3-4 one-minute videos, 20-40 stills and a top down shot. Mike stitches all those together in Photoshop and delivers a megapixel image of the entire property from 400 feet looking down. He saves them a lot of money by providing that documentation, their project manager meets with corporate every week and needs to show them progress. David: “For a construction job where you'll shoot once a week and these projects take months, what do you typically charge for a job like that?” Mike is hired to fly once a week for 30 weeks and charges them $300 a flight. That includes 1-1 1/2 hrs of flying, culling images, making sure his videos look good, uploading and then sending them the link. This is an ongoing client, often bringing him onto another project as they’re finishing one up. David: “Were you actively reaching out to those types of clients or did they find you? How did that work come about?” I shot for many years for a large West Coast healthcare provider. They were building a medical office building where Mike lives in Sacramento and the construction company brought him on for their own projects. One job led to another. Most of my business at this point in my career is word of mouth. David: “Looking back to when you were first starting, can you think of tactics that might work in today's environment? For example, if you were starting in the drone business, didn't have history with Jensen Films, and wanted a drone only business, what do you think you would do first to get it going?” Mike says he’s expanded his video company and doing a lot of different things—drones are just one of them. For example, when he started doing photo booths, he got on Facebook and let everybody know by creating and posting short videos. Similarly, for 360VR work, they just started shooting some footage unpaid, posted it and let his friends know. A photographer friend knew about a huge condo project that was going up and needed 360 video. “What really helped me was letting the world know what I was doing and doing it well. I needed to WOW the first client I got and then over-deliver on the promises I’d made. It’s also important to continue to up my game. I’m always looking for ways to increase my skills. If you start standing still, that's a prescription to fail.” David: “So tell me a little bit about the VR stuff. When did you guys start doing that...what's that like?” One night when he was editing late, Mike stumbled on the website of a 360 videographer who’d created gorgeous 360 images of the Royal Danish wedding. Mike realized he needed to do that with his brides, so he bought the equipment and started marketing it. Since then, he’s made custom rigs for his drones and included Live 360 and Ground 360 in virtual wedding movies for his brides. Clients can link to it on Vimeo or Facebook from their desktop, laptop or phones, or use goggles. David: “How much do you charge for VR video?” Mike began charging $750 for VR wedding video, but with every new VR video, he’s raised the price to $1,000, $1,250 or $1500. It’s an add-on to a basic package for the day. An exciting thing he’s been using is the new Insta 360-1R, which is two cameras that mount on the top and bottom of the Mavic 2Pro and can shoot stills or video without that dead spot on top (see link at bottom for website for Insta 360-1R) David: “In the last five years or so, as drones have become much more affordable and the technology has gotten a lot better, how has that impacted your business, if at all?” Mike says he’s always been an early adopter because it's given him the advantage of being able to market something that no one else has. With the wedding 360s, there may be only five other people in the country that offer that for wedding packages. He tells his brides, “it's the only shot of your wedding day where you'll be able to see everyone in your wedding in one shot.” Mike says, “I’m never satisfied with where my business is. I'm always looking for different ways to help my clients put the dream and the goal of what they need and want into images.” David: “So you have corporate and weddings, you're doing construction stuff, some VR stuff and the photo booth stuff. Is there anything else that you have going on that you're excited about?” Jensen Films is contracted with a real estate company that brings in actors to stand-in inside luxury homes while Mike films them. It’s a type of lifestyle video that’s simple to do. Mike brings in the actors and, now that he’s been licensed for a number of years, he flies the drone himself.  It’s also in the contract that when the house sells, they’ll pay him an extra $750 to $1,000. He also helps them by posting to his social media and giving them a little bit of advertising from his end. David: “If you had some advice to give somebody who's just starting a drone business—whether it's video, documenting construction sites, or mapping—what direction would you provide to get started?" 1-Always deliver more than you promise. Clients have come back to him again and again because he always delivers more. 2-Don't get into this industry unless you have a passion, not only for the drone work, but for the business end as well. The drone is the backend of the business. 3-Continue to improve on not only your technical flight skills, but on your creative photo and video skills, composition, movement, lighting. Whenever Mike flies for a client, he’s looking for that epic shot that will wow his clients. Connect with Mike: Website: www.jensenfilms.com Some samples of Mike’s 360VR wedding work: https://vimeo.com/262143827 https://vimeo.com/256345801 Insta360 One R: https://www.insta360.com/product/insta360-oner_twin-edition Have a Drone Business? Want to be Interviewed for Season 3? Complete this questionnaire: Drone to 1K Business Owner Application Training from Drone Launch Academy Part 107 Exam Prep Course ($50 off) Aerial Photo Pro Course ($50 off) Aerial Video A to Z Course ($100 off) Aerial Roof Inspection Pro Course ($100 off) Drones 101 Course ($20 off) Other Places to Listen iTunes Stitcher Google Play Spotify  

jivetalking
Alexander Danilenko benchmarks water utility performance

jivetalking

Play Episode Listen Later Apr 20, 2020 59:12


Episode 73: Alexander Danilenko developed and managed the International Benchmarking Network of Water and Sanitation Utilities of the World Bank (IBNET) from 1998 to 2018. IBNET (https://www.ib-net.org) is the largest publicly available database of water utilities' performance. Alexander is directly involved in water reform agenda in many countries, where IBNET performance assessment tools are being used for the sector development. He works with water sector development of Uganda now. Alexander holds PhD in Environmental (Physical) Chemistry from Kazakh National Academy of Sciences and MSc in Resource Economics from University of Massachusetts, Amherst. Episode motto: "The public provision of data creates more value than it costs." Links: IBNET database: https://database.ib-net.org/DefaultNew.aspx Tariffs' database: https://tariffs.ib-net.org/ [David] How to price water for conservation and fiscal stability https://kysq.org/aguanomics/2015/04/how-to-price-water-for-conservation-in-california/

The Twenty Minute VC: Venture Capital | Startup Funding | The Pitch
20VC: Basecamp Founder David Heinemeier Hansson on Why It Is The Biggest BS To Chase Being A Unicorn, His Relationship to Wealth and Status and Why Now More Than Ever It Is A Myth Entrepreneurs Have To Raise VC

The Twenty Minute VC: Venture Capital | Startup Funding | The Pitch

Play Episode Listen Later Apr 14, 2020 49:24


David “DHH” Heinemeier Hansson (@dhh) is the creator of Ruby on Rails, founder and CTO at Basecamp (formerly 37Signals), and the best-selling co-author of Rework and Remote: Office Not Required. If that was not enough, fun fact, he went from not having a driver’s license at 25 to winning, at 34, the 24 Hours of Le Mans race, one of the most prestigious automobile races in the world. It is often called the “Grand Prix of endurance and efficiency.” In Today’s Episode You Will Learn: 1.) How David made his way into the world of tech and startups from his childhood living in Copenhagen and how a cold email led to the founding of Basecamp with Jason Fried? 2.) What have been some of David’s core observations as people move to remote work over the last few weeks? What is the #1 mistake that 90% of teams make? How does David advise founders to approach loneliness and depression in their team? What strategies have Basecamp used to unite the team and inspire collaboration and teamwork? 3.) Why have David and Jason always tried to keep the Basecamp team as small as possible? Why does David believe one of the biggest problems is that execs have too much time? How does that manifest itself? What does David’s week look like? How does he approach meetings? 4.) Why does David hate the majority of “mission statements” today? What are the best composed of? What are the worst? What feelings does David believe your mission statement should inspire in the reader? What does David believe one needs to do to build a challenger brand today? 5.) Why has David and Basecamp always resisted the conventional path of raising VC funds? Why does David believe needs VC money is total BS? Why does David believe it is BS to chase being a unicorn? Why have founders got this so wrong today and what can they do to change? 6.) How would David describe his relationship to money? How has that relationship changed over time? What are the core challenges as one moves from a monetary to a deeper appreciation of what makes one happy? How did the transition occur for David? How does David advise others in terms of finding their moment for the transition? Items Mentioned In Today’s Show: David’s Fave Book: Erich Fromm: To Have Or To Be As always you can follow Harry, The Twenty Minute VC and David and on Twitter here! Likewise, you can follow Harry on Instagram here for mojito madness and all things 20VC. Carta simplifies how startups and investors manage equity, track cap tables, and get valuations. Go to carta.com/20vc to get 10% off. More than 800,000 employees and shareholders use Carta to manage hundreds of billions of dollars in equity and Carta now offers Fund Administration so you can see real-time data in the Carta platform and work with Carta’s team of experienced fund accountants. Go to carta.com/20vc to get 10% off.

Drone to 1K Podcast by Drone Launch Academy
S2/EP 2: Sinuhe Montoya from DroneQuote

Drone to 1K Podcast by Drone Launch Academy

Play Episode Listen Later Apr 7, 2020 40:05


Sinuhe is Founder of DroneQuote a company that specializes in helping roofing and solar companies better understand what’s happening on a roof through drone survey imagery. Sinuhe started working installing solar panels on new roofs for residential and commercial purposes. He had to get on roofs to take measurements and conduct surveys and was afraid of heights. In thinking there had to be a better way, he bought a small drone with a camera and started seeing potential and benefits such as being able to: Take far more accurate measurements and SELL better Get a better understanding of what was happening on the roof AND save time Pay more attention to details because fear of falling didn’t prevent him from noticing details Stay SAFER! “My first $100 drone was very rudimentary; it taught me how to fly a drone and allowed me to open my mind to the concept of utilizing a drone. There was an opportunity and I learned from it.” When Sinuhe learned he could transmit an image to a receiver, he needed something more sophisticated, so, in February 2014, he sold his motorcycle to buy a real TBS (Team Black Sheep) drone for $3,400. That first drone lasted until the day he crashed into a pine tree, falling 30 feet to the ground and smashing it into smithereens. Lesson learned for anyone just starting to get into drones...don't overestimate your confidence because you will pay through the nose!”   David:  So, at that point, you're working for a solar installer and using the drone to make your life easier in your current job, right? Yes. The drone, Sinuhe says, enabled him to generate more sales, which made him more sales commission by using it—it paid for itself—but his company wasn’t paying for him to have it. “I realized that I had something on my hands that nobody was using for that purpose. I was also speaking with well-to-do clientele. When I entered a house whose living room was the size of my entire house, I shifted from trying to sell solar to learning what that person did to be successful.” Almost everyone said they became successful by starting a business. The seed was planted and Sinuhe started saving money to start a business. It took him two years to get his ducks in a row and leave his company to set out on his own.   David: “Smart. When did you shift from working for the solar company to starting your own business? What was your plan? How did you get your first paying client?” Sinuhe started his business in 2017. For him, it’s not until you open your doors for business that you find out what’s going to work. You Droners.io was his original model. He said, “I'm going to build a website that's going to help people find drone pilots, yet I kept getting calls from people in the solar industry asking me to inspect a roof. So I shifted my focus to inspecting roofs wholeheartedly—and that was really where we started making money. “So you figure out what's working, what's not, where your opportunity is, and then shift your focus that way. With this model, I was getting paid right away for the service.”   David: “How did you build that up to where people knew who you were? Did you have a lot of contacts from your days selling solar? I know you’re brave with cold-calling—for people out there who may not be as comfortable cold calling, can you walk us through a mock cold call? How do you get past the first minute of awkwardness where the other person is trying to figure out what you want?” Sinuhe makes it a point to be active on social media where he found solar companies and large roof installers. He cold called... and cold called... and cold called—which turned into opportunities. Sinuhe says,” “A lot of people see cold-calling as intimidating, but It's in your head. It’s the person's job to answer the phone and it’s only awkward if you make it so. You avoid that by doing research on who you're going to call before you call them. If you get the right information, you have a WARM call.” SInuhe mentions his most important cold-call points: Ask if they have a moment for you to offer to help them with something. Mention something you saw on LinkedIn. Reference a person and use their language, so they know you understand their company and pain points. You’ll earn their interest based on your ability to understand some of their pain points. With the person who answered the phone, make it sound as though you've already talked to the person you’re trying to reach in the past. When you get to the person you want, mention a topic they posted and offer the opportunity to help with something specific; in this way, you’re not talking about something they haven't thought about or planned for. Use open ended questions, such as “What is something that troubles you? What challenges do you face on steep roofs?. LET THEM TALK! In due time, offer a solution, such as, “I can survey your roof in a much quicker manner and more than likely at a lower cost to your company.” Even if you don’t understand the industry. If you’ve done your research, you can learn—it’s all research-based. Be willing to learn. You’re going to hear “No, I don't need your services. Thank you.” Look forward to the NOs. Count how many NOs it takes to get to YES! With every no, you're one step closer to your YES! Ask if there's anybody they know that would benefit from your services. You may get some leads. It's worth asking because the worst they can say is no.   David: “What did people pay you for a typical job at the beginning and what product were you delivering?  What does it take on your end to do a residential home? What data are you capturing and what do you need to process?” Sinuhe was usually charging about one $50 to $200 per flight for roof inspections, depending on the size. Now, for a large commercial building, it can be $500. For a residential home, they do a drone survey gathering details on air conditioning, service panels, water and gas lines, proximity of trees, etc. He’s using the drone to create an orthomosaic map image of the property with accurate measurements.   David: “How many jobs are you getting from solar companies? For larger scale, you can hire other pilots, but if you were going to fly all those by yourself, what's the average you're charging per job?” It depends on time of year. Solar slows down at the end of the year but during the summer months, they do 50-75 jobs a month. For an average sized house, he charges $150 and if he plots his route efficiently beforehand, he can be very efficient and do 5-6 jobs a day.   David: “What other customers do you have for this type of service besides solar companies? Do you use a promo video of your guys working?” According to Sinuhe, roofing companies are a tough nut to crack because they want boots on the ground. They are more receptive because they can see the value. They're getting hired by roofing and solar companies who’ve already sold the job and want to get the roof survey completed so they can move on to permitting or plans. David: “Moving forward, where do you see the biggest opportunity for people who want to use their drones for roof inspections? What tactics do you think people should be looking into in the future?” Sinuhe sees big opportunity in the solar space because it will has shown strong growth in the last 5-7 years and will continue to grow. He believes if they continue to bring down the acquisition cost to the customer, decrease the survey and installation costs, they will continue to be an attractive asset.” Connect with Sinuhe Email: smontoya@dronequote.net Website: dronequote.net Instagram: www.instagram.com Facebook www.facebook.com LinkedIn: www.linkedin.com Have a Drone Business? Want to be Interviewed for Season 3? Complete this questionnaire: Drone to 1K Business Owner Application Training from Drone Launch Academy Part 107 Exam Prep Course ($50 off) Aerial Photo Pro Course ($50 off) Aerial Video A to Z Course ($100 off) Aerial Roof Inspection Pro Course ($100 off) Drones 101 Course ($20 off) Other Places to Listen iTunes Stitcher Google Play Spotify TuneIn

Drone to 1K Podcast by Drone Launch Academy
S2/EP 1: Andrew Hicks from SkyPix Aerial Photography

Drone to 1K Podcast by Drone Launch Academy

Play Episode Listen Later Mar 31, 2020 40:00


Introduction to Andrew: Although Andrew started flying drones 5 years ago, about a year ago, he decided to build a business to make some extra money. Andrew says, “Aerial photography isn’t so big in winter so I didn’t start to get business the summer. But this winter, I’ve lined up clients through spring of next year.” By the way, Andrew is a senior in high school. Andrew bought his first drone for $50 when he was 13. He then got a Parrot Bebop2 which he loved but wasn’t pleased with the pictures. He later bought, and still uses, a Maverick2 Pro.” David agreed “Cheaper drones can get you interested and lead to more. My first drone was a Syma X5C so when someone wants my advice on their first drone, I say, ‘Get a Syma X5Cs on Amazon for $40. They're super light and when you need to land, you just cut the power and it flows to the ground’.” David: “What was it that sparked you to say, ‘I need to make some money doing this’? Did you target realtors when you started? Tell us about your original business plan starting out.” When Andrew could get his Part 107 license at 16, he got a nicer drone for taking pictures and videos. He thought, “Why not get a license, work and bring in some extra money to travel and save for college?” Andrew agreed to take pictures for a golf course in return for them putting it on their social media and tagging him. The job was unpaid, but got him clients and followers—basically, they advertised for him. Last summer, the most impactful thing he did was message a drone company in Chicago to ask for advice about getting clients. They told him to find a local real estate photographer and offer aerial photography to them. So that’s what he did. David: “Are you just doing photography or are you doing video too? Do you charge separately for videos? Do you also edit?” Andrew says he takes as many pictures or videos as he can in 30-45’ to give clients a lot to choose from. If he has to fly from one spot to another, that’s a video. He does some editing but outsources most of it to a company in Vietnam for a very affordable price. For pictures with some videos and no editing he charges $100, slightly more for editing and/or any location farther than 30’ from home. David: “Regarding your approach to the golf course, did you say, ‘I'm going to get my name out there’, and then Googled ‘golf courses in my area’ and contacted them? How did you specifically start to make that happen?” While flying one day, Andrew took pictures of a golf course across the road from his school which he posted to IG and tagged. When they responded that they loved his pictures through Instagram, he requested a contact. He sent them an EM saying, “I'm starting this company, I'm insured and licensed. Can I come to your golf course and take pictures for your social media?” They agreed, so Andrew took and edited pictures and sent them over (They still post his pictures). Since then, Andrew’s process has become simple...he finds contact information online and reaches out. At this point, though, he has a whole portfolio so he’s not offering his services for free. David: “Tell us more about the paying clients that you got from free work. Were they members of the golf course or people from the neighborhood who saw it on social media and reached out?” Andrew got two clients from the first golf course who were from the neighborhood. At first, they followed the golf course on IG. Then, they followed Andrew, reaching out to him later through there. They wanted pictures of the golf course for their home; he charged them $125 for 4x2 & 5x7 pictures. With printing costing $30, he made $95 from each job.  David: “So after getting paying clients from the golf course, how did you expand into real estate? Did you try and fail and then reach out to that company in Chicago or is that the first thing you did? Walk us through when you started shifting to real estate.” Andrew replied, “The first real estate job I had was in July before I reached out to that company in Chicago. I brought business cards to my school’s career day, and went up to a broker from a large commercial real estate firm who spoke and said, ‘I just started doing aerial photography for real estate. Here's my card.’ He said thank you—nothing more. In July he reached out to ask me to do a 500-acre farm. I was so excited because I thought they would give me more work if I did good.” The work took four hours and he charged $585: $400 for the time, $185 for editing and a 5-minute video (at that point, he had no idea what to charge so he made it up). Now, Andrew gets one $200-$500 real estate job per month. During busy months, Andrew averages 5-10 jobs a week, which is $2000 to $4,000 a month. During slow months, he often has 2 jobs a week, making $1,200 a month. David: “How much detail do you add to videos...Music? Narration? Overlay text?” He uses Litchi to map out his flight 10 minutes beforehand and then creates automated flight video going around the property for 40 minutes, taking video clips and pictures of the house. For video, he starts off with a title/address and puts it to music. David: “What other ways have you found effective to get clients? I know you also reached out to a real estate photographer. Talk about that a little bit.” Essentially, Andrew Googled “real estate photographer, Frederick, MD,” and found one company to email, saying “I do aerial photography, and I would love to be the person you hire.” When he sent his portfolio, they’d said other people had charged a lot more than him and their work wasn’t as good, so he was hired! Later when Andrew posted/tagged pics of big hotel chains, when they said “This is amazing. We love this”, he said it was a big confidence booster. David: “For your company, did you set up the SkyPix name as an LLC with a bank account or is that just kind of a name you chose to?” Since he’s under 18, the name is a trade name. When 18, he’ll create an LLC. Andrew keeps track of all payments, using Square for invoices and a Google spreadsheet to keep track of everything he spends. David: “Where do you see things headed? Will you stay in real estate, or with golf courses, or try to expand into other things? Will you build a team? What does the future look like for you?” Andrew wants to start a drone pilot network, like drone ERs. He’ll be working with a development team to develop the platform and do his marketing. He’s moving to Orlando, so right now he’s training somebody in Maryland to keep doing work there (right now, this person is studying to get their Part 107 license with Drone Launch Academy). Once he moves to Orlando, Andrew will reach out to real estate agents. He’d eventually like to get into mapping and infrared, but doesn't have the money saved up right now to put towards something like an Inspire 2 with a special camera.” Connect with Martin Instagram: www.instagram.com Website: www.skypixap.com Have a Drone Business? Want to be Interviewed for Season 3? Complete this questionnaire: Drone to 1K Business Owner Application Training from Drone Launch Academy Part 107 Exam Prep Course ($50 off) Aerial Video A to Z Course (20% off) Other Places to Listen iTunes Stitcher Google Play Spotify TuneIn

MyCreditStatus Podcast
Use My Credit Status To Get A Great Credit Score

MyCreditStatus Podcast

Play Episode Play 39 sec Highlight Listen Later Feb 23, 2020 15:53


We have been working hard to provide you with the best user experience on our website. There are so many exciting developments happening at the moment. In this podcast, we interview David Bester who is the Chief Analytical Officer at MCS. David has over 10 years of experience in the online field. One of his primary functions is to continually keep us up to date with the latest software, making sure that we remain one of the leading credit providers in South Africa. These are some of the questions we asked David: How can consumers fix their credit scores by making use of MCS? What advice do you have for people who have a terrible credit score? Currently, there are 3 options to choose from when consumers are looking for their credit reports on MCS. Can you explain the difference between them? There are hundreds of credit reporting websites to choose from, what sets MCS aside from the rest?

Learn Korean with David
Episode 64 - What to say with first encounters

Learn Korean with David

Play Episode Listen Later Nov 7, 2019 7:11


Want to learn some more daily Korean? Take a listen here! Today we will learn/review: Hello 안녕하세요~ How are you? 잘지내요? I'm good. 잘지내요. What's your name? 이름이 뭐예요? My name is ____. 내이름은 David입니다. 저는 David 입니다 How old are you? 몇 살이에요? Long time no see. 오랜만에요. Have questions? Send me an email: learnkoreanwithdavid@gmail.com Check out our instagram: instagram.com/learnkoreanwithdavidig Thanks to my patreons! J.V. Helena Phoebe Steed Wanna support me? https://www.patreon.com/dtrettel Special thanks goes to Vivian for making the amazing podcast logo art! Check her out! instagram.com/vxvx.wx Also, this is sponsored! --- This episode is sponsored by · Anchor: The easiest way to make a podcast. https://anchor.fm/app

Gritty Founder
00062. How Visionary Entrepreneur David Hose Built Seven Businesses and Is Now the CEO of AirMap

Gritty Founder

Play Episode Listen Later Nov 4, 2019 53:06


On today's episode of Gritty Founder, Kreig Kent talks with David Hose about his journey as an entrepreneur. David shares valuable advice on setting goals, finding a great team, and knowing your customers. David Hose is CEO of AirMap, the world’s leading airspace management platform for drones. He’s a seasoned technology leader and has founded seven businesses over the course of his career. Some Questions Kreig asks David: - How did you persevere when you would build an idea and not see traction? (18:35) - Why do you think so many startups fail? (24:45) - If you were starting a company from scratch, what would you make sure you have in order before starting? (26:55) - What is one skill founders should focus on developing? (36:21) In This Episode, You Will Learn: - About David’s background and how he became an entrepreneur (4:25) - The story of how David built Signalsoft (7:54) - How setting goals will help you persevere (18:51) - Why a great team is more important than a great idea (27:20) - Timing plays a huge role (30:40) - The first order of business is to stay in business (32:41) - The importance of knowing your customer (36:36) - Why David thinks most business success stories are largely because of luck (41:08) Connect with David Hose: Twitter AirMap Also Mentioned on This Show... David’s favorite quote: “Never mistake activity for achievement.” —John Wooden David’s book recommendation: The Hard Thing About Hard Things by Ben Horowitz

Calvary Baptist Church - Grand Rapids, MI

July 21, 2019 Speaker: Pastor Jeff Halsted "Of Kings and Kingdoms: The Rule of David: How the Mighty Have Fallen" 2 Samuel 1:1-27

Friends of Kijabe
Mardi Steere

Friends of Kijabe

Play Episode Listen Later Aug 30, 2019 58:07


FULL EPISODE EPISODE SUMMARY Conversation with Dr. Mardi Steere about Mission, Leadership, Emergency Medicine and Ebenezer Moments from her 8+ years at Kijabe Hospital. EPISODE NOTES David - So today, I'm talking with Mardi Steere. This is a conversation that I don't want to have. It's about leaving about memories, and about Kijabe.And I don't want to have it because I don't want you guys ever to leave. That is the hardest part of life in Kijabe. But amazing people come and amazing people go and you're gonna do amazing things and stay in touch. First, why don't you give the introduction you gave at the medical team the other day. Mardi - So this is bittersweet for me as well. We came to Kijabe in 2011 and planned to stay for two years and here we are eight and a half years later, taking our leave. And in some ways, it's inevitable. You can't stay in a place forever. It's been a real opportunity for me to reflect. David - Let me pause you real quick there. So when you first came, who is we? And then what did you come to do? Mardi - In 2011, I was a young pediatric emergency physician with an engineering husband looking for a place where we felt like God had said "To whom much is given, much is required," and we knew our next step was to go in somewhere with the gifts and the passions and the exposure and education that we've been given. And so I came as a Pediatrician, and the hospital hadn't had a long-term pediatrician in quite a while. Jennifer Myhre had just joined the team in 2010 and my husband Andy is a civil engineer and project manager, and now, theological educator as well.We moved here with our then two-year-old and four-year-old to do whatever seemed to be next. David - That's amazing. So give the theological introduction to the Ebenezer. Mardi - It comes from first Samuel Chapter 7 verse 7-12, where there's a battle between the Philistines and the Israelites and Samuel lays a stone to God for being faithful and to remember what God has done. When Andy and I got married in 1998, actually, it was a scripture that was read at our wedding. And we were encouraged when these Ebenezer moments come, take stock of them, step back, and acknowledge what God has done . Those moments will be key moments in your marriage. As I was talking to the medical division the other day, I felt like it was just another reminder that, as we have our professional lives and we work in a place like Kijabe and we serve, it's really easy to get caught up day-to-day in the daily struggles that we all have - with life and death and bureaucracy and not enough money and not enough equipment and team dynamics and conflict. But there are these moments when we take a step back and we see what God has done. This hospital has been around for 100 years, and I've only been here for a little over eight of them, but there are so many moments where I look back on where we've come from - and the journey that we've been on - and I see these landmark moments of God intervening. David - How do you see the balance here between medical excellence and spiritual - I don't know if excellence is the right word - between medical excellence and spiritual excellence. I think the origins of medicine were very intertwined with the spiritual, but at least in Western medicine, it's very divorced and I feel like in some ways, what I see happening here is not taught in classrooms anywhere else. Mardi - This is one of those things that I am going to be taking with me for the rest of my life. I don't know who's listening to this, but Americans have a cultural Christianity where it's acceptable in medicine, I think, to ask medical questions and maybe you ask a spiritual question and saying God bless you and bless her heart, and praying for people is somewhat accepted but still it's a parallel track to medicine. In Australia, it's completely divorced. There's almost a cultural fear of discussing the spiritual in Australia, a very agnostic country. So to be a Christian in Australia, you have to make a choice. But then when you go to medical school, it's taught to you almost don't bring that in. This is a science, and one of the things that I love about Kijabe is that they are inextricably intertwined. There isn't a meeting that we start here without prayer. When I'm covering pediatrics, as a clinician, we start with team prayer and depending how busy things are, if you're trying to see 30 patients on rounds, you might pray for the room, as you start. We ask the parents how they're doing, and then we pray for the mom with her permission, and for the baby or the dad or whichever caregiver is there. We ask God to intervene, we ask God to give us wisdom, we ask him to be a part of the science. We ask him to be a part of the conversations. When it comes to the even bigger picture, when it comes to strategically planning the hospital, and our core values again - they're inextricably intertwined, and it's a gift. One thing that I'm gonna take with me as a leader and as a clinician, is that it is not difficult to ask anyone, "What is your world view and what is your spiritual worldview? Because all of us have one in Australia. That world view might be... "I don't believe there's a spiritual realm." That's so important to know. But what if the answer to that question is," I believe in God, but I don't see him doing anything." What an opportunity we miss. What if we have immigrants in our population in our community, and we don't ask them "What is your spiritual and cultural world view? What do you think is happening beneath the surface?" and we don't give someone an opportunity to say without derision, "I think I've been cursed" or "There is a generational problem in my family," and we don't open up the opportunity to intervene in a way that's holistic, much we miss by not intertwining the spiritual and the physical? The fact is every one of our communities has a spiritual world view, and shame on us if we don't explore it with them. David - Amen. It's fascinating here because before coming here, I thought of missions as giving. The longer I'm here, the more I think of it as receiving. When you stop and pray for a family, the encouragement received from those family members is huge. The trust and the love, and you do see people who come in the halls and you ask, "Why are you here?" "Because my doctor will pray for me." Mardi - So what's interesting to me is there are some conversations going on in medicine around the world right now about this "innovative new concept of Compassionomics." And really it's exactly what you're saying, it's not new and it's not innovative. I think that Compassionomics is our fearful way of re-exploring the spiritual. It's taking the time on rounds to say, "How are you doing as a family, how are we doing as a team," and to take the opportunity to draw comfort from each other. It comes from a spiritual foundation, that I think that we've lost, and I think a lot of it comes from burnout and from the way that medicine has become a business and a commodity. We're starting to re-explore through Compassionomics, and I pray through exploring the spiritual, the deeper side of medicine that around the world I think people really miss. David - Right on. Mardi - And if that's not reverse innovation, I don't know what is. David - It's fascinating, this space that Kijabe fills and how we think about it and how we talk about it. I use a phrase - World class healthcare in the developing world - but when I use that, I don't mean that I want Kijabe to be the big hospital in the big city in the West, because there are certain aspects that we don't want to lose. Yes, absolutely, it would be super-cool to be doing robotic surgery, and some of these wild technological things, but really I feel like what Kijabe excels at is not fancy and not glamorous. It fundamentals of medicine. I remember Evelyn Mbugua telling me this one time. I asked her, "What do you think about medicine in general?" "When I have a challenge or when I'm stuck on a patient, I go back to their history." It's fascinating that that's fascinating! Some of the basic fundamentals of medicine are practiced here, just looking at your patient and laying your hands on them and touching them and talking to them. A conversation is both a diagnostic tool and it's actually medicine. If the numbers are true, I know it's different from orthopedic surgery than for outpatient, but, if half of medicine is actually placebo, this stuff is really important to healing. And it's not anti-science. It actually is science to care about people. Mardi - It's interesting when you mentioned the placebo effect. I think that the placebo effect is considered as nothing, but it's not the placebo effect, is actually a real effect. It's that time and conversation and compassion, truly do bring healing and the point of a control trial is to see in a drug-do better than that. But the thing we're doing, already makes sense. It's interesting to me that medicine around the world is getting faster and faster and more and more advanced. Time is money. I think that around the world, we wanna save money in medicine, we wanna do more with what we have, but we're willing to sacrifice time, to make that happen. And why is that the first thing that goes? Burned-out physicians in high income countries, the thing that they love, is when they have to see more and more patients in less and less time because they know what they have to offer is beyond a drug, and beyond a diagnosis and beyond a referral and beyond a surgery. The one of my favorite phrases in medicine that I truly don't understand but want to spend the rest of my life working on it, is a "value-based care." I think to define value you have to define what we're offering. If value is time, then one of the things I think that Kijabe and mission hospitals can continue to pioneer the way in is, "how do we cut costs in other areas but refuse to sacrifice the cost of time and make sure that our impact is helpful for our patients but that also helps our team members and our clinicians receive the value that comes from being a part of a meaningful conversation. I think that's what patients want too. They don't want the robotics, they come to us because they're helpless vulnerable and afraid, and those are the things that we're treating. They trust what we tell them and if we don't have the time to build up that trust, we've lost a lot of the value that we offer. David - What have you seen change about team? You guys have been part of this big culture change process, but I think it's something that's started long before long before either of us. What do you see is the arc of Kijabe and the archive teamwork and the arc of culture? Mardi - So, Kenya is an incredibly multicultural and diverse country and Nairobi is high-powered and it's fast and it's a lot of white-collar and highly educated people and Kijabe is not so far from that. I think we operate more in a Nairobi mindset than a rural, small town mindset, but that's actually been a huge transition, I think, is going from presenting ourselves as a rural distant place to a part of a busy growing rapidly advancing system, and so that comes with leadership styles that become more open and more I guess, more modern in style. And so that's been the first big thing that I've just seen a huge jar over the part of the decade that I have been here is that leadership is no longer just top-down, enforced. It's participational leadership and I'm a massive fan of that. Leaders do have to make hard decisions and make things happen, but the input of the team has become a much, much higher priority in the last decade. And that's huge because our young highly-educated, highly-aspirational team members have got some great ideas and shame on us as leaders, if we don't take the time to listen to their approach to things. So that inclusive style of leadership has has been a huge arc. And then I think the other thing is just our changing generations, millennials are not confined to high-income countries. We have a young generation of people here who aren't gonna stay in the same job for 40 years like their parents or their grandparents did, and that's the same globally. And so we've had to question, over the last decade, how do you approach team members who are only gonna be here for a little while? Do you see that is, they're just gonna go, or do you get the maximum investment into them and benefit out of them in the time that they're gonna be here and then release them with your blessing? And so that's been something that's been huge for me is when we've got these new graduate nurses or lab staff radiographers, to not be on the fact that three years after they come to us, they go it's to say, "You know what, we've got these guys for three years, let's sow into them, let's get the most we can out of their recent education... Let's do what we can to up skill them with the people that we've got here and then let's release them all over Kenya to be great resources for health care across the country and across the region. David - I would say, for healthcare and for the gospel. I've been wrestling a lot with what does it mean for Kijabe is to be a mission hospital. I think the classic definition - I don't know if we define it as such, I don't often hear people say it out loud, but I think it's an unwritten thing - that what makes a Mission hospital a Mission Hospital, is that it cares for the poor. Hopefully on some level, or on a lot of levels, that will always be true at Kijabe. But I'm really excited about the possibility of what you just described, that if these guys are here for three or four years and we are to training them with the attitude that they are going out as Christian leaders and as missionaries to these parts of Kenya that honestly, you and I will never touch. And a lot of the places I've never even heard of. But if we're equipping them to be the light that's the huge opportunity that Kijabe has to be missional. Mardi - This is a much, much longer podcast, but defining mission is really really important, isn't it? I think that there's a couple of things that stick out to me as you're talking and one is that, I think mission has a history that can be associated with colonialism. And one thing I love about my time in Kenya is seeing that we are a globe of missionaries. The church that we attended in Nairobi, Mamlaka Hill Chapel, these guys would send mission teams to New Zealand, which is fabulous. It's not that lower middle income countries are receiving missionaries anymore. All of us need the gospel, all of us need the full word of Jesus and when you're spreading the gospel, what are you spreading? I think that this is a much longer conversation, but I believe that we are called to go and make disciples we are called to serve the sick, we are called to serve the poor, we are called to serve those in prison. I focus on the parable of the sheep and the goats, it is one of my life scriptures, "when you are poor and sick and needy whatever you did for the least of these, you did for me." And what I hope for Kijabe does is that for whoever passes through our doors, whether it be patient, whether it be staff member, this is who we are, we love Jesus and we want you to know this incredible King who gave so much for us and who has an eternal life for us that starts now. And eternal life starting now means making an impact and restoring that which is broken, and it means restoring it now, wherever you are. As our team members go out to work in other hospitals, I would hope that one of the indicators of success for us would be a lack of brain drain, because it would show that we've shown people, "You know what there are people here that need you in healthcare. And this is why I'm here." If I had wanted to be an evangelist rather than a health care missionary, I should have stayed in Australia, for less people in Australia know Jesus that in Kenya. But I felt like my call in mission was to serve the sick in a place where I could help other people do the same. That's been my passion here, but I'm called to go back to Australia now. Does that mean my mission life is over? Absolutely not. It means that I'm going back to Australia to love Jesus and serve sick there and to do it in a different way. And I think that understanding that all of us, whoever is listening to this podcast right now, wherever you you have a call to mission, it's that sphere of influence that God's put you in. It's to take care of the poor or the sick, or to love the wealthy, who are lost around you that are never gonna step foot in a church but need a love of Jesus every bit as much as one of our nursing students here in the college. David - Amen again, that's fantastic. So back to Ebenezers, back to the the stones. What are things come to mind as you look back over on your time at Kijabe that were hallmarks or turning points? Mardi - There's a few of them. One evening sticks out to me because it's so indicative of the bigger picture and what we've been working towards. I'd been here for about nine months or so. . . One of the things that Jennifer Myhre and I noticed is we started out on pediatrics was that our nursing staff were incredibly passionate about their kids, but no one had really had the time to teach them about sick kids and how to resuscitate them, just basic life support, because they were so overwhelmed. You know, there was one nurse who was taking care of 12-15 patients at a time. That ratio is now one to eight, so it's much easier. But they just hadn't had the opportunity to learn some of the basic life-saving assessment in resuscitation skills, and so we started doing just weekly mock resuscitations with the nurses and as we got to know each other and they got to trust me and to know that I wasn't there to, to judge them, but to try and help them, we would do mock recesses every week, and people would stop being scared of coming and would come with by interested and actually came to test their knowledge. When I started in 2011, about once a week I would get called in, in the middle of the night to find a baby blue and not breathing, who was dead, and there was nothing that I could do. But what we worked together on was setting up a resuscitation room, and setting up the right equipment. And so after about nine months of this, I was called in for yet another resuscitation in the middle of the night, and by the time I got there, the baby was just screaming and pink, and I asked the nurse is what had happened and it was the same story as always, this baby choked on milk, they had turned on the oxygen given the baby oxygen done some CPR and they resuscitated that baby before I got there, they didn't need me at all. And the Ebenezer for me was the was the pride on their faces. "We are experts at this and we know what we're doing." That has just escalated leaps and bounds. Now we've got outstanding nursing leadership and they're being equipped and taught and up-skilled every day. But that was an Ebenezer moment for me that the time taken to build relationship and team and invest doesn't just bring a resuscitated baby and life is important, but it builds team and it builds ownership and pride in "this is what I've been called to do, and I'm good at it." It's interesting because it's what you would do is individual doctors with your teams and doing the mock code. But it's also very much a systems process for Kijabe hospital, right? A big part of solving that challenge was getting the right nursing ratios, but also setting up high dependency units to where children you're concerned about could be escalated. Did that happened during your time here? Mardi - So when we started here in 2011, children weren't really admitted to the ICU at all unless they were surgical patients who just had an operation, and then the surgeons would take care of them and transfer them down to the ward. So the pediatrics team wasn't really involved in any ICU care, extremely rarely. We didn't have a high dependency unit. And our definition of high dependency unit, here, is a baby that can be monitored on a machine 24-7. This is something that shows you how reliant we are on partnerships, David. So for example, the nursing and the medical team together decided, "Look, we think we need a three-bed unit, where at least the babies who were the more sick ones can be monitored on machines." And so, Bethany kids were the ones who equipped... We turned one of our words into a three-bed HDU in the old Bethany kids wing, and that was the first time we could put some higher risk babies on monitoring so that if they deteriorated we knew about it sooner. And we saw deaths start to drop, just with that simple thing. The other thing was that pediatricians who worked here in the past weren't necessarily equipped in how to do... ICU care. And so Jennifer and I said, "Well I'm a Peds-emergency physician, and she is an expert in resource-poor medicine, between the two of us, we can probably figure this out." We started putting some babies in ICU who we knew had a condition that would be reversible if we could just hook them up for 24 hours to ventilator. So we started ventilating babies with just pneumonia or bronchiolitis. Or sepsis, that was the other big one, something that if you can help their heart beats more strongly for a day or two, you can turn the tide. And so we just started working with the ICU team to say, "Look, can we choose some babies to start bringing up here? And four years later we were overtaking the ICU at the time and that's why we had to build a new Pediatric ICU, which opened in 2016. All of these things are incremental, and we stand on the shoulders of giants. The Paeds ward existed because a surgeon said "I don't want babies with hydrocephalus and spina bifida to not get care." And then we came along and said "We think that's great, but we think that babies with hydrocephalus spina bifida, who also have kidney problems and malnutrition, should probably have a pediatrician care for them." And over time, that degree of care, that we've been able to offer has just grown and grown. And we had Dr. Sara Muma as a pediatrician join us in 2012 then Dr. Ima Barasa - she was sponsored into pediatric residency long before I got here. That was the foresight of the medical director back then, to say "We are gonna need some better pediatric care". And then I stepped into the medical director role and people like Ima and Ariana came along and they've just pushed it further and further and further. None of us are satisfied with what we walk into, and we keep saying we can do better because these kids deserve more. David - That's fantastic, I think that's another way when you think about the influence and the impact of Kijabe, it's that refusing to settle. It's to say, "Yeah this is possible. Let's figure it out." And for all the team members to say that and commit to it, and for the leadership to support that I think that's what makes Kijabe special. I read something that the other day, it was just an interesting take, someone said [to a visiting doctor] "Why are you going to that place? It has so much." But Kijabe only has “so much” because the immense sacrifice of so many people over so much time. None of this showed up without the hours and the donations and years and years and years of work. I remember you saying that about Patrick with his ophthalmology laser? How did you phrase that? Mardi - Patrick, he's such a wonderful example of the kind of person that doesn't look for reward, but sees a need and just walks to the finish line. He started out, I believe, on the housekeeping team in the hospital. He's been here for 20 years at least, I think, and then went through clinical office or training, which is a physician assistant level training, and then received higher training in cataract surgery. He started our ophthalmology service in 2012. Since then he had nurses trained around him. He's been doing cataract surgery, and then he said, "We've got these diabetic patients and the care we offer isn't good enough, we need a laser." He went to Tanzania, and got laser training, and now he's going to start doing laser surgery on patients with diabetic retinopathy. He refuses to be satisfied with the status quo. And that's the heritage that we have here. You know, talking about even a moment I feel them enormously privileged to have been here in 2015 as we as a hospital celebrated our centennial. It took us a year to prepare for that, and I know you were a part of that process, David. David's job was find all of the stories and all of the photos and interview all of the people and make sure to document everything that might be lost if we lose these stories now. Being a part of that process... I was in tears so many times when we would hear one more story about somebody's commitment and sacrifice. We've been able to write down that story from 2015, with the Theodora Hospital as we were known then. The stories of not just these missionaries but these extraordinary early nurses, like Wairegi and Salome who worked here for decades, who were initially trained informally, because we didn't even have accreditation for the nursing program. David - We didn't even exist as a country. Mardi - That's a really good point! To hear those stories and to see our very first lab technician was just amazing. And then when these 80 and 90-year-olds came over and saw the scope of the hospital as it exists now, it just gave me a glimpse into whatever we do today, we have no concept of 100 years from now, the fruit that that will bear. And I think a missional life, is like that, isn't it? It's being okay with not seeing fruit. There's foundations positive and negative, that all of us lay in the interactions and the work that we do and I think all of us, our prayer is that those seeds that we plant would bear fruit. We have to be okay with not seeing the fruit with saying this has been my contribution. I've stood on the shoulders of giants and now I hand over the baton to you, who will come after me. Make of it what you will. It's not my dream and it's not my goal, I've done my part, and let's see where God takes it through you. David - And so, very shortly, you're about to become a giant. [laughter] I really appreciate you, I appreciate you bringing that up. That was one of the most important things that could have ever happened. It was in the 2015. It was before we started Friends of Kijabe. The realization for me I always come back to how long life is. It's both amazingly short and amazingly long. Watching Dr. Barnett and realizing that he worked here for 30 years, and then went back to the states, so now he's... I think he just hit 102 years old. It really does bring in a clear view what is legacy, what does it mean and what are we building? But also that this is very much outside of us. We get to pour everything we have into it for a time, but then others will take up that work. And it's both humbling, and amazing and... Mardi - And I think it's helpful to as many of us have a sense of calling on our lives, I think that this is what God has for me now. But we have to hold that with open hands because our view and our understanding of what God is doing is so small and what he is doing is so large. I think sometimes in this kind of setting, you come in with a dream and a passion and a goal, but you see that path shift and change during the time that you're here and that is good and that is okay. I think a danger is when we come in and think that we have the answers or we know exactly where God is going, and then things don't work out, and we burn out or are bitter or disappointed. To come into a sense of mission and calling... Saying "not my will but yours be done," and to just obey in the day-to-day and to see where it goes and to be okay with the direction being different at the end than it was at the beginning - I think that's how we lead a life led by the Spirit. We hold these things with open hands and say, "God take it where you will" and if it's a different place, let me just play my part in that. David - Okay, I gotta dig into that cause. How do you balance that? I would frame it as vision. I feel like a good example to look at, I don't know if it's the right one, so, you can choose a different one if you want to, but the balance between vision and practicality and reality. Because you say that, and you are walking in the day-to-day, but I just think of the Organogram that has been on your wall, which was on Rich's, wall, which is now your's again, which is about to be Evelyn's wall. And you had this vision back in, "this is how I think the organization should work to function well." But there's a four-year process in making that come to pass. How do the day-to-day and the long-term balance? Mardi - I think we're talking about spiritual and practical things combined aren't we? I think that anyone who's in organizational leadership knows that you, your organization as a whole needs a trajectory and a long-term plan. We make these five-year strategic plans which are based on the assumptions of today and every strategic plan. You need to go back every couple of years and say, Were those assumptions right? And just to be a super business nerd for a minute, you base things on SWOT analyses and you base things on the current politics and economics. David - What does SWOT stand for? Mardi - Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats. Then you do a PESTLE analysis, you look at the politics, you look at the economy, you look at the social environment of the day, etcetera etcetera. In technology everything is changing quicker than we can keep up with. And so I think that when you're looking at a place like a happy, which is large and complex, you set yourself some goals, and you work with them, but, you know, so something's going to change. Politics are gonna change, the economy's gonna tank, maybe there's gonna be a war on the other side of the world and we’re the only source of this, that, or the other?Maybe India falls into the sea and we start doing all of the surgeries that India was doing? I just don't even know. One thing for me, I've been enormously privileged to have been the medical director for two different terms that were separated by two years. And so I think I have a slightly unique perspective because from 2013 to 2016, I set the way I thought that our division would work and I came back into the role, two years later and already it had changed, but Rich had made it a better. It's funny, I when I came into the role, my predecessor. Steve Letchford said, "Look, you're gonna need a deputy, you can't do this by yourself." And I looked at my team and said "Um, No, I need four deputies, four sub-divisional heads because this is too much for one or two people and I can't keep my ear to the ground without it. I came back after two years away and there were five deputies and my initial gut reaction was, "You changed my structure!" And then I realized that Rich and Ken had made a really wise call. It did have to be five deputies for lots of really good reasons and that team of five has been my absolute rock this year. David - Who is the team of five? So the team of five, I've got a head of inpatient medicine and pediatrics, and specialties and this George Otieno. There's a head of Outpatient Department, and Community Health and Satellite clinics, and that's Miriam Miima. I've got ahead of Surgery and Anesthesia, and that's Jack Barasa. There's a head of Pharmacy, and that's Elizabeth Irungu. Then there's a head of what we call Allied and Diagnostic that incorporates the Lab and Pathology, Radiology, Physiotherapy, Nutrition and Audiology, and the head of that, it is Jeffrey Mashiya who is a radiographer. What's amazing to me about that is when I instituted this framework in 2014, there were four people and they were all missionaries. And I've come back in 2018 and there are five people and they're all our Kenyan senior staff and they're extraordinarily talented and any one of them can stand in for the medical director, when the medical director is away. What a gift that has been. David - I can't imagine how important this is for continuity. Because you think right now, you're handing off your responsibilities to Evelyn, but she has five people that...those are the executors and they actually get to groom her in leadership. That's amazing and for the strength of Kijabe and the stability, it's indispensable. I don't think there's another way to build a strong, stable system other than to build that. Mardi - Yeah, that's actually one of the things that brings me so much joy as I leave is the team isn't going to notice too much the change in senior leadership because that level of day-to-day practical strategic and operational leadership is just so strong. I think it made Ken as my CEO, I think it made his job easier to say, "Look, who should fill the position that Mardi is vacating?" He was able to say, "Who's got institutional memory and who's got leadership expertise and wisdom, and who knows how the senior leadership team works?" Whoever that person is, they're gonna have a team around them that will mean that no voices get lost in the transition. When I took the job in 2013, hearing the voices of specifically missionaries and surgeons can be really noisy and you hear their voices, but who's listening to the head of palliative care and who's listening to the head of laboratory who's listening to the head of nutrition, which is a tiny team of four people, those voices are well represented by wise people who all listen to each other and make the system work around them. It's a tremendous gift and there's no way to do this job without a team of people like that around you. And you know what, that's one of my other Ebenezers, David. Thursday, we installed Evelyn as the incoming medical director. Seeing those five sub-divisional heads praying for Evelyn and as that took off, I will never forget that. David - Absolutely. I wasn't here the first time, but I remember I should print out a series of those [pictures] because I remember you handing the hat to Rich and I remember it going back to you and then watching you give Evelyn the hat and stethoscope. There's this legacy of people that care. It's interesting to think about... 'cause you are, I mean you’re building this remarkable team and your system and things that operate independently of you. But at the same time, you're unbelievably special, and have given a ton over the past years and you. As Rich phrased it, you walked in shoes that not many other people will get to walk in. It's special. I imagine is what it's like when the former presidents get together for their picture. There's things that only only you guys will know and only you guys will have experienced. Mardi - You know, one thing that is really special is I think a lot of leadership transitions come through pain, brutality and war. And one thing that I noticed on Thursday, is that in the room as I handed over leadership to evil and were Steve Letchford and Peter Bird, who have both been here for decades and who've previously been the medical directors. I think there's a beauty about the transition of leadership here in the clinical division that it hasn't come through attrition, war and burnout. I'm leaving with a lot of sadness, and I'm not cutting ties with this place to see. . . there has been a cost. Rich. I know, I would still love to be here in this position as the person who is my predecessor…but to see such strength of leadership that is here and sowing into the next generation rather than leaving when they died. They've stepped down and gone into leading other areas to ensure that the team that follows them is strong, I think that's a tremendous gift and something unique about Kijabe. People love this place and they love this team and they wanna be a part of its ongoing success in its broader mission. David - And they love and they love that above their own glory and their own desires. I think it's what makes an organization great, it’s what makes a country great. I think it's probably gonna be easier in a place of faith, honestly, that this is God's ministry, not our own, not any one persons's. FPECC What is FPECC? I think it's important for people to know a little bit about how hard is it to create a training program or anything new in Kenya? Mardi - So FPECC is the fellowship program in pediatric emergency and critical care. Ariana [Shirk] and I are pediatric emergency physicians, we trained in pediatrics, and then we did specially training in how to take care of emergencies and resuscitation. And were the only two formally trained pediatric emergency doctors in Kenya. Critical Care is taking care of kids in ICUs and currently in the country, there are four pediatric ICU doctors for 55 million people. I don't have the stats that my finger tips, but it's extraordinarily low. I think of the city where you live and how many ICU beds there are, and how many children's hospitals you have just in your own city if you're based in a high income country. For 55 million people, there's kids just can’t access that care. David - Recently, I'm sure it's gone up, but two years ago, it was 100 beds for the country. Mardi - For adults and kids. . . In the country, there are a 12 pediatric ICU beds. Actually no, that's not true, there are 16 and eight of them came into existence, when we opened up our Peds ICU here three years ago. David - And keep in mind, this is East Africa, of the 56 million people. . .33 million of those are under age 18. So 16 beds. Mardi - That's right. Think of anything that can cause a critical illness. Trauma, illness, cancer, you name it, that's not enough beds. So when I came to Kenyo, I had no dream of starting a training program that wasn't even remotely on my radar. But sometimes things just come together at the right time. It was actually University of Nairobi, where they have the only other Peds ICU, they had been working with University of Washington in Seattle to say, “Look, can you help us start some training?” This is really important, because in East Africa there is nowhere that a pediatrician can learn how to run an ICU. Think of the US, where every state has got multiple training programs, where pediatricians will spend three years to learn to be an ICU doctor. There is nowhere for 360 million people in this region to learn how to do ICU care for children. Just think about that for a second. 360 million people... No training program. There's one in Cairo, and there's one in Cape Town, but that's for 600 million people. So I'm just taking a few of them where there's nowhere to go. University of Nairobi was talking to Seattle. They've got two Peds ICU doctors in Nairobi and they were thinking of starting a program. Then just through several contacts, actually through the Christian mission network, one of University of Washington's ICU doctors grew up in Nigeria but she's involved with the Christian Medical and Dental Association, and so she knew about Kijabe. The University of Washington team came out to Kenya for a visit, and they said, "Hey we heard you doing some ICU care caring Kijabe. Can we come out and see what's happening?" That was in 2013. They came out and said "Hey what are you guys doing here?" And we showed them around, and their minds were blown, they didn't know there was any peds ICU happening outside of Nairobi at all. And so, we rapidly started some conversations and said "Look, why don't we start a training program in Pediatric Emergency Care and Critical Care and our trainees can train at both Kijabe hospital and Kenyatta hospital in Nairobi and they can get an exposure to two different types of ICUs. They can also take advantage of the fact that Ariana and I are here as Peds Emergency faculty, and we can split the training load. Training programs in the US have dozens of faculty for something like this, to rely on just two doctors in Nairobi was an incredible risk even though University of Washington is supporting with visiting faculty. So we said, "Look, we've got all these people in the country at the same time, let's just try and do it." So we started that process in 2013. We took our first fellows at the beginning of this year. It's taken us six years. That's how things work here. You've got to form relationships. University of Nairobi didn't know us real well when it came to our pediatric care. We had to get to know each other, we had to develop a curriculum. We had to let the Ministry of Health know. We had to get the Kenya pediatrics Association on side. The Kenya Medical Practitioners and Dentists Board, had to approve the program. The University Senate had to approve the program. We had to try and get some funding in place. None of that happens quickly. It's all relationship that's all a lot of chai. That's all a lot of back and forth and making sure that you don't try and skip anything to get through the hoops, any quicker than you need to, because if you try to go to quick it falls apart. And if University of Nairobi and Kenya doesn't own this program, it's not gonna last. And I think that's probably the first thing to take away for me is this program exists because University of Nairobi and Kenya wanted it I didn't come in here and say, "We need this.” University of Nairobi wanted it, and we said, "How can we support it?" And so Arianna showing up here for a short-term visit - which we rapidly recruited you guys as long-term - it was God's timing because Ariana and I couldn't have done this independently from each other. It's taken both of us to build those relationships over the last six years. Arianna and I are so proud of this program. Our first two graduates will finish this training at end of December 2020, and we hope and pray that we can recruit them to stay at Kijabe and University of Nairobi as our first home-grown faculty. What's been lovely about that, too, is that we've connected with people all over the world who want to support this kind of thing, they just didn't know how. David - Not did they not know how, there wasn’t a way. It literally did not exist until February 2019. Mardi - So now, we're actually talking to colleagues in Uganda and Tanzania, and colleagues in Sudan and other places about... “Hey, is this a good model for you?” I've got some contacts in Nigeria, they've got how many million people, 30 million people or something ridiculous? And there's no way to get this training there either. And people all over the world want to be able to support what a country wants to start in its own strategy. So that's something that I'm just thrilled to be leaving. Even as we leave next month, I'm hoping and planning to come back at least once a year to teach in the program for the forseeable future and to support Arianna from a distance in continuing to connect people all over the world to say, "Here's a way that your global health desires can interface with a local country's needs." David - You two are the only Peds Emergency Medicine doctors in the country and there's a realization. . .What actually is Emergency Medicine here and what is the difference between what it looks like here versus America? Mardi - Yeah, it's a really great question. First of all, Ariana and I trained in a country where there are multiple children's hospitals per city. So, Pediatric Emergency Medicine is the Emergency Department attached to a children's hospital. There are less than 10 children's hospitals on this entire continent, I think. So there are no Pediatric Emergency departments. What is really great is that Emergency Medicine combined adult and pediatric is a growing specialty here. There's been so much great work that's going on in so many countries around the region. Rwanda last year, just graduated their first class of emergency residents. Uganda just on the cusp, the great advocate there, Annette Allenyo is leading the charge for emergency medicine. Ben Wachira is an Emergency Medicine trained doctor here at Agha University, and they're on the cusp of starting an emergency medicine residency training program. You know Emergency Medicine's a funny thing. Emergency medicine in a high-income country, is a part of a functioning system. Emergency medicine in the US means that you've got ambulances that get your people to you and you've got an ICU at the other end that you send sick people to. Emergency medicine here is. . . people showing up on our door step, we don't know how to get them here and then where do we send them? I think that Emergency Medicine training here is so much more broad. We're training people not only how to provide Emergency Medicine, but how to be advocates in a broader system. And I think if you live in a high income country, you can't understand how much medical training is not about medical training. It's about advocacy and building access to care for people, no matter where they're at. What I see emerging here is…from the start, it's collaborative. Emergency Medicine training here isn't just training a doctor in a specialty to give you a certificate and leave you there. It's connecting you with people who are trying to get paramedic systems going and people trying to build ICU care. That's one of the reasons we realized that our Pediatric Emergency and Critical Care program had to be both. There's not enough places to work where you've got the luxury of staying in the ICU. Our graduates are gonna go out and work in hospitals where they will be expert trainers for the pediatricians running the ICU and the family medicine doctors running the emergency department and the surgeons who are doing pediatric surgery with just general training. Our graduates are gonna be those advocates drawing teams together asking "How can we improve the system from arrival at our doorstep till the day we send them home." It's a different focus in our training. Yes, the skills are necessary. You need to know how to run a ventilator and keep a heart pumping when it's not. But it's about building a team and being a part of solving systems issues and hopefully in a way that is affordable and sustainable. David - I love that word, systems. For me, this is the year of systems. Thinking broadly about each of these individual parts because it’s another way that healthcare here is very different from healthcare in the US. The US is just sub-specialization, that's what it's all about. And here, there's not a fine line between. . .for an Emergency Medicine doctor, you're not sitting out in casualty waiting for a kid to come in, right? If you want to find the emergency, you just walk around and lay eyes on every kid and there's gonna be one out of 70 children in that building, who is in trouble. So it really is a bigger and broader way of thinking about things. Mardi - I think another thing that's interesting to me just as we come back to the missional aspect of who we are... I think 00 years ago, a missionary was someone who would go into deepest, darkest wherever and be whoever they wanted to be. I think as we consider what is global mission, our question needs to be, “What is that country looking for, what systems are they trying to develop and how do we help them in it?" And that comes down to health…if you're a missionary, what does the local church want to do? What is their mission and how can we assist them? I think we need to ask better, what system is someone trying to build and how can we be a part of it. Because that's the key, isn't it? We're here to serve God who is restoring creation and he's doing it in lots of different ways already. We don't need to necessarily think we've got the answer, but to say "God, where are you working and how can I be a part of it, and what does it look like?" I think Mary Adam in her community health project, is a really lovely example of that. Community Health growth is a priority of Kenya. So she's gotten grant funding and she is just sowing in it, she knows every county Governor in the country, I'm suspecting. She knows how to get into the system, but how to be salt and light, and how to be the love of Jesus in making things functional and making all things new. I think that's one thing that I think Kijabe is doing well. We are looking at health strategy and saying How can we be a part of it and love that our FPECC program is in partnership with University of Nairobi. I love that our clinical offices have a program that we got accredited for called the Emergency Critical Care Clinical Officer program, that actually wasn't a part of hell strategy, but we did see a gap, and as soon as we trained people in that we went to the Clinical Officer of Council and said, "Hey you want to accredit this? This is a really good program. And they did, and now the Kenya Medical training training college has taken that program and they're doing their own program. I think those are lovely examples of saying “We're here to bring restoration but we don't want to be separate from the system. Where are you going and how can we help” David - What does that mean for friends of Kijabe? How do you see that working with Friends of Kijabe as an organization? Mardi - What's been really lovely, about Friends of Kijabe in the last year, and I know you're excited about this, David, is in what the core the Friends of Kijabe vision and mission. I think a core part of Friends of Kijabe that we've got the CEO, the CFO and the Director of Clinical Services on the Friends of Kijabe board. One question that I've heard you ask so many times in the last year is "Where are you going and how can we help, what are your priorities? Friends of Kijabe exists to help the hospital further its strategy, but also exists as a bit of a connector between people in high-income countries who really want to contribute and who have passions. Where does that intersect with the hospital strategy? So Friends of Kijabe is not going to take the whole hospital strategy and try and piecemeal help every part of it. They're gonna say, "Hey you're a part of your strategy that are happy resonates with and that's become very clear. A lot of Friends of Kijabe funding currently goes towards whatever the hospital thinks is important. The hospital has prioritized the theater expansion project this year and that's great. But, at its core, Friends of Kijabe also says, "We support the needy. We support education. We support sustainability. How can we get there?" And so [FoK] has prioritized putting money towards each of those areas which happened to align with the core values of Kijabe Hospital. So a large proportion of what Friends of Kijabe hospital is doing this year is helping us with an infrastructure project. But every year we're going re-ask "What are your priorities, and how can we help that?" But we're also going to say, "Here is where our heart beats. Can we help with this too?" I think one of the things about Friends of Kijabe is the trust that's developed since its inception. As Friends of Kijabe, we trust that the hospital leadership is following a strategy that is meaningful, that is sustainable, and that is in line with where Kenya is going and where the African Inland Church is going because that's who we're owned and operated by. As long as our missions intersect, I think Friends of Kijabe can trust that at the hospital is taking us in a good direction. David - Awesome, anything else I should ask you? Anything you'd like to add? Mardi - No. It's been an extraordinary eight years and it's been such a privilege to be here, and it's lovely to leave with joy, even as there's associated sadness. I really can't wait to see what the next few decades bring, and I'm gonna be watching both from a distance and also up close, when I come back to visit. David - Thank you Mardi.

Script & Style
Getting a Job in Tech

Script & Style

Play Episode Listen Later May 24, 2019 68:23


Panelists Susan Greve, QA at Target, Formerly a Recruiter at DevJam Sarah Cooke, Customer Engineering at Kipsu, Prime Digital Academy graduate Emily Schweiss, Operations at Treehouse TalentPath Apprenticeship platform Web News (Todd) https://www.techspot.com/news/79848-hertz-hits-accenture-32-million-lawsuit-over-failed.html Main Topic: Getting a Job in Tech How do you find the right organization for you to join? Sarah was worried about burnout with a startup, but saw good signs from current employees Susan: Target had tons of smart people that i could learn from Emily: Treehouse saw me as an active expert in the community already and supported the causes that i believed in--breaking into tech for disadvantaged communities. Not being a jerk. And being active in the community David: jobs for phases of life: getting started, tired of corporate, making a difference and following the dream. I knew people there, and they were super proud to be part of it. How to make them interested in you? Emily: Being active in the community, and not being a jerk, sometimes the company will seek you out. Susan: building a personal brand, being known in the community, and being connected. Being in a community is like interviewing all the time. Personal brand: blogging, twitter, volunteer for organizations, show off who you are. You got an interview! Now what? What to make sure they know? What you should learn about them? Sarah: I knew who i was talking to, so I could ask more pointed questions and know what to expect. There was multiple levels of interviews, each with its own focus. Supportive environment An evolution of the employee role. Show all my skills to offer: focus to learn, enthusiasm, and other business skills. Susan: Come from startup-feel, where people come as their full-selves, and i was worried that that would be “abbreviated” in a bigcorp. What sucks about this job? Culture: I want to be on a “product team”. Someone who owns a product and helps us drive it forward. Culture: building things with humility, avoiding ego. Emily: Highlight skills you already have from non-tech things and using tech. You probably know a lot about how stuff works. Be your own gatekeeper -- dont share skills that you dont want to do. David: How much overtime is worked/expected? Red Flags-What to look out for Emily: What’s your favorite part of working here… crickets? Leave David/Todd: Long hours, Susan: I don’t want to be the token diversity hire. They need to speak to how this is going to happen. Negotiating Compensation Emily: its more than the salary. “ i have a lot of cats to pay for” Tech companies have lots of other ways to compensate you Training allowances for conferencs, training, books, that I get to choose. Time Off, Flex schedule, working from home Dont be afraid to push back when asked for a number. Sarah, Have a really specific range, more than your baseline. The range will be a conversation point. David: Dont be afraid to ask for more once youre in a role. Recruiters How can you tell the difference between a LinkedIn/copy-paste-hope recruiter and one that really cares and did their homework? What are your thoughts on the state of recruitment? Emily: which people are coming to events and engaging with communities. Meet with a few and understand what you want. Susan: bad ones don’t know you, understand whats appropriate for your background. ##Takeaways David: Advocate for yourself, compensation Sarah: networking and your personal brand. MplsJrDevs https://mplsjrdevs.com/ Susan: Conversations about salary help everyone be paid more fairly. Emily: Community is like interviewing all the time. Todd: What sucks about this job? ##Hosts Todd Gardner DavidWalsh This episode is sponsored by TrackJS JavaScript Error Monitoring. Find and fix the bugs in your web application with the context to see real user errors. Start your free trial at TrackJS.com.

Flute 360
Episode 56: Academic Highlights at Texas Woman's University

Flute 360

Play Episode Listen Later Apr 20, 2019 42:25


Flute 360 | Episode 56: “Academic Highlights at Texas Woman’s University” (42:38) In today’s episode, Heidi talks with the Flute Pedagogy class at Texas Woman’s University. Dr. Danielle Woolery who is a clarinetist and a music education specialist teaches the pedagogy class. My time at TWU was eventful with a Flute 360 presentation and then the recording of this episode. The TWU students talk about their academic successes throughout the year, their unique projects, and many other topics. Check out today’s episode! Episode 56 – Main Points: 0:26 – Gold Sponsor: Interactive Flute Retreat, South Haven, MI 1:15 – Welcome & Episode Topics 3:11 – Flute Pedagogy Course 3:26 – Dr. Danielle Woolery 3:32 – Class Topics: methodologies, résumés, studio lesson handbooks, interviews 4:45 – Caitlin: Lessons learned from the flute pedagogy course. 4:56 – Method Books: beginner & intermediate levels, scale books, and more! 6:05 – David: How to write a recommendation letter for our students. 6:55 – Flute 360’s Episode 20: Recommendation Letters 7:31 – Giovanni: Explore our teaching methods through literature. 8:05 – Giovanni & Caitlin: Supportive Environment 9:14 – Networking and Collaboration 10:20 – David: Flute Literature and Flute Pedagogy Courses 11:31 – Target’s Bookshelves 12:23 – Caitlin: Personalized Courses 12:56 – Résumés 13:24 – Every flutist has their own unique place within the music community! 14:10 – TWU’s Department of Music – Pedagogy Degree 15:55 – Caitlin’s comments 17:52 – Heidi: Life is a great teacher! 18:14 – Caitlin graduates May 2019 from TWU. 19:04 – Dr. Woolery’s comments 19:34 – TWU’s Teaching Assistantships through the Department of Music. 19:51 – David: Requirements for the T.A. 21:03 – Changing different hats as a musician. 21:21 – Caitlin: Teaching and Grading 22:35 – Building confidence and gaining experience. 23:00 – Mentorship 23:21 – Caitlin comments about her teaching assistantship. 23:29 – Denton State Supported Living Center, TX 24:44 – Time Management 25:31 – Texas Flute Society 26:12 – Jacob Wright, TFS - Festival Co-Chair 27:01 – Giovanni: Music Family at TWU 30:00 – Topic #3 30:08 – David: TWU’s Flute Pedagogy Workshop 31:14 – Flute 360’s Episode 37 with Valerie Coleman 31:44 – Dr. Danielle Woolery mentions students’ projects! 32:07 – Flute Quartet Project (Paula, Caitlin, Jacob, and special mention, David) 32:30 – Caitlin comments on the group’s flute quartet project! 32:48 – Prescribed Music List (PML) 35:38 – Click here for the PDF or contact Caitlin Rose. 36:39 – Elizabeth Gilbert’s Big Magic: Creative Living Beyond Fear 37:25 – National Association of College Wind and Percussion Instructors 38:04 – Gio’s project. 41:04 – Conclusion! 41:57 – Bronze Sponsor: J&K Productions’ Website Episode 56 – Resources Mentioned: TWU – Dr. Danielle Woolery TWU – Dr. Pamela Youngblood TWU – The Department of Music TWU Student: Paula Hartsough’s Website TWU Student: Caitlin Rose’s Website TWU Student: David Wright’s Instagram TWU Student: Giovanni Perez’s Facebook Flute 360 – Dr. Heidi Kay Begay’s Website Episode 56 – Sponsors: Gold: Interactive Flute Retreat, South Haven, MI Silver & Bronze: J&K Productions’ Website

Friends of Kijabe
PAACS Part 1

Friends of Kijabe

Play Episode Listen Later Feb 21, 2019 26:59


PAACS Part 1 Good morning and welcome to the first PAACS episode. PAACS stands for the Pan-African Academy of Christian Surgeons and on the next two episodes I’ll be sharing conversations with graduates and faculty in the PAACS training programs at mission hospitals in Kijabe and around Africa. Nothing done at Kijabe Hospital is in isolation. Surgeons have been training under the PAACS program at Kijabe for more than a decade, and I think the PAACS program develops some of the best Christian leaders on the planet – not just surgeons, but Christian leaders. Friends of Kijabe is a support organization – we support the work of Kijabe Hospital in general and we support the work of PAACS at Kijabe through infrastructure projects like the Operating Theatre Expansion or through needy patient funding. I’m excited to share these conversations because they paint a vision of what is possible. Dr. Jacques in Malawi describes the blessing PAACS is in African Healthcare The second interviewee is anonymous because of a sensitive location, but he articulates the intersection of mission, medicine and the gospel perhaps better than anyone I’ve ever interviewed. Dr. Beryl Akinyi, associate director of PAACS at Kijabe, talks about paying it forward – giving young surgeons the time and effort that was given her, to help them succeed. Please enjoy! David – You’ve been these multiple different places, you’ve seen PAACS working all over the continent, what is your impression on the work? Jacques – The work of PAACS? This is incredible, incredible work. As an African I can say clearly, without doubt, PAACS has been, and it is, and it will be a blessing for Africa. A real blessing for Africa. My real joy is, I come from nowhere, God allowed me to be a general surgeon, then on top of that, God allowed to become an educator with PAACS. I’m so happy to train others, just as Paul trained Timothy. This is my real joy, to train others. PAACS is a real blessing for us. David – Where is nowhere? Jacques – DRC is a huge country, blessed by several resources. But when you go to DRC, you will say what I am saying. People live in poverty, people die of simple health issues, people are not really educated. With all the conflicts that are happening in DRC, I really pray for my country. David – Where do you see yourself 5 or 10 years from now? The ways of God are sometimes difficult to understand. I don’t know why God didn’t allow me to find a suitable hospital in DRC to work and serve my people. He sent me instead to Cameroon to Mbingo hospital. I don’t know know why God has allowed the instability in Cameroon and sent me way down to Malawi. I don’t really understand, but I know as long as I’m on the path of our Lord Jesus Christ, I’m content with His plan for my life. But one day, if He allowed me to return to DRC, I would only say, “Thank You!” Y Interview David: One of the unique benefits of PAACS, you’re training not only surgeons, you are training Christian leaders. When you look at these wide-ranging systemic problems, that’s what you are teaching them to address. What does that look like in how you work with your students and how you are teaching them? Y: It’s really interesting to see how our residents are growing academically, but also spiritually. We recruit residents that are believers, they love the Lord, they want to share what the Lord has given to them. Some of them, they want to be missionaries, to go to remote places to help the needy people. But when they come to the training environment, they get more. We are trying to fit into the curriculum Bible studies, discussions that are related to what they are doing. How can you show the love of Christ to a sick patient? You might heal somebody with medication, but the way you touch the patient, the way you speak to the patient, the way you care for his well-being and the well-being of his family. This in our context, is very important. These are some of the things we try to emphasize, not just to look at the patient as a sick person, but as a person who has spiritual needs. Those spiritual needs need to come up so you will have the opportunity to talk to them. There are various ways we help our residents by demonstrating. As a teacher, I do all I can to help my resident understand why I am so compassionate to my patients. Why should I come and greet my patient? Why should I come and sit at his side and talk to him in a gentle way? Most of our patients are Muslims. It’s so amazing that when you offer prayers to them, they will always say “Yes, pray for me, pray for me so that I will get well.” And if we pray, we pray in the name of Jesus. We will tell them we are praying in the name of Jesus. And if they are healed, Jesus healed, not us. So, we integrate that into the system. We also help our residents to be residents that are telling the truth. That sheds light not only on the patients but on other workers. Did this thing happen? Did you do this test? No teacher, I did not. It helps to know we are not there only for the surgery, for the pathology, but we are saying to our resident, “Be honest in your deeds.” “Did you examine this patient?” No teacher, I did not. When we grow and understand honesty is part of the thing that reflects Christ’s life, it changes things. David: What’s interesting about that, is it shows the trust they have in you as a teacher. Y: One of the things I see in residents or workers, if they see the teacher saying, “I’m sorry, I think I should have done this thing differently.” That changes a lot in the life of the resident, the nurses, the team. For the teacher to say, “I think I made the wrong choice here. It was my fault.” It makes a lot of difference. This type of training I like so much because it carries me, because of who I am, and I should show respect and be honest to myself. If I am wrong, and I know that I am wrong, and I refuse to confess that, my resident will not do that. We know as a teacher, we do things, not intentionally, but if we make mistakes we must come back and confess them. And if we do that, the resident will train in the perspective that, if you are wrong, you have to say that you are wrong. It doesn’t have to be a hidden thing. It is a be a normal thing to say that you are wrong. “I’m sorry for doing that. I will not do this next time.” David: That’s so profound. Sometimes the hardest things to do are the ones that even a little child should know. This is an issue for every medical provider everywhere in the world. Am I willing to own the truth and speak the truth? Y: Really, we have a lot of opportunities. (Our country) is 99% Muslim. Most people who come to our hospital come for their health problems and this gives us opportunities to share Christ with them. It’s sometimes very easy to engage into a discussion with somebody. A few weeks ago, we got a gunshot injury. Somebody went to another country, bought a car, thieves pursued him to his house, and in his sleep, they shot him. The bullet went through the left side of his abdomen toward the right side. It passed in between two vertebrae, did not go into the spinal cord, just passing near. We took him into surgery, repaired about 4 bowel perforations, his ureter was cut, some of the vertebral vessels were so destroyed. But his function was not affected. Looking at the x-ray, “Is he really moving his legs, this man?” Looking at the entry, he narrowly escaped being paralyzed for his life, but it didn’t happen. That really gave us the opportunity to open the discussion, how God was merciful on him. We took the x-ray, showed him what could have happened to him. We opened that discussion, shared the love of Christ with. We are engaging in communication to lead him to Christ. So, trauma, getting into training, if I didn’t know how to repair these things, I wouldn’t have the opportunity to do that, to share Christ with someone. We see such scenarios in our hospitals most of the time. I’m really happy with the vision that PAACS has. We are going to change the way we do medical mission, because the Lord is in the process of changing the way we do medical mission. Why am I saying this? I used to be the only doctor in my hospital. When I came back I spent about 9 months being the only surgeon. I would be on call almost every night. That was the situation of each mission hospital about 20 years ago. Missionaries would come from overseas, they would go to the place where the need is overwhelming, and they would be the only doctor or surgeon in that place until they burned out. Do they have time with the patients, to share? If you look at the workload, you say “No, they probably do not have.” I’m proud to say, today we have 8 residents and we are planning to go up to 10. So, we will train and we will send. We are multiplying ourselves, instead of the past idea of just doing it. And we are multiplying with the local people, who understand the language, the politics, the places they need to go to. Medical mission is changing, it’s spreading, and I think now we are getting it right. Jesus started with 12 disciples, he concentrated on those 12, and taught them, and after that, they went all over. That’s how Christianity came to us, Christianity came to Africa. If they did not teach and also send, it would never happen. I think that PAACS is taking that hope. We are teaching, we are training, we are making disciples, and we are sending them to go spread the word. That is the positive thing to me in this situation. David – What motivates you as a surgeon, what gets you out of bed at three in the morning? Beryl – I’d say in Kenya there is a big surgical need, the fact that I can meet that and later they come back and they’re smiling, that motivates me. The other thing that gets me out of bed, is I’m heavily involved in training of residents. When I see someone comes in so green, and they graduate as a surgeon, to me that’s a very big motivation - we’ve added someone to the workforce, meeting the need within the country and Africa in general. How do you think about, and how do you talk about the surgical need in Kenya? Is there an easy way to describe it? Beryl – That’s one burden of having poor patients coming in late. The other problem comes in terms of workforce, when people are not properly trained to offer the service that is needed. Those who are trained or skilled, especially in subspecialties are very, very few. That means we have increased waiting time for anyone to get their treatment, and that just makes the burden heavier and heavier. That’s what I’d say currently. David – You were talking about how there is very limited sub-specialization, but a lot of you as general surgeons choose an area of expertise a little bit, even if it’s not on a diploma. What is that for you, what do you love doing? Beryl – Two things, I like doing breast surgery and surgical education. Breast surgery is a little bit individualized, direct to one patient. Surgical education, you are multiplying yourself, I’m not just one person doing this, I’m teaching many people at different levels. David – I have watched you in theatre, and you are a very good surgical teacher. You are very patient, very gentle, you are willing to take longer on a procedure so the person you are working with can learn to do it right. How, practically, do you think about surgical education? What are the things you do on a daily basis in your teaching role? Beryl – Currently, because Kijabe is a training site, we have general surgery, orthopaedic surgery, and pediatric surgery fellowship. I am the assistant program director for the general surgery program, but I coordinate the learning for all basic sciences for all these specialties. That has made me read more, but has also made me focus more on the bigger picture, what’s the need for all these individual students? I’m trying to organize, so that in the five-year-time that all these trainees are here, they get what they need to get to make them a better surgeon. As an individual, I’ve had people who invested time in me, so I could be a better surgeon. That drives me, because if they didn’t invest this time and energy in me, I don’t think I’d be what I am today. So, as an individual, I try to use those good qualities, to make me a better teacher for my residents. David – How does faith play into what you do with your teaching and even with patients? Beryl – God has called us to be good stewards with whatever talent he has given us. To me, being a surgeon is what God has given me, and that is what drives me. God has called me to be a good steward with this talent or this gift. Each time I go to the hospital to work, to teach, I do it for God, not necessarily for the patient or for somebody else to see me. If I do it for my own glory, or for the patients or everyone else to see me, at some point in time I will be tired if I don’t get any good feedback. Knowing I’m doing this for God, drives me to be better and better each day, because that’s what He requires of me. I’d say I’m very grateful to Kijabe and over all to the PAACS program for offering an opportunity for me to learn as a surgeon, to do what I love most, and for all the people who invested their time and energy to help me grow. I’m grateful to Kijabe as a hospital and to PAACS as an organization.

2Bobs - with David C. Baker and Blair Enns
A Beginner's Guide to Negotiating

2Bobs - with David C. Baker and Blair Enns

Play Episode Listen Later Feb 13, 2019 35:11


David gets into Blair's head to get his 10 basic negotiating tips that he has worked with clients on over the years.   LINKS “10 Negotiating Tips” (with 5 bonus tips) “Selling in One Lesson,” 2Bobs episode 49 Buying Less for Less: How to avoid the Marketing Procurement dilemma, by Gerry Preece Negotiating with Backbone: Eight Sales Strategies to Defend Your Price and Value, by Reed K. Holden   TRANSCRIPT DAVID C. BAKER: Blair, today we are going to talk about 10 really interesting ways you can get your spouse to go ... Wait, I haven't, quit laughing. I haven't - BLAIR ENNS: I'm out. DAVID: How to get your spouse to go to the place for dinner that you want to go to. BLAIR: Okay. DAVID: How's that? BLAIR: Sure. What kind of trouble could we possibly get into? DAVID: Yeah, that would be a really stupid pod ... No. What we're talking about are some negotiating tips that you've thought about over many years. You've polled, you've tested, you've researched. You've worked with clients on. You've consolidated them into this one place. We may get to some bonus tips. I don't know if we'll have the time, but we definitely want to talk about the 10 basic tips around negotiating. Can you get me inside your head for a minute before I start pulling these out from you one by one? BLAIR: Well it's pretty crowded in there. What is it that you wanted access to? I gave you my password to everything the other day. What else do you want? DAVID: Is this going to be this difficult today? Are we going to do that? Or are we going to be cooperative? BLAIR: I'm feeling a little punchy. DAVID: Yeah, I see. I see you are. BLAIR: I'm in another hotel room. This is day 31 of a 36 day road trip. I tweeted today, "Okay. I've answered the question, how much travel is too much?". DAVID: Yeah. BLAIR: Getting into my head, I think these tips, I considered it kind of a beginner's guide to negotiating. I don't consider myself to be an expert on negotiating. But you can't advise people on the subject of selling and pricing without knowing something about negotiating, so a while ago I took a bunch of the best practices that I've encountered on the subject of negotiating, and kind of put it into one place. That's I think what we're going to talk about today. I'll call it a beginner's guide to negotiating, and we're referencing to these 10 tips that I've published previously. DAVID: Hopefully it will be more than a beginner's guide. But we'll just set people's expectations low. BLAIR: Yeah, right. DAVID: Then we'll exceed them. BLAIR: That's exactly what I was doing. DAVID: There are 10 in here. But there are two of them that we've actually had the chance to talk about in previous episodes. I will reference all 10 of them. But then with two of them I'm going to point people to a previous episode if they want to really bone up on all that stuff. DAVID: The first one is, avoid over-investing. This is one that we have talked about. It was in a recent episode. It was called Selling In One Lesson. The idea is that the more somebody wants it, the more at a disadvantage they are, right? Just summarize that for us and then we'll move on to the number two one. Over-investing is the first one. BLAIR: Yeah, so you can, a good metaphor for negotiating would be a poker game where there's times when you're bluffing, when you're playing certain hands. But in particular the idea of bluffing. Or calling somebody else's bluff. You can apply some of the tips that we'll talk about here. If it's very clear to the client that you want this so bad, and it's clear to the client not just from what you say, but from all of the free work that you have done, all of the costs that you've incurred. If you are clearly over-invested in the sale then you do not have much of a bargaining position. Because you are demonstrating through your behavior that you want it more than the client does. Therefor the client is the one with the power in the relationship. BLAIR: It's a big broad rule. Avoid over-investing in the sale. As you pointed out, we covered this in detail in the podcast, Selling In One Lesson. DAVID: Okay. Even if you do desperately need it, don't act like it. BLAIR: Right. DAVID: Second, and here we want to start diving in in more detail. The second principle for negotiating is, ask the question, "Have we already won?". As I read that, I wasn't sure exactly what you meant. That led me to dive a little bit deeper into this, and I found it really interesting. "Have we already won?". Are you really asking that specific question? Or is it more just framing the negotiating in your head? BLAIR: This is a negotiating point specific to the topic of negotiating with procurement. This comes up a lot, I wrote about this in my book, Pricing Creativity: A Guide To Profit Beyond the Billable Hour. In the last month in the various places I've been, and the talks that I've done, and the training I've done, procurement has come up a lot. Where I'll talk about a principle and somebody says, "Yeah, but you don't understand. That doesn't work with procurement". BLAIR: The role of procurement, and I learned the most from this listening to a talk by a guy named Tom Kinnaird. Tom was head of procurement at WPP. Gerry Preece is another great resource on negotiating with procurement people. Gerry is an ex P&G global design procurement person who has a consulting practice, and he's written a great book on dealing with procurement. It's called Buying Less For Less. I think the subtitle is The Marketing Procurement Problem. BLAIR: When I was listening to Tom Kinnaird, who was former head of procurement at WPP and is now a consultant, he was giving away at a conference in London I was also speaking at, he was giving away some insider procurement tips. One of the tips he gave away was, you need to know that procurement often lies. When procurement shows up at the end of a negotiation, when you feel like you are the ordained firm, you've either won the business or you're in the pole position, and then procurement shows up to negotiate the final deal. In that situation, almost greater than nine out of 10 times, you have won. You've already won, and the concessions that procurement is demanding that you make, it's not mandatory that you make them. BLAIR: Procurement's going to communicate to you that, in order for you to win the business, that it's still a competitive situation, they're still considering other firms. In order for you to win the business you have to cut price. The general rule of thumb is, if procurement shows up late and starts using that language on you, they're lying. I talk about this in my next article. I'm actually quite heated about it in the next article. So far I'm only at the unedited version of it. DAVID: Still very angry. BLAIR: Yeah. It will be published by the time this podcast goes to air. Hopefully it's a little bit more measured. But in it I make the point that procurement is the only profession in the world that I know of where they're taught that it's okay to lie. It's okay to outright lie in the course of everyday business. When they show up late and say, "You need to sharpen your pencil. We've got three bids. You're the highest bidder. You need to get your price to X or you're not getting the business", they're almost always lying. BLAIR: Now when procurement shows up at the beginning and they navigate the entire purchase process, you have another problem. They're not lying. It's an even bigger problem. They're seeing what it is that they're buying as a commodity, so you have to ask yourself, should you be even participating in a process where the client clearly does not value what you do, and it's seen as an expense to be minimized rather than an investment to be made? But the lesson is, so the tip is, ask the question, "Have you already won?". BLAIR: When you're in a situation where it feels like you've won, and then procurement comes in and says, "You haven't won yet. You've got to get past us. You have to give us all of these concessions", don't believe them. In fact I would go further and say, "We have this idea that we've got to throw procurement a bone in a situation like this. We'll give them this one win and then they'll go away". That's not how they work. They're trained to keep asking until you say no, so you want to start with no. BLAIR: We could go deeper into that. We could do a whole podcast on negotiating with procurement. But that's the tip. You ask yourself before you start giving concessions away, ask yourself, "Wait a minute. Have I already won here? Is it really necessary for me to make these concessions?". Because in a lot of situations you have already won, and it is not in your interest to make any concessions whatsoever. DAVID: The main clue is found in when procurement comes. At the beginning or the end. BLAIR: Yes. DAVID: That's the second one, okay. The third tip here takes this further, and it's around the idea that procurement lies regularly. Not just about this one thing that we're talking about that relates to how to decipher the timing and whether you've actually won. BLAIR: Yeah, so it is a recurring theme here. You might think, I always say, "Attack ideas. Don't attack people and organizations". But I always make an exception for procurement. Reid Holden, who's written a couple of great books on pricing and also on negotiating, and he infiltrated the world of procurement. He has this great line, and I repeat it often. "80 percent of procurement people give the other 20 percent a bad name". DAVID: As opposed to 20-80, yeah. You're flipping that around, right? BLAIR: Yeah. In the story I'm writing, I'm writing two different examples of two different agencies pitching two different pieces of business and then having to deal with procurement. One hold their ground and the other one doesn't hold their ground. The example where the agency holds their ground, they're told in the beginning, "The account is a $500,000 a year retainer", and so they do a little pilot project for free. They prove validation. Then they're handed off to procurement and procurement says, "The fees are not $500,000. They're $300,000. Take it or leave it". The firm walked away, and in the end the client came back and said, "Oh, no no. We want you to work with us. You can have the original $500,000". BLAIR: As I was talking to the agency president who was telling me this story, I said to him, "If I were you in that situation. If I'd heard that from the procurement person, I would want to get the client and the procurement person in the room together. I would want to look them both in the eyes and say, 'I want to know which one of you lied to me. You said it was $500,000 in fees. You said it's not $500,000, it's $300,000. One of you lied. Which one was it?'". BLAIR: We know who the liar is. The liar is always procurement, right? Because they're taught that it's okay to lie. But I just imagine, and I'm ranting in this article, and you can feel me getting emotional now. Because I can't believe that we continue to give this egregious behavior a free pass. We need to call out irresponsible practices and outright lies when we hear them from our clients and our clients' procurement department. I hope I've addressed the issue of three procurement lies. I feel like we should probably get off the subject of procurement. DAVID: Well I turned the recorder off a long time ago, and what people are going to hear instead of you ranting is me providing a very reasonable response to all of these things. BLAIR: Instead of my therapy while I lie on your couch. I'm going to a marketing procurement conference in London. I think it's in June. I'm really looking forward to being in the room with these people, and having an open conversation about what I think of their business practices. DAVID: The third point is, beware of procurement lies. Let me just read some of these and then we'll go to the next point. "It's down to you and one other". That's one lie. Another one is, "Yours is the highest bid". Another is, "You have to cut your price to remain in contention", or all these other things that you might hear. BLAIR: Or, "Take it or leave it. There's no negotiating. There's no middle ground. Here's my offer. Take it or leave it". That's another one. DAVID: Right, yeah. Then a concession, you say, is an invitation to ask for more. All right. Let's get you back down to happy land, and we'll move off of procurement. BLAIR: Well we're still going to talk about procurement a little bit here in the next one. Go ahead. DAVID: The fourth point is, outwait the waiter. Outwait the waiter is the fourth point. Talk about that. BLAIR: Yeah. I forget where I heard this idea from first, because I really would like to attribute to the various sources that I've pulled all of these things from. It might be Chris Voss who wrote, "Never split the difference. Negotiate like your life depends on it". Or it might be Jim Camp. Or it might be Tom Kinnaird. I don't remember who. But the idea is, when you're in the final negotiations with people, and again it's almost always procurement. Because it's procurement who's trained in negotiating. That's another point. We really need to be trained in negotiating to counteract those on the client side who are trained in negotiating. BLAIR: One of the tactics that they do is, after you've won, or you think you've won, they slow everything down. Procurement will say, "I'll get back to you in this time period", and then they'll take longer. You'll reach out to them and leave a message, and they'll just kind of stretch things out to make you sweat and to make you more nervous. That's the way they can extract more concessions from you. BLAIR: Again, if you think back to the formula that we talked about in Selling In One Lesson, P equals DB over D. Your power in the sale is a function of your desirability, is your desirability greater than your own desire? Because if it's not, if you're communicating that your desire for the client and the engagement is higher than the client's desire, then you have the least power in the relationship. The tactic when procurement is trying to slow things down to make you sweat is, you slow things down even more. If they take 24 hours to get back to you, you take 48 hours. You communicate to them that, "Yeah, that's fine. We're in no rush. I mean, if this is going to happen it's going to happen. If it isn't, that's fine too". BLAIR: It's almost a game of, and there are times when negotiating really is a game and it really should be fun. It's never fun if you're over-invested in the sale, right? DAVID: Yeah, right. BLAIR: But it should be fun, and you should play this game. Instead of being anxious you just play it out and outwait them. If they delay, you delay longer. If they say they can't speak for 48 hours, you say you can't speak for 96 hours, etc. DAVID: Just multiply by two. BLAIR: Yeah. DAVID: They're saying, "We need to slow this down in some way", and they're expecting you to indicate some investment in the sale. Like minor panic or whatever. Instead you're flipping this around and saying, "Ah, no problem at all. Do you need more time?". BLAIR: Yeah. DAVID: "That's fine. We're not in any hurry, okay". BLAIR: You got it. DAVID: Got it, so that's the fourth point. The fifth point here is to beware the white knight. I don't think we need to talk too much about this one, because in a slightly different context we did talk about this in an episode called How To Drive Your Employees Batshit Crazy. Here we were talking more about management and so on. But the principle is the same. It's this idea that we are going to bring in the big white knight to save the day. Just give us a few sentences on this one. BLAIR: Yeah, the white knight is usually the senior person on your team. There's some negotiating going back and forth. Everything's proceeding, maybe well but slowly. Maybe it doesn't feel like it's proceeding well. But the principle or the senior person swoops in and says, "You know what? I'm going to fix, I'm going to get this deal done in one fell swoop". They show up and make a concession, thinking, "Okay. I'll just make the one concession and close on this". What they don't understand is, they've just undone a lot of work being done by other good people. BLAIR: Sometimes it makes sense, if you think of the previous tip about outwait the waiter. Sometimes it makes sense to just, it's part of the negotiation. To slow things down. When the principle shows up to speed things up and says, "I'm going to make this one concession and close the deal", then they realize, that one concession is really just the beginning. They have just created a whole new set of problems, and the likelihood that the agency is going to close this business at a profitable position has just diminished significantly. BLAIR: The idea is, be careful about allowing the senior person, usually the principle, to swoop in at the last minute and make a concession that they think is going to just close the deal. Because it usually doesn't work that way. DAVID: Yeah. On the other side of the table, they've discovered where the weakness is and how they can get even more concessions. Because you've tipped your hand. That's a good one. DAVID: All right, number six. Decide your give and gets in advance. Decide your give and gets in advance. Which is opposite of what you just talked about, where somebody else swoops in without much consultation. We might make a concession, but we're going to do it very intentionally. We're not going to be willy nilly here. Decide your give and gets in advance. Who's doing this? The team as whole? Anybody that's in a position of power? How does this work? BLAIR: That's a good question. It's not just the person who's on the front lines. It's the people ultimately who have to live with the decision. It's a senior member. It's probably a team decision or the decision in the principle. The idea here is similar to going into an auction, right? We go to an auction, we think, "I'm not going to do anything stupid", and we end up bidding these crazy high prices. Because in part, loss aversion bias kicks in. We make a bid, we mentally own it, and then somebody outbids us and now we've lost something that we just a second ago emotionally owned. BLAIR: What the science shows is, we value losing something about two times as much as we value gaining it. In an auction that causes us to do crazy things. The way you combat that going into an auction is, you have an honest conversation with yourself about what your absolute maximum price is, and you do not deviate from that maximum price whatsoever. You do not allow yourself to get swept up in the moment. You hold the line by making the decision in advance. BLAIR: The principle here of, "Decide your give gets in advance", is the same thing. You decide, what are you willing to give up in advance in the negotiation? What are you not willing to give up? What is it that you absolutely need to get from the client, and what are you willing to take a pass on? You make those decisions in advance so that you do not find yourself in the middle of a negotiation, while at the table or in the conversation, giving away something that you are going to regret later. You just draw the boundaries in advance of the negotiation.   DAVID: I want to take a slight detour here and ask you a question. Because we're assuming that this is occurring at the outset of a new relationship in many cases. If you do this right, do you have to play these same games in subsequent negotiations with the same client? Or do they get and sort of figure out your style and where the lines are, so that it's a little bit more efficient later? BLAIR: Yeah. There's two different camps here, and we may be opening a big can of worms. I mean, it's a legitimate question. There's the negotiating with procurement camp, where if you really are using these principles and you're getting into these protracted things and you have these standoffs, you win. You've won the first round. That does not mean that procurement's not coming back for you even harder. When you're going into a relationship with that type of organization, you're going to win some battles. Ultimately you will lose the war. Ultimately everybody loses the war. BLAIR: The idea is that you get to a point where, "All right. This relationship is no longer fruitful. They've kind of beaten all of the margin out of us over the long term". You know, hopefully it was a good run. BLAIR: Then on the other camp would be good clients where you're not dealing with procurement, or they're more of a value buyer where you just have to use one or two of these techniques, and you're not setting up a long term war where you're constantly battling each other. It really could be one or the other, where you're constantly in a negotiation. Always defending what you know is an onslaught that you're ultimately going to lose in the end, but it still might be worth it. It might be a three, four year good run and it's worth fighting the battle. Or other situations where you just find yourself using one or two of these techniques and that's it. Then you find yourself in a good relationship with a value buyer who really values what it is that you do. DAVID: Yeah. I find that when I talk with my clients, and we share some clients, it's dispiriting enough when they have to enter these negotiations with a new client. But when they've worked with a client for years and then this gets turned on them again, when they want to review the relationship. They almost are just intentionally forgetting everything that happened over the last four years, and you have to prove yourself again. There isn't much in business that can pull the rug out from under your confidence and slap you in the face than something like that. I don't even know why I'm saying this. It just hits me at the moment that it's very discouraging for people to have to do that over and over again. BLAIR: I agree. DAVID: All right. Number seven. Neuter the final negotiators. Neuter ... It's like we're watching a Game of Thrones episode here. What kind of a serial killer are you in disguise? Neuter the final negotiators. Okay. What kind of knife do we use here? BLAIR: Maybe there's a better word for neuter. What I'm talking about is, the moment that you have the greatest amount of power in the relationship is the moment when the client, not the procurement person, but the client says, "You're hired". DAVID: Mm-hmm (affirmative). BLAIR: When that happens, and often you go from the client saying you're hired to, then you get handed off to procurement or legal or finance or whomever. That other department will kind of, you've got to fight another war over there. But if you know the war is coming, if you know, if you're used to dealing with the same types of clients and you know there's a battle with procurement coming, use your power at its height. The moment you're hired. BLAIR: I had a client once who called me and said, "We're doing great. We're closing all of these really big deals. Seven figures. We've got all the senior decision makers in the room. But I have the same problem. It's like every time I get a call from procurement, 'You've got to knock 200 grand off of this', etc". BLAIR: I said, "Okay. Next time it happens, next time you close a deal, in the room you have the senior decision makers. You say to the client, 'Okay. We've got a problem here'. Everybody's in agreement. We're going to do this. Here's the price. Here's the scope. Everybody's in agreement. Everybody's excited about moving forward and really looking for the engagement. Then you stop and say, 'Okay. We've got a problem. We've just agreed on this. The price is the price. We've talked about the value that we're going to create. BLAIR: I'm going to get a call from your procurement person, and that procurement person is going to tell me that if I don't knock $200,000 or $300,000 off this price we're not going to do business together. The price is the price. We've just agreed on what we all agree is fair for the value that we're going to create. The price is the price. There's no economies of scale here for us to make the price cheaper. Can we agree, when procurement calls me', and then you look over at the client side and say, 'When procurement calls me, who can I get them to call?'". BLAIR: Now you're in this little, it's a little bit like a power play move but not as bad as it sounds. In that the senior client on the client side of the table generally will take responsibility and say, "No. Have that person call me". That's what I mean by neuter the final negotiators. Leverage the fact that you have the most power to combat procurement in the moment when the client says, "You're hired". BLAIR: Now the higher up you're dealing in a client organization, the more power you have. In this example my client, the agency, was dealing with senior people on the client side. Presidents of divisions. They weren't dealing with brand managers. Bu even some brand managers might be willing to lend some weight to helping you get around procurement. But again, you ask in that moment. The moment when the client says, "I want to do this", or, "We want to hire you". That's when you have the most power to neuter the final negotiators. DAVID: Well I think this would be fun to do. Because I can see saying it with kind of a twinkle in your eye, and they just smile and look at each other. Because they know that that is coming, and they kind of chuckle and say, "Yeah yeah. Here's who it'll be. This is what they'll say. We'll take care of it". I love this one. DAVID: All right. We're on the way to 10, and we're at number eight. This one is an A B thing. What you say here is that you should either be ruthless, or you should be collaborative. One place is going to take you somewhere. The other place is going to take you somewhere else. Which is which here? Be ruthless or be collaborative? BLAIR: Yeah, so it's both but you pick your spot. You be ruthless with other professional negotiators, and you be collaborative with clients. With good clients. Because you have to work with the clients. You don't want to get into ... If you're setting the tone of the relationship moving forward where you're in this somewhat ruthless battle, you have to be aware of creating the conditions, if we're just not a very fruitful relationship moving forward. But you really should be ruthless with professionals. Again, you could hear me getting a little bit emotional as I talk about procurement people. You don't want to do that. BLAIR: One of the advantages procurement people have is, they are not emotionally invested in the sale. They don't give a shit at all, right? DAVID: They aren't even people. They don't even have emotions. BLAIR: "They're bureaucrats, Morty. Shoot them". Or, "They're robots". It's a Rick and Morty line. We're going to get into trouble with the 20 percent of the procurement people who are out there. Again, I just say to my friends in procurement, I don't actually have any friends in procurement, but it's possible that one day I might have a friend in procurement. I would just say that, the problem isn't just in the procurement profession. It's actually in the organizations above procurement who give license to procurement to procure creative and marketing service as though they were widgets. They think that they can drive cost down without affecting the quality or the value to be created. You can't really do that. The responsibility isn't just with procurement. BLAIR: But back to, these people aren't emotionally invested. We, especially if you're the creative person coming up with the concept, we tend to be emotionally invested in the results. You be ruthless with them. You hold the line. As I've already said, they're going to ask until they hear no, so you start with no. There's no need to build rapport or kindness or to ever negotiate out of emotion. If you find yourself being emotional, see if you can't retreat, regroup, let go of whatever it is that you're emotionally attached to. Then re-engage again when you're emotionally detached. But it's like, be ruthless. Hold the line. Don't fall into the trap of this ridiculous idea that you're going to befriend a procurement or a professional negotiator and you're going to, somehow through the strength of your personality, you're going to get to a solution. BLAIR: As you've pointed out, they're robots, or they're bureaucrats. I use that term in this moment out of a little bit of a respect. What I mean by that is, they're not clouded by emotions. They've got a job to do. They've got an objective. They're marching steadily toward that objective and not letting their emotions cloud their judgment, so you should be able to operate at that same unemotional ruthless level. DAVID: All right. Number nine is, use a positive no. Use a positive no. Can you explain that? I presume you can. BLAIR: Let's hope I can. DAVID: Yeah. BLAIR: There are so many different ways that you can say no. I think so many of us have a hard time delivering the word no, because in so many of our businesses, what we do is we find a creative solution to every problem. We don't accept that the answer has to be no to something, so therefore we have a hard time saying no. BLAIR: There are all kinds of different techniques on how to deliver a positive no. I'll just give you a couple of them here. First you just kind of, if there's an objection, you just make sure that you restate the objection. "Okay, I'm hearing that affordability is an issue for you". Then you deliver your no. You start with kind of a yes. "Yes, I hear that affordability is an issue for you". Then you deliver your no. "Listen, I can't give you that price in this specific situation". Then you layer in another yes. "But what I can do is stretch out the payment terms a little bit", or something else. Or throw in some other forms of value. Throughout the entire time, your attitude is always positive. It's not, "Oh, you know, I don't think we can do this". It's not, "There's no way we can do this". BLAIR: There's a time for, "No way". But there's a time when you want to use a positive no. You're nodding your head saying, "Yeah, I'm absolutely hearing you that affordability is an issue for you on this. I can't give you that price in this situation that you're looking for. But here's what I can do for you". Then deliver what it is you can. "I can throw in some extra value. I can stretch out the payment terms a little bit for you". It's all about delivering no with a positive attitude. BLAIR: I'm not saying that's always the approach. I think there are times when it's just a hard line, "No. Take it or leave it", walk away. But in many situations it makes sense to deliver a positive no. DAVID: You're also demonstrating that you've listened. That you care. You may make a decision that's not one they would prefer, but you're not just simply closing up and not listening to them. That's part of restating this to them. BLAIR: Yeah. DAVID: All right. The final one is to use alternatives to no, and you've got a few examples here. Are these used with clients or with pros? I think I probably should have asked that question many times here, because it's been interesting to hear the distinction. Using alternatives to no. Who do you use these with, primarily? BLAIR: Yeah, I would put most of these, like use a positive no or use an alternative to no, I would put most of them under the collaborate column. That means with clients. Where I find myself tending to want to be more ruthless and just deliver hard nos to procurement. Now that's me a little bit worked up emotionally, violating what I said earlier. The truth is, a really good negotiator will use positive nos and alternatives to nos with procurement from time to time. It's not just all hard lines. Although I really believe that you begin with a super hard line with procurement. BLAIR: I think generally speaking, for sure you should use these approaches with clients. The people that you want to have a fruitful working relationship with that. A great alternative to no, and I think this one comes from Chris Voss. If it's not Chris it's somebody else. I'll also, I'm recalling that some of the other techniques I probably got from Reid Holden in his book, Negotiating With Backbone. It's a small book. It's a really good book. Both of those books are great books on negotiating. BLAIR: His line, and again I think it's Chris Voss. Instead of saying no just ask, "Well how would I do that?". If procurement is saying, "Listen, the fees in your proposal, we're not giving you that. We're giving you 60 percent of what you've asked for. You can take it or leave it". Then you essentially turn the problem back onto, instead of saying no you just turn the problem back onto the client. "Okay, 60 percent of the fee. How would I do that? How would I deliver the services that you're looking for at just 60 percent?". DAVID: Mm-hmm (affirmative), and a pause, right? At that point? BLAIR: Right. Always a pause, and we're not talking about that here, but I've talked about the power of pause before. When you pause after you deliver a no or an objection or an obstacle for the client to overcome, you want to pause because whatever you hear next gives you so much information about how much power you have in the buy sell relationship. BLAIR: You could also use a, "Yes, but", instead of asking, "How would I do that?". The client might say, "I don't know. That's your problem. How you do it is your problem". You might say, "Well do you think we have 40 percent profit margin built into this?". "I don't know, that's your problem". You could say, "Yes, but". You could say, "Well you know, I suppose I could deliver on 60 percent of that. I mean, if that's your bottom line. I guess we'll just put the interns on it and remove access to senior people. Access to principles. We'll take our creative director off of it, and yeah, we can meet your price that way". DAVID: They're starting to get a warm feeling. BLAIR: Yeah. I mean, this is where we're having fun now, right? I think when the client asks you to do something ridiculous, you could ask the client, "Well okay. How would I do that?". Or if the client's not going to participate in that question you can offer a solution. Again, this speaks to the title of Gerry Preece's book, Buying Less For Less. The idea that when procurement is buying marketing services, they drive the cost down. What they don't appreciate is, they're driving the quality down. Because in a people based business, the way you get your costs down is, you get less expensive people on the job. BLAIR: Just communicate that to the client. "Okay, we can give you that price. But here are all of the things that we have to strip out". What you're almost certainly going to hear is, "No, we want those deliverables or value drivers at the price you quoted". That's where you can laugh and say, "Yeah, well let me tell you about the things that I want in my life too, that I'm not going to get either". DAVID: One of the things that I've been thinking about my own situation over the years, and something that's hit me. It's given me this kind of warm feeling. I know that sounds weird. But it's when I find myself getting a little bit angry, and that's because I feel like I'm being taken advantage of, or not appreciated to the level I should be. BLAIR: Yeah. DAVID: I can relax and tell myself, "I don't need this that badly. Why don't I just smile and make this more of an interesting exercise?". Not so much a contest, but an exercise to see what I can learn. As long as I'm willing to walk away from it, I don't understand why I'm getting angry. I need to treat this more as a business conversation. It frees up my mind to think in these categories and not get all wrapped up in myself at some point. BLAIR: Yeah. I call that smile and defy. You smile to yourself for a minute. Remind yourself, "Let's not get carried away here. This is just a game". Then you defy what it is that's been asked of you. Then you just see what happens next. You have that ability to do that. I have that ability to do that. Because we're not over-invested in the sale. We're not allocating significant resources from our businesses to close any one particular deal. DAVID: Yeah. BLAIR: When you don't over-invest, and I know and work with lots of agencies who have learned to not over-invest in the sale, everything changes when you're not over-invested. It's easier for you to smile. It's easier for you to use some of these techniques. It's easier for you to walk away from poor fits, knowing that if it really is a good fit, it will come back on your terms. DAVID: Care a lot, but don't care too early. That should be the title of this. BLAIR: That's great advice, yeah. DAVID: All right. We will put some bonus ideas in the show notes. Marcus will help us with that. These are 10, and we'll throw some more in there. This was really fun to talk about, Blair. Let's hope that none of these procurement folks listen to this before you meet them in London, or we will have some real life neutering taking place. BLAIR: I would prefer they did listen, and we had some frank and fruitful discussions. DAVID: Okay. Thank-you, Blair. BLAIR: Thanks David.

2Bobs - with David C. Baker and Blair Enns
Shoot - Now What Do We Do?

2Bobs - with David C. Baker and Blair Enns

Play Episode Listen Later Jan 2, 2019 34:10


Blair asks David to make some predictions about the new year, and then they discuss some ways that businesses can prepare for and react to (God forbid) an economic downturn.   TRANSCRIPT BLAIR ENNS: David, predict the future. Coming year, the year ahead ... It doesn't matter when people are listening to this or when we've recorded it, but in the year ahead is it going to be a year of abundance or is it batten the hatches, we've got trouble? DAVID C. BAKER: I think it'll probably be right in the middle. I think it'll be- BLAIR: Oh, come on. Make a guess. DAVID: Oh, no but that is a real prediction. BLAIR: Don't you love driving through these small towns and rural parts of whatever country and you see these fortune tellers that read the cards or whatever? And they're all in these shitty little offices. I'm just wondering, how does that work? DAVID: How come they're not in palaces? BLAIR: Yeah. Right. Or the 49th floor of some high rise condominium. DAVID: You talk with your clients, a lot of them every week, and I do as well, it'd be interesting to see what you're feeling right now. What they're feeling right now. My sense is that there's quite a bit of uncertainty, like the stock market wasn't great through last year, and unemployment is still low, and there's some political uncertainty. The world feels a little bit fragile. But really that's kind of in our heads. DAVID: The actual business results have been pretty good for almost everybody in the marketing field. There are a few isolated examples of firms that have struggled a lot. Often because they lost one big client or something like that. But it's generally, firms have been doing really well, and there's thinking okay, is this next year, is this year, 2019, going to be as good as last year? DAVID: I don't think it will be better. I don't think it will be a whole lot worse. I think we'll be lucky to have a similar year. But what do you think? BLAIR: For context, we're recording this on December 21st, 2018. So Happy Solstice by the way. So we're going into 2019 wondering how things are going to shake out. And the stock market, see I don't pay much attention to the stock market but I just noticed that all the gains for the year have been wiped out in the last few weeks. So the market is down. There is discussion within the broader financial markets about whether, or not we're headed for another 2008-ish crisis. There is the global political unrest and uncertainty. BLAIR: But in the face of all that, if you ask me to make a prediction of the year ahead ... this has nothing to do with reality, I realize as I was thinking about it. And only to do with whatever is going on inside of me. But I always believe my future is bigger than my past, to steal a phrase from Dan Sullivan, from Strategic Coach. So I'm an eternal optimist. BLAIR: Now it doesn't mean I think that the market conditions are going to improve next year. I actually don't spend a whole lot of time thinking about this. That's why I'm going to interview you on it. Because you've spent some time thinking about it. And this can't be right, but it's a great way to go through life. I actually think it really doesn't matter what the markets do. BLAIR: If I'm running a well run business, I will be able to survive anything. So, that's the way I think about. And then how I think about a bad year, looking back on it, might be entirely different. But I go into it with this, you might call it naiveté, around what's going to happen. But you should hope for the best and prepare for the worst. Is that the saying? DAVID: Yeah. That's a really interesting perspective. And by the way, you are so messed up in the head. BLAIR: I know. I acknowledge that. DAVID: You think I wouldn't be surprised anymore by the stuff you say. BLAIR: What surprised you? DAVID: Well, you said something really powerful, that I don't want to pass up. I want to make sure that people don't miss it. And that's that from a personal performance, or a firm performance standpoint, next year will be better than last year. And that's separate than what the marketplace might bring us. I think that's really, really smart thinking. DAVID: I want to clarify having, in that broader context, that yeah, I absolutely believe that too. Every one of my clients is going to be running their business better in 2019 than they were in 2018. But what will the marketplace bring them? And I think that's just brilliant the way you just separated those two things. BLAIR: So I've spent a lot of time contemplating the question of, is there such thing as free will? Do we human beings have free will? Then one day I realized, you know what, it's kind of a stupid question. Because the answer is it doesn't matter. You should live your life like you have free will and you have total control. And I feel the same way about business. BLAIR: You should operate your business like you have complete control over what happens. Because I think in those moments when we feel helpless and out of control; and if we have a tendency to blame the market, really most of us we're running businesses that can survive a downturn in the market. If we're making correct and courageous decisions and preparing ourselves appropriately, it really doesn't matter what happens in the market. BLAIR: Now there are some exceptions to that. Maybe we'll get into that. Because some vertically specialized firms in particular are more susceptible to an economic downturn. Is that right? DAVID: Right. For sure. I think of this as ... so you, the people listening to this, are the captain of the ship. You're standing on the deck, and you can't control the winds that are going to come your way, but how far out should you look so that you can take corrective action if you see an iceberg coming. That's kind of your job as the captain. You can't just rail at the winds, assuming that you're going to change them. But you can get your crew ready. You can think about the decisions you need to make, as far in advance as possible. Think about the culture of the crew and all of those things. DAVID: So it's a unique balance that nobody else at the firm has to think like you do with a finger firmly on the immediate pulse, but also looking far ahead, and making those smart decisions that way. BLAIR: Okay. Let's begin by talking about those things that our listeners can do to prepare before a downturn even hits. So if you suspect, or if you're worried about the economic conditions in front of you, wherever you are in time, what are some of the things that you should do to prepare yourself? DAVID: Well, one of the things that you might do is think about, rather than building a much more expansive, slash expensive, amount of money going to people, you could give somebody a one time bonus, instead of building that amount into their usual salary. Because it's very difficult to take money away from somebody, so that would be one thing that you could do. I don't mean a Christmas bonus. I just mean, instead of an annual bonus, maybe you'd give them just a one time bonus, rather than raising their compensation. That'd be one thing to think about. DAVID: Obviously if you've been doing the opposite for a long time that's going to raise a few eyebrows, but it also might just be prudent thinking, and say, "Hey listen. You've kind of maxed out within the salary range that we set for your role. But you've been a fantastic employee. I don't want to build a whole lot of fixed, higher money going to salaries, but I do think you deserve something. So here it is." I think that might be the first thing you probably think about. BLAIR: I think that's a great way to phrase it. Because as you were describing it I was thinking, well how do you communicate this? So you communicate it by saying, "I want to acknowledge your good work." I guess this is my question. Would you acknowledge nervousness about the market? Because of the market et cetera, I don't want to build in higher, fixed salaries. Or would you always come back to, you've kind of maxed out in the salary band. Is it appropriate to communicate to your people, I'm doing this move because I'm concerned about the larger economic conditions? DAVID: Not unless not mentioning it would strike them as odd. So if they are feeling the same thing, because of what they're seeing in the news, and what you're talking about. And if you don't acknowledge that potential for something right around the corner then I think you're going to look kind of stupid. But if saying that feels more like an excuse to them, then I wouldn't say it. So just sort of acknowledge what is widely viewed in the marketplace. I think that's how I would view it. BLAIR: So preparation point number one is to consider bonusing people rather than building salary raises into fixed compensation. What else should people do to prepare? DAVID: I'm really just working down the income statement thinking about where most of the money goes. Right? And most of the money goes to people. Where does it go next? Well it used, and this is kind of changing a little bit, because of how expensive benefits are for people. But where it goes next is facilities. DAVID: So this is not the time to sign a 15 year lease. Right? It might be as long as you have some outs. And those outs are the ability to sublease to somebody else, or the ability to give them six or twelve months notice at any point in the lease, and walk away from it at that point. Or maybe if you're providing a personal guarantee for the entire term of the lease, that personal guarantee is capped at some certain amount. DAVID: So when you think about how you might need to adjust the size of your firm, other than people, facility is the next thing to think about. So just really careful about some of those long term decisions that you're making. BLAIR: Okay. That makes total sense. What else? DAVID: This is one I want to talk about together. And it's just this notion that lead generation, if done well, is this massive fly wheel. Where I grew up we had to supply our own electricity, and there's this diesel generator. I remember how slow that thing would start. You'd have to crank it over by hand and it would go ... little faster, faster. And then once you turned it off it would take forever to slow up. You could lose a hand if you put your hand in there too quickly. That to me is what lead generation is like. It takes so long to spin up. DAVID: So if you don't have your own lead generation plan well in place, before some sort of downturn hits, then you are screwed, my friend. Because it just takes so long. People are always asking me, after we fix positioning and lead generation at a firm, and you're doing the same kind of work as I am, well what results should I expect? How long should this take? And the answer isn't the same for everybody. But frequently it sounds something like this. "Well, if you do everything right, you should expect to land the first right fit client in about six months. And then about every three months you're going to land another one." And they look back at you thinking, that is not what I expected to here. DAVID: So you've got this downturn that hits and then you decide to get your act together. Sorry friends, it's too late. You know. What do you think about how long this kind of stuff takes to spin up? BLAIR: Well, and both of these issues, positioning, and lead gen in particular, they also affect how you see the new business position. So if you don't have the flywheel, the lead generation flywheel moving already, by creating content, building a reputation, et cetera, putting stuff out there that positions you and drives inbound inquiries. If that's not happening and then you hit an economic downturn ... and let's say you've got the new business seat is empty, and you decide oh we need new business, we have to fill it. You're going to look at the new business seat as you want to feel it with somebody who does lead generation the old fashioned way. The outreach, the cold outreach way. BLAIR: And when times are good and your lead generation flywheel, to continue the metaphor, is turning with little effort, then most small to midsize independent firms, probably don't need a business development person who is its salesperson. They need somebody who is actually good at navigating a sale to a close. BLAIR: Just very quickly, if you need your new business person to generate leads for you, rather than navigate the leads that marketing is generating for you, than you want somebody who has got a very high competitive drive. Who's rejection proof. Who goes, goes, goes. Who talks people into things. When leads are coming from marketing then you tend to think of a salesperson as somebody who is a little bit more patient and consultative, who's good at navigating. Is a little bit more discerning, so they have a lower competitive drive. And they're good at navigating opportunities through to a close. And in a lot of firms that can be the principal or another senior person. BLAIR: If your lead generation flywheel is turning you don't need that kind of old school typical new business person, who's out there smiling and dialing. DAVID: Right. BLAIR: But as soon as the downturn hurts and you realize that you haven't done the hard work on the lead generation flywheel issue, then you're going to panic, and you're going to go looking for a salesperson, lead generator, who's going to smile and dial and try to talk people into things. DAVID: I always picture those people driving a Taurus for some reason. BLAIR: Why? DAVID: I don't know. They drive 300 mile max trip and it's usually a dark colored Taurus, and they're wearing a polyester suit. Maybe I'm a little prejudiced about those sales people. BLAIR: Yeah. Maybe you are. DAVID: Yeah. Maybe. BLAIR: Okay. So we're talking about preparing for a downturn. You've talked about trying to keep your fixed comp lower by maybe bonusing people, rather than raises. You've talked about being careful about signing long term leases. You've talked about do your positioning and lead generation planning and work in advance, so that the flywheel is still spinning even in a down economic period. What else? Anything else on the preparation list? DAVID: Last thing maybe would be just to pay down as much as possible, the debt that you've already incurred from either ignoring operational issues that you should have solved in other ways, or maybe from the last downturn, or whatever. Get that off the books. Because when you are looking at reducing your monthly outlay there are some things that you simply can't touch. One of those is the debt. So if you have debt, still on the books, in a downturn, you have to cut the people side even deeper than you would have wanted to. You can't cut the facility. You can't cut the debt. So you have to cut the people side deeper. DAVID: So you really want to focus there, and in particular you want to focus on any debt that's personally guaranteed. Which for any smaller firm listening, almost all of it is. Even the credit cards. That would be like a term loan from a bank or a line of credit. Sometimes in the bigger firms, it's not. If there's a distinction there and some of the debt is personally guaranteed, and some isn't, then focus on the part that's personally guaranteed. So that if there's a really big disaster and we have to walk away from the firm you won't be as harmed personally outside of the corporation, that is the business. BLAIR: Yeah. This in a previous episode we talked about the idea of steady pressure and a pulse of something hitting. So the steady pressure in this case might be debt. You're carrying an unnecessarily high debt load, and then the pulse is rapid economic downturn. You've talked before about how ... I don't know if you abhor debt, but you can correct me if that's wrong. I think you've got a great line about how debt covers up some other issues. Right? It hides things. Is that right? DAVID: Right. Right. Debt is okay in some cases. I personally hate it for anything except for appreciating assets. But where I particularly hate it is where it's just covering up sins that need to be solved in other ways. Whatever the reason for the debt that's on the books, get rid of it as much as you can before a downturn. Then of course if the downturn does hit you could borrow again. I don't think you should. You could borrow again. But mainly it's about giving yourself the flexibility of not cutting more people than you would have otherwise done. BLAIR: Yeah. If you're carrying a lot of debt in good economic downturns, the likelihood of you surviving an economic downturn is not good.   BLAIR: So let's move from how to prepare to how to react. So let's say, God forbid, the market keeps dropping. Other things happen. And we get something close to what happened in 2008, and a big part of the economy kind of takes a big hit. Or freezes outright for a little while. I think you're a big proponent of having a plan. Right? Essentially having a plan, in writing, that you enact at the appropriate time. Is that fair? DAVID: Yeah. Because it's very emotional when it hits. So whether it affected the world around you, and you weren't being singled out, or whether it was just you losing a big client. Whenever that happens it tends to freeze you. It's emotional. You don't know exactly what to do and the best way to prepare for that, I found, is for you as a management team to get together before it happens, and put two plans together. One is the adjustment plan. One is the survival plan. And you put it in a folder. I mean, maybe it's not really a physical folder, where somebody could find it. Maybe it's just in a folder on your computer, or whatever. You just pull that plan out. It will still need to be modified a little bit. But it's a fantastic starting place. DAVID: The adjustment plan would say, "Okay. We probably need to get rid of this one administrative person. We're going to need to slim down and have two fewer account people. Whatever." Then the survival plan is much deeper than that. "We are going to sublease half of our facility. We are going to stop our cooperation with this other firm that we've been doing. We are going to put off this particular purchase. We are going to draw down our line of credit, up to this amount but not a penny beyond that. I am going to cut my salary." Whatever all of those things are. You just pull out the appropriate plan. The adjustment plan or the survival plan, and then you put it into place. DAVID: If you haven't done that then you're typically going to lose two or three weeks worth of very valuable time in reacting the way you probably should. BLAIR: Okay. So I'm imagining, it's a little bit of war planning or just scenario planning. You have these two folders. Here's what's going to happen when things go bad. But I also imagine that that subjective measure of when things go bad, changes as things are going bad. So you probably should have some objective measure that says, when this happens or when revenue or AGI per FTE, or when this client leaves. Or a client of a certain size leaves, or whatever. Is that what you're saying? And if so what would those objective measures be? DAVID: That isn't what I was saying but I really like adding that. Because otherwise, you just don't know when ... so if we were part of the military planning in the U.S., we might say, "Okay if North Korea launches this missile, this is what we're going to do." That would be very easy to measure. But if we say, "Okay how do we measure our relations with that country getting worse, and so on." DAVID: So one of the things that I've seen some firms do is that when they add generous benefits ... so they say, "Okay we're going to pay for everybody's parking now." That makes sense. A lot of firms say that. But what they don't do is they say, "We're going to pay for everybody's parking now, because now our fee billings per full time equivalent employee are above X. And by the way, if they drop below X again, then we will no longer be able to do that." So they layer the generosity, and they tie those individual layers to specific performance metrics. DAVID: The ones that they would particularly pay attention to would typically be the fee billings per full time equivalent employee. Or it could be net profit. That net profit frequently would need to be indexed so that if the principal pays themselves less money to help get through a downturn, we recognize that. And say, "The net profit lower would be a whole lot lower if I hadn't lowered my compensation." So, that's what I mean by indexing that. DAVID: But I like that. So we're going to go to this folder if we lose this client. Any client that represents more than 25% of our billings. Or we're just going to go to this folder if we have two quarters in a row with less than five percent net profit. Or something like that. That's how I would think about it. BLAIR: So I think our listeners need to go out and buy one orange folder and one red folder. DAVID: One red folder. Right. BLAIR: Okay. What else should we be thinking about in terms of our reaction plan? DAVID: You know when you work with a firm, and I work with a firm, and we're sitting there looking at their situation for the first time, it's really obvious to both of us that the roots of what they're struggling with came about many years ago, or many months ago. Then you stop and say, "How did that happen? What led to that?" And frequently it's when they began to chase cash instead of chasing profit. DAVID: So they had these people that were working for them. They didn't want to lay them off. So they said, "Okay I know this is not an ideal client but at least it's something for them to do. We're not going to make a lot of money, but we'll make more money than if we didn't take work for them." And that's fine if you want to do it. But what you don't want to do is lie to yourself here and say, "And then when things get better we'll convert them into the good client that we had hoped they would be at the first." That is simply not going to happen. It's very unlikely that that's going to happen. DAVID: What you want to do is not necessarily, you wouldn't be able to drop this edict on yourself and say we're just never going to chase cash. We're really going to chase profit only. That's probably unrealistic. But at least be honest with yourself and say, "We are going to take this client. We're not going to make much money. But at least it's going to cover our overhead. We know that as soon as we are able to we are going to replace them with a client that will deliver profit to us." So just being honest at the very beginning and recognizing when the switch in your head flips, and you chase cash instead of chasing profit. BLAIR: That's a really important point. And you wrote something years ago, and I quoted you again within the last two weeks on the subject. I think the article was titled, it wasn't the title it was the point of it. Most cashflow problems are profitability problems. DAVID: Right. BLAIR: And somebody said to me the other day, "Oh yeah, we're going to do X. It's just an issue of cashflow." And I probed deeper into that to try to determine whether it was a cashflow problem or a profitability problem. But the interesting idea there is some people know it's a profitability problem. We're just not getting validation from the market that what we do is actually worth something. And others are somewhat delusional about it. So they might know it and they might be spinning a story to you. Others might be spinning a story to themselves. BLAIR: So you're saying, be honest with yourself. First of all. About whether or not we're talking about cashflow or profitability. But in this specific situation, I really like how you said it, it's unrealistic to say never take something for the cash. Because there are times when you've got good people sitting there with nothing to do, and along comes a project that isn't profitable, and you think, 'yeah, what's the harm. It will keep them busy. Maybe they'll enjoy it. There's no profit in it for us but allows me to keep those resources around.' So you're saying that perfectly valid. Just be honest with yourself, and maybe your teammates or your leadership team about what you're doing. DAVID: Yeah. Exactly. And when you mask a problem and say it's cashflow, what you're really saying is this is a problem with my clients. If you said profit, that's really a problem with the way you're running the business. So it's easy to deflect some of the decisions you're making around that. DAVID: You know the other thing I would do too, working down this list, is just about, do you really want to continue this business? In the past it never seemed to be an option to just close the business because there was so much stigma attached to that. But I don't see that stigma in the marketplace anymore. I don't see the stigma of failure like I used to. In fact, I see more stigma associated with people who stick it out, and they really shouldn't. Instead the courageous decision is not to stick it out. The courageous decision is to just stop it. Right? DAVID: But you want to make that choice for yourself. Like every professional athlete, they want to chose when they stop. They don't want their contract to not get renewed, or get shuffled down to a minor league team or something. Just deciding, making a good decision, early on, and not just bleeding all of the money that you do have out to fix this thing that in the end never gets fixed. BLAIR: Now you work with about 50 firms a year. How many times a year are you advising your clients to shut their businesses down? DAVID: About, probably two a year. So four percent or so, of those firms. BLAIR: Yeah. Yeah. Okay. What else is on the list of how to react to a downturn? DAVID: Maybe you need to get rid of that partner. Maybe this is the right time to do it. The firm will never be cheaper if you need to pay them out. This is going to be the cheapest you'll ever get it. That would be one way to look at it. BLAIR: So I'm imagining a firm of two partners, and both partners are listening individually, and they're both thinking, 'Yeah.' DAVID: Yeah. BLAIR: I'm going to get rid of that other partner. DAVID: And they're trying not to flinch as they listen to betray what they just thought of. Yeah. BLAIR: Okay you're both in the car together. You're not making eye contact. This is getting really awkward. You better stop for coffee. Or switch to country music. DAVID: Surely it's not that bad. We don't have to go to country music. BLAIR: We can stop right now. We're done. This podcast will not get any better. DAVID: It probably won't. Why do you not get through a tough time, if you do have a partner? You would think that having a partner would make it easier to get through a good time. When in fact sometimes it's just that you're not on the same page. You're not pulling the oars in the same direction. I often think that, oh there's a great opportunity to adjust your partnership. Especially if this highlights how one of you is just not carrying your share of the weight. BLAIR: Insert awkward silence here. We just stirred up a whole hornets nest, didn't we? Anything else on your reaction list before we get to things that we don't dread about a downturn? DAVID: No, that's about it. Those are the big things. But if you get those you've covered almost all of it. BLAIR: Okay. So I'll just recap. So it happens, you've got to have two folders. One is like things are going bad and when things are really bad. You want to have objective measures where possible. You want to know who you're going to layoff because as you've pointed out, that's probably the easiest part of your overhead to deal with, is the personnel. Don't chase cash instead of profit. Unless you're honest with yourself about what it is that you're doing. Think about shutting it down if it's appropriate. If you're thinking of getting rid of your partner, now is a really good time to do it. Probably financially as well. Okay. BLAIR: So you and I have talked about this before, in private conversations. We have each talked about this from a stage, or written about it. But a downturn isn't all bad, is it? Why? Why isn't it bad? DAVID: No, and I'd want to hear what you have to say about this because you have a very strong evolutionary way of thinking about this. Right? BLAIR: Yeah. DAVID: You see animals killed where you live and you realize it's a part of life. Maybe firms dying now and then is a part of life. It just sounds so cruel when we say it, right, but thinning the herd is okay. If maybe you don't survive, maybe you didn't deserve ... did I just say that? Maybe you don't deserve to survive right? BLAIR: Yeah. DAVID: And if you do survive than tomorrow you're going to have fewer competitors. And it's kind of sad for them, but it's kind of a good time, too, right? Oh that just sounds so awful saying it. BLAIR: Well first let's put it in a larger context. Because I think for most of listeners here, let's just acknowledge, we're all very fortunate to be born when we're born and where we're born. And to be running businesses. And if our business fails what's the worst that's going to happen? If we've been successful entrepreneurs to a point, and our businesses fail, then we will regroup and we'll be fine. We will start another business, or we will go work for somebody else, and we will put those skills to bear. BLAIR: A small number of people, for whatever reason, whatever else they're dealing with in their lives, it's not going to be so easy. So let's just acknowledge that there's always some human suffering. But as we talked about in one of the podcasts a couple of episodes ago, the worst case scenario really, for most of us, isn't all that bad compared to most of the population on the planet. BLAIR: So with that greater context, the idea is that a downturn is like a disease running through an animal herd. It kind of kills the sick and the weak. And in some ways it's a horrible ... well it's a ruthless metaphor. It's not horrible. But in the end it makes the herd stronger. There have been times when I've heard you say, you know if you've opened a design firm in the last ten years, and you haven't made money, then you're an idiot. Because the economic times have been so good that all you had to do was- DAVID: Did I really say it like that? BLAIR: Yeah. Maybe on paraphrasing. But you've essentially said, times are so good that it's really hard not to make money. We have to make exceptions for the exceptional situations. Like when you're young, you're just starting out. You're highly leveraged debt wise. Taking all this risk when you're just starting out. I'm a big fan of those people. And other things, you care for a sick loved one, et cetera. There are all kinds of extenuating circumstances. But generally speaking there are some firms that continuing with the ruthlessness streak, that the world's just not going to miss. DAVID: Right. BLAIR: If they go out of business. Because the honest to God truth is they weren't creating value in ways that other firms, that may have been somewhat similar to theirs, were creating real value. So if you're not creating real value in the world, and an economic downturn hits and your firm gets wiped out, you can feel sorry. You can say, "Oh the odds were stacked against me." But statistically the odds are probably that your business isn't going to be missed. DAVID: Yeah. BLAIR: So what does that do to the profession? It makes it stronger. At least in theory it does, doesn't it? DAVID: It does. And even though it does sound callous I concur exactly with what you're saying. So if you are running a firm right now, and you know how well you're positioned, you've got this lead generation flywheel spinning. And you've got good people, and you don't have a lot of debt. What if next year is bad? In the world around you. What if the environment does take a turn for the worse? In some ways you ought to be rubbing your hands together, and saying, "Oh man. This is going to clear my head. I can't wait to make sharper decisions and to think more clearly about this. And to not tolerate some of the poorer performers that I have. And to use my time more wisely. It's okay." DAVID: So as we face some of the uncertainty that's coming up, I hope the people that get nervous are the ones who should get nervous. And they get off their asses and start fixing their lead generation problem, mainly. That's the big one. I know you've got some events coming up. I've got some events coming up. People need to take that sort of stuff seriously. Or if they just know what the answer is, then they just need to get off the couch and start doing things. Those are the people I want to hear this and just really implant this sense of excited, not urgency, but excited about the future. Excited about taking their firm a little bit more seriously. I think is a message we want for people. BLAIR: You wrote to me an economic downturn is like a breath of cold, fresh air, on a cold winter day, in the mountains. What the hell did you mean by that? DAVID: You just can't ignore it. You just climb out of the tent and ... oh my goodness. It opens up your lungs in a way that it doesn't. And you feel alive, like you're never going to feel alive in an apartment in a city somewhere. Right? BLAIR: Yeah. When I read that I thought some of us our wartime CEOs. When there isn't something wrong, when we're not under attack, by say a competitor or a larger economy, then we are not at our best. When you see threat on the horizon that's when, you know it's like that bracing cold air. It's like, all right. I recognize that in myself. I don't know if you see it in yourself. I recognize it in some of my clients. BLAIR: There's nothing like a little bit of threat to reinvigorate you about your business. And that's what I was when I read your line that an economic downturn is a breath of cold, fresh air, on a clod winter day, in the mountains. DAVID: Yeah. And I didn't mean that as a Hallmark card either. I meant it as a terrifying, sort of invigorating statement. BLAIR: Yeah. DAVID: This has been fun. BLAIR: It has been fun. So let's just leave our listeners with this. We hope an economic downturn is not in your immediate future, but if it is we'd like you to think about it, like a breath of cold, fresh air, on a cold winter day, in the mountains. Okay. Thank you David. DAVID: Thank you Blair.

Hacker Noon Podcast
SE02 - University of Boulder Live Edition: Linh & David Smooke Speak at Disruptive Entrepreneurship Class

Hacker Noon Podcast

Play Episode Listen Later Nov 27, 2018 27:01


Hacker Noon CEO David Smooke & COO Linh Dao Smooke recently spoke at University of Colorado Boulder's Disruptive Entrepreneurship class taught by Professor & Hacker Noon contributing writer Nathan Schneider. Learn more about Hacker Noon's equity crowdfunding campaign.  "On the internet right now, there is a massive battle going on between centralization and decentralization." - David "It's what drives us everyday: we know that people want to read more, write more and that people rally behind us when we are threatened by an external source." - Linh  "Know that the obstacles are only a day, and tomorrow will be a new day and that obstacle won't be as bad, or maybe it'll be worse and day after will be better." -David "It's the community that decides what we're gonna' look like - therefore we think it's the best reflection of the internet." -Linh  "We're people that built a company out of iteration, and we did not intend to make one of the most popular tech blogs." - David "How can we reflect the internet? The merits should be the story and the story itself." - Linh Learn more about Hacker Noon's equity crowdfunding campaign. Production and music by Derek Bernard - https://haberdasherband.com/production  

Factor 2.9
#35 Combining Deliberate Habit Formation with Mindfulness Meditation

Factor 2.9

Play Episode Listen Later Nov 13, 2018 36:00


In this first episode with a freer discussion format we talk about how we form new habits and the difficulties we face as we try to keep them, in particular regarding Magnus’ attempt to start meditating regularly. David tells us about his own mindfulness meditation habit and we contrast our personal experiences against Charles Duhigg’s “The Power of Habit” and Sam Harris’ “Waking Up”. TIME STAMPS -------------------- 00:30 Today’s topic: Unknown 01:10 Background: Charles Duhigg’s “The Power of Habit” and Sam Harris’ “Waking Up” 01:30 David: How is your meditation habit going? 01:55 Magnus: How I’ve failed 03:00 Not being disciplined might be a question of the chicken or the egg 04:35 Magnus trying to explain…(away?) 05:10 Analogy: the successful habit of exercising 06:50 How more positive self-talk motivates 07:10 Magnus: A conscious decision not letting reality get in the way of the exercise habit 09:15 The connection between the two books and the question of not being able to create the habit to meditate 11:30 The parts of a habit: Cue, routine, reward 12:00 The conscious decision to exercise might not be conscious 14:10 Sam Harris: All our experiences are products of our consciousness -> The illusion of the I (or the self) 17:00 Motivation comes out of the narratives we tell ourselves 17:20 Mindfulness helps us see these narratives 18:30 Narratives are useful to create meaning. Unsound behaviours can be avoided by seeing and getting rid of counter-productive narratives 19:40 Meditation can help your long-term ego 21:20 If you can be fully content in the present, are long term plans then really important? 23:35 Meditation is not removing meaning, rather to be able to see it (and its roots) clearly. 25:50 You can keep, see and experience your narratives if you do mindfulness 27:20 When meditating don’t try to analyze the narratives, just experience them and let them move on 28:50 David’s meditation habits 31:50 About The Power of Habit 32:50 Combining mindfulness meditation and meta-cognition 34:30 Bye! CONTACT --------------- Website: www.factor2point9.com E-mail: factor2point9@gmail.com Twitter: twitter.com/factor2_9 Facebook: www.facebook.com/Factor2point9/ Instagram: www.instagram.com/factor2.9/

OrthoAnalytika
Bible Study #42: The Rise of David the Christ

OrthoAnalytika

Play Episode Listen Later Oct 25, 2018 58:11


Bible Study #42: The Rise of David the Christ (1 Kingdom/Samuel 11-15) St. Mary’s Ukrainian Orthodox Church, Allentown PA Fr. Anthony Perkins, 25 October 2018 Opening Prayer: Make the pure light of Your divine knowledge shine in our hearts, Loving Master, and open the eyes of our minds that we may understand the message of Your Gospel. Instill also in us reverence for Your blessed commandments, so that overcoming all worldly desires, we may pursue a spiritual life, both thinking and doing all things pleasing to You. For You, Christ our God, are the Light of our souls and bodies, and to You we give the glory, together with Your Father, without beginning, and Your All Holy, Good, and Life- Creating Spirit, now and ever and to the ages of ages. Amen. (From the Prayer before the Gospel in the Divine Liturgy; see 2 Corinthians 6:6; Ephesians 1:18; 2 Peter 2:11) 1 Kingdoms (Samuel) 16. The Spirit of God enters David and leaves Saul. Questions: What do we learn about the Way of God from His selection of David? How can we put that lesson to good use in our own lives? David the Christ prefigures Jesus the Christ. How do we fit into this model? Saul was also a Christ. But God took His Spirit from Him and an evil spirit of the Lord tormented him. What are we to make of this? Does God cause this? One of the signs that Jesus is the Christ is His power over demons. David the Christ was given some of that power to assist King Saul. Patristic Answers: On the selection of David. St. Clement of Alexandria. People have gone beyond the limits of impropriety. They have invented mirrors to reflect all this artificial beautification of theirs, as if it were nobility of character or self-improvement. They should, rather, conceal such deception with a veil. It did the handsome Narcissus no good to gaze on his own image, as the Greek myth tells us. If Moses forbade his people to fashion any image to take the place of God, is it right for these women to study their reflected images for no other reason that to distort the natural features of their faces? In much the same way, when Samuel the prophet was sent to anoint one of the sons of Jesse as king, and when he brought out his chrism as soon as he saw the oldest son, admiring his handsomeness and height, Scripture tells us, “The Lord said to him: ‘Look not on his countenance, nor on the height of his stature, because I have rejected him. For man sees those things that appear, but the Lord beholds the heart.’” He finally anointed not the one who was fair in body but the one who was fair of soul. If the Lord places more importance on beauty of soul than on that of the body, what must he think of artificial beautification when he abhors so thoroughly every sort of lie? “We walk by faith, not by sight.” On the evil spirit. St. Athanasius. Therefore, when a person falls from the Spirit for any wickedness, if he repents after his fall, the grace remains irrevocably to the one who is willing; otherwise he who has fallen is no longer in God (because that Holy Spirit and Paraclete which is in God has deserted him), but this sinner shall be in him to whom he has subjected himself, as took place in Saul’s instance; for the Spirit of God departed from him and an evil spirit was afflicting him. St. Jerome. Again, that you may be sure that God curbs the spirit of pride, recall how the good spirit of God departed from Saul and an evil spirit troubled him. Holy Writ says, “And an evil spirit of God troubled him,” a spirit from God. Does God, then, have an evil spirit? Not at all. God had withdrawn so that afterwards an evil spirit might trouble Saul. In that sense, the spirit of God is called evil. Finally, holy David, knowing that God could take away the spirit of princes, entreats him, “And do not take your holy spirit from me.” Psalm 90; A help in times of trouble (to include exorcisms and spiritual warfare). Michael Heiser. The Naked Bible Podcast, episode 87.  https://www.nakedbiblepodcast.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Transcript-87-Exorcism.pdf K. van der Toorn, B. Becking, & P. W. van der Horst (Eds.), Dictionary of deities and demons in the Bible (2nd extensively rev. ed., p. 854). Leiden; Boston; Köln; Grand Rapids, MI; Cambridge: Brill; Eerdmans. Franke, J. R. (Ed.). (2005). Old Testament IV: Joshua, Judges, Ruth, 1–2 Samuel (p. 264). Downers Grove, IL: InterVarsity Press.

Rock Chalk Talk: for Kansas Jayhawks fans
S03E10 - Out Kansas-ing Kansas

Rock Chalk Talk: for Kansas Jayhawks fans

Play Episode Listen Later Sep 21, 2018 123:29


Today, Andy is joined by to recap a surprising win against Rutgers and what it means for this team. He is then joined by David Fankhouser to look ahead to the Baylor matchup Topics discussed: Rutgers with Grad: -Biggest surprise from the game. -How did this happen? -Just how bad is Rutgers? -Will David Beaty ever NOT have a game where he thinks about going for a 4th down, call a timeout, and then punt/kick? (h/t @TJFsports) -Defense: Is it this good or just really lucky? -QB play: Any improvement possible? -Conventional wisdom says Kendrick should be the starter and the run game should replace the dink and dunk passes. But will the coaching staff follow conventional wisdom? (h/t @gimmethewooby) -Pooka for Heisman? -PFF Focus: Pooka, Mike Lee and Bryce Torneden on the national team. -How many wins would it take for Beaty to get another year? (h/t @SuttonNealKU) -Is Kansas the worst team in the Big 12 right now? -Will Kansas break the conference road losing streak this year as well? -Looking ahead to Baylor, how competitive do you think this game will be? KU-Baylor with David: -How has Matt Rhule dealt with the trying circumstances of his position? -How big was the lost recruiting class in the wake of the scandal? -Did the first couple of games affect expectations for this team? -Given the performance against Duke, how worried are you about the Kansas defensive front? -Importance/likelihood of turnovers. -How will Baylor handle the trio of running backs for Kansas? -Other critical matchups for this game. -Predictions. We want your input on the podcast. If you have something you would like to talk about on the podcast, or any suggestions for people that we should try to talk to, let us know by emailing us at rockchalkpodcast@gmail.com or on twitter @RockChalkPod. Find us on iTunes: https://itunes.apple.com/us/podcast/the-rock-chalk-podcast/id1294906568?mt=2 This podcast is powered by ZenCast.fm Learn more about your ad choices. Visit megaphone.fm/adchoices

North Star Podcast
Devon Zuegel: Cities as a Superpower

North Star Podcast

Play Episode Listen Later Aug 18, 2018 74:23


Listen Here: iTunes | Overcast | PlayerFM Keep Up with the North Star Podcast Here My guest today is Devon Zuegel, a writer of code and writer of words who spends her time unlocking human potential through incentive design and tools for thought and cities. In this conversation, we jump from coordination problems to urban planning to travel to architecture. We compare cities like Singapore and San Francisco and talk about the power of urban density and architecture to make us happier and healthier. Then, we talk about writing, specifically the three tiers of common knowledge, how to find good ideas, and the concept that Devon calls playing chess with yourself. One thing sticks out from this podcast and other conversations with Devon. Above all else, Devon lives in obsessive pursuit of high leverage ways to spend her time and energy. In the past, that’s led her to computer science and in the future, I suspect it will lead her to cities and infrastructure. Why cities? Devon offers an excellent answer. Cities are big enough to have real importance in the world and small enough to be nimble and somewhat understandable and there are a lot of cities. You can actually hope to make some comparisons in a way that you can’t really do with countries.  Please enjoy my conversation with Devon Zuegel. Links Bloom Algorithms To Live By: The Computer Science of Human Decisions Georgism Devon’s articles related to this episode:  Advice on Writing Why Flaking Is So Widespread in San Francisco A Day In Singapore: Urban Identity 2:03 Devon on coordination problems and the problems they’ve caused, such as climate change and housing issues, and how clever solutions to these problems are the reason humans have progressed so much in the past hundreds of years 6:19 Human cognition and thought as it is augmented by media, cities and blockchains and the benefits of this augmentation 8:10 The most classic tool for thought and why it’s such a catalyst for healthy and productive cognition, long term and short term memory function and increased IQ 16:41 Devon’s writing process and why she defines it as playing chess with herself 17:45 How Devon has been able to get her writing to flow and the three categories of topics available to write about, common knowledge, obscure knowledge and the intersection in the middle 20:17 Devon’s theory of on why people in San Francisco are so flaky in comparison to sister cities like Chicago, Los Angeles and New York City 28:16 How Devon chooses what rabbit holes she wants to go down prior to writing an article and how to make most topics interesting by creating a model around the idea 32:25 What makes Singapore so interesting to Devon, in regards to history, culture, GDP growth, etc. and her major observations after visiting the country 47:20 The moment Devon became aware of the effect of architecture and how it can make employees less involved with their colleagues by not promoting micro-interactions 50:53 The five metrics that a house should be described with, that are never used, when being promoted on websites like Airbnb, Zillow, Craigslist, etc.  57:00 Devon chooses the three metrics that she’d pick when it comes to the city she lives in and the home she’s living in for maximum interaction, convenience and mental economy 1:03:16 Algorithms To Live By and why Devon sees it as the best self help book she’s ever read, despite it not being a self help book 1:05:37 Devon’s opinion on Georgism and how people talk about economics as a spectrum from capitalism to socialism or communism and the third category of economic goods that it doesn’t touch upon 1:07:30 Devon’s changing opinions and her epistemic status placed on each of her blog posts written with a strong opinion 1:10:03 Devon’s philosophy of travel and why she views it as scale free regardless of how many or little places you visit 1:11:51 Devon’s philosophy of productivity and how she writes down dozens of notes and uses long form emails to repurpose her ideas into publishable articles Subscribe to my “Monday Musings” newsletter to keep up with the podcast. Quotes “I am very interested in coordination problems. I think that they explain a lot of the problems that we see in the world, everything from climate change to nuclear disarming to issues in cities to making it so that people can actually live where they are the most productive to housing policy. I could go on and on. The solution to coordination problems is incentive design, and clever solutions that are some of the reason humans have been able to progress to the extent they have throughout the past few hundred years.” “The most classic tool for thought, and one that I think we tend to take for granted, is writing. Most people think of writing as a way to communicate ideas that they’ve had in their head to other people. Obviously, it does serve that purpose and people sell books for a reason. But, I think it goes way beyond that.” “In the last year, I have found that writing has gotten a lot easier for me. There’s probably a lot of reasons for this but I think the core is that I realized there are three categories of topics you can write about. There’s the stuff that everybody knows that is trivial to write about because it’s easy. On the other end, there’s stuff that nobody knows yet or nobody around you knows yet, so it takes a lot of time to figure it out and it takes a lot of research. Now, there’s this middle area between common knowledge and really obscure knowledge of stuff that you have a unique perspective on because of where you happen to be in life and you understand it so intuitively that you can just talk, think and write about it fluidly. But, a lot of people don’t know it yet. That’s the sweet spot.” “For me, it’s very important that I can walk places. Walking is a way to interact with your community in these small ways, every single day. The way people get comfortable in a place and in a social group is not through one really intense interaction, but through a bunch of smaller ones where you see things from different angles. You experience, what does my neighborhood looks like on a sunny day, on a cloudy day, or when I’m tired. These tiny, trivial things help you understand, much better, how things function. You get to know the vibe so much better and you meet people you wouldn’t meet if you were in an Uber.” “Algorithms To Live By is the best self help book I’ve ever read and it’s not intended to be a self help book, it’s intended to be an algorithmic look at certain problems that people see day to day. But, it helps me frame certain problems that I personally run into in terms of the algorithmic complexity. I realized the stress that I was feeling about certain things I was worrying about, were actually totally rational.” Subscribe to my “Monday Musings” newsletter to keep up with the podcast. TRANSCRIPT DEVON: I am very interested in coordination problems. I think that they explain a lot of the problems that we see in the world. Everything from climate change to nuclear disarmament to issues in cities and making it so that people can actually live in where they're the most productive, in housing policy. Well, I could go on and on and on with the list. So the solution to cooperation problems is incentive design. And I think clever solutions to incentive design are some of the reasons why humans have been able to progress to the extent that they have throughout the last few hundred years. So a primary example is contract law, it makes it possible for people to trust one another. Other examples are the development of risk and the concept of commodifying the risk. DAVID: I was having a conversation yesterday in another podcast and the guest was saying that in 1471, what happened was people were able to pool maritime risk. And what happened was it let big expansive ship voyages happen because you could pull risks together. And so if you invested in a ship and say that ship broke down, then you wouldn't lose all your money. And by pooling risk and by coming up with new financing and coordination solutions, you could do things that weren't previously possible. I thought that was really interesting. DEVON: Totally. That's a great example. Actually. Old maritime risk looks a lot like venture capital today wherein venture a lot of things fail. A lot of things fail spectacularly. But if you can spread out that risk across a whole pool of investments, it only takes a few to like really, carry the whole fund. In the case of maritime investments, a lot of the ships broke down, they had problems. But if one ship came back with a whole load of goods that could repay all of the rest of the costs. However, most, most investors back then couldn't take that risk because most of them would have failed. They might've lost all their money before they hit that one big one. And so by the development of that maritime risk, they were able to get past that sort of short-term problem and to get into the run longer returns. I think that's a really good metaphor for all sorts of problems that we run into wherein the short term it's rational to do a thing that is not as interesting, that it's not as lucrative, but it's also not as risky. But if we're able to coordinate as a society, as a company or whatever level you want to talk about. So one more concrete example to bring it down from like highfalutin, venture capital and maritime risk, you could just look at cooperation problems as simple as when you're dating someone for the first time, there's that standard wait three days until you text them back after you met them because you want to come off as cool. You don't want to come off as desperate, right? But if you really like each other, like all this is going to signal is that you don't like them very much. And that may be rational for you because you don't want to come off as desperate. But if you're both doing that, you end up with an outcome where it seems like you don't like each other very much and it takes a really long time to actually realize that you do. Ideally, you would have some neutral trustable third party who could be a person A, person B, out Alice and Bob like you both like each other. You told me that you liked each other, just go for it. You know, have fun. And I think a lot of healthy relationships that I've seen have actually started in this way because of some small quirk at the very beginning. It can be super useful, but a lot of the pain that I see my friends going through when they date is literally just the result of playing games because rationally, you're supposed to. It's basically a prisoner's dilemma. And so if you can have someone who forces you into the correct quadrant where everyone is better off, that's much better. DAVID: So then let's jump into sort of human cognition and human thought. Maybe begin with media. What interests you? Sort of when I think of where this conversation is going to go today. So much of it is about augmentation, right? Like cities augmenting the potential for humans interact and making that so much easier. And blockchain augmenting human coordination is making that easier. And then here with thought and having tools, augmenting human thoughts and letting us go places that we probably wouldn't be able to go if we were stuck in the mountains on our own. DEVON: I think the underlying reason I'm interested in incentive design is because it allows us to unlock human potential and allows people to do much cooler stuff that makes them happier, healthier, makes life more worth living. I see ways to augment our cognition as serving that same purpose though from a different angle. The umbrella term that people sometimes give this is tools for thoughts and we have basically the same brains that we and our ancestors had thousands of years ago, but we're able to do so much more. Part of that is because we've developed incentive design. The other reason is because we've developed tools for giving our cognition more leverage. And I use the term leverage actually very specifically. You can only get so strong no matter how much you lift. How once you go to the gym, like you're still not going to be an order of magnitude stronger. You're definitely not going to be two orders of magnitude stronger. However, if you design an engine, if you just even add a lever that gives you that leverage, you can do so much more with your muscles. I see that that translates directly to your brain. The most classic tool for thought and one that I think we tend to take for granted is writing. Most people think of writing as a way to just communicate ideas that they've had in their head to other people. It obviously does serve that purpose. People sell books for a reason, but I think it goes way beyond that. So one thing that writing does for you is it expands your working and your long-term memory. With the long-term memory, it's pretty obvious. You take notes, maybe you don't remember all the details, but you can look them up later. DAVID: To your point, even today I was writing something this morning and I wrote something that I wrote about a year ago and I have no recollection of writing it and I read it and I was like, wow, that's actually pretty smart and it really helped me, but I think to your point, there's a permanent element of writing and being able to sort of work through sentences and craft them, makes it so that you can achieve thoughts because of the repetition and the sort of tweaking and editing of writing that you can't do if you're just speaking like we are right now. DEVON: 100 percent. And I've also had that experience more times than I can count of like coming across something I've written and being like, oh, this is interesting, I wrote that. That came out of my brain. And as long as you have enough of a pointer to that idea that you can find it when it's necessary, or it gets surfaced by accident because you happen to open up an old notebook. That's extremely powerful. It makes you much better at remembering. I think even more importantly, a writing helps you with your short term memory, your working memory. There have been a lot of studies showing that a working memory is one of the highest things correlated with IQ and the ability to solve problems. And I think the reason for this is because if you have good working memory, you can hold a lot of state in your head and you can sort of fiddle with that state. You can hold contradictory but potentially correct ideas and outcomes in your head while you work through the problem. And then they collapse into one at the end. DAVID: Describe state real quick for someone who doesn't have the computer vocabulary that you do. DEVON: So state is what is the current status of the world right now. Let's say you're working through a personal problem and with your family or something, and you want to go through step by step and sort of understand the implications of what different people have done. You're getting the story from different friends, like maybe you're helping reconcile like your aunt and your uncle or something like that, having marital problems and you want to understand how they got to that point and how, given where they are right now at that point, like how different changes result in better or worse outcomes. Understanding the current state of the situation and then like fiddling with it and being able to hold all of those sort of partial computations in your head are really important to be able to compare them and to be able to move forward and find a solution. DAVID: So you're saying that writing and sort of computers at large now help us hold more state so then we can move on to higher-order tasks that perhaps aren't memory, that our brains are really well suited for. DEVON: Exactly. And they're more interesting. And working memory can kind of provide abstractions. I think the best metaphor for working memory or external working memory is like scratch paper, that there's a reason why math teachers always tell you, feel free to use as much scratch paper as you want. That's not just because they hate trees and they want to waste all paper. It's because being able to externalize that process is really, really helpful. Offload is the perfect word. DAVID: So back to writing. DEVON: I think it actually goes even much further than memory. With writing, it is fundamentally the process of externalizing an idea which allows you to play with it in ways that I don't think are so easy when it's in your head. I'm certainly not capable of it. Writing things down can reduce the amount of ego that you have as you fiddled with an idea. Maybe I'm just crazy, but when I wrote them down and almost pretend like the person who wrote that wasn't me, it was like, that's past Devon or someone else entirely. I can detach myself from it much more in a way where, when I am a thinking through something just in my head and lying in bed wondering. I'm not going to be as rigorous about it. Now that's not strictly worse. There are other things like everyone has great thoughts in the shower for instance. It's very common. But it doesn't serve all purposes, especially if you're trying to vet and find the nooks and crannies of an idea. When you write it down, when an idea has inconsistencies or gaping holes, they are clear and right in the face when it's written down in a way that is just so easy to gloss over when they're in your head. DAVID: And also when you're speaking, you can sort of gloss over some of the inconsistencies with emotion, right? If I speak really deeper and confident with what I'm saying, actually there's an element of trust there. It was really funny. So we had a meetup in Queens a couple of weeks ago and my buddy goes on Snapchat stories and he goes really confidently, coming to the meetup and he goes "Did you know that the reason it's called Queens is because Queen Elizabeth came to New York in 1754?" and you're sitting there being like "Man, you know, why are you being so smart here?" And then he finishes the thing and he goes "Well, I just made that up, but you believe me because I said it so confidently." So what writing does is it strips out the emotion out of a form of communication and it allows logic to take over emotion. DEVON: Right. And it allows you, it gives you something like almost physical to move around and change. I'm a really big believer that constraints are actually a good thing in your thinking because if you're completely working in a vacuum, you have nothing to push off of. You have no feedback cycles. Whereas if you can just get a draft onto the page, you can fiddle around with it so much more. And I find that writing that draft in the first place, that's usually the hardest part, but once I have something to work off of, it gets much, much easier. It helps you find implications that you didn't realize there were, which again, I don't fully understand like the cognitive science behind why this is. But by putting it on the page, you start seeing these almost trails in your head of like, given this, given I said this, what are the implications there? And you can actually follow those trails and like come back to them after you've written them down and realize, oh, this thing does have an implication I hadn't considered. One of my favorite things to do when I'm writing is just looking up synonyms for words. And the reason is not just to make myself sound smarter. Though, that's always a plus. But much more importantly is that by looking up synonyms, you can think about which words don't make sense here. Even though they are technically synonyms. And why they don't make sense and analyzing that is extremely useful. It's sort of a generator function for coming up with new ideas. Similarly, I think choosing the right word is also really important. Words come with such heavy connotation that picking the right one can be the difference between concepts really striking home and like feeling kind of flat. So I highly recommend people using sources when they write, all over the place. I actually use sources when I write code as well, for variable names and class names and things like that, because it helps you. Computer science and programming is basically the art of abstractions and abstractions is another way of saying names mostly. And coming up with really good names for things is a really critical piece of being able to write good software. So I think the source, I go to thesaurus.com probably 300 times a day. I have never actually counted, but it's a lot of times. I've always idea called playing chess with yourself. DAVID: Walk me through that. DEVON: So I think writing, especially the writing process, before you've published, as kind of like playing chess or yourself. There's that Pixar short, it's called like Geri’s Chest Game or something like that. And it zooms in on this guy sitting on a park bench playing chess and his partner isn't around. And you're like, oh, I guess maybe they went to the restroom, maybe they're coming back and then all of a sudden the camera zooms in and he's like on the other side, playing with the white pieces now. And then he flips back and forth and you realize he's just having a ton of fun and playing against himself. And he's really excited against himself. This is a hard thing to do inside of your own head, but it's actually a lot easier when you've externalized something because once you have that writing on the page, you can treat that as sort of another person almost. And play around with it in a way that is just much harder when you're by yourself. DAVID: Totally. And then the other thing is I think you have sort of an uncanny knack for generating unusual ideas and I don't say this to discredit you, but I think that you've built some systems to make that a hell of a lot easier. Walk me through different tiers of common knowledge. So I got an email last week from a guy who said, I love your writing, but the biggest thing preventing me from writing is that I always think that everybody else knows the things that I know and that's the biggest thing. Stopping. And I responded and I said, well, that's not necessarily the case, but I wasn't able to formulate something that I think that you've been able to grasp in terms of different ways of thinking about what is common knowledge? If you could describe that. And then how does that translate to writing and drafting an idea? DEVON: Yeah, that's a great question. So in the last year, I've found that writing has gotten a lot easier for me. There's probably a lot of reasons for this, but I think the core one is that I realized there's sort of three categories of topics that you can write about. There's the stuff that everyone knows that's like trivial to write about it because it's easy. The sky is blue. Okay, good. That's awesome. No one wants to read that. Very common knowledge. On the other end, there's stuff that no one knows yet or no one around you knows yet. And so it takes a really long time to figure it out, requires a lot of research. I can point to some examples of things I've written where I'm very proud of this writing that I've done, but it was a slog all the way through. Some of the stuff that I wrote about, the federal housing administration last year, just required poring through hundreds of documents from old FHA manuals and things that I don't know if people have looked at in a while and I found some novel stuff, but it also was a ton of work. Now there's this middle area between common knowledge and like really obscure knowledge of stuff that you have a unique perspective on because of where you happen to be in life and you understand it so intuitively that you can just talk and think about it fluidly. But actually a lot of people don't know it yet and I think that that is the sweet spot for generating a lot of streams. DAVID: How would you know when that's true? DEVON: That's a hard question. For a long time, I just thought that this the way I think is the way that everyone thinks. And so I was like, no one really wants to read about like my theory on flaking in San Francisco. Everyone in SF knows that already. DAVID: But what's your theory on flaking? DEVON: I haven't lived really in any other city, but my impression from talking with friends is that the rate of flaking is extremely high, with friends, with romantic partners, et cetera, relative to sort of sister cities like New York or Chicago or LA. I think part of the reason is that people in my social circles in San Francisco really understand opportunity cost well. There's a very casual culture here where it seems like an acceptable flake. And we also are like, even more so than other millennial types, are very technologically savvy. So if 10 minutes before your coffee date you're like, oh, sorry, I got caught up in something. Can we reschedule next week? It feels trivial because it's just a text. You're not going to literally stand them up because they just won't show up. But the problem with this is that it's another cooperation problem where we ended up in this equilibrium where it feels acceptable for everyone to flake all the time and just not show up to their commitments. But then like everyone's worse off because your scheduling is more complicated. You never really know. If things are going to happen when you think they're going to happen, you kind of don't want to be seen as like the pathetic one who doesn't cancel the plan. So you almost are incentivized to flake because if someone flakes on you enough times, you're like, well, I don't want to look like an idiot. I don't want to be taken advantage of here. So, next time we make plans I'm going to double book and see which one feels more interesting that day. And I think that leads to a real breakdown of trust and like happiness and satisfaction with relationships. Since I realized this, I've personally made a stance where I'm like, I will not flake on something unless I have an exceptionally good reason. And my friends I've noticed have also started to like follow up with me where I've put a stake in the ground. It helps that I wrote a blog post about it. I put a stake in the ground of like, I don't want this to be okay anymore because it's like making everyone's life worse. DAVID: What about San Francisco makes flaking uniquely common here? DEVON: I think there's a mentality of casualness where if you walk around the city, no one's ever dressed up. I mean, literally today I am wearing yoga pants and a tee shirt, and people want to look mostly clean cut, but they'll wear athletic gear almost all the time. I think that is indicative of a broader social casualness. Certain social norms are not as strong and in fact, the social norm is to not have strong social norms. And if you want to come off as like cool and casual. If someone is placed on you and you say something and you're like, hey dude, you flaked on me last time too. That's sort of like a point against you. You're seen as uptight or something. Maybe LA is also more similar to this, but I think like in New York, I feel like there's more of a seriousness in the way people interact where it's like your people get dressed up when they go out. Like when I go to New York, I always feel super underdressed. I think that carries over to a lot of parts of the culture. Where you don't break dates unless you have a good reason. Whereas I can look back on my calendar before I had all of these thoughts and honestly I was either breaking or having commitments broken on me like 50 to 70 percent of the time. And I don't think I'm unique in this because I've had conversations with a lot of people on my team. So I want to go back to writing, but I just want to summarize why I think that falls into the second category of common knowledge. So the first category is things that everybody knows like the sky is blue. The third category is things like the history of FHA housing, which probably requires a lot of research and nobody knows those things. But the second category is things that everyone sort of has a common framework for discussing like flaking. But because you are in a social circle that has a high opportunity cost in San Francisco, you have unique insight into that problem. And when we have a common knowledge, a common way of speaking about something and you have unique insight into that same sort of thing, that is when you should go pursue an idea and share it with the world. DEVON: Totally. I think that's a really good framing of it. I especially like the term common knowledge. Because I don't think anything I said in the post was surprising to anyone, but I think finally sitting down and putting the pieces together as to why all of this stuff comes together, I think is the difference. And just taking the time to sort of reflect on like various dynamics in your own life I think can be a really powerful generative tool. DAVID: I gotta ask, as you think about your writing, you think about your learning sort of your process for living, so to speak. It's cool because I like people like this. Your process for living is also a process for sharing, right? It's almost like a co-dynamic between the two where you live, you share, you share, you live, and I think that they, they sort of co-evolve and develop. Who were the people who have really inspired you to become like that and who were the mentors, digital or physical that have really inspired you? DEVON: There have been a lot. And this actually ties really nicely into the framework of like common knowledge to obscure knowledge. I think I used to think that a writing had to be this big formal process where you sit down with an argument or a spectrum and you try to decide where on that spectrum of arguments you lie and then you dive deep into the literature and you study it, and then you pop out weeks later and you've like displayed to the world this thing, this masterpiece you've been working on. A lot of writing does follow that. A lot of great writing. And I don't think people should stop doing that by any means, but I think there's this other type of writing that is treat your ideas less as a final project product and more as a process. Someone who I think does this very well, I don't know him personally, is Ben Thompson at Stratechery. He writes about the same stuff day after day, but each time he writes about it, he turns it a little bit in his mind. He comes at it from a slightly different angle and over the course of years he has built this canon of like what aggregation theory and he has this whole vocabulary that he's built up and you can see when you go back to his earlier writing, the idea is not fully developed at all, but the writing itself was the thing that developed the ideas. And I think that that is a huge mindset shift that I've had where I used to think first you have the ideas and then you write them down, but actually, you should have some seed of an idea. But then when you start writing, that's what actually brings it out and like causes it to flourish and grow. Another person who's played a really big role in helping me realize the value of this is Tyler Cowen (my podcast episode with Tyler). His blog, Marginal Revolution is just like one of my favorite things on the internet. It's the most ridiculous set of things. It's the intersection of all stuff and he doesn't take it that seriously. DAVID: Right. And the juxtaposition of ideas that you find there puts your brain in crazy places because he'll share, NBA basketball, his recent trip to Ethiopia, and then markets and everything in some weird market that you've never heard of. And I think that really cool ideas and really cool ways of thinking come not necessarily when you discover a new idea, but when you juxtapose ideas that you're vaguely familiar with and then your brain just goes in weird places through that. DEVON: Yeah, by having this huge diversity of sources and ideas, it allows for a type of lateral thinking that I think is really missing in the world. And something I particularly love about Tyler's work is that he both does and doesn't take it seriously at all. So by does, I mean he does, he spends all of his time doing this and he cares about deeply. So he's serious in that sense, but he also treats it as this big game where he's just like, you know, I'm just having fun, I'm pursuing the things I find interesting and I will go down the rabbit holes that seem interesting and ultimately they will become useful. DAVID: So talk about that. So that is a really important part of the learning journey, especially on the internet. so if you take before the internet, right? Like, think of the process of going into the library to research a project in college, right? You go to the librarian and you say take me to history and then it's between like book number 800-899 on the little codes and sort of you spend time in history. But you said something there that I don't think you realize that you said, but it is what it means to learn on the internet. It's sort of having hunches and ideas that certain rabbit holes are going to be interesting and having the audacity to go down those rabbit holes. But how do you gauge what rabbit holes do you want to go down? DEVON: So I think it doesn't matter. I actually think that almost everything can be interesting if you try to build a model for it. Now so things aren't interesting if you try to just rote memorize stuff and I think that that's going to be true with basically every topic actually. However, if you try to understand why things happen and build a causal model in your head, everything's interesting. When I was much younger I felt like, ugh, I like playing sports but I don't really enjoy watching sports. And I think this is a pretty typical like nerd opinion to have. But I realized that if you actually watch a game and you tried to understand sort of where the threads are, like if you pull this thread here, what happens to the fabric over there, have this ongoing game. It's extremely fascinating. Same with a mortgage history. Like if the FHA had done this like tiny little thing differently, like what would have been the rippling effects downstream and why do you think that's true? What are the other explanations for that same behavior? So I don't think the specific rabbit hole really matters that much as long as you are actively forcing yourself to build a model. DAVID: It's interesting because I was just watching the NBA finals and with the Warriors. So Stephen Curry, the reason where he is so good, is because after he passes the ball, he runs to the corner and tries to catch it and you just watch it and it's like, it's amazing to watch. But just, it's funny because. And then I would also watch switches on screens and what not. These are things that sound advanced, but they're super simple. And just by having two or three things that I could sort of hook to, then it opened the door for the rest of it. And it was funny because to go back to Tyler when, whenever I try to learn something the best advice that I've gotten from Tyler Cowen is the idea of entry points. Find something that you like, something that it's intuitive, a metaphor that you like, start there. And then as you begin any sort of learning journey, start with an entry point that you're familiar with and use that as your balances, your crutch to go explore new territory. DEVON: I strongly agree with that. So in high school, I thought of myself as much more of a liberal artsy type of person. I was always pretty good at math and science and so on. I didn't struggle but it just didn't click until I was 16, 17. My boyfriend and I at the time rebuilt a 67 Mustang that he owned and we did an engine swap. We replace the rear end, we did a lot of work on this car. And suddenly all of the engineering and engineering related skills that I've picked up over time became fascinating. I was like, I want to understand how all this works. I picked up something like thermodynamics books and like this, this car was the entryway to all sorts of things and now this is a particularly useful one because if we did it wrong we would die while we were driving it. So like we had pretty good motivation to figure stuff out. But I think finding some sort of entryway into that is critical. And I mean working on the car has literally changed my career in the sense that I don't think I would have gone into mechanical engineering and then computer science if it hadn't been for that thing. I mean the guy helps too, but the car was like really this concrete thing I could imagine in my head and then want to understand the pieces that made up the whole thing. DAVID: Totally. Well, I want to switch gears and talk to you about the thing that I'm most excited to talk to you about today, which is really cities and with the intersection of architecture and incentives. Maybe we can start with Singapore and I'm going to ask that selfishly because I'm really interested in Singapore. I think there's a lot to learn from Singapore, but you were also just there and you've written a lot about Singapore. What is so interesting to you about Singapore? DEVON: Oh man. What is not interesting about Singapore? So Singapore I think is one of the most interesting countries in history. And that's saying something, given that it's only been around for I think 50 or 60 years. It is a city-state. It's only about 5 million people. It is ethnically extremely diverse. There are ethnic Chinese, ethnic Malays, ethnic Indians, and many, many other groups there as well. And it's one of the safest places in the world and it has a booming economy and it has been for a long time, seen as like a center of stability in a region that has not always been stable. So all of those things are incredible about Singapore and that would be crazy for any city or any country, but especially considering where they came from, where they had, I don't remember the exact number, but they had GDP, I think equivalent to like Vietnam in the sixties, and now they have significantly higher GDP than almost any country in the world. One of the highest. Now GDP doesn't measure everything, but it correlates with a lot of important things. The reason I think if I had to pick one reason why I'm fascinated by Singapore, it's because it has one of the weirdest types of governance ever. DAVID: Describe the governance. DEVON: The governance is increasingly less so now, but it's quite to totalitarian. It's not very Democratic at all. DAVID: It's funny because my first thought is whoa, that's not good. But it seems like you're hinting at something else. DEVON: I also think it's not good. And if the whole world were run the way Singapore is run, I don't think that would be a good thing for the world. In part because of the specific things that Singapore does, like it still has like physical punishment and so on for not very big crimes. But then also beyond physical and capital punishment. It also just like having one system for the whole world is not a great thing. It's extremely fragile. Things can go wrong in ways that ripple across the entire world. Now that sounds extreme, but I bring that up because I think Singapore is interesting because it is the opposite. Not only does it not, not only is the whole world not governed the way Singapore is. Singapore is tiny. So even if you really strongly dislike what Singapore is trying to do, what it's experimenting with, it's relatively easy to leave. Now I want to add the strong caveat that like leaving the country you were born in is never an easy decision. And I am not like underplaying that. But it is relatively much easier than leaving a massive country that is not deeply interconnected with the world. And so the thing I find exciting about this country is that it provides this room for experimentation at a relatively low cost. If the entire United States were to take on an experiment, say universal basic income or something else entirely, and if it were to go wrong, it would just, it would be a disaster. It could cripple the country and it would affect roughly 20 million people, something like that. And like you also wouldn't even really be able to know if what the causal mechanism was if UBI was the thing that screwed up or something else entirely. Whereas if you can run a bunch of smaller experiments, which this is the idea of federalism, then you can actually compare the results. People can leave if they really don't want to be part of this experiment. And I think this is really important. People don't like the concept of being experimented on and I get it, but if we don't experiment with new models, we're never going to improve. And so I think the question shouldn't be, should we experimental or should we not experiment. It's like, yes we should, but we should find the ways to have the greatest diversity of experiments while also minimizing the cost. DAVID: Right. Like a lot of what China's doing is sort of A, B testing cities, but the downside risk is impacting millions and millions of people. And I think to your point about minimizing the downside, you know, you could argue that they've gone too far. DEVON: Yeah. I think there's a Slate Star Codex blog post that has a great word for this. It calls it archipelago communitarianism. The concept is like we could have a bunch of cities or very small countries, that had radically different systems and the only promise that they make to each other is that they won't stop the people from leaving those places if they really want to. Maybe there are a few other rules too. I'm not gonna remember the entire details of the blog post, read it a few years ago, but I love this idea of having like little islands of extremity to really push an idea to its limit. And if it, if everyone leaves them, that means that that's not what people wanted. DAVID: Well, that's sort of where the whole voice exit loyalty idea of crypto is coming from. Traditionally in terms of countries, you could voice and you could sort of vote and you could say we want to change the way that things are run by speaking up and there's an exit where you can leave. But traditionally with citizenship, you haven't really been able to leave your country. Even if you're abroad, you still have to pay taxes as an American citizen. And so you're forced to be stuck between voice and loyalty. Whereas now we're switching to where you can still voice your opinion, but if you don't like it, you can exit. And there's a lot of freedom that I think comes with that. DEVON: Yeah. I think it's not just that you can still voice your opinions and also you can leave, it's that you can voice your opinions often better if you have a very small community. A single person has much more sway over the outcome. So it seems very likely to me that it's much easier for a person in a very small community to be able to make a change in that community to begin with and like shape it in their own image than it would be for a massive country like the US or Brazil or something like that. So by bringing it down to a smaller scale, you both get added exit rates, but you also get a greater voice. DAVID: Totally. So you were just in Singapore. What stuck out about being in Singapore to you? Let's go to two places. What is the biggest thing that surprised you when you were there? And what is the biggest thing that you've been thinking about since you came back from Singapore? DEVON: I knew that Singapore had great Infrastructure. I knew that its citizens were well educated, that a lot of its systems just worked. But I didn't realize how much this is embedded in the psyche of the place. It's not just that like, stuff works well and some people forget about it and like go ahead and do their own thing. It's like the most central place of the city right next to Maxwell's Hawker Center, which is like a big destination in the core of the city. There's this place called the URA, the urban research association. I don't remember the exact acronym. Basically, it's this like big gallery on urbanism and like what it means to be an effective city with good governance and what it will take for this to continue and get better over time. I went into this gallery exhibit because I can't keep away if you say that it's like an urban museum. I'm like, okay. It's Devon catnip. I couldn't help but to go in. And I was there at 3:00 PM on a Tuesday and it was full of students, the sense that I got is that like every Singaporean student probably goes there like once a year. I don't even think that we have a gallery like that in San Francisco. And certainly not in the center of the city and kids definitely don't go there all the time. There was this overall sense of understanding of why things work so well, how things won't necessarily keep working well in the future unless we do something about it and like a sense of responsibility that people in the community have to like be a presence voice, which seems very contradictory with some sort of a more totalitarian style of ruling. But Singapore may be the only place in the world where there's a brain drain into the government and not out of it. That is very consistent with what I saw. It's very deeply respected to be a good technocrat. Someone who understands how systems work and like truly wants to make them better. DAVID: They pay well, what else? DEVON: They pay very well. There's really high prestige going in. I haven't really thought about this too hard. DAVID: Okay. Then we'll switch gears. So you said something really interesting about cities before we were recording the podcast that I thought that you phrased perfectly and that you're especially drawn to cities because they're in this middle of scale, right? Where they're big enough to have an importance on the world stage, right? Like a city like New York, San Francisco, Singapore, they're a big deal. But then there are small enough to be nimble and still sort of understandable like it's hard to sort of wrap your head around what it means to be American because they're just so much going on here, but then also sort of what you were talking about earlier in terms of experimenting. There's a lot of them so you can sort of abstract lessons from each one. And so it's this perfect size, perfect density, perfect volume that makes cities really interesting to study. Right? DEVON: Totally. I think that the nimbleness is really important. There is some digital ID that Singapore is rolling out for all of its citizens pretty soon and they're going to just do it. They have 5 million people, which is a lot of people to roll something out to, but it's big enough for this ID to really matter, but it's small enough where they're like, we can just do this, we can just, we can just make it happen. And I think that's thrilling that you can experiment with something of that size. At the same time, you have this really tight feedback loop. If your trash isn't picked up tomorrow, you're gonna notice within a week you're going to probably start writing letters and like your trash better get picked up. I think at the national level, the feedback loops are much longer and it's just harder to know if people are governing you well at all. And that's a recipe for disaster. It leads to much more misalignment of incentives. DAVID: Definitely. Tight feedback is key to learning. DEVON: It's key to everything. Like if you don't have a tight feedback loop, you're just not really going to improve I think, and you're actually very likely to do things that aren't purely for signaling that you care as opposed to actually doing the right thing. DAVID: Go off on that because that's an idea I haven't explored. DEVON: Yeah. Officials in the US tend to do grandstand a lot, at the federal level. And the reason for this is because they don't even really know if they're having the impact they want to have or that their constituents want them to have. The only real information that people get on both sides is like what someone said, even after the facts, even a decade later, it can be very difficult to draw any meaningful causality stemming from a particular leader. I think that's true in any organization ever. Even as small as a single person organization. You can't do randomized controlled trials on like everything or almost anything. But the problem just grows in scale to a huge extent as you get bigger. I think if you can keep it to a smaller size, it's like, well, you either did your job or you didn't. And the problems are much more manageable, the relationships are less opaque. It's just a much more transparent system overall. DAVID: Totally. So, I mean, for me what's been really interesting is in New York studying art decor, one thing that I love about architecture is I've been thinking about this idea a lot, where a lot of history is sort of subject to the narrative fallacy where it's written by the winners and the really good book on this is The People's History of the United States by Howard Zinn. He admits that it's biased, but he tries to tell American history from the perspective of the losers. And if you have a generic understanding of American history, you're going to get so many ideas pumped into your head that are totally different. So what's really cool about architecture is, if you look at something like the Chrysler building and at the very top of it and in the lobby and sort of the birds hanging off the side, you know, 60 feet below the top of the building, you can see this like technological enthusiasm, this almost sense of like a utopian spirit that technology in the twenties and the roaring twenties was going to come and save the world. And through the architecture of New York, you can really understand the city in a way that understanding history might not allow you to do. DEVON: Yeah. And I think it's especially interesting to see how buildings change over time in reaction to that original time when it was created and how they shift. I think the moment when I really became aware of the importance of architecture was in my very first job, we started out in this very small office that was cozy and like my desk was far away from the restroom and the kitchen. So when I wanted to take a break, I'd have to walk past everyone and I'd have like a little conversation and I felt very positive about all my coworkers and I feel like we had a really good rapport. About halfway through my time there, we moved into a totally different building. It was supposed to be fancier, it was nicer by everything you could put on paper. But the shape of the rooms was super messed up. Basically, everyone was very close. It was more like a doughnut where like all of the good stuff was in the center and good stuff, meaning, like the kitchen. And so you didn't have to walk past anyone to go see it, which was kind of nice if you're focusing on a problem or you want some alone time, there are pluses to that, but you don't end up having these interactions. And as a result, I almost immediately started feeling like the only people I knew in the company were my team and a lot of the work that I was supposed to be doing was cross-functional. So this made me significantly worse in my job just immediately. Now, of course, this doesn't stop you from having coffee with a coworker and the sales team or something or organizing something with the product team or you know, inviting them to sit at your table at lunch. But these micro-interactions are really critical for building that rapport, for making, keeping people on context. I almost felt like I was a remote worker, and I don't mean to insult remote work. I think that there are huge pluses to that, but it's really undercut the benefits of being in the office as soon as we moved into this new place. DAVID: It's funny because I feel like so much of architecture now, we place such an emphasis on the outside of a building what most people see. But I don't know that we have the same sort of rich discussions about the experience of actually being somewhere. And I guess the example that comes to me is natural light. Like I value natural light in indoors just to such a high degree. It's like the number one thing that I care about in a building, but so often we look at the outside of buildings, so we say, oh that's beautiful. It looks great in a photo, but the experience of being inside of it, I don't actually know that the incentives are aligned for architects to think about that. DEVON: I agree. I mean if you have ever spent time looking for an apartment on Craigslist or a place on Airbnb, actually everything and I'll explain that later. But on craigslist it's like it tells you the square footage, it tells you how many rooms, how many bathrooms there are, which are obviously important details, but it does very little to describe features like natural light and things that make you actually happy, how livable it is. I think part of the problem for this is that it's a much harder thing to commoditize, which means that like it's harder to measure. It's harder to compare two things, there's not a strict measure that you can really use. But it really matters. It really matters a lot. The experience of being in a place is totally different from the way people will often describe a room, at least in describing a room in comparable terms. I think maybe it seems possible. Maybe someone just needs to build a vocabulary for it. DAVID: Okay. Let's play a little game. So if you had to take five metrics for deciding a house on Zillow, right? We have rooms square foot, but if you had five metrics that don't exist right now, what would it be? You do some, I do some. DEVON: Okay. I kinda like this, I'm thinking of it sort of like the, you know, the big five personality. It's kind of like that. DAVID: So you get three, I get two. DEVON: Let's see, I'd say flexibility. Like how much can you change the space to fit your own needs? Is it like very tightly custom designed? The purest example of this would be like the cabinets are built into the walls so you can't move the cabinets. Versus like a lot of ability to move stuff around. DAVID: Mine is the density of power outlets. Most houses don't have nearly enough. DEVON: Oh my god. The computer science building at Stanford has almost no power outlets, which is insane because you go there for the office hours and you know, everyone's there for hours and hours and hours and everyone's computer starts dying around hour three and there's one power outlet and the whole building. Yeah, that needs to change. DAVID: Here's another one. Where I really like houses where the rooms are super private and the open spaces are super public. So you have the kitchen, the living room, the dining room, all sort of in the same room because at the houses that I grew up in, the kitchen was always separate from the dining room. And so whenever we would cook as hosts, It was always sort of awkward because you sort of had to choose. Whereas you get this awesome communal vibe, but I think it really helps with family dynamics if all that is sort of in the same room and it has really good natural light and there's a nice ambiance in there because then people can cluster there. But then you balance that with like the privacy of the rooms. DEVON: I'll expand that one to like the ability to pass through. So in the house I live in right now, it's very hard to get to the backyard. DAVID: Yeah, describe this house because it's actually really cool. It's a commune with 10 people, but like really intelligent people here. DEVON: We call it an intentional community because commune has a lot of economic implications that probably don't apply. So I'm one of 10 people who live in this house. We're actually expanding to an upper floor and it'll be 16 soon. And we're just a group of people who we all care a lot about, having really easy relationships and what that means is I think a lot of the most meaningful and happiness-inducing experiences and interactions that you'll often have will be these little micro-interactions. It's very similar to what I was talking about with my old office. Where if it's really expensive to meet up with someone and hang out with them, it takes money, time, and energy. You have to have to call them, which seems like not a big deal. But here's an intention that's necessary therefore it to happen. You're only going to become close with people where you have an explicit reason to do so. Like sort of a motive almost. Whereas if you're just in the same place, this is why people love college so much. If you're just in the same place with a lot of people who are energetic, motivated, ambitious, like these amazing things will happen where you'll just bump into each other throughout your day and like amazing things will happen without intention and I think that's amazingly valuable and really easy to undervalue. DAVID: You make a really good point because that's almost in a place where that's not the case. Having relationships where you meet somebody right away is almost the mark of a good friendship. It was Saturday night, 11:00 PM a couple of weeks ago. My friend calls me and he goes, what are you doing right now? And it was the first time that happened to me in New York, but it was this like moment in our friendship where in order to do that. Like that happened all the time in college. Like that's college 101. Oh, what are you doing right now? But for it to happen in New York? First of all, was like shocking to me and second of all it was like this mark of our friendship where to get there with somebody takes so much more work because of the way that New York is built and that happens daily in this house here, which I think is really cool. DEVON: It's amazing. I mean, it's amazing you say that that's the case in New York because New York is probably one of the best places in the entire US for this. Like in the opposite sense of what you're talking about. Now imagine if you guys lived in Irvine, California or a far-flung suburb of Salt Lake City or something comes up for you to meet up with this person. Like right now it's just, you jump on the subway, you're there in a few minutes. Not that big of a deal. In those places, you have to like get in your car. Maybe you have to get your snow boots on. You can't get drunk and go home, which is also a good way to bond with people. Also, when you arrive, it will likely just be the two of you, probably no one else was invited, whereas like in a city, maybe you meet up at a bar where there's like a bunch of other random people around you who ended up being really interesting. Actually one of my closest friends. I met like at an event at the MoMa, and just because we like bumped into each other at a mixer afterward. That wouldn't have happened if we weren't in the city. You don't have things like the MoMa in far-out suburbs. And so this is like another example of not just architecture but the general built environment, having dramatic effects on the way you actually interact with the world. DAVID: So let's play another game. If you were to take, I gave you three, we're just going to do metrics again, three metrics or three data points that you could pick and you're going to choose where you live, the house that you lived, a location, what city, what the house looks like, what would the three that you picked be? DEVON: That's a good one. One would be, how long does it take for you to walk from where you live to like your top 10 favorite locations in the city? I think if the answer is a long time and especially if the answer is like you can't even walk there, that's not a good sign for me. Now I don't mean this to be normative for everybody. Other people do have other preferences. Some people want to like go on a big ranch in Idaho and like never see another human. Again, totally not my type but good for them. I'm not saying it's the case, but for me it's very important that I can walk places. I think the reason for this is because walking is a way to interact with your community in these small ways every single day where I think the way people get comfortable in a place in a social group is not through just like one really intense interaction, but through a bunch of smaller ones where you sort of see things from different angles you experienced, you know, what does my neighborhood looked like on a rainy day, what does my neighborhood look like when it's a cloudy day, what does it look like when I'm kind of tired? And these sound like tiny, trivial differences. But you can understand much better how things function. Maybe usually on a sunny day people will like to sit outside at Maxfield's coffee down the street, but on a different one, people sort of tuck inside and it has this closer vibe. You get to know the vibe just much better and you end up meeting people that you probably wouldn't meet if you were in an uber going from point A to point B all the time. So walking is one. Another one would be if for random and sort of once in a while type things like I had to get a necklace fixed the other day, how easy is it for this to be a part of your daily routine? So is it like you have to drive like way out of your way and find some really specialty store to do it? Or like what I did, I was able to walk two blocks away. There's a little jeweler who was able to fix it in three minutes and I walked back and that was like not even my whole lunch break. That was just a little pause in the middle of my day. I grabbed coffee on the way and I came back and up until that point, I had no idea that jeweler was there and we had a nice conversation. But it was just right there. And I love that my whole community can be inside of this little circle. Number three. DAVID: I'll give you my three real quick. So my first one would be natural light, as I've said many times before. That's super important to me. The second one, yours is walking, for me, it's like not having to use a car. So I actually sort of like taking public transportation so I just don't like driving and I don't really like being in cars. So those are the two. The third one would be I like being able to walk, especially to food. Like at my old apartment I was super close with everyone who worked at the bagel shop and I'm pretty close with all the ladies who work at maya taqueria, my local taqueria. And the last one would just be a high density of super intellectually hungry people, which for me is why I've chosen to live in New York. DEVON: Oh, I see. So we can expand this beyond built environment. I would definitely make that my third one as well. This is why I'm in San Francisco, New York maybe is a good choice too, but there is just always someone I can talk to about whatever crazy idea I have going in through my head or is going through their head any given day. I find not everybody here necessarily wants to discuss these ideas, but by using twitter you can actually find these people and like create this strong core where I've basically tricked my brain. The thinking that like everyone around me is just this crazy monster of ideas, continually coming up with new things. There's so much intersection of like different types of people doing work in the city. Everything from like researchers to engineers to entrepreneurs to artists. And unfortunately, fewer these days, as a city gets more expensive. And they're all just mixed together in this pretty small city where you can always find them. But then I think the important component is you also have to have some tools that sort of overlay this to help find them. Just walking around the city. Like I was talking about before, won't surface all of these people and you also are less likely to get outside of your current network if you just stick in your small neighborhood. DAVID: Let's do a quick fire round. So I'm going to ask you like five, six questions and try to keep your answers to like 30 seconds or less. Why do you love Stewart Brand so much? DEVON: He is a polymath. A lot of people take crusades on things. They pick one idea and they just drive it for years and years. Stewart takes hundreds of ideas and makes them all good and is still able to keep a really strong sense of identity despite not having like one thing that he ties himself. DAVID: So I have a theory that personality will end up being almost like the last mode and that sort of so much of what's happening in society right now is like brands are sort of disappearing where many people have less likely to have a favorite brand. But I think that the internet has made it really easy to connect with people. And Stewart Brand is always sort of been a pioneer of technology and I think that people can move around and explore different things through their personality in ways that institutions can't. And I think that that's really helped somebody like Stewart Brand. I don't actually think that focusing on the same thing is like a vector that really matters when it comes to consistency with a person. DEVON: I think that's true. And I think Stewart and Tyler are two fantastic examples of this being 100 percent possible. I think that most people don't realize that and they think that they have to pick one thing and so that you see th

The Social Change Career Podcast
From Tears to transformation with Robi Damelin

The Social Change Career Podcast

Play Episode Listen Later Jan 10, 2018 47:00


Born in an affluent household during Apartheid South Africa; Robi was always a free spirit who loved and rescued animals from an early age. Robi moved to Israel, raised her children and had a successful career in Public Relations. In 2002, a Palestinian sniper killed her son David. Robi soon joined The Parents Circle where she travels the world alongside Palestinian and Israeli bereaved families speaking about reconciliation and peace. Find out more about Robi's career in Episode 1 of the Social Change Career Podcast.     In this episode we discuss:     Growing up in Apartheid South Africa as a privileged person in a liberal household Her lifelong passion for animals and how she stole a horse at the age of 5 How her uncle defended Nelson Mandela in the first treason trial The influence of the South African Truth & Reconciliation Commission (and how it prevented what could have been a terrible blood bath) How she came to Israel in 1967 Robi moved to Tel Aviv with her kids David and Eran Robi opened a PR office and did that for many years The knock on the door (when soldiers informed her of the death of her son David) How her life is her mission not work The importance of working on the ground for real insights How her PR work informed her work with The Parent Circle Remembering David as a Philosophy of Education Masters student How Robi found The Parents Circle to help prevent other families from experiencing this pain Find something that gives meaning to your life Robi's first meeting with other bereaved Palestinian families and discovering the shared pain Robi's work with The Parent Circle Robi in London with Tina Brown “Women in the World” Robi's story of Bushra : a story of transformation from hatred Busha's trip from a tiny Palestinian village to NYC and her love for hamburgers How Bushra and Robi spoke to 3,000 people in NYC, then Delhi, London and Canada spreading a message of reconciliation and peace Robi's meeting with black bereaved mothers of police mothers in Atlanta Robi's lunch with a mother of Sandy Hook and how she is preparing to speak with a mother of the Columbine massacre Robi's next project Robi's advice on how to be a meaningful academic Robi's career advice Robi's take on failure Three things for a career of social impact according to Robi   Links The Parents Circle Sandy Hook Joan B. Krock Institute for Peace and Justice Women in the World Georgetown University Encounter Point Another Side of Peace One Day After Peace Two-Sided Story   Related topics   Check out our weekly blogposts and monthly webinar from the PCDNs Career Series. To take you from passion to hired!   Need career advice? Need it now? Join PCDN Career Helping Line. Go ask your questions, help answer others and participate in fruitful discussion to advance your social change career.  

Evolve with Pete Evans
Dr David Perlmutter

Evolve with Pete Evans

Play Episode Listen Later Dec 13, 2017 57:39


Dr David Perlmutter is a Board-certified Neurologist and four-time New York Times bestselling author. He serves on the Board of Directors and is a Fellow of the American College of Nutrition. Dr Perlmutter received his MD degree from the University of Miami School of Medicine where he was awarded the Leonard G. Rowntree Research Award.He has published extensively in peer reviewed scientific journals including Archives of Neurology, Neurosurgery, and The Journal of Applied Nutrition. In addition he's a frequent lecturer at symposia sponsored by such medical institutions as Columbia University, Scripps Institute, New York University and Harvard University, and serves an Associate Professor at the University of Miami Miller School of Medicine.His books have been published in 28 languages and include ‘Grain Brain: The Surprising Truth About Wheat, Carbs And Sugar’ with over 1 million copies in print. Other New York Times bestsellers include ‘Brain Maker, the Grain Brain Cookbook’, and his most recent book, ‘The Grain Brain Whole Life Plan’.Join me as I ask Dr David:* How does the body and brain become inflamed?* The condition of modern society’s microbiomes.* What he recommends for prevention or treatment of Alzheimers.* How do grains impact our brain health?Dr David is also kind enough to share with us:* The studies on how gut bacteria affect our brain activity (most of our neurotransmitters are made in the gut, not the brain!)* The link between gluten and gut leakiness.* What, how and when he eats.* How to get started on the ketogenic diet.Dr David is a mentor and good friend of mine, and a few things he said resonated with me today:“The ketogenic diet is brand new - I mean it's only the type of diet humans have been on for two million years!”“Dietary fat and being fat are two entirely different things.”“I’ve been accused of saying that I'm against research to find a cure for Alzheimer's - I am not. I mean if there were a magic pill that could help people with their brain functioning you bet I’d be writing prescriptions for it - but we don't have that yet.”To find out more about Dr Perlmutter visit his website https://www.drperlmutter.comI’d love to know your thoughts and experiences - join the conversation on my Facebook page.For more episodes of Recipes For Life, find us on iTunes at https://apple.co/2NpsIba, Spotify at https://spoti.fi/2NpSiN0, Whooskhaa at https://www.whooshkaa.com/shows/recipes-for-life-with-pete-evans, click the link on https://peteevans.com, or just look up "Recipes For Life" in your favourite podcast app.I'd love to spread the knowledge in these podcasts far and wide. If you liked this episode, I'd love it if you could share it with your friends, and perhaps even leave a review on iTunes.This podcast is proudly presented by The Institute For Integrative Nutrition, or IIN for short.I've completed this amazing health training course through IIN, and I would thoroughly recommend it for anyone wanting to start a career in the health coaching and wellness space.This course is conducted over a year long period and it's constructed in a way that if you're a full time worker or a busy parent or wherever you are in your life you'll still be able to complete all the required curriculum and modules.Please see the link included in this post on my Facebook or Instagram page or on iTunes, to access the free sample class and first module of the program, to get a great taste of the format and structure as well as utilise my special discount that I can offer you if you decide to sign up.Just go to https://geti.in/2K2QcAw, email... See acast.com/privacy for privacy and opt-out information.

Evolve with Pete Evans
Dr David Perlmutter

Evolve with Pete Evans

Play Episode Listen Later Dec 13, 2017 58:58


Dr David Perlmutter is a Board-certified Neurologist and four-time New York Times bestselling author. He serves on the Board of Directors and is a Fellow of the American College of Nutrition. Dr Perlmutter received his MD degree from the University of Miami School of Medicine where he was awarded the Leonard G. Rowntree Research Award.He has published extensively in peer reviewed scientific journals including Archives of Neurology, Neurosurgery, and The Journal of Applied Nutrition. In addition he's a frequent lecturer at symposia sponsored by such medical institutions as Columbia University, Scripps Institute, New York University and Harvard University, and serves an Associate Professor at the University of Miami Miller School of Medicine.His books have been published in 28 languages and include ‘Grain Brain: The Surprising Truth About Wheat, Carbs And Sugar' with over 1 million copies in print. Other New York Times bestsellers include ‘Brain Maker, the Grain Brain Cookbook', and his most recent book, ‘The Grain Brain Whole Life Plan'.Join me as I ask Dr David:* How does the body and brain become inflamed?* The condition of modern society's microbiomes.* What he recommends for prevention or treatment of Alzheimers.* How do grains impact our brain health?Dr David is also kind enough to share with us:* The studies on how gut bacteria affect our brain activity (most of our neurotransmitters are made in the gut, not the brain!)* The link between gluten and gut leakiness.* What, how and when he eats.* How to get started on the ketogenic diet.Dr David is a mentor and good friend of mine, and a few things he said resonated with me today:“The ketogenic diet is brand new - I mean it's only the type of diet humans have been on for two million years!”“Dietary fat and being fat are two entirely different things.”“I've been accused of saying that I'm against research to find a cure for Alzheimer's - I am not. I mean if there were a magic pill that could help people with their brain functioning you bet I'd be writing prescriptions for it - but we don't have that yet.”To find out more about Dr Perlmutter visit his website https://www.drperlmutter.comI'd love to know your thoughts and experiences - join the conversation on my Facebook page.For more episodes of Recipes For Life, find us on iTunes at https://apple.co/2NpsIba, Spotify at https://spoti.fi/2NpSiN0, Whooskhaa at https://www.whooshkaa.com/shows/recipes-for-life-with-pete-evans, click the link on https://peteevans.com, or just look up "Recipes For Life" in your favourite podcast app.I'd love to spread the knowledge in these podcasts far and wide. If you liked this episode, I'd love it if you could share it with your friends, and perhaps even leave a review on iTunes.This podcast is proudly presented by The Institute For Integrative Nutrition, or IIN for short.I've completed this amazing health training course through IIN, and I would thoroughly recommend it for anyone wanting to start a career in the health coaching and wellness space.This course is conducted over a year long period and it's constructed in a way that if you're a full time worker or a busy parent or wherever you are in your life you'll still be able to complete all the required curriculum and modules.Please see the link included in this post on my Facebook or Instagram page or on iTunes, to access the free sample class and first module of the program, to get a great taste of the format and structure as well as utilise my special discount that I can offer you if you decide to sign up.Just go to

Instant Internet Identity Podcast: Creating An Effective Online Presence
109: Life Is Like A Voyage Into The Unknown – Part 1

Instant Internet Identity Podcast: Creating An Effective Online Presence

Play Episode Listen Later Nov 14, 2017 10:50


Sandra: “Good day Sandra! Hi David! How are you?” David: “Very well, but it’s my last day today.” Sandra: “How sad.” David: “How sad. Yes? Sad? I’m returning to England tomorrow.” Sandra: “When are you coming back?” David: “I don’t know. Next year I hope to come back here.” Patricia: “How are you?” David: “Very […]

WW1 Centennial News
WW1 Centennial News: Episode #40 - "Ask Alexa" | Spy ring in Palestine | Richard Rubin | Booby Trap | 100C/100M Ridgewood, NJ | David Hanna | #CountdownToVeteransDay and more...

WW1 Centennial News

Play Episode Listen Later Oct 6, 2017 41:47


Highlights: Ask Alexa: “Play W W 1 Centennial News Podcast” |@ 01:00 Second Liberty Bond drive launches |@ 02:00 Spy ring in Palestine - Mike Shuster |@ 06:25 War In the Sky - RiesenFlugzeug - behemoths of the sky |@ 10:10 Great War Alliance Forum |@ 13:05 Follow up on Cardines Field rededication |@ 13:55 Holding talks about WWI in communities - Richard Rubin |@ 15:15 Speaking WWI -  This week: “Booby Trap” |@ 21:30 100C/100M in Ridgewood, NJ - Chris Stout |@ 23:10 “Rendezvous With Death” - David Hanna |@ 28:30 Pershing/Lafayette statues rededicated in Versaille |@ 34:40 Trek through the Dolomites - WWrtie Blog w Shannon Huffman Polson |@ 36:00 The Buzz on #CountdownToVeteransDay -Katherine Akey |@ 36:55----more---- Opening Welcome to World War 1 centennial News - It’s about WW1 THEN - what was happening 100 years ago this week  - and it’s about WW1 NOW - news and updates about the centennial and the commemoration. Today is October 4th, 2017 and our guests this week are: Mike Shuster from the great war project blog,    Richard Rubin, author of The Last of the Doughboys and Back Over There Chris Stout from the 100 Cities / 100 Memorials project in Ridgewood, New Jersey And David Hanna, author of the WW1 book and now website - Rendezvous with Death   WW1 Centennial News is brought to you by the U.S. World War I Centennial Commission and the Pritzker Military Museum and Library. I’m Theo Mayer - the Chief Technologist for the Commission and your host. Welcome to the show. Preface Before we get going today I wanted to let you know, especially all of you who own Amazon Echo or other Alexa enabled device, Alexa has a new skill. If you say “Alexa, play the “W” “W” one centennial news podcast” she will dutifully find the most current episode on the internet and play it for you. We are excited because that opens up WW1 Centennial News to 20 million new player and all you have to do is ask! Welcome to the future - but right now - let’s jump into our wayback machine and head 100 years into the past! World War One THEN 100 Year Ago This Week [MUSIC TRANSITION] Yes, we’ve gone back in time 100 years to explore the war that changed the world! And It’s the first week of October 1917. What’s on the US government’s mind this week? Raising money to pay for the war! [SOUND EFFECT] Dateline October 1st 1917 Headline: Secretary of the treasury - McAdoo begins Second Liberty Loan Drive... Five Billion Dollars from Ten Million Subscribers fixed as goal! So In 1917, financing a war with deficit spending is not at all the plan. The Wilson administration is determined to raise the money needed for this immense effort, and in part, by issuing of government backed war bonds. This is innovative… and it is interesting to note, that the same 1917 law that authorizes the war bonds will continue to be used to sell US treasury bonds 100 years later! Back in June (during our episode 24), we reported on the Wilson administration touting the first liberty loan drive was an unprecedented and huge success. In fact, they raised $2 billion dollars from five and one half million people! A century later that $2 billion is the equivalent of 38 billion dollars. So - not too bad! This Second Liberty Bond drive is targeting twice as much revenue from two times as many subscribers. Though there is a lot of controversy about how successful the liberty bond program is, with the government claiming HUGE success and other press of the time criticizing lackluster enthusiasm and talking about the discounting of the bonds,  anyone who has ever undertaken to raise substantial amounts of money KNOWS, it’s no cake walk! Focusing on participation by the general public as small investors -- Secretary  Mcadoo reaches out to the administration’s secret weapon --- their powerhouse of propaganda, their empresario of promo, their master of emotion, their superman of spin - George Creel’s Committee on Public Information! This is the same outfit that publishes the daily Official Bulletin that we use here on the podcast every week to tell you the story of WW1, and whose pages we re-publish daily on the centennial anniversary of their original publication at ww1cc.org/bulletin. Anyway, Creel is probably America’s first marketing genius. He shows up as the man behind the curtain all over the place during this period... And with outrageous but brilliant ideas - like in late May -- as the first Liberty loan drive wraps up, he gets all churches, schools and city halls around the country to ring their bells every night in a countdown to the end of the first drive! Talk about taking your promotion to the grassroots. Last week we reported on the massive national billboard campaign for “Food will win the war” including using electric lights to light up the billboards at night. We have not verified that Creel was the man behind this endeavor, but it has his style written all over it. He is also a multi-media and social media genius… and In 1917 that means the flaming hot new media of the MOVIES and the Phonograph. Before the 4th liberty bond sale is over, and there will be 4 of them - Creel will have recruited the biggest stars of the day including Al jolson, Mary Pickford, Douglas Fairbanks and his premiere celebrity pitch man - Charlie Chaplin Creel doesn’t just go big, he also goes wide. George puts together a citizen army of 70,000 called “the 4 minute men”. He arms them with 4 minutes speeches - And in this case - on why buying Bonds is the key to Liberty and Freedom for Americans and why it is every citizens patriotic duty to participate He sends this army into every movie theater in the nation, arranging for them to make their presentation just before the features film. And so McAdoo launches his second liberty loan campaign 100 years ago this week! [SOUND EFFECT] Great War Project Now we are joined by Mike shuster, former NPR correspondent and curator for the Great War Project blog, to walk us through his fascinating post - A Ring of Spies in Palestine… all about a Jewish Spy ring assisting the british against the turks --- that gets busted by the turkish Secret Police... Welcome Mike! [Mike Shuster] Thank you Mike. That was Mike Shuster from the Great War Project blog. LINK: http://greatwarproject.org/2017/10/01/ring-of-spies-in-palestine/ War in the Sky This week in the Great War in the sky, there are two stories worth noting. The first involves a british Battle cruiser - The HMS Repulse. At the time, she is touted to be the fastest battle ship of the fleet. On October 1st 1917, having built a strange - slightly up-angled - platform on top of the turret of one of the big 15-inch guns  - her captain faces the Repulse into the wind --. Sitting atop the platform, Royal Naval Air Service Commander F.J. Rutland fires up the engine on his Sopwith Pup fighter plane. He cranks the RPM, higher, higher and higher still as the battle cruiser pushes into the wind - Finally he lets loose the brakes and his planes takes to the air making it the first fighter plane ever launched from such a ship! He, of course, does NOT attempt a landing on same! And we have a link in the podcast notes showing you a picture of the rig they used. Also this week, on October 5th, after a long period of unfavorable weather, the Germans finally send planes to the UK for a night raid on London. Nineteen Gotha bombers and two Reisenflugzeug bombers come at the brits in several waves causing quite a bit of damage but inflicting no casualties. Now… Reisenflugzeug literally means GIANT AIRPLANE in German… and they were. These multi-engine behemoths had wingspans of 100 feet or more and seemed more like an exercise in the art of the possible instead of the art of war. This was to be the last German raid against the UK until January of 1918 - the Gotha bombers and two of these behemoth flying machines let loose their payloads over the UK during the war in the sky - 100 years ago this week. We also have a link to a picture of a Reisenflugzeug in the podcast notes. Link: http://media.iwm.org.uk/ciim5/331/146/mid_000000.jpg https://upload.wikimedia.org/wikipedia/commons/thumb/d/d3/Riesenflugzeug_Siemens_Schuckert_VIII_1918.jpg/1200px-Riesenflugzeug_Siemens_Schuckert_VIII_1918.jpg [SOUND EFFECT] The Great War Channel If you’d like to watch some videos about WW1, visit our friend at the Great War Channel on Youtube - They have well over 400 episodes about WW1 and from a more European perspective. New episodes for this week include: The Battle of Polygon Wood Recap of Our Trip to Italy and Slovenia And Denmark in WW1 Follow the link in the podcast notes or search for “the great war” on youtube. Link: https://www.youtube.com/user/TheGreatWar World War One NOW [SOUND EFFECT] We have moved forward in time to the present… Welcome to WW1 Centennial News NOW  - This part of the program is not about history but how the centennial of the War that changed the world is being commemorated today. Commission News This week in Commission news, we highlight a panel discussion about the Origins of the Trilateral Alliance - The alliance between Britain, America and France during World War One, its difficult birth, and its enduring impact after the war. The event was part of the Great War Alliance Forum at the Meridian International Center, a premier nonprofit global leadership organization headquartered in Washington DC Our own Commissioner Monique Seefried was part of the team that explored the history of the trilateral alliance; societal changes and the future of global conflict. You can read more about the event and watch the videos of this insightful discussion by following the link in the podcast notes. Link:https://www.meridian.org/project/the-great-war-alliance-forum/ [Sound Effect] Activities and Events Cardines Field Next, in our Activities and Events Section, we wanted to follow up on our report about the Rededication of Cardines Baseball Field which took place on September 29th, US Centennial Commissioner Jack Monahan attended the event in Rhode island,  that included an Army-Navy baseball game played by students from the U.S. Naval War College dressed in period baseball uniforms. Thanks to Associated Press reporter Jennifer McDermott from Rhode Island, the story about this unique and fun WW1 commemoration event got picked up by newspapers, blogs and posts all around the country This includes the New York Times, the Washington Post and local papers in Washington State, North Carolina, Texas, Oklahoma and more. Check out the articles from across the country in the podcast notes. We invite YOU to add your own event to the National U.S. WW1 Centennial Events Register. Go to ww1cc.org/events, click the big red button and post your WW1 commemoration event for all to discover. We just added a new category this week for Social Media Events - so if you are planning a Facebook Live, livestream, WW1 Hackathon or other online WW1 commemoration event - get it posted and let our community of interest know! links: http://ww1cc.org/events https://www.nytimes.com/aponline/2017/09/29/us/ap-us-wwi-baseball-game.html https://www.washingtonpost.com/news/early-lead/wp/2017/09/28/army-soldiers-and-navy-sailors-to-recreate-world-war-i-era-baseball-game/?utm_term=.aa623b76c64e http://www.thenewportbuzz.com/batter-up-naval-war-college-to-host-wwi-baseball-at-cardines-field-this-friday/12817 http://www.thenewstribune.com/sports/article175660656.html http://www.newsobserver.com/sports/article175660656.html http://www.houstonchronicle.com/news/article/Sailors-and-soldiers-to-recreate-World-War-I-12240885.php http://www.brownsvilleherald.com/sports/article_d3a6e966-fb51-5b87-8718-dc03ab061fae.html http://newsok.com/sailors-and-soldiers-to-recreate-world-war-i-baseball-game/article/feed/1435175 https://www.theet.com/web_exclusive/us/sailors-and-soldiers-recreate-world-war-i-baseball-game/article_3da2b656-0e29-5316-845e-0fa637e2e5d2.html http://www.phillytrib.com/news/state_and_region/sailors-and-soldiers-recreate-world-war-i-baseball-game/article_2bc1387a-441a-5107-a1b6-00254a8585a9.html [SOUND EFFECT] Richard Rubin Talks To Towns We are joined by our good friend Richard Rubin - author of the WWI books, The Last of the Doughboys and Back Over There. Richard is joining us today to talk to us about his experiences during speaking engagements across the country about World War One. Welcome, Richard! [exchange greetings] [So Richard, you have gone around the country to speak about your books, the research that went into them and World War 1 at large -  tell us a bit about these events?] [Richard, you mentioned that people often come with artifacts,  photos, mementos, and family histories. Why do you think people are so eager to share these with you? ] [-Is there one story or artifact that someone brought in that stands out in your mind?] [-If somebody wants to have hold one of these events, how do they get a hold of you?] Richard Rubin - Thank you very much for coming on! That was author Richard Rubin, we have links in the podcast notes to Richard’s website which is also a great way to contact him. link:https://www.richardrubinonline.com/ [SOUND EFFECT] Speaking WW1 And now for our feature “Speaking World War 1 - Where we  explore today’s words & phrases that are rooted in the war  --- First some background - In spanish, a bobo is a fool, a clown, or someone who is easily cheated" … in the late 1800’s the term was anglicised into “booby” for terms like Booby Prize - and Booby Trap… then, it signified a prank like a book, or water put atop a door left ajar - so when someone walked in - Sploosh! And a great big guffaw! In WWI the word ‘Booby Trap” this week’s speaking WW1 word - took on a whole new sinister meaning! The English journalist Sir Philip Gibbs wrote in his war memoir From Bapaume to Passchendaele: “the enemy left … slow-working fuses and ‘booby-traps’ to blow a man to bits or blind him for life if he touched a harmless looking stick or opened the lid of a box, or stumbled over an old boot.” So troops picked up the phrase to describe a myriad of explosive devices deliberately disguised as a harmless objects often left behind in territory that exchanged hands, hidden in doorways, set to go off when a curious soldier opened the lid to a box or rifled through abandoned equipment. In modern times with this tactic becoming a major tool in asymmetric warfare the term was updated to IED - Improvised Explosive Device. Booby-trap --- a fool’s trap - one more word that was altered forever during the War that Changed the World. See the podcast notes to learn more! link: https://www.theguardian.com/education/2014/jun/28/first-world-war-one-soldiers-tommies-common-language-trenches http://joellambert.com/123/history-booby-traps/   [SOUND EFFECT] 100 Cities/100 Memorials Chris Stout - Ridgewood, NJ Next, we are going to profile another 100 Cities / 100 Memorials project. That is our $200,000 matching grant giveaway to rescue ailing WW1 memorials. Last week, we profiled a project from Swanton Ohio. This week, we head to Ridgewood, NJ. Joining us is Chris Stout, a member of Ridgewood’s American Legion Post 53 and a self-appointed amateur local historian. Welcome, Chris! [exchange greetings] [Chris.. The saying is “a man is not dead until he is forgotten” and that frames your 100 Cities / 100 Memorials project. Tell us about it.] [What was your reaction when you learned about being one of the awardees for a Matching Grant by the program?] [Can you tell us about the rededication that took place on Memorial day?] [Chris - What distinguishes your project - for me - is that it is a fairly small project that is righting a large issue… Congratulations to you and your whole post!] Thank you so much for being here with us today! That was Chris Stout, member of American Legion Post 53, local historian and resident of Ridgewood, New Jersey. We will continue to profile the submitting teams and their unique and amazing projects on the show over the coming months. Learn more about the 100 Cities / 100 Memorials program at ww1cc.org/100memorials or follow the link in the podcast notes. Link: www.ww1cc.org/100memorials http://www.worldwar1centennial.org/index.php/communicate/press-media/wwi-centennial-news/3166-first-50-official-wwi-centennial-memorials-to-be-announced.html   [SOUND EFFECT] Stories of Service Rendezvous With death - Interview with David Hanna In our “Remember the veterans” section, today we have David Hanna with us. David is a history teacher at Stuyvesant (Sty-ves-ant) High School in New York City and author of two books, Knights of the Sea about a naval battle that occurred off the coast of Maine in 1813; and Rendezvous with Death, about the original group of American volunteers in the French Army in 1914. Welcome, David! [exchange greetings] [David, how did you come to write a book about the American Volunteers of WW1?] [As you’ve noted, the dozens of Americans that volunteered in 1914 represented a cross-section of American society at the time. What common impulse made them volunteer for the war?] [There are many famous individuals who volunteered early on in the war: Ernest Hemingway, Alan Seeger, e. e. cummings, Walt Disney… but of all the many volunteers you’ve researched, does anyone stand out to you?] [David: How did you decide on the title “Rendezvous with Death”?] [David - put up a website on the Commissions server - what kinds of information can I find there?] Thank you so much for joining us! That was David Hanna, author of Rendezvous with Death and curator of the website at ww1cc.org/rendezvous The links are in the podcast notes. Link:http://www.worldwar1centennial.org/index.php/rendezvous-with-death-home-page.html https://www.amazon.com/Rendezvous-Death-Americans-Foreign-Civilization/dp/1621573966/ref=asap_bc?ie=UTF8 International Report For our International Report, we head to France, to the town of Versaille for an interesting story about two companion statues one of General Pershing and the other of the Marquis de Lafayette The statues were recently restored and re-dedicated on October 6th 2017. The dual monuments to the generals were originally built in 1937, two equestrian statues of the generals on nine meter tall pedestals on either side of the road leading into the town of Versaille. The two statues were erected to commemorate the friendship between France and the United States and to pay tribute to the Americans troops for their significant contribution to the Allied victory in 1918. The statues were hastily built in plaster with a bronze patina (puh-tee-nuh) so they could be in place and on view for they’re inauguration, which took place with General Pershing present on a European tour. The plaster statues were quickly damaged by exposure and had never been replaced, until now. On October 6th 2017, exactly 80 years after the initial inauguration, permanent versions of the statues were re-dedicated.  Read more about the statues and the rededication at the links in the podcast notes. link:http://www.pershing-lafayette-versailles.org/ http://centenaire.org/fr/en-france/versailles-ceremonie-restauration-monument-pershing-la-fayette   WWrite Blog It’s time for an update for our WWRITE blog, which explores WWI’s Influence on contemporary writing and scholarship, this week's post is: “What the Mountains Hold: A Writer's Trek Through the Dolomites of Mark Helprin's WWI Italy” The post brings a fresh face to the WWI Italy described in  Hemingway's “A Farewell to Arms”. Author and veteran, Shannon Huffman Polson, takes us on a spellbinding trek through the Dolomites, where 689,000 Italians perished during the war. Following the footsteps of characters from Mark Helprin's novel, “A Soldier of the Great War”, Polson leads us through the stark, striking landscape of one of Italian-history's most indelible memories. A stunning narrative not to be missed! Read it by following the link in the podcast notes. Link: www.ww1cc.org.wwrite http://www.worldwar1centennial.org/index.php/articles-posts/3190-what-the-mountains-hold.html   The Buzz - WW1 in Social Media Posts That brings us to the buzz - the centennial of WW1 this week in social media with Katherine Akey - Katherine - You have two stories to share with us today - Take it away! Thanks Theo! Fort Riley and the 1st Division Museum Watch a great video series about the 1st division in WW1! link:https://www.facebook.com/FtRileyMuseums/ https://www.facebook.com/FtRileyMuseums/videos/1217575371721494/ Countdown to Veterans Day Follow us as we #countdowntoveteransday . You can join in, too! link:https://www.facebook.com/ww1centennial/photos/a.290566277785344.1073741829.185589304949709/845531832288783/?type=3&theater https://www.facebook.com/hashtag/countdowntoveteransday https://www.instagram.com/explore/tags/countdowntoveteransday/?hl=en   Closing Well It’s time to wrap things up - and for those who listen through to the very end of the episode you know about the little treats we always put there. We want to thank our guests: Mike Shuster and his report on espionage in the middle east   Richard Rubin, telling us about his experiences speaking across the country Chris Stout from the 100 Cities / 100 Memorials project in Ridgewood, New Jersey David Hanna giving us insight into the Americans who joined the war well before America did Katherine Akey the Commission’s social media director and also the line producer for the show. And I am Theo Mayer - your host.   The US World War One Centennial Commission was created by Congress to honor, commemorate and educate about WW1. Our programs are to-- inspire a national conversation and awareness about WW1; This program is a part of that…. We are bringing the lessons of the 100 years ago into today's classrooms; We are helping to restore WW1 memorials in communities of all sizes across our country; and of course we are building America’s National WW1 Memorial in Washington DC. If you like the work we are doing, please support it with a tax deductible donation at ww1cc.org/donate - all lower case Or if you are on your smart phone text  the word: WW1 to 41444. that's the letters ww the number 1 texted to 41444. Any amount is appreciated. We want to thank commission’s founding sponsor the Pritzker Military Museum and Library for their support. The podcast can be found on our website at ww1cc.org/cn   on  iTunes and google play ww1 Centennial News, and on Amazon Echo or other Alexa enabled devices. Our twitter and instagram handles are both @ww1cc and we are on facebook @ww1centennial. Thanks for joining us. And don’t forget to share the stories you are hearing here with someone about the war that changed the world! [music - The man behind the hammer and the plow - Arthur Fields - Edison Record] Alexa: Play the W W 1 Centennial News Podcast [Alexa response]   So long!

Journal With Me
Love The Lord Your God

Journal With Me

Play Episode Listen Later Oct 5, 2017 5:48


Today we read Matthew 22:37-40 and look at what it means to love the Lord with all your heart, soul, and mind. How can we be like Moses and David? How do we love God in our choices and thoughts? Let's grow together as we journal this scripture. Music: Greatest Love by HIS CALL MUSIC

Real Democracy Now! a podcast
3.1 Electoral Systems with Professor David Farrell

Real Democracy Now! a podcast

Play Episode Listen Later Sep 17, 2017 33:31


Thank you for joining me in episode 1 of Season 3 of Real Democracy Now! a podcast. Season 3 of the podcast is looking at Elections, electoral systems, electoral reform and alternatives. As you can imagine this is a huge area to cover and I would like to thank Anika Gauja from the University of Sydney who helped me develop a broad structure for this Season.    I’m going to start looking at a few areas at a high level before moving into more detail in areas such as electoral systems around the world, negative campaigning and populism, compulsory vs voluntary voting, the various institutions and actors involved and alternatives to elections, where I’ll look at sortition and digital democracy.   In today’s episode, I’m talking to Professor David Farrell. David is a Professor of Politics in the School of Politics and International Relations at the University College Dublin. He is a specialist in the study of parties, elections, electoral systems and members of parliament. His current research focuses on the role of deliberation in constitutional reform processes.   I asked David How would you define the term ‘electoral system’? [1:45]   How do you approach comparing so many different approaches to electoral systems around the world? [4:20]   How do you characterise different families of electoral systems? [5.00]   Could you provide an overview of the key elements of different electoral systems? [6:00]   How can everyday people evaluate the different options? [15:05]   Are there electoral reforms that warrant serious consideration that are still only theoretical i.e. they haven’t been used anywhere? [20:25]   What do you think about the idea of using sortition to select a house of review? [22:15]   If you were asked to re-design the Irish electoral system what would it look like? [25:25] Thank you for joining me today. In next week’s episode I’ll be talking to Emeritus Professor Arend Lijphartabout his lifetime’s work. [29:40]   I hope you’ll join me then.  

INspired INsider with Dr. Jeremy Weisz
Successful Product Introduction with David Rabie of Tovala

INspired INsider with Dr. Jeremy Weisz

Play Episode Listen Later Jan 26, 2017 62:16


David Rabie is the Founder of Tovala which is a Smart Oven that is paired with a meal delivery service. Essentially you get a fresh healthy packaged meal delivered and you scan the package and pop it in the Smart Oven and it knows the precise time and method to cook the meal to perfection whether it be broiling, baking, steaming or convection. They sold 250K worth of Tovala ovens on Kickstarter and 100K of that in one day. They also won the University of Chicago New Venture Challenge in 2015. To date they have raised over 700K. In this episode… How an innovator meets and overcomes challenges on their journey says a lot about their character and internal fortitude. One of the many obstacles entrepreneurs like David Robie face is tackling critical feedback. David and his company Tovala have been gearing up for the product introduction of their new Smart Oven. Using his business savvy, David has sought out and embraced critiques and tough feedback for his product. A huge part of this process is incorporating the use of focus groups and beta testing before product launch. It can be tempting for innovators to take this kind of feedback personally. Only the most driven and wise leaders rise above and push through criticism and even embrace it to see their products thrive in the marketplace. Assembling a stellar team can make or break a successful product introduction. A quality team is so vital to the success of today’s startups that small business accelerator, Y Combinator largely rejects innovators that don’t have a solid team built around them. Entrepreneur David Rabie credits much of his products success and popularity to his all-star team. He has high caliber individuals that have brought key advice, feedback, and contributions to the development of Tovala’s Smart Oven. They are poised now for a smooth and successful product launch in Spring 2017 because of the essential contributions and collaboration fostered by this amazing team. To hear more about the necessity of building a quality team and more from David’s story - listen to this episode of Inspired Insider. The digital age has brought about many changes in the realm of startups and product introduction. An amazing tool for innovators and entrepreneurs in this new digital age is the crowdsourcing website Kickstarter. Kickstarter has facilitated thousands of product launches over the years as it has gained notoriety. Tovala founder David Rabie has enjoyed using this platform to gather a tribe around his innovative product, a Smart Oven. Listen to Jeremy's conversation with David that centers around his great success and even some challenges on this episode of Inspired Insider. The age old question - what did you want to be when you were a child? It makes for a great icebreaker question but it’s also a fun question to ask an entrepreneur like David Rabie. From childhood, David has dreamed of owning his own business. David attributes this largely to the influence of growing up as a child of immigrants. His parents immigrated from Iran to America in the late 1970’s. For the majority of his life, all David knew was his father working as his own boss. So fast-forward to today and David is a successful business leader who is poised to launch his company’s first product; the Tovala Smart Oven in Spring 2017. Hear more about David’s road to success on this episode of Inspired Insider. A product launch date for founders of new startups can be like anticipating the arrival of a new child in many ways. The whole range of emotions are there; nervousness, jitters, joy, pride, anxiety, and much more! Like a proud new father, David Rabie of Tovala is fired up about his company’s upcoming product launch. He should be! The Tovala Smart Oven is an amazing product. David’s enthusiasm is around the great service his product will bring to people of all backgrounds - he’s even excited to use it in his own home! Learn from David’s fascinating journey on this episode of Inspired Insider. Here’s a glimpse of what you’ll learn: [0:50] Jeremy’s introduction of David Rabie and this episode. [1:50] David talks about developing his first prototype oven. [3:10] What caused David to pivot and make changes to his product? [6:00] David talks about innovation his team engaged in. [7:00] Where is all this happening? [8:30] David talks about one of the pivotal moments in his company’s success. [9:30] What is some of the best advice and input David has received from his co-founder? [10:20] What was the reason David and his team chose to incorporate steam? [11:30] David talks about building a great team. [17:30] How did David recruit his team to get on board with his vision? [19:30] What are some of the common objections David receives to his product? [23:00] What’s been one of the hardest questions David has received from investors? [24:00] What are some of the challenges to developing the physical product? [26:20] David talks about food challenges. [28:30] Working with focus groups and beta testing. [32:30] David talks about applying to and getting involved with Y Combinator. [38:30] Critical feedback and advice from the folks at Y Combinator. [40:30] David talks about Kickstarter success. [43:00] David talks about the Tovala launch. [44:20] Lessons from David’s experience in PR and in the food industry. [47:30] Growing up as the son of immigrants. [51:30] David talks about traveling around the world and his time in China. [53:30] What excites David about the product launch? [54:30] How can people get a Tovala oven? How do they order food? [56:04] What has been the lowest moment on this journey for David? How did he push through? What was the proudest moment? Resources Mentioned on this episode Tovala’s Kickstarter Page Tovala's website Business Insider article on Tovala Grubhub Y Combinator New Venture Challenge   Sponsor for this episode One of our sponsor today is www.Rise25.com where entrepreneurs of 6,7, and 8 figure businesses come together live and in person every few months to solve their biggest business challenges through this high-level Mastermind group. Each member leaves each week with lifelong friendships and actionable steps to take their business to the next level. Check out Rise25.com - a group run by myself and cofounder John Corcoran. Rise 25 is application only.

Beth Ariel LA Podcast
Dealing With the Temptation of Revenge

Beth Ariel LA Podcast

Play Episode Listen Later Nov 11, 2016 43:24


(1 Samuel 24)(Series:Making of a Man, Lessons from the Life of David) How are we able to forgive? Returning to our strongholds.

Bad Boy Running
Ep 37 - David runs an ultra (Part 2)

Bad Boy Running

Play Episode Listen Later Mar 11, 2016 58:24


The episode continues with more chat and feedback from Bad Boy Running listeners... ... plus there's some actual running talk (buried at around the 37-minute mark, we believe). Here's the order of service: The chaps talk new kinds of races… and it takes an odd turn Jody and David try to work out the heaviest person in the world They guys decide a new Bad Boy challenge that involves putting ON weight The boys compare images of the fattest people in Britain and then present a new challenge to BBR listeners … and then some bad maths Another call out for sponsors (and this is a real half-hearted attempt) The attention turns to the Color Obstacle Rush UK A discussion of the anger about BBR's lack of awards nominations Why Tyson Fury would LOVE Edinburgh Marathon Some seriously good Bad Boy performances are revealed… and why David and Jody's advice WORKS Jody reveals that David has a stalker David argues he doesn't have serious job titles… and reveals how he manages to spend his time David inadvertently reveals the nickname of his ex-girlfriend… and gets all cryptic (answers on a postcard please) as he goes off on a story about he met her One listener's attempts at matchmaking with David… and David reveals he's off the market (allegedly) David reveals his worries about jinxing the relationship by mentioning her in the podcast… oh. The guys reveal what they do on Valentine's Day… (not with each other, of course) Officially the WORST segue EVER Letters from international Bad Boy Running listeners A call out to US runners as Jody and David make an unashamed play to win over the US running market David tries another Pato Banton impression… A reader question about pacing leaves the guys confused about a race's pacing strategy… and then fail to work it out A warning about pacers… and why you shouldn't always trust them (and a clearly made-up stat from David) How to seriously p*** off a Park Run The rise of BBR's resident veterinary expert A call out for technical experts to edit Bad Boy Running Enjoy! If you enjoyed this episode please SUBSCRIBE to get every episode delivered to you before everyone else. Join the conversation! If you want to request a guest or chat about this episode with like-minded drunk runners then head over to the Bad Boy Running Podcast Facebook group, here: https://www.facebook.com/groups/1609232602668375/ To join, just answer three questions either correctly or hilariously and we'll realise you're not a spam robot and add you! Here's how to get involved: Follow us on Instagram: www.instagram.com/badboy

The Twenty Minute VC: Venture Capital | Startup Funding | The Pitch
20 VC 055: David Pakman @ Venrock on The Future Of The Music Industry

The Twenty Minute VC: Venture Capital | Startup Funding | The Pitch

Play Episode Listen Later Jul 15, 2015 20:10


Quote of the Day: 'A great entrepreneur has the ability to bend the world to their will'. David Pakman, 20VC David Pakman is a Partner at Venrock, having spent the past 12 years as an internet entrepreneur. This includes David's appointment as CEO of eMusic, the world’s leading digital retailer of independent music, second only to iTunes. Prior to joining eMusic, David co-founded Myplay in 1999, which he later sold, in 2001, to Bertelsmann’s ecommerce Group. Before Myplay, he was Vice President at N2K Entertainment, which created the first digital music download service. If that wasn't enough David is also the co-creator of Apple Computer’s Music Group. In Today's Episode You Will Learn: How David started his career as an entrepreneur and later made the move to VC? How David found the transition from entrepreneur and CEO to being a VC? What is the main value add that both Venrock and David provides to their investments? What makes a great entrepreneur for David? How long do VCs need to know entrepreneurs before making investments? What 3 tips would David give for best sourcing deals as a VC? What areas does David believe are soon to be disrupted? How does David predict the next big industries to be disrupted? What did David think of Jay Z's launch of Tidal? Who will dominate in the music streaming sector in the coming years? Items Mentioned in Today's Episode: David's Fave Book: Mindset by Carole Dweck David's Favourite Blog: Ben Thompson's: Stratechery Dollar Shave Club: Shave Time, Shave Money YouNow Tidal: High Fidelity Music Streaming As always you can follow Harry, David, The Twenty Minute VC and Venrock on Twitter here!  

GotQuestions.org Audio Pages - Archive 2015-2016

What was the tabernacle of David? How is the Tabernacle of David related to the Tabernacle of Moses?

Digital Marketing Radio
DMR #37: BRANDON NOLTE – What does it take to start and build your own successful e-commerce store?

Digital Marketing Radio

Play Episode Listen Later Oct 21, 2014 25:49


David: What does it take to start and build your own successful e-commerce store? What are the common mistakes that e-commerce stores make and how do you increase your e-commerce conversion rates? Those are just 3 of the questions that I intend to ask today's special guest, Brandon Nolte. Brandon, welcome to DMR. Brandon: Thank you so much for having me, David. David: Thanks for joining us. Brandon is an e-commerce entrepreneur. He's founded a store, bringing in over $20,000 a month in revenue. His favorite things include hiring, working with his awesome team, and saying no! So Brandon, what prompted you to start an e-commerce store? Brandon: I guess I was looking for a way out of my previous business, which was a Kindle publishing business. It was actually doing really well for me, but I wanted to grow myself and my skill set. I thought e-commerce sounded like fun. It's probably not the most scientific way to go about it. Yeah, I was really just looking to grow myself as an entrepreneur. I feel like the e-commerce business model really allows you to expand your skill set. There's so many things you can learn from e-mail marketing to customer service to building teams and stuff like that. David: How long ago was it that you actually started? Brandon: The store went live basically January 1st. It's been running pretty much this whole year. David: Okay. Wow! We're talking just the beginning of October 2014. You're talking about 9 months or so it's been going. Fairly fresh, but you're obviously doing very well already. What would you say are the things you've done so far that has driven along the furthest that made it to the success that it is today? Brandon: I think the first one is certainly finding a good market. I ended up getting into a market where I saw that there was demands. I think, a lot of times, people go into businesses because they have a great idea or they think they have a great idea, and they have to try to validate it with the market. What really convinced me to get into my particular market was just talking to somebody who was already in it. After hearing his success, I wanted to get in. That was validation enough for me to try it. I guess the point I'm trying to make is you want to make sure that there is enough demand for your store to grow. That's certainly one of the things that's important.

Digital Marketing Radio
DMR #36: ALITA HARVEY-RODRIGUEZ – How do you best build an authentic list of email subscribers?

Digital Marketing Radio

Play Episode Listen Later Oct 20, 2014 28:53


David: How do you best build an authentic list of email subscribers? Should you buy an email list or is it best to build one for yourself? And does email marketing also work just as well for B2B? Those are just the three of the questions I intend to ask today's special guest Alita Harvey-Rodriguez. Alita, welcome to DMR. Alita: Hi, David. How are you going? David: Very good, thanks. How are you doing yourself? Alita: I'm very well, thank you. David: Superb. Well, Alita is the founder of Milk it Digital Academy, helping businesses to uncover hidden profits in digital business channels through business development workshops. So Alita, your philosophy is “data beats emotions”. What do you actually mean by that? Alita: Good question. Thank you for asking. It's a question that I get asked a lot. What I mean by "data beats emotion", it's very simple is that we're no longer in an era of business where we can simply rely on our gut feeling in order to make a decision to grow our business in the most profitable way possible. The numbers are all there for us to make decisions in the best way possible. Even if a lot of my clients come to me thinking that they don't have this information and it just takes a couple of hours of asking some really strategic questions to get this information, pulling apart P&L reports, looking at Google Analytics, looking at any kind of insights that they might have within their business and pulling them into a form which we can manipulate and get a solid answer to a question. For example, how much should I be spending on Facebook marketing in order to pull a return? Well, the first thing we need to find out is, actually, is Facebook marketing going to pull a return for you based on industry statistics, also together with existing data within the business. Then we can figure out accurately how much money you actually should be investing for a particular campaign to get a result within 10% either way.